*yy(*#% 
 
 
 IV 
 
 1#f 'W 
 
■cu - 
 
 
A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 PORTUGUESE AND ENGLISH, 
 
 EXHIBITING, IN A SERIES OE EXERCISES IN DOUBLE 
 TRANSLATION, 
 
 C{j* f irtamatk Stadtrre 0f krtlj languages, 
 
 AS NOW WRITTEN AND SPOKEN, 
 
 ADAPTED TO- OLLENDORFF SYSTEM. 
 
 BY THE , \ 
 
 KEY. ALEX/^L D. D'OESEY, B.D., 
 
 FELLOW-COMMONER OP CORPUS CHRISTI COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 
 
 CHAPLAIN" TO THE BISHOP OP GIBRALTAR, LATE CHAPLAIN' IN MADEIRA, ANT) 
 FORMERLY MASTER IN THE HIGH SCHOOL OF GLASGOW. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 TBUBKER AND CO., 60, PATEENOSTEE EOW. 
 
 1860. 
 
.In 
 
 lUOa 
 
 LONDOI: 
 
 THOMAS HABBILD, P*j(^ R SALISBUBY SQTTABE, 
 FIBET STBEBT. 
 
 387270 
 '29 
 

 s- 
 
 HIS MOST FAITHFUL MAJESTY, 
 
 DOI PEDEO V,, 
 
 KING OF POKTUGAL, 
 
 ETC., ETC., ETC., 
 THIS aRAMMAB IS, BY EXPRESS PERMISSION, 
 
 BY HIS MAJESTY'S 
 
 VEBY Q-EATEPUL SEEYANT, 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 The peculiar plan on which this Grammar* is constructed 
 is so evident to the habitual student, from a mere inspec- 
 tion of any of its pages, that it seems hardly necessary to 
 introduce it with the now almost stereotyped formality 
 of a preface. It is, however, possible that some persons 
 may feel the want of a few explanatory remarks as to the 
 system, sources of information, method of study, and kin- 
 dred topics ; and I may, therefore, venture to offer one or 
 two observations. 
 
 The plan may be called a copy or adaptation of 
 Ollendorff and Arnold's, for there is certainly enough 
 of resemblance to justify the comparison; but, from 
 having used the text-books of both authors in teaching 
 classics and foreign languages, I can safely say that this 
 little work is not a servile imitation. It aspires to fol- 
 low the excellencies, without adhering to the blemishes, 
 peculiar to the popular models in question. For instance, 
 it does not indulge in the tedious repetition of the same 
 words and phrases, which some consider the distinguish- 
 
 * The first edition, compiled in Madeira in 1852, was printed in 
 Lisbon. This, the first London edition, is greatly improved and 
 enlarged. 
 
VI PEEEACE. 
 
 ing merit of Ollendorf ; nor does it enter into those 
 minute details and unimportant philological discussions 
 with which Arnold often perplexes even the intelligent, 
 and sometimes discourages the enthusiastic. How far the 
 execution corresponds with the scheme, others must 
 determine. 
 
 It may, I think, be laid down as a principle, that no 
 Grammar is worthy of the name which does not support 
 its rules by quotations from the best authors ; and, 
 though a brief treatise like the present cannot contain 
 names and references, the very words of the writers 
 ought in all cases to be given, as insuring purity of 
 style, and exemplifying the actual state of the language ; 
 or, rather, the compiler of a grammar, instead of theoriz- 
 ing, ought rigidly to follow the principles of inductive 
 science, and frame his rules on an extensive and impar- 
 tial examination of all the forms of speech, as exhibited 
 in modern standard works, periodical literature, parlia- 
 mentary debates, and ordinary conversation. Such is 
 the basis on which this work has been founded. Every 
 page contains a "Lessor," consisting of three parts. 
 Eirst, the rule or precept, placed first for the sake of 
 form, but really being the inference from the authorities 
 quoted; secondly, Portuguese sentences, in strict rela- 
 tion to the rule, for translating into English ; thirdly, 
 English phrases for rendering into Portuguese. 
 
 The manner of using this Grammar will, of course, be 
 modified by the views of the teacher and the require- 
 ments of the pupils ; but it is suggested that an hour 
 
PKEPACE. 
 
 should be devoted to each page, that the teacher should 
 first read the foreign language slowly, making the pupil 
 imitate, and that there should be constant oral examina- 
 tion and practice in viva voce double translation, before 
 writing the illustrations. Afterwards, the pupil should 
 write out both exercises for correction by the teacher. 
 The pages of this book have not been filled with long 
 lists of words, whieh-auy dictionary can supply.* 
 
 Though*a thorough knowledge of any language can 
 only be gained by patient study and hard work, yet 
 there are many who are forced, from want of time, to 
 rest satisfied with a lower standard. Such persons are 
 recommended to omit all exercises that refer to unusual 
 or exceptional cases, or to write only half of each page. 
 Several pages are intended more for the Portuguese than 
 the English student, such as 17, 18, etc., and may be 
 neglected by the latter. 
 
 In conjunction with his course of practical grammar, 
 the student is recommended to commit to memory daily 
 a page, or at least half a page, of the " Colloquial 
 Portuguese." 
 
 The learner should bear in mind that the successful 
 study of a foreign tongue requires a previous knowledge 
 of his own, that there is no royal road to languages any 
 more than to geometry, and that the ordinary hope of 
 being able to "pick up" Portuguese without labour, 
 
 * At present there is no good dictionary of the English and 
 Portuguese languages ; but one is in preparation, and will, it is 
 hoped, be published next year. 
 
V1U PEEFACE. 
 
 by living in Portugal, and associating with peasants and 
 servants, is a pure delusion ; for * less than thorough, will 
 not do it." 
 
 A. J. D, D. 
 Corpus Christi College, Ca^ibridge. 
 1th June, 1860. 
 
A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 OF 
 
 POKTUGUESE AND ENGLISH. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 O pal, a inai, a filha. 
 
 Do sol, da lua. 
 Ao cavallo, d egua. 
 Pelo* soldado, pela igreja. 
 No jardim, na rua. 
 De, em, a, para, por. 
 
 The father, the mother, the 
 
 daughter. 
 Of the sun, of the moon. 
 To the horse, to the mare. 
 ~By the soldier, by the church. 
 In the garden, in the street. 
 Of, in, to, for, by. 
 
 O sol. A liia. O cavallo. A igreja. Do soldado 
 Da filha. Da egua. Do jardim. Ao jpai. A fillia Jo 
 soldado. A mai Ja governador. ^0 tempo. No fim Jo 
 mez. A'gua na bacia. iVa mesa. No campo. Delo 
 caminho de ferro. Ao principio. No inverno. No 
 mar e na terra. Ao ar. Ao presente. A casa do gover- 
 nador. O fim do anno. Para a cama. O cavallo do 
 soldado. Ao sul do rio. O exemplo do bispo. Na flor 
 da idade. Ao tempo do dominio romano. A historia do 
 paiz. A bocca da grata. A vinda Jo conde com um 
 exercito. A innuencia da rainha. Para o progresso da 
 civilisacao. Na cama. Ao mercado. No chao. 
 
 The horse. :Z%# mare. The garden of the father. 
 At the beginning of the year. On the table. Of the 
 door. The history of the country. The influence of the 
 governor. The progress of civilization in the Eoman em- 
 pire. The railroad in the country. To the entrance of 
 the grotto. In the garden of the soldier. The father of 
 the governor. The church in the street. At present. 
 The count and the soldier. The sun and the moon. At 
 market. On the ground. The end of the year. The 
 governor's horse. In the garden of the soldier. The 
 progress of the railroad. 
 
 * JPelo is a contraction for por o, no for em o, na for em a. 
 
LESSON II. 
 
 DEFINITE AETICLE. 
 Genekal Eule. — The Plural is formed, as in English, by adding s. 
 
 Os livros, as cartas. 
 Dos amigos, das casas. 
 Aos irrnaos, as irmas. 
 Pelos campos, pelas pdrtas. 
 
 The books, the letters. 
 Of the books, of the houses. » 
 To the brothers, to the sisters. 
 Through the fields, by the doors. 
 
 No servicjo, nas guerras. I In the service, in the wars. 
 
 E, e. I And, is. 
 
 Os livros. Os cavallos. Os soldados. Os amigos. 
 As casas. As portas. As guerras. As ruas. As igrejas. 
 Dos livros. Dos cavallos. Dos soldados. Aos amigos. 
 Aos campos. Os livros dos Romanos. As janellas das 
 casas. As ondas ; nas profundezas do mar ; as montanbas ; 
 os habitantes da terra. No servico dos reis. Para a gloria 
 da patria. Nos bracos dos irmaos. Pelas janellas. As 
 lidras da vida. Nas universidades, nas escholas, e nos 
 mosteiros. Nas gavetas. A lista dos erros. As hervas 
 do cainpo. arco dos fortes. JPelos Eomanos. As 
 faculdades do entendimento. Belo valor nos conibates. 
 Os castellos dos rebeldes. As fortunas dos proprietaries. 
 
 Tlie horses. The friends ofilw soldiers. The house 
 of the sisters. In the castles of the kings. The inhabi- 
 tants of the fields. By the arms of the kings. The 
 proprietors, and the inhabitants of the cities. By Grecian 
 civilization. The w aves of the seas. The caprices of the 
 friends. By the faculties of the mind. By the valour of 
 the brother. In the wars of the Romans. In the fields 
 of the country. The friends of the sisters. The list of 
 the kings. The inhabitants of the empires. The wars of 
 counts. The fortunes of the Romans. By the doors of 
 the houses. 
 
LESSON III. 
 
 INDEFINITE AETICLE. 
 
 Um* lid mem, uma* mullier. 
 jyimH rei, d'uma rainha. 
 A um mimero, a uma coroa. 
 For um tempo, por uma semana. 
 N'um logar, it' uma lidra. 
 Com um sorriso, um vapor. 
 
 A man, a woman. 
 Of a king, of a queen. 
 To a number, to a crown. 
 For a time, /or a week. 
 In a place, in an hour. 
 With a smile, a steamer. 
 
 Um pai. Um soldado. Um cavallo. Uma filha. 
 Uma egua. Uma riia. D'umf jardim. D'um anno. D'um 
 rio. A uma filha. A lima igreja. A uma mulher. D'tem 
 vapor. Uma collier e um garfo. Um chapeu de palha. 
 Uma deliciosa freseura. Com um terno amor. Uma 
 revolta dos povos nas provincias. Um corpo de tropas, 
 Um esciido, um elmo, uma espada, e uma lanca. Uma 
 chavana de cha. Uma garrafa de Malaga. Um profdndo 
 silencio. Um grande misterio. A. vida de um homem. 
 Um membro da familia. Uma profunda melancholia. 
 Umas* botas. Com uns* livros nas maos. Por uns 
 valles. Por um dos notarios. 
 
 A friend. A liouse. A queen. A crown. Of a friend. 
 Of a house. To a man. To a crown. The horse of a 
 king. A voyage to Punchal. A cup of coiFee. The bell 
 of a church. A shield of gold. A member of the family. 
 In a thought. With a smile. The glance of a moment. 
 The tender love of a sister. To a king. To a queen. In 
 the midst of a life of combats. An invitation from the 
 king. A bruise by a fall. A revolt of the soldiers. A 
 bottle of wine. A member of the counsel. Besidence 
 in a family. A view of the plains. A small part of Por- 
 tugal. One of the castles. A sword and a lance. A 
 straw-hat. In an hour. 
 
 * Used in the plural uns, umas, some. Um, uma, were formerly 
 always spelled Hum, huma (or hua), and are so still in official docu- 
 ments. 
 
 t Ffum is a contraction for de um, as rCum is for em um; but the 
 uncontracted forms are often used. 
 
LESSON IV. 
 
 WITHOUT AETICLE. 
 
 Joao, Inglaterra.* 
 
 De Maria, de Pedro. 
 
 A Jose, a Lisboa. 
 
 Por G-uilherme, por Anna. 
 
 Um sceptro de ouro. 
 
 John, England. 
 Of Mary, of Peter. 
 To Joseph, to Lisbon. 
 By William, by Anna. 
 A sceptre of gold. 
 
 Sem forma. I "Without the form. 
 
 O filho de Ulysses. A guerra de Troia. No terri- 
 torio de Coiinbra.t Na corte do rei de Leao. Varios 
 ramos de instruccao. ISTo campo de batalha. Filho de 
 Boberto e irinao de Henrique. Aos fins de Abril. tu- 
 mulo de Anchises. Sem forma de templo. Uma mivem 
 de poeira. Uma raca de gigantes. Os limites dos estados 
 de Fernando Magno. Pela conquista de Badajoz. A 
 guerra nas fronteiras de Portugal. O Administrador do* 
 Funchal na Una da* Madeira. caminho por terra para 
 Jerusalem. Um lenco de cambraia. Os idolos de ouro, 
 e de prata, e de cobre, e de pedra, e de pan. Grande 
 reduccao em precos. JEm grande escala. 
 
 The tomb of tbe king of Portugal. In the court of 
 Ulysses. By the wars of Anchises. In the territories 
 q/*Eobert. The son of the king of 'Leon. On the fron- 
 tiers of the states. A province of Spain. Son of John 
 and brother of Peter. A silver spoon. The tomb of 
 Henry. The way by land to Lisbon. A straw-hat. A 
 cloud of dust. By the conquest of Coimbra. In conse- 
 quence of the cloud. At the end o/* May. Idols of gold 
 and silver. In the territory of Austria. John's brother. 
 Henry's mother. The Island of Madeira. 
 
 * Proper name3 sometimes take articles. (1.) Countries : A 
 Lombardia, A Franca. (2.) Eivers : O Tejo, O Mincio. (3.) Great 
 men: O Camoes, Q'Virgilio. (4.) Familiarly : O Phelps, O Castel- 
 branco. (5.) For distinction : A Madeira, when it means the island 
 of that name ; because Madeira, without the article, means vjood^ or 
 timber. 
 
 f Almost as if Queem-bra. 
 
LESSON V. 
 
 ARTICLES USED IN ENGLISH, NOT IN POILTUGFESE. 
 
 Samsgate, porto maritimo. 
 Elle e medico.* 
 Que bello cavallo ! 
 Henrique primeiro. 
 Historia de Portugal.f 
 Nao iia dia. 
 Em tab caso. 
 
 ;e, a seaport. 
 He is a doctor. 
 What a fine horse ! 
 Henry the First. 
 A History of Portugal. 
 There is not a day. 
 In such a case. 
 
 De viva voz. Em poucas paiavras. Em terceiro lo- 
 gar. Lisboa, capital do reino, residencia do rei. Setu- 
 bal, villa muito notavel, com vasto e segiiro porto, exporta 
 grande quantidade de sal. Coimbra, em feliz situacao, 
 tern estabelecimentos de primeira drdem. Sou medico. 
 ISToite calmosa de junbo. Seu. tio e hespanhol. Em 
 meio dos grandes riscos. Bristol, patria de Locke, 
 philosopho ilkistre. O seu amigo e tenente. Que bello 
 navio ! Que accao tao infame ! Este e um paiz bellis- 
 simo. Tanto melhor. E' animal ampbibio. Em bene- 
 ficio dos habitantes. 
 
 Madrid, the capital of Spain. Your brother is a 
 lawyer. "What a line horse ! So much tlie less. In the 
 fourth place. George the Third. A history of Madeira. 
 The frog is an amphibious animal. JSTot a day passed in 
 which, etc. In spite of a brave resistance. In what we 
 now call the province of Estremadura. Up to a certain 
 point. What a night ! It is a fact, that, etc. The 
 church is a beautiful fabric. He had a good heart. His 
 brother is a general. What a beautiful town ! London, 
 the capital of England. In a little time. 
 
 * The article is invariably omitted in Portuguese before names of 
 professions, trades, etc., except when a special case is meant, as O 
 vigario nao esta em casa." 
 
 t Article omitted in titles of books. 
 
LESSOR VI. 
 
 O homem e o senhor da terra. 
 preto, o branco, e o yerde. 
 A hnagem da morte. 
 A virtude e amavel. 
 Sobre todos os assumptos. 
 Desde as 9 as tres boras. 
 Por toda a Europa. 
 
 Man is the lord of the earth. 
 Blade, white, and green. 
 The image of death. 
 Yirtue is amiable. 
 On all subjects. 
 From 9 to 3 o'clock. 
 Through all Europe. 
 
 O fiin da historia e a verdade. No progresso da 
 sciencia. Todas as horas da vida. O seu liome e cele- 
 brado por toda a Asia, pelo seu valor nos combates. 
 Venho da igreja. O almoco esta prompto. A historia 
 antiga e moderna. Os soldados 311690s e os velhos. A 
 rdsa e a mais bella das nores. A grandeza do nasci- 
 mento. As virtudes dos sens maidres. A gloria militar. 
 A influencia do ouro. As redeas do governo. meiho- 
 ramento da edueacao. Em. todas as classes do povo. 
 As principles nacoes da Europa. No decurso da vida. 
 Das cartas em geral. 
 
 Ancient and modern history. The constant exercise 
 of virtue. The weight of authority. The voice of inde- 
 pendence, reason, and truth. The energy of social life. 
 All sorts of letters. The community of language. The 
 old and new scholars. The elephant is the largest of 
 quadrupeds. The administration of justice. To the 
 north of Cape St. Yincent. In spite of all separations. 
 The vast dominions of history. In the empire of Brazil. 
 Some of whom. In truth. At least. In case of altera- 
 tion. The islands of Europe. Xavier, the apostle of 
 India. The influence of gold. 
 
 * Tbe article is used in Portuguese before nouns in then.' widest 
 sense, e. g., man for mankind ; and before abstract nouns, virtue, 
 beauty, etc. 
 
LESSON VII. 
 
 ARTICLES OMITTED, OR TRANSPOSED. 
 
 Com uma tal carta. 
 Em tdo vasta escala. 
 Por via de regra. 
 Materias de facto. 
 Sem ceremdnia. 
 Uma meia chicara. 
 
 Tamanho. 
 
 With such a letter. 
 
 On so vast a scale. So great. 
 
 By way of rule. 
 
 Matters of fact. 
 
 Without ceremony. 
 
 Half a cup. 
 
 Esta colleccao de cartas. Em pouco tempo. Um 
 genero d'escriptura. Tao louvavel proposito. Em tal 
 materia. De tal mddo. iNuiica Ihe disse tal cousa. 
 Tal nome. Sem restriceao. Em tal caso. Em vdz 
 baixa. Mais de meia hdra. A causa de tal mudanca. 
 Em segredo. Em fdmo. Um tamanho privilegio. Sem 
 duvida. Com elegancia. Com mais frequencia. Com 
 drdem e methodo. Em pratica. Em silencio. Em 
 parte. Por falta de esp^o. Em poucas semanas. Em 
 grande parte da Asia. O motivo de similhaiite proceder. 
 
 With energy. In a severe tone. In general. With- 
 out pity. Such a man is praiseworthy. In short. This 
 collection of books. In a little time. In such a case. 
 In a low voice. In a few days. Such a king. More 
 than half an hour. Eor want of time. In a great part 
 of Europe. In practice. "With such a collection of 
 letters. Such a title. In a few days. The reason of 
 such a smoke. In a few months. A kind of writing. 
 The cause of such a change. "Without doubt. In secret. 
 In such a way. "Without restraint. Half a cup. On 
 so vast a scale. Such a thins:. 
 
LESSON VIII. 
 
 PECULIAEITIES OF THE AE/TICLE. 
 Quatro xelins o arratel. ] Four shillings a pound. 
 
 Duas patacas a vara. 
 Com as chaves na mao. 
 O ver-te, e o abracar-te. 
 Levou as maos a cabega. 
 O bom do monge. 
 
 Two dollars an ell. 
 With the keys in his hand. 
 Seeing thee and embracing thee. 
 Raised his hands to his head. 
 The good monk. 
 
 Em todos os tempos. Pagar tanto por cabeca. Boa 
 gente de ambos os sexos. Paca-me ouiro par. Cao que 
 ladra nao morde. A todos 05 respeitos. Instruido por 
 tao memoravel acontecimento. No leito da mdrte. 
 Apresentado por mao de Pernando. Eram # perto das seis 
 boras da tarde do dia seis de maio do anno de 1389. Cao 
 que vive com lobes, acaba por ser feroz. Com ambas as 
 maos. O abuso da liberdade de imprensa. JBor espdeo 
 de cinco annos. Mdu dia para comecar viagem. Metade 
 de uma semana. Ao domingo de tarde. 
 
 I was Charles's comrade. "With the stick in Ms 
 hand. Make me another hat. On his death-bed. "With 
 both hands. A had day for beginning an enterprise. 
 The liberty of the press is precious. TJie good soldier 
 raised his hand to his mouth. This is three dollars a 
 pound. I gave four bits a yard for it. In all respects, 
 I think it good. The money was presented by the hand 
 of Frederick. Half a week. On Saturday evening. On 
 Monday afternoon. Another pair. Por the space of 
 nye days. He pays so much a head. Both sexes. 
 
 * The third'person plural may end " ao " or " am," e. g., sao, 
 sam ; erao, eram. The former is more usual, the latter gradually 
 coming into practice. 
 
LESSON IX. 
 
 AETICLES COMBINED WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 No, na, nos, nas, in the. 
 Pelo, pela, pelos, pelas, by the. 
 N'um, n'uma, in a. 
 
 Nos temos, we have. 
 Elles tern, they have. 
 Esta, is* 
 
 Bacia, basin; ahnogo, breakfast; mesa, table; quarto, a room . 
 Idja, shop ; igreja, church ; eseacla, staircase. 
 
 Na cama. Ao almoco. Num quarto. Nas lojas. A 
 bacia nao esta no quarto. Belo filho. Beta filha. 
 PeZos homens. Na bacia. * ife igrejas. Na escada. No 
 liso <i# lingua. Unia difxerenca no systema. O dominio 
 dos Bomanos. O alnidco esta na mesa. O progress© da 
 sociedade. Na verdade. Na infaneia da historia. Nos 
 tempos da revolucao. A restauracao das letras. No 
 meio. Nas universidades e nas escholas. As ruinas da 
 liberda.de. Pelas innueneias dos tempos. Nos temos 
 agua na bacia. Elles tern livros nos quartos. Na lcja. 
 
 In tlie beds. In the rooms. By the progress of truth. 
 In a stop. In the church and in the school. In the in- 
 fancy of society. The restoration of the Somans. In the 
 midst of the ruins. "We have the use of the tongue. The 
 basin is in the room. By the influence of liberty. "We 
 have a difference in the schools. Breakfast is on the 
 table. In the ruins of the church. The son is in bed. 
 In the room of the man. In the times of the E-omans. 
 The progress of truth. The restoration of liberty. A 
 difference in the use of the book. In the boy's bed. 
 
 * JEsta is used for is, when time, place, and circumstances are 
 spoken of ; but e is employed when a permanent quality is referred 
 to. "A agua esta quente," the water is hot — temporarily — but 
 A agua do mar e salgada — sea water is salt — c 
 
10 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 NUMBEE OP ^OTTN'S — BEGULAE PLUEALS. 
 
 Lirro, book ; uva, grape ; irrnao, brother ; irnia, sister ; meia 
 stocking; sapato, shoe ; navalba, razor; senhor,* lord, sir; estao, 
 are; eu tiiilia, Iliad; ella tinha, she had; nos tfhhamos, tee had; 
 elles tinham, they had; de-me, give me; meu, my (m.) ; rainlia, my 
 (f.) ; meus (in. p.) ; rninhas (f. p.) ; todo, a, os, as, all; niestre, 
 master : nao, not. 
 
 Eu tinha livros. As discdrdias dos tres irmaos. De- 
 ine as navdlhas. Urn corpo de tropas. Os irmaos tern 
 sapdtos e meias. Elle tinha todas as meias. De-me os 
 livros. ~Nvls f route ir as de Portugal. As dioceses dos o&- 
 _£>os. Os senhores nao tern navdlhas. Guerras e conquis 
 tas. Os membros da congregacao. Os estddos dos rm. 
 De-ine as minhas meias. Os meus irmaos estao na nor da 
 idade. As fronteiras dos estddos. As traicoes dos ww- 
 migos. Todos os livros. Os descobrimentos dos navegdn- 
 tes. Os 7/itos sao os meslres nnidos. 
 
 She had not Z>o0/l\?. I had s^oes. I had not a body 
 of troops. The brothers of the bishops. The zfrtrs of the 
 Icings. My brother has not razors. Had I ooo^s ? I 
 had not s/zoes. The stos and stockings of my brothers. 
 "We had the stockings of the son. My brothers are in the 
 rooms. My sisters are in the midsfc of the ruins. The 
 s7zoj?s of the towns. The wars and conquests of the kings. 
 The &z;zys had troops. "We had ooo&s. The king had a 
 body of troops. My sisters had enemies, (xive me the 
 s/^oes and stockings. She had three sisters. They had 
 my fooyfo. 
 
 * Nouns in r take es to form the plural, senhor, senhores. 
 Nouns in z likewise take es, toz, yozes. 
 
11 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 NOUNS — NUMBER.* 
 
 Cartas, pennas, folhas. 
 Igrejas, desejos, copos. 
 Senhoras, deveres, inoscas. 
 Dias, rapazes, jogos. 
 Caixas, rapozas, impdstos. 
 
 Letters, pens, sheet*. 
 Churches, wishes, gL 
 Ladies, duties, flies. 
 Days, boys, plays. 
 Boxes, foxes, taxes. 
 
 Mil agradecimentos . Grdgas a Deus. As cartas do 
 ainigo. Os Urios do campo. A grandeza dos dimes. 
 As cartas do Padre Vieira. As leis da honra e do mun- 
 do. As miosas eram as deusas das sciencias e das dries. 
 Pennas e tinta. As garrdfas e os copos. As senhoras e 
 os rapazes. Os dias do anno. Oinjas, mordngos, amor as, 
 e pecegos. Vestidos d'homem. tlm seculo das desco- 
 bertas. As igrejas das cidddes. Hecddos a familia. ]STos 
 cantos das ruas. Os rdmos d&sfdias. As cdixas de cha. 
 As rapozas nos desertos. 
 
 The letters of the man. The Ze#ws of the trees. The 
 wishes of the Soys. The dresses of the ladies. The 
 brushes of the men. The bottles and they/«sses. The duties 
 of the families. The glories of the discoveries. The pZ^ys- 
 of the 6oys. Birches, beeches, and larches are fine ft^es. 
 The beauties of natnre. The ladies of the family. The 
 voices of the goddesses. The houses and churches of the 
 cities. The Z>oys have peaches, nuts, and cherries. The 
 Jtfj/s of the week. The duties of the ladies. Lilies and 
 daisies. The 5oo&s in the churches. A thousand thanks. 
 The sheets of the boolcs. The luishes of the were and 6oys. 
 
 * This page being intended to show Portuguese students the mode 
 of forming English phu^als, may be passed over by Englishmen. 
 
12 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 NOUNS — NUMBEE. 
 
 Mulheres, paes, facas. 
 Tectos, pifanos, chefes. 
 Heroes, pretos, echos. 
 Nuncios. 
 
 Wives, loaves, knives. 
 Hoofs, fifes, chiefs. 
 Heroes, negroes, echoes. 
 Xuncios. 
 
 Volcoes, bufalos, batatas. J Volcanoes, buffaloes, potatoes. 
 
 Asfolhas das fores. Noe com seus filhos, sua mu- 
 Iher, e as mulheres de seus fillios. Mil copos de prata, 
 vinte e nove fdcas, trinta togas d'ouro. lima torta de 
 cerejas. A virtude dos heroes. Os Mhos sao a/mm es 
 ferozes. Os pifanos dos pretos. As mulheres dos heroes. 
 Os ladroes da Syria. Os nuncios sao ernbaixadores do 
 papa. Os negros n'uma roca da America. Lencinhos 
 do pescoco. Veus de renda. Seis lengos de seda. Couves, 
 espincfres, ervilhas e batatas. Os volcoes, os terremotos, 
 as allumoes. Os oufalos da America. Os cantos da 
 Lusiada. 
 
 The wives of the men. The loaves of the thieves. 
 The knives of the negroes. The roq/s of the houses. The 
 fr&res of the province. The quarries of marble. Paradise 
 Lost, a poem in twelve cantos. The frees on the margins 
 of the rivers. Pour silk handkerchiefs. The echoes of 
 the ivoods. The red and white potatoes are the most com- 
 mon roote now in use. The punctilios of public cere- 
 ononies. The cool grottoes. Ponderous folios. I sing of 
 lieroes and of Icings. American buffaloes. Knives, forks 
 and spoons. The cantos of Childe Harold. 
 
 Eor the Portuguese student. 
 
13 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 NOTJNS — NUMBER.* 
 
 Homens, mulheres, creanc,as. ] Men, women, children. 
 
 Pes, dentes, gansos. Feet, teeth, geese. 
 
 P>6is, pdrcos; vintens. Oxen, swine ; pennies, pence. 
 
 E.atos,tMorganhos,cunhos, dados, i Mice, dies, dice. 
 
 Tafu.es, fachos, gado. I Beaux, flambeaux, cattle. 
 
 Os homens, as mulheres e as credncas da cidade. Os 
 rdtos coinem as hervilhas. Dois vintens o arratel. Os 
 pes das senhoras. Tenho hois, jumentos, ovelhas, servos, 
 e servas. Os seus dentes eram como os dentes dos leoes. 
 Uma grande manada de pdrcos. Cunhos sao pecas d'aco 
 para imprimir nas moedas ou medalhas. O vinho a seis 
 vintens a garrafa. As plantas dos joes. A luz dos fdchos. 
 Dados falsos. Fdchas sao tochas ou feixes de varas. As 
 patas dos gansos. Os dentes dos morgdnhos. As preten- 
 coes dos tafues. Os azdres dos dados. Os pes dos hois. 
 
 The men are thieves. The ivomen have knives. The 
 children have bottles and glasses. Abram had sheep, 
 oxen, and asses. The hair of cats, rats, and mice. A 
 gamester and the dice. Two pence a pound. The coach- 
 men and footmen. The soles of the feet. Turkeys, geese 
 and ducks. A herd of swine. The teeth of the lions. 
 The thieves have dies. Three pence a yard. Pour silver 
 pennies. Dies used in stamping money. Pour pence a 
 pound. The men's children are with the women. The 
 teeth of the swine and the feet of the geese. 
 
 * Chiefly for the Portuguese student. 
 
 t Rdtos means rats and often mice; but morgdnhos always 
 mice. 
 
14 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 NOUNS — NUMBEE. 
 
 Cameiro, veados. 
 
 Apparato, hiato, espe"cie. 
 
 Meios, riquezas. 
 
 Povo, gente ; hortalicas, manid- 
 
 tas. 
 Bellas-lettras, as gazetas, archivos. ' Belles-lettres, the papers, archives. 
 
 Sheep, deer. 
 
 Apparatus, hiatus, species. 
 
 Means, riches. 
 
 People ; vegetables, manacles. 
 
 Os hornens couiem os hois, os carneiros, os gdnsos, e 
 os veddos. A data do reinado de Affdnso vi do nome na 
 serie dos reis de Oviedo. O born pastor da a propria vida 
 pelas siias ovelhas. O apparato de guerra. Um hiato e 
 lima abertura da boca occasionada pel a pronuncia das 
 vogaes O povo portuguez, celebre na historia. Gente, 
 multidao de pessoas. As noticias sao boas. Hortalica, 
 couves, alfaces, legumes nas hortas. Riquezas, hens, e 
 gloria. TJma multidao de povo. Balantes ovelhas com os 
 ternos cordeiros. Luiz xiv era o protector das he'll as- 
 lettras. 
 
 The sheep and the oxen are in the fields. News of 
 your brother. The crocuses and narcissuses are beautiful. 
 A fine bed of asparagus. The deserted archives of Por- 
 tugal. Beer, stags, and huff aloes. In the long series of 
 kings. The Spanish people. The academy of ft& fine- 
 arts. The apparatus of the Chemist. A series of vowels. 
 Sleep, deer, and oxen. An obscure population. Thepapers 
 are full of news. The arch ives of the kingdom. The riches 
 of the shepherd are the sheep. The vegetables are good. 
 The tender lamhs of the bleating sleep. The manacles of 
 the thieves. The king is the protector of the fine-arts. 
 
15 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 PLTJBALS.* 
 
 €idad«05, Christaos, mcios. \ Citizens, Christians, hands. 
 
 Capitals, caes, -paes. j Captains, clogs, loaves. 
 
 Accoe.s, nagoes, cov&qoes. Actions, nations, hearts. 
 
 Andes, villaes — oes. . ( Dwarfs, country-men. 
 
 Os cidadaos de Lisboa. Nas mcios do inimigo. 
 ■Capitaes de lad roes. Cinco paes e dois peixes. A for- 
 macao dos plurdes. A furia dos cidadaos. Com violentas 
 convulsoes. As acgoes do liomem. Os medicos, os cirur- 
 gioes, e os boticarios. As intengoes, sao excellentes. As 
 dissensoes do imperio. As paixoes das turbas. Christaos 
 e sarraeenos. Os capitaes do exercito. Os chefes das 
 nacoes. As oragoes dos arcebispos. Uma das maos. Os 
 altares dos Christaos. As pretengoes do rei. A existencia 
 das geragoes. As collegoes de monumentos. O alternado 
 das estacoes. 
 
 In the hands of the citizens. The captains of Chris- 
 tians. The thieves in the cities. The actions of the 
 chiefs. The fury of the countrymen. The intentions of 
 the surgeons. The dissensions and convulsions of the 
 empires. The generations of Moses. The relations of 
 the king. The invasions of the Christians. The cora- 
 ditions of the treaties. The council of the ancients. The 
 compositions of the poets. The Jo^s of the countrymen. 
 The confessions of the hearts. The definitions, the opinions, 
 and the questions. The orphans of the brothers. The 
 passions of the pagans. The citizens of Paris are in the 
 hands of the enemy. 
 
 * There are tf&ree ways of forming the plural of nouns in «o, for 
 which see Appendix. 
 
16 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 NOTJNS — PLURALS. * 
 
 Mare?, colhere?, cruze?. 
 Amimaes, soes, faroes. 
 I*a,peis, tonnew, fasis. 
 Homens, Jins, bens, atun,?. 
 Consuls, male?, paue?. 
 
 Seas, spoons, crosses. 
 Animals, suns, lighthouses 
 Papers, casks, firelocks. 
 Men, ends, goods, tunnies. 
 Consuls, evils, marshes. 
 
 Os tujoes dos mares da China. Anneis e brincos 
 d'ouro. O azeite das luzes. As plantas dao sdes. 
 Cabeddes sao dinheiros, haveres e materides. Os homens 
 sao officides de justica. Milhdres de pergarninhos. Os 
 reptis da terra. Pescadores de Jidmens. A harmonia das 
 vozes. O clarao nas nuvens. Pecegos, figos e nozes- 
 As mdrgens do rio. Os principals da cidade. Os carto 
 rios das cathedrdes. Os homens de lettras. Os caracteres 
 dos persondgens. Uroqiieis de madeira ou de metal. Os 
 minerdes do paiz. As ordens do rei. As vezes. Nos 
 /ms do seculo. 
 
 The voices of the officers. In the seas of Asia. The 
 fishes in the seas. The oil of the lights in the cathedrals. 
 The s«Zte of the plants. Thousands of papers. The 
 chief- weft of the city are wm of letters. The minerals of 
 the countries. The harmony of the voices of the fisher- 
 men. In the archives of the cathedrals. Rings of gold. 
 CM» of wine. Silver-spools. £«ms, moons, and stars. 
 The virgins of the house. The firelocks of the soldiers. 
 The words are the s/0w$ of £Ae ideas. The consuls in the 
 c&&£. The nostrils of the mera. The rk^s of the citizens. 
 The toaters of the seas. The sounds of the animals. The 
 combs of the women. 
 
 * See rules in Appendix. 
 
17 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 NOUNS — PLURAL. 
 
 Bases, eixos, crises. 
 Dados, meios, camadas. 
 Raios, genios, magos. 
 Redomomhos, genios, indigenas. 
 Lammas, borralho. 
 
 Bases, axes, crises. 
 Data, media, strata. 
 Radii, genii, magi. 
 Yortices, geniuses, aborigines. 
 Laminae, scoriae. 
 
 Os eixos das curvas. As crises das doencas. As oases 
 das columnas. As crises sao as mudancas notaveis nas 
 molestias. Dados sao nocoes, razoes, fundamentos ou 
 principles. Os rdios sao semi-diainetros. Byron e Scott 
 fordo genios. Os genios das lendas das Mil e tuna noi- 
 tes. Bedemoinhos sao movhnentos em giro nos rios on 
 mares. JN r os appendices das obras. Os arcdnos da mo- 
 narchia. Os magos erao os sabios dos orieataes. Hypo- 
 theses e systemas. Os phenomenos da natureza. 
 
 The bases of the pyramids. The axes of the planets. 
 The crises of the histories. The scoriae of the volcanoes. 
 Strata of lime and coal. I have not data. The genii 
 of death. The radii or semi diameters of the circle. The 
 aborigines of Spain. The vortices in the river. The magi 
 of the East. The Dons of Castile. The gifts of nature 
 and grace. Laminae in the minerals. The phases of the 
 moon are phenomena. Ganthar ides are insects. The foci 
 of the ellipses. The Lares, amongst the Romans, were 
 domestic gods, protecting genii, and guardians of the 
 house. Errata in the theses. The apices of the Pyra- 
 mids. 
 
18 
 
 LESSOR XVIII. 
 
 PLURALS. 
 
 Esmdla, annaes, cinzas. 
 O ptica, politica, collete. 
 Tesoura, espivitaddr, tenazes. 
 Bofes, folle, calcas. 
 O'culos, cerdulas, as damas. 
 
 Alms, annals, ashes. 
 Optics, politics, stays. 
 Scissors, snuffers, tongs. 
 Lungs, bellows, trousers. 
 Spectacles, drawers, draughts. 
 
 Os amides das racas. Miiitas esmdlas ao povo. As 
 cinzas de Isaac. No po e na cinza. Lucernas com seus 
 espivitadores.* Lampadas e tenazes d'ouro. Os miolos 
 do homem. A optica e uma parte da physica. A aveia 
 e o trigo. As abas do telhado. Aprendeu as mathemd- 
 ticas com Pedro Niiues. Os tropicos. Os poros das plan- 
 tas. Os bofes sao os orgaos da respiracao. A politica 
 e a sciencia do governo, Uma tesoura e um iDstrumento 
 de diias pe9as. Dai-me as meias e as cdlgas. Onde esta 
 o folle? As tenazes estao no canto. 
 
 The alms of the Christians. The annals of the cities. 
 The ashes of the dead. Optics is a "branch of science. 
 The politics of the governors. The stays are new. Oive 
 me the scissors and the snuffers. The lungs of the coun- 
 trymen. G-olden tongs. The regimentals are on the table. 
 Soots, half-boots, shoes, pumps, and slippers. The shovel 
 and the tongs. The drawers are in the bed-room. The 
 eaves of the roofs. The tropics are parallel to the equator. 
 He learned Mathematics and Physics. The spectacles of 
 the deans. A game at draughts. The brains of the 
 hermits. 
 
 * Tes6ura> ou tesouras, espivitadeira, espivitador, tesoura das 
 velas, are all terms in use for snuffers. 
 
19 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 PLURALS. 
 
 Portico, portico ; casco, hoof; menfno, child ; hdmem, man ; 
 mullier, woman ; pe, foot ; morganho, mouse ; raposa, fox ; ganso, 
 goose; mugido, lowing ; boi, ox; dente, tooth; lobo, wolf; vitella, 
 calf; ovelha, sheep ; porco, pig ; folha, leaf; herde, hero ; veado, 
 deer ; echo, echo ; gloria, glory ; cereja, cherry. 
 
 Os porticos dos temples. Os meninos dos heroes. Os 
 cdscos dos cavallos. Os homems e as mulheres estao nas 
 igrejas. Os pes dos ratinhos. As raposas tern os gdnsos. 
 Os mugidos dos hois. Os denies dos lohos. Os pes dos 
 porcos. As senhoras tern vitellas, ovellas, hois e porcos. 
 Os mordngos estao n&sfolhas. Os ladroes tern os vestidos. 
 Os genios da epoca.. Os genios da Lampada. Asfolhas 
 das arvores. Os znnidos das moscas. Os meninos tern 
 pecegos e cerejas. Os cavallos dos homens. Os denies dos 
 meninos. Os gdnsos. 
 
 The porticoes of the clmrclies. The hoofs of the cwera. 
 The children of the mew and women. The fee^ of the mice. 
 The feet oHhe geese. The echoes of the roofs. The glories 
 of the heroes. The wives of the chiefs. He has calves, 
 sheep, swine, and £?eer. The peaches and cherries are in 
 the leaves. The clothes of the thieves. The ruffs of the 
 ladies. The geniuses of the age. The ^ewn of the lamp. 
 The buzzing o£ flies. The mew had/cwes and wolves. The 
 wives and children of the heroes. Thejfee£ of the mice. 
 He has cherries and peaches. 
 
20 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 NUMBER OF LOTUS'S. 
 
 Cidadao, citizen; Christao, Christian; mao, hand; drgao, 
 organ ; cao, dog ; capitao, captain ; escriyao, writer ; guardiao, 
 guardian; ac^iio, action; coracao, heart; opiniao, opinion; mar, 
 sea; cruz, cross; animal, animal; papel, paper; fossil, fossil ; 
 paz, peace : nmito, — a, — os,— as, many. 
 
 ~No territorio dos Christaos. Nas niaos dos Allcmdes. 
 Os olhos sao orgdos. As opinioes dos capitdes. latido 
 dos ca.es. Os mares da China. Os coracoes dos animdes. 
 Os papeis dos escrivdes. As niaos dos guardides. As criizes 
 dos Christaos. Os cidadaos de Lisboa. Os irmaos dos 
 capitdes. As bengdos dos pdes. As condicoes da vida. Os 
 limoes do jardim. As affeigoes dos parentes. Ligoes de 
 moral. As citagoes dos authores. As impressoes do clhna, 
 das /m, dos diversos estddos da civilisacao. As producgoes 
 de todos esses sublimes genios. 
 
 The captains have three ^fo^s. The opinions of the 
 Christians. In the hands of the citizens. The organs in 
 the churches. The actions of the u-riters. The instinct 
 of animals. The new division. The conditions of the 
 citizens. By the actions of the citizens. In the hearts of 
 many animals. The signals of invasions. By the papers 
 of my parents. The voices of the captains. The captains 
 are the brothers of the citizens. In the papers of the 
 writers. In the regions of poetry. Different editions of 
 books. The poetical productions. 
 
2] 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 GENDER OE NOUNS (MASCULINE), 
 
 Pedro, rei, bfspo, leao. 
 Cafe, pe, valle. 
 Sal, fim, ddm, ardor, prazer. 
 Javali, livro, peru, nau. 
 (f.) Se, fe, chamine. 
 
 Peter, king, bishop, lion. 
 Coffee, foot, valley. 
 Salt, end, gift, heat, pleasure. 
 Boar, book, turkey, ship. 
 Cathedral, faith, chimney.. 
 
 Pedro e medico, e seu mdno bispo. Os desejos do rei 
 rugido do leao. O ladrido do cao. O cafe e bom. O 
 pe do monte. O valle de lagrimas. O leite da vaca. O 
 conde e do sangue dos reis. Zacre esta quente. A 
 mare e ofluxo e refliixo do war. A se de Coimbra. Ajfe' 
 e lima das tres virttides. Osferros da chamine. O s<iZ da 
 terra. O fim da rua. O ddm da natureza. O ardor 
 do conflicto. Os colmilhos d' urn j avail. TJm catalog o 
 de livros. Uma ^<m.. 
 
 A king, the father of his people. The gift of the 
 Archbishop. The roaring of the lions. The clamour of 
 men and boys and dogs. The coffee is strong. The foot 
 of the tree. The heat of the valley. The Cathedral of 
 Punchal. The milk is good. The blood of the sacrifices. 
 The wax is soft. The tide is favourable. The faith of the 
 Christians. 2%<s chimney of the chamber, TAe salt of 
 the sea. ^4^ the end of the book. The heat of the climate. 
 The feet of the boar. The wing of the turkey . The ships 
 of the line. Thy grandmother Lois. A cooper's adze. 
 A crowd of people. A barber's whet-stone. 
 
22 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 GENDEE OE NOUNS (FEMININE). 
 
 Kainha Maria, criada, egua. 
 
 Liia, agua, calma. 
 
 Mae) v - • •- 
 Mgi j 11900, opiniao. 
 
 Amizade, virtiide. 
 
 (m.) Planeta, systema, dia. 
 
 La, merce, lei. 
 
 Queen Mary, servant, mare. 
 Moon, water, heat. 
 
 Mother, lesson, opinion. 
 
 Friendship, virtue. 
 Planet, system, day. 
 Wool, grace, law. 
 
 Victoria, rainha da Inglaterra, e Maria, rainlia de 
 Portugal. Uma cridd-a e uma mulher que serve. Um 
 cavallo e uma egua. A lua nova. A agua do mar. A 
 calma e o calor do sol, e a fdlta de vento. A mae de 
 Joao. Uma licao e lima leitura, ou uma exposigao de 
 doutrina. lima nova opiniao. Pela sua erudicao. A in- 
 vasao dos Erancezes. ISa infdncia da historia. A monar- 
 chia hespanhola. A restauracao das letras Gregas. A 
 verdadeira amizade e rmiito rara. Os fragmentos dos 
 planetas do systema solar. As drlas do mar. 
 
 The Queen of Spain. The servant-Am**? of the Countess. 
 A new society. The light of the 1110011 in the water. The 
 opinions of the mother. The experience of the past. The 
 immediate consequence. The glorious traditions of the 
 nation. The history is in the Latin language. The yeo- 
 graphy of the Peninsula. A remote antiquity. The 
 genealogy of the Portuguese nation. The Erench two- 
 narchy. The restoration of Roman literature. The 
 planets and comets of the system. The reign of the 
 ■monarch. The Aorse and the ware. Public instruction. 
 A complete victory. 
 
23 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 GENDER OE NOUNS. 
 
 Herdeiro, herdeira. 
 Tutor, tutora. 
 Bode, cabra. 
 Pavao, pavoa. 
 Peru, perua. 
 
 Heir, heiress. 
 Tutor, tutored. 
 .He-goat, s^e-goat. 
 Pea-coc&, ^pea-hen. 
 Turkey-cock, turkey-hen. 
 
 Herdeiros e herdeiras sao pessoas que recebem he- 
 rancas em virtude da lei. A duqueza e herdeira dos 
 seus bens. Tutor de seus filbos. JNTomeava a rainha por 
 tutora do principe. Duzentas cobras e vinte lodes. 
 pavao e ufano da sua plumagem. O actor e a actriz sao 
 excellentes. Unia joven cantora. Urn lobo, unia loba, 
 e um lobinbo. O embaixador e a embaixatriz estao em 
 Londres. O barao e a baroneza de Goldsmid. O coW<? 
 e a condessa de Castello-Melbor. A pavoa e a femea do 
 vavao. pern e a, perua estao no jardim. 
 
 Tbe heiress of the crown. An abbess is tbe superior 
 or governess of a nunnery. Tbe Countess of Grlasgow. 
 Rachel is a Jewess. A turkey-cock and turJcey-hen. A 
 prophetess. Tbe dog-fox. A Z«^y and gentleman. A 
 shepherd and shepherdess. A fo'ora and lioness. A ^er 
 and a tigress. A #e«r and she-bear. Vixen is the name 
 of a she-fox. A jacJc-ass and a jenny-ass. The infant 
 Don Miguel. The infanta of Portugal. Presumptive 
 heiress of tbe throne. The Dz^e and Duchess of Welling- 
 ton. Tbe Empress of tbe French. Tbe Queen is the 
 friend of the Countess. A w^Ze monkey and a female 
 monkey. A Tom-cat. 
 
24 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 IEEEGELAE GENDERS. 
 
 Bapaz, rapariga ; mano, mana. 
 Rei, rainlia ; senhor, senhora. 
 Yiuvo, viuva ; amo, ama. 
 
 Herde, heroma ; 111690, 11169a. 
 Cavallo, egua ; touro, vacca. 
 
 Boy, girl ; brother, sister. 
 King, queen ; lord, lady. 
 Widower, widow ; master, mis- 
 tress. 
 Hero, heroine ; lad, lass. 
 Horse, mare ; bull, cow. 
 
 O irmao deu um livro ao rapdz e lima boneca a ra- 
 pariga. O rei e a rainlia da Prussia. Meu tio e men 
 tutor. O touro e a vdca. Minna tia esta doente. Uraa 
 velha viuva. A senhora Rosa. gdllo e a gallinha estao 
 110 gaUinheiro. O frdngo e a frdnga estao gordos. 
 peru e a perua. Um gCnno e lima gdma. Um carneiro 
 e lima ovelha. Uma filha, formosa rapariga, chamada 
 Bernardina. macaco e a macdca chegam do Brazil. O 
 vedclo e a corca. O lecw e a leva estao presos. heroe 
 e a lieroina estao no templo da gloria. 
 
 The streets of the city are full of logs and girls. The 
 brothers and sisters are in the house. The King and 
 Queen of Portugal. The ladies and gentlemen are ill. 
 The lion and lioness are wild. A hero is an illustrious 
 man ; a heroine, a heroic"; woman. The lords and ladies 
 have horses and mares. The WZs and cotes are in the 
 fields. The old widower is the brother of the Queen. 
 Many kinds of horses. The female-monkey is in the 
 garden. The King of Portugal. The Queen of Prussia. 
 The milk of the cow. The horns of the ram. The wool 
 of the sheep. She is a fine girl. I have a young mare. 
 
25 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 GENITIVE CASE (COMPLEMENT), 
 
 Urn piano d"educacdo. 
 
 As possessoes da monorchia. 
 
 Digno d'attenqao. 
 
 A cidade de Londres. 
 
 O duque de Wellington. 
 
 A plan of education. 
 
 The possessions of the monarchy. 
 
 Worthy of attention. 
 
 The city of London. 
 
 The Duke of Wellington. 
 
 Os rarcios de sciencia. Alfandega grande de Lisboa. 
 Theatro de D. Maria II. Sabbado 6 de Mdrgo. Os 
 jornaes do Rio de Janeiro. A camara dos Pares. Sessao 
 de 9 de Marco de 1852. As diias hdras da tdrde. A' forca 
 d'armas. Dez moios de trigo. Por meio de figuras. A 
 arte de escrever. Lencos de seda. XJm projecto de lei. 
 O grao- duque de Baden. Os caminhos de ferro. Em 
 nome do rei de Dinamdrca. XJm esquadrao de lanceiros. 
 Urn testemiinho de respeito. O prelado da diocese. Uma 
 carta datada de 6 do corrente. 
 
 The Marquis of Bezende. The importance of this sort 
 of exposition. A glance of the eye. The Duke of Bra- 
 ganza. The council of state. The rest of his days. The 
 improvement of education. The true spirit of patriotism. 
 Different qualities of oil. "With the rank of lieutenant- 
 colonel. The municipal guard of Lisbon. A body of 
 5,000 men. The names of the subscribers. The various 
 branches of commerce. The first method of writing. He 
 is worthy of praise. The theatre ofD. Fernando. Mon- 
 day, 4th of April. On the 22nd of the current month. 
 Silk handkerchiefs. The Bishop of the Diocese. 21st 
 September, 1853. 
 
26 
 LESSON XXYI. 
 
 ACCTJSATITE CASE.* 
 
 Celebrar uma victoria. 
 Tomar o commando. 
 Conciliar o respeito de- 
 Publicar noticias. 
 Tomar urn castello. 
 Seguir o curso. 
 
 To celebrate a victory. 
 Take the command. 
 Conciliate the respect of- 
 Publish news. 
 Take a castle. 
 Follow the course. 
 
 Eu nao tenho esse despdcho. Guardamos as nossas 
 posicoes. Nao decinamos a responsabiliddde. Precisa 
 explicar as cdusas. Os meios de melhorar o estddo das 
 nossas colonias. Fazemos algiimas consider agoes. 
 Becoinmendamos a cultura do cafe. Para beneficiar 
 o povo. Seu irmao ganhou a batdllia. Ismael aceom- 
 metteu e tomou o castello de Leiria. Seguindo o curso 
 do Tejo. Tomamos agasdllio. Lobo nao mata a lubo* 
 Como vejo fazer a tdntos auctores. As abelhas fabricam 
 os fdvos. leao inspira medo. Castigar o inimigo. 
 
 Its mission is to diminish our losses, soothe o\xr pains, 
 dry our tears. He neither loves God, nor his neighbour. 
 To communicate our ideas. He has read the despatch. 
 He keeps his place. I decline the responsibility. To 
 better the condition of our friends. To benefit the people. 
 The Duke gained the battle. The Count took the castle. 
 Bees make honey. The way of dating letters. I took 
 shelter. My brother read the booh. John calls Peter. 
 I have not read the news. The Duke has taken the 
 command. I recommend the cultivation of coffee. The 
 Count declines the responsibility. 
 
 * The accusative is marked by the particle a prefixed only when 
 the omission wo\dd cause an ambiguity. Joao ama a Pedro. 
 
27 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 YOCATITE CASE. 
 
 0' mogo, traga urn cdpo de cer- 
 
 v&ja/ 
 Adeus, senhor capitao. 
 A' sua satide, men senhor. 
 [Nao, senhor ', nao pdsso. 
 Sim, Vdssa Senhoria. 
 Ja, Vdssa Excellencia. 
 
 Boy, bring a glass of beer. 
 
 Grood-bye, Captain. 
 Your good health, Sir. 
 No, Sir, I cannot. 
 Yes, Sir. 
 Directly, your Excellency. 
 
 Eu so te escolho a ti, 6 virtuoso, Lydia ! Pag ens, aju- 
 dae-me. 0' mogo, traga-me unia chavana de cafe e um 
 pao francez. Nao temaes, 6 valordsos Portugueses. O" 
 mogo, lembre-se que queremos partir as seis horas. Or 
 rapdz, venha ca. Cocheiro ande ligeiro. Aonde estaes, 
 minha fillia ? Estou aqui, minha mae. Bern as entendo, 
 minhas senlwras. Oica, senhor a, o meu recado. Oh, 
 Gory don, Corydon ! 0' Jbao, venha ca. Bostilhdo, pare. 
 Muito obrigado, senhor. Mil agradecimentos, 
 Rapdz, leve a minha mala. 
 
 "Where are you, father ? * I understand you, gentle- 
 men. Good-bye, Colonel. I hear you, ladies. Boy, bring 
 me a glass of wine and a biscuit. Pear not, valiant 
 Romans. Where art thou, my son ? Boy, carry my 
 trunk. Many thanks, Sir. "Where are you, my friend ? 
 Here I am, Sir„ No, my Lady, I cannot. O grave, 
 where is thy victory ? Coachman, stop. Tour good 
 health, Madam. My lad, bring me a cup of tea and a 
 roll. Boy, take this letter. Girl, come here. John, 
 give me the money. Fages, open the doors. 
 
 * The Portuguese use the possessive pronoun in such cases ; the 
 English not. 
 
28 
 
 LESSON XXYIII. 
 
 ABLATIVE CASE. 
 
 Estabelecido por lei. 
 Caus ado pelas rdehas. 
 Cercado de montanhas. 
 Resultante da victoria. 
 Passado pelo parocho. 
 
 Established by law. 
 Caused by the rocks. 
 Surrounded by mountains. 
 Resulting from the victory. 
 Certified by the parish priest. 
 
 docmnento prodazido por Jodo Pedro. O impera- 
 dor foi accompanhado por Adridno. De certo, nao e por 
 culpa sua. Banhado pelo mar. Urna subscripcao pro- 
 movida pelo digno governador civil. Certos livros recen- 
 temente publicados por algims dos professores do lyceu. 
 Proclamado imperador pelos soldados. systema pecca 
 por excesso e por falta. Uma arvore conhecida pela excel- 
 lencia dos seus oleos. Nacoes espalhadas por tdda a 
 terra. Uma nan. assaltada por contrarios ventos. As 
 tropas coininandadas^e/o diique. 
 
 Caused hy the leaves. A city surrounded hy moun- 
 tains. The paper produced hy William. The King was 
 accompanied hy the Duke. Certain documents published 
 hy Herculano. John was proclaimed hy the soldiers. The 
 troops commanded hy the Count. The castle bathed hy 
 the sea. The tree known hy the goodness of its fruits. 
 The steamer assailed hy contrary winds. The ruin of 
 the city caused hy the rocks. A book published hy the 
 professor. The paper signed hy me. Certified hy the 
 doctor. Caused hy the dog. The city surrounded hy the 
 sea. 
 
29 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 PEOPEE NOUNS. 
 
 A Eurdpa, a A'sia, a A-'frica. 
 A Madeira,* o Eunchal, o Porto. 
 L6ndre3, Paris, Lisboa. 
 O Algarve, a Beira, a Castella. 
 Os Lusiadas, o Milton, Carlos. 
 
 Europe, Asia, Africa. 
 Madeira, Funchal, Oporto. 
 London, Paris, Lisbon. 
 Algarve, Beira, Castile. 
 The Lusiad, the Milton, Charles. 
 
 Os costumes da Furopa moderna. As margens do 
 Lima, Minho e do Douro. As vastas regioes da Africa 
 e da Asia. As novellas do Cid. governador civil do 
 districto do Funchal. No servi90 de Hannibal. A barra 
 de Lisboa. As guerras civis de Cesar e JPompeu. No 
 throno dos Cesares. Em Burgos, capital de Castella. A 
 guamicao de Santarem. A exporta9ao de cereaes para a 
 Madeira. O Camoes nos Lusiadas dedicados ao desco- 
 brimento da Tndia. Os ciimes do Ararat. niosteiro 
 da Se'rra do Filar. O Imperador de Franga.f 
 
 The laws of Asia. The banks of the Tagus. The 
 governor of Castile. In the service of Napoleon. In 
 London, the capital of England. The port of Funchal. 
 In the university of Oxford. The Cato of Addison. The 
 taking of Lisbon. The summits of the Alps. Territory- 
 bounded on the north by the Douro. The vast regions 
 of modern Furore. The city of Oporto. Charles XLL. 
 was the Alexander of the north. The Virgils of the cen- 
 tury. 
 
 * When the name of a place is also the name of a thing, the 
 proper noun takes the article; thus, "Madeira" means "wood," in 
 its original sense. 
 
 f Franca, Italia, Portugal, Hespanha, with or without the article, 
 
30 
 
 XESSON XXX. 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 Chapeu de paiha, collier de prata. 
 Peixe de rio, agua do mar. 
 Palacio de guerra, correio, 
 Hdmem d'armas, mestre de canto. 
 Dentes d'aUios. Friita de caroco. 
 
 Straw-hat, silver-spoon. 
 River- fish, sea- water. 
 War-office, post-office. 
 Man-at-arms, singing-master. 
 Cloves of garlic. Stone-fruit. 
 
 Os brincos d'ouro. TJina mesa de carvdlho. arsenal 
 da manuka. TJma collier de clid. TJma dor de cabega. 
 Duas cadeiras de brdgos. Uma bandeja magnifica. Offi- 
 cial da alfdndega. A cdsa da moeda. A cdsa de j ant dr. 
 Os dedos dos pes. IT in rdmo de flares. TJma todlha de 
 mesa. O cantdr do gdllo. Urn cavdllo de sella. O gudrda- 
 livros. Uma estagao de policia. JJmespelho. Acgao de 
 grdgas. Fivellas d'dgo. JSIanteiga de porco. Holho de 
 peixe. O nascer do sol. Tela de ardnlia. lid mem do 
 lime. Os moinhos de vento eram gigantes. TJma estante 
 para livros. 
 
 A tea-cup. A singing-master with a straw-hat. Two 
 arm-chairs are in the dining-room. The gunpowder in 
 the box. A custom-house officer. A railway. Sun-set. 
 Wind-mills. Cloves of garlic. A tooth-brush. A church- 
 yard. A war-horse. A counting-house. Whale-fishery. 
 Gunpowder. The .Foreign Secretary. A straw-hat with- 
 in a hat-box. The tea-pot, sugar-basin, and milk-pot. 
 The pen-Jcnife and the sealing-wax. A leg of mutton. A 
 round of beef. Fish-sauce. A book-case. Stone-fruit. 
 A sheet of paper. A linen-draper 's shop. Dancing-shoes. 
 
31 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 ABSTKACT NOUNS. 
 
 Natureza, virtude, vicio. 
 Amizade, crueldade, heroismo. 
 Valor, altivez, esperanca. 
 Diligencia, dociira, alegria. 
 Clareza, simplicidade. 
 
 Nature, virtue, vice. 
 Friendship, cruelty, heroism. 
 Bravery, haughtiness, hope. 
 Diligence, meekness, mirth. 
 Clearness, simplicity. 
 
 Pela natureza das cousas. A amizade e um sentimento 
 duradouro. Os motivos de respeito e de gratiddo. O go- 
 verno. As influencias da inveja. Deus aborrece ava- 
 rezas. A tyrannia do rei de Gralliza. Os maiores bens 
 sao a saude, a fovea, o dnimo, apdz, a uniao dai familias, 
 a liberddde das cidadaos, a abunddncia das cousas neces- 
 sarias, o desprezo das superfluas, a applicacdo ao trabalho, 
 e o horror da oeiosidade, a emulacao da virtude, a s^6- 
 missdo as leis, e o temor dos Deuses. Pobreza nao e 
 w7ez<z. 
 
 The friendship of the king. The poverty of the fami- 
 lies. The respect and gratitude of the citizens. The w«- 
 tfwre of man. The authority of the prince. The £n^& of 
 the maxim. The designs of the enemy. The term of life. 
 Dignity without pride, affability without meanness, ele- 
 gance without affectation. The appearance of merit. The 
 influences of tyranny. The foundation of luealtli %&& pros- 
 perity. The £ra^<? of the English colonies. The sanctity 
 of the day. The solemnity of the scene. The nothingness 
 of humanity. Two centuries of ingratitude. The simpli- 
 city of the work. The friendship of the Queen. 
 
32 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 COLLECTIVES. 
 
 Exercito, marinha, frdta. 
 Par, parelha, tropel. 
 JReuniao, partida, eardiime. 
 Ma-nada, rebanho, bando. 
 Serra, cordilheira. 
 Pilha, riina. 
 
 Army, nary, fleet. 
 Pair, yoke, troop. 
 Assembly, party, shoal. 
 Herd, flock, flight. 
 Chain of hills. 
 Pile, heap. 
 
 O exc'rcito do rei de Prussia. As deliberacoes da 
 assembled. Urn par de meias. Uma parelha de bestas. 
 TJmpdr de botas finas. Uma m a ta de coelhos. I7m bdndo 
 d'aves. Uma ninhdda de pintos. A infanteria Celtibera 
 e a cavallaria Andaluza. Um rebanho de ovelhas, urn fdto 
 de cabras, uma vara de porcos. Cinco grvpos principles 
 de tribus barbaras. Um grcsso curpo de soldadesca. Um 
 punliddo de Todos. Um troco de cavalleiros. Um cardume 
 de peixes. Um cacho d'uvas. Uma mandda de gado. 
 Os rebdnhos de carneiros, exercitos de irdmigos. 
 
 The army of the Queen. The navy of England. The 
 fleet in the Tagus. Two pairs of gloyes. Six pairs of 
 stockings. A cloud of locusts. The Portuguese infantry. 
 A shoal of fish. Flocks of sheep. A pair of boots. 
 A. flight of birds A swarm of bees. A large body of 
 cavalry. A^azV of shoes. A multitude of people. Two 
 pairs of sheets. A collection of flowers, A bunch of 
 grapes. The acting committee. A. forest of masts. An 
 assortment of books. Herds of cattle and ponies. Rows 
 of houses. The Congress of Yienna. An assembly called 
 the diet. 
 
 * Andaluz is often used as the feminine form, instead of 
 Andaluza, 
 
33 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 TITLES, TEADES, ETC. 
 
 Diique, marquez, conde. 
 Banqueiro, barbeiro, barqueiro. 
 Mei'cador, ferrador, pescador. 
 Droguista, oculista, perfumista. 
 Bibliothecario, empregado. 
 Mestre, official, trabalhador. 
 Porteiro, portador, gallego.* 
 
 Duke, marquis, earl. 
 Banker, barber, boatman. 
 Shopkeeper, farrier, fisher. 
 Druggist, optician, perfumer. 
 Librarian, official. 
 Tradesman, workman, labourer. 
 Gatekeeper, messenger, porter. 
 
 Urn banqueiro tern banco de commercio. Seu pai e 
 barbeiro. Os baroes de Portugal. Com o titulo de conde. 
 O casamento do infante. Trabalhadores para a vinha. 
 Eii era mercador e pescador, O chronista da idade media. 
 O barco do pescador. O guar da mor. Cada homem e 
 fabricador da sua fortuna. Os seg adores sao os anjos. Os 
 pedes da terra. Um ourives de prata, por nome Demetrio. 
 O presidente interino. Ajuddnte de campo do rei com o 
 grau de coronet. Joao e medico, e Pedro negocidnte. Por- 
 teiro, homem que guarda a porta. Portador, pessoa que 
 leva carta ou carga. 
 
 The officer of the law. The mind of the statesman. 
 The fishermen and the reapers. Greorge the Third was 
 King of England. The gardener, the miller, and the cow- 
 herd. The woodcutter, labourer, and ploughman. The 
 Queen of Sweden. Marquis of Pombal. The Earl of 
 Derby. The merchants of Scotland. The Counts of Bar- 
 celona. The DuJce of Saldanha. The minister of the in- 
 terior. The grand-master of the order. The treasurer 
 of the palace. Ministers and secretaries of state. The 
 Professor of Portuguese Grammar. The second lieu- 
 tenants. The librarian is not at home. The gatekeeper 
 of the quinta. 
 
 * " Gallego" literally means a Gallician ; but the Gallicians in 
 Lisbon are the ivater-carriers and porters of the city. " Mariola" — 
 translated " porter" (!) in the dictionaries — means blackguard. 
 
34 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 NAMES OP PLACES.* 
 
 Officma, fabrica. I Work-shop, manufactory. 
 
 Tinturaria, cordoaria. Dve-house, rope-yard, 
 
 Moniho de vento, momho d'agua. Wind-mill, water-mill. 
 Pombal, laranjal, pomar. , Dovecot, orangery, orchard. 
 
 Tapada, achada, ramada. j Park, leTel, bower. 
 
 Oratorio, observatorio. j Oratory, observatory. 
 
 As officinas de imprimir. paldcio da marinha. 
 escriptorio dos passapdrtes. Fnndicao dos typos. Uma 
 se, uma igreja, e uma cape'lla. O pdco episcopal. Uma 
 cdsa de trabalho. asylo dos surdo-mudos. Uma tin- 
 turaria e uma qfficina de tingir. A torre de Londres. 
 Os arsendes, estaleiros, e officinas onde se fabricam as 
 nans. Urn pombdl e uma casa de criacao dos pombos. 
 Um laranjal e um pomar de laranjeiras. A qfficina typo- 
 graphica. Um distillatorio. Uma loja. Uma cdsa de 
 pdsto. Ape'sca do arenque. 
 
 The war-office, the custom-house, and the wu>^. A 
 fish-market. An eating-house. Wind-mills and water-mills 
 are in the country. An eagle in a dovecot. A kitchen- 
 garden is a more pleasant sight than the finest orangery. 
 Baths, o? , chards,&Tid fish-pools. The palace of Holyrood. 
 The observatory of Greenwich. An orchard and a kitchen- 
 garden. The museum of natural history. The Royal 
 library. A lunatic asylum. Paper-mills. Carpet-manu- 
 factory. A cannon-foundry. An oratory is a private 
 place for prayer. Steam-engine manufactory. Type- 
 foundry. The Ajuda palace. A printing-office. 
 
 * The usual terminations indicating to7iere a thing is, is done, 
 or a trade carried on, are al, ada f ia, ina, orio. 
 
35 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 DIMINTJTITES.* 
 
 Ribeirfnho, braceletinho, folhinha. Eivulet, braceletinho, leaflet. 
 
 Gansinho, patmho. ; Gosling, duckling. 
 Cordeirmho, anao ou anaosmho. Lambkin, mannikin. 
 Gatmho, cachorrmho, caosinho. Kitten, puppy, whelp. 
 Particula, corpusculo. Particle, corpuscle. 
 
 Monticulo, Guilhermmho. Hillock, "Willie." 
 
 Vasilha. Coitadfnho ! ! Utensil. Poor little thing ! 
 
 As arrecadas e braceletes nas maos de sua irma. A 
 margem do ribeirinho. O bracelete d'Annicas. patmho 
 da poca. O gansinho da criacao. O cordeirinho da niaii- 
 jadoura. O anao do pa^o. gatmho do pastorinho. Os 
 cachorrinhos da moceta. TJma particula da cartinha. 
 Urn corpusculo do escudete. Os livrinhos da escola. 
 velhaquete do criado. As maosinhas da menina. Os 
 cavallinhos do circo. TJma ilhota deserta. A luzinha 
 da aurora. A coroasinlia da condessa. Uma febrinha e 
 uma pequena febre. Coitandinho ! 
 
 By fountain or by shady rivulet. Bracelets of gold. 
 An odorous chaplet of sweet buds. Drakes, ducks, and 
 ducklings. The coronets of the dukes. The islets in the 
 river. Eaglets. The levrets were in the field. A. brood 
 of goslings. Clean as young lambkins. Whelps or kittens. 
 The gilded puppets. Young puppies are blind. Particles 
 of bodies. Corpuscles are atoms or small fragments . The 
 mountain and a few hillocks. Here are rolls. The poor 
 puppj. The little steamer. Little William was the 
 youngest son. My little son. The little brother was in 
 the house. The. dwarf is in the rivulet. A leaflet is a 
 little leaf. 
 
 * Diminutives are much used in Portuguese, and the correct 
 employment of them is no slight test of a foreigner's proficiency. 
 They do not always imply diminutiveness, but very often express 
 compassion or affection. 
 
36 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 atjgmentatives {often slang). 
 
 Hdruemzarrao, sabidiao. 
 
 Doutoraco. 
 
 Toleiriio, mocetao, casacao. 
 
 Rapazao, papelao,* ratao.f 
 
 Velhacaz, mulherao, chapeirao. 
 
 Mocetona, mullierona. 
 
 Large man, wiseacre. 
 
 A mighty doctor. 
 
 Great fool, bumpkin, great-coat. 
 
 Iiig boy, thick paper. 
 
 Old rake, amazon, " bad hat." 
 
 Stout lass, big woman. 
 
 homemzarrdo da Patagonia. O doutordgo de Coim- 
 bra. O toleirao do entremez. O mocetao do criado. Pa- 
 pelao de desenho. O velhacaz do boieiro. O rapazao do 
 arrieiro. cura era bonacheirao. Os mestrdgos de direito. 
 As mocetonas da feira. As mulheronas do arraiaJ. Os^>a- 
 peloes do theatro. Os paspalhoes da praca publica. Os 
 rapazoes de freguezia. Os toleiroes da plateia. Os 
 bonacheiroes da republiea. Os Allemaes sao hdmemzarroes. 
 O velhacaz do porteiro. Sabidiao em direito. casacao 
 do meu amigo. O toleirao tern o teu casacao. 
 
 The wiseacres bave general ideas on the question. 
 He is a mighty doctor of Oxford. Tbe inhabitants of 
 Patagonia are immense men. The blockhead of a boy has 
 not his lessons. The great fool was in the theatre of D. 
 Fernando. Ton bave a " shocking bad hat." Your 
 great-coat is in your room. Tbe curate is a " right-good 
 fellow." The bumpkin of a groom is in tbe stable. Tbe 
 big lads of the parish. Tbe good felloivs of tbe city. 
 The G-ermans are jolly men. This is my old great-coat. 
 John is a queer fellow. 
 
 * Papelao also means " a swell" a braggart. 
 
 t Ratao is a term of contempt, equal to "queer fellow, 
 
 odd 
 
 fish," etc. 
 
37 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Delicioso, doloroso. 
 Perigoso, precioso. 
 Terr^stre, celeste, planetario. 
 Brutal, pessoal, formal. 
 Branqumho, negrmho. 
 
 Delightful, painful. 
 Dangerous, precious. 
 Earthly, heavenly, planetary. 
 Brutal, personal, formal. 
 Whitish, blackish. 
 
 TJhi jardim delicioso. TJma operacao dolorosa. N'um 
 logar perigoso. Yinho hrdnco. Urn perigoso visinho. 
 Urn momento de cruel incerteza. Uni velho soldado de 
 valor. Kpreciosa purpura do seu vestido comprido. Os 
 espiritos celestes. A guerra divide-se em terrestre e mari- 
 tima. Moco estrangeiro. Um genio brutal. Urn ser- 
 vico pessoal. Um cavallo Arabe. Uma declaracaoybrwaZ. 
 O negro esta calado e immovel. Uma reform ageral no 
 governo. O progresso do ensino publico. Obrigacao 
 pessoal. Um chapeu de veludo preto. Os preciosos res- 
 tos da antiguidade. 
 
 A rustic simplicity. Warm water. In a delicious 
 place. A personal service to the young stranger. The 
 war by land. The precious wine. The operation is dan- 
 gerous. The man is silent. In the variety of contradic- 
 tory opinions. The planetary system. A dangerous 
 disease. The white hat. A. furious horse is a dangerous 
 neighbour. In the military college. Good counsel is the 
 first duty of a true friend. A view of the principal city. 
 In a historical work. A delightful climate. Delightful 
 music. A painful loss. A dangerous enterprise. The 
 precious gifts of nature. Celestial blue. 
 
38 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 ADJECTIYES. 
 
 Activo, antigo, fugitive Active, ancient, fugitive. 
 
 Horrivel, agradavel, singular, Horrible, agreeable, singular. 
 
 Amado, vestido, continuado. Beloved, dressed, continued. 
 
 Domestico, humano, moderno. Domestic, human, modem. 
 
 Constante, decente, differente. j Constant, decent, different. 
 
 mum do antigo. Um hdmem activo. Uma morte 
 horrivel. Urna voz agradavel. reifugitivo. Uma coiu- 
 cidencia singular. Um animal domestico. Um vento 
 constante. O altar vestido de brocado. Uma continudda 
 primavera. O poder independente. O genero humano. 
 O poder absoluto. Sabbado pass ado. A guerra incessdnte 
 com o bellicoso rei. O sentimento de independencia na- 
 tional. Com gerdl applause Na seguinte noite. Uma 
 guerra domestica. O valente rei de Leao. prado ves- 
 tido de relva. Portugal modtrno. Uma terra abunddnte 
 de fructas. 
 
 An active king. The horrible death of the Arabian 
 horse. The agreeable voice of the queen. Domestic 
 affairs. A steady wind. The power of national indepen- 
 dence. The new world. The fugitive animal. The royal 
 palace is an irregular edifice. A fatal and horrible pre- 
 sentiment. The singular aspect. A short period. Natural 
 history. A terrible example. The public authority. An 
 active life. Ancient customs. Fugitive years. A horrible 
 monster. The singular number. A man clothed with 
 honour. The fugitive slave. Continued labours. Disco- 
 veries continued by new explorers. A domestic animal. 
 Human weakness. 
 
N6vo, nova ; perfeito, a ; velho, a. 
 Chris- ( a ") ; bom, boa; vao, va, 
 
 tao, (, an ) mao, ma. 
 Portuguez, a ; Hespanhdl, a -. 
 
 mi, a. 
 Breve, final, feh'z, fiel. 
 
 39 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (GENDEE.) 
 
 New, perfect, old. 
 
 Christian, good, bad, vain. 
 Portuguese, Spanish, naked. 
 
 Short, final, happy, faithful. 
 
 Em perfeita saude. altar da velha cathedral. Urn 
 novo meio. Os tempos da restaura^ao christd. TJma noite 
 linda. Em boa occasiao. Pedro o cru. Carne crua. Urn 
 mdu jantar. TJma gravata brdnca. A minha casaca nova. 
 A ultima mdda. Cerveja brdnca. Urn homem sdo. TJma 
 doutrina sa. Agu&fria. TJma espada nua. Em seguuda 
 mao. Muita moeda falsa. A curta distancia. O vdsto 
 corpo da monarchia Sespanhola. Um calor excessivo. 
 TJma boa e bonita carruagem. O grao Tiirco. A Gra- 
 Bretanha. fjma frondosa arvore. Elle e vao. Um 
 bello dia. 
 
 My faithful friend is in perfect health. Vain ambi- 
 tion. The girl is young and vain. Sound advice. A 
 volcanic eruption. The populous city of Turin. Books in 
 the Spanish and Portuguese languages. In the principal 
 street of Burgos. The coat is new, in the last fashion. 
 The man has a beautiful voice. At a short distance from 
 the old cathedral. A new and excellent bridge. The 
 'premature death of the king. A town pretty, well-built, 
 and clean. It is not a new thing. A naked sword. His 
 barefoot. A perfect work. A good climate. Good fruit. 
 Good air. 
 
40 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (sIKGULAE). 
 
 Um dia* bonito. 
 Cerveja branca. 
 Um trem especial. 
 Um quarto retirado. 
 Bom anno ; anno bom.f 
 Seis pes de largo. 
 
 A beautiful day. 
 Ale (white beer). 
 A special train. 
 A retired room. 
 Abundant year ; neiv year. 
 Six feet broad. 
 
 Neste empenho patriotico. O correio estrangeiro. A 
 camara municipal. Uma febre aguda. Nenhuma desco- 
 berta importdnte. A primeira necessidade. O unico 
 meio. Mappa geogrdphico do theatro da guerra. Nossa 
 bella provincia. Uma communicacao regular. Uma mulher 
 casdda. Seu mdu procedimento. No dia seguinte. A 
 grdnde cidade industrial de Birmingham. Um Undo ta- 
 pete de verdiira. Um famoso dia.* Um prato limpo. 
 Agua quente. Manteiga fresca. Meu sempre cliorddo 
 sobrinlio. O meu culpdvel esquecimento. seu obse- 
 quioso convite. 
 
 A strong defensive position. A severe fever. The 
 beautiful province. Cold water. An irregular commu- 
 nication. The first discovery. Last year. The kind 
 proposal of the governor. The large commercial city of 
 Bristol. His ever-lamented sister. The civil governor 
 of the province. The bad behaviour of the captain- 
 general. Fresh butter and a clean plate. A married 
 man. On the following day. By the first ship. The 
 patriotic general. The culpable forgetfulness of the cap- 
 tain. In such a case. In this important employment. 
 Our beautiful house. 
 
 * A few words in " a" are masculine. 
 
 t The adjective generally follows the noun in Portuguese, but 
 sometimes precedes. Usage determines ; but the sense is altered by 
 the relative position, as above; like "petit homme," and "homme 
 petit." 
 
41 
 LESSON XLL 
 
 ADJECTIVES (PLTJBAL*). 
 
 Noticias estrangeiras. 
 As condic^es seguintes 
 Ar vores fructiferas. 
 Actos immordes. 
 Os redes hdspedes. 
 As authoridades civis. 
 
 foreign intelligence. 
 The following conditions. 
 Fruitful trees. 
 Immoral acts. 
 The royal guests. 
 The civil authorities, 
 
 Sens servicos pessodes. Os nieus agradecimentos sin- 
 ceros. Os capitaes-yewmzes de differentes districtos. Os 
 officiaes superiores tem tido febres epidemicas. As es- 
 quadras combinddas. Cronstadt tem immensas fortifica- 
 coes abundantemente artilhddas. Cartas fechddas. As 
 boas maneiras do commandante, e o bom arranjo de todas 
 as cousas. Yunecioiiirios publicos bem escolhidos e bem 
 pdgos. ISTos primeiros dias do corrente mez de Julho. 
 Gruerras civis. Estes excellentes pianos. As vinhas do- 
 entes. Coracoes insensweis. Pagamentos igudes. 
 
 The following proposals. Important news. The civil 
 and military authorities. The personal services of the 
 public functionaries. The first days of the week. The 
 English officers in the combined squadrons. The pleasant 
 manners of the French generals. The immense fortifica- 
 tions of Sebastopol. The naval and military resources. 
 Useful letters. The royal generals. The excellent hearts 
 of the princes. Two English steam-frigates of the com- 
 bined squadrons. The foreign generals have serious 
 apprehensions. The three great powers. His sincere 
 thanks. 
 
 * Adjectives form their plurals as nouns do. For Eules, see 
 Appendix. 
 
42 
 
 LESSON XLIL 
 
 adjectives (plural continued). 
 Good ; two ; bad. 
 
 Bons, boas ; dois, duas ; maus 
 
 mas. 
 Saos, sas ; delicidsos, osas. 
 Allemaes, as ; nacionaes, suaves 
 Faceis, amaveis, difficeis. 
 Posteriores, civfs, urgentes. 
 
 Sound, delicious. 
 German, national, sweet. 
 Easy, amiable, difficult. 
 After, civil, urgent. 
 
 B,aro co mo os bans dias. A publicacao dos primeiros 
 dois volumes. As duas grandes epochas. Os periddicos 
 Allemaes. Ares saos. Cidades sas. As divisoes territo- 
 rides. dvos quentes. As cores nacionaes. Os linea- 
 mentos principdes da idade. Os sudves accentos da sua 
 voz. Estes delicidsos sitios. Uma latada de tenras vides. 
 As riias sao limpas e as casas bem edificddas. As coudi- 
 qoesfdceis. Hdmens amaveis. Estudos difficeis. Pri- 
 vilegios pessodes. JNegdcios urgentes. As senhoras 
 Allemas. Pennas metdllicas. As memdrias cliristds. Os 
 successos posteriores. 
 
 Civil wars. The days are short. The paintings are 
 admirable. Cities large and small. The roads are good. 
 Two volumes of the German book. The two great cities. 
 The national privileges. The civil rights. Streets good 
 and bad. The sweet accents of the beautiful voices. The 
 difficult aiFairs. The German institutions. The principal 
 streets of the new cities are clean. Terrible difficulties. 
 Irreconcilable enemies. The remarkable buildings. 
 Happy men. Royal persons. Fertile fields. The ad- 
 acent provinces. The streets are narrow. Fossil riches. 
 
43 
 LESSON XLIIL 
 
 ADJECTIVES (COMPARATIVE).' 
 
 Mdis esclarecido que-^- 
 Menos agradavel que — 
 Tao alto e tao branco. 
 !Nao tao quente como — 
 Melhdr, peidr, mendr, maidr. 
 Tanto melhdr; muito.* 
 
 More enlightened than — 
 
 Less agreeable than — 
 
 So tall and white. 
 
 Not so hot as — 
 
 Better, worse, less, greater. 
 
 So much the better ; very. 
 
 bom resultado e menos duvidoso. Esse desciiido e 
 muito mdis notdvel. Um logar era menos importdnte e 
 menos pingue, outro mdis importdnte e mdis rendoso. O 
 fim foi mdis agradavel que o principio. Mdis curto na 
 saia. Quero as calcaa mdis compridas. Acho a cama muito 
 dura. Porque esta a carne mais cdra ? cabello deve 
 estar mais liso e lustroso. clima nao e tao quente 
 como na Inglaterra no verao, nem tao frio como la no 
 inverno. Aquellas mulheres nao sao tao ooas como estes 
 homens. Bases mdis solidas que as da forca material. 
 
 The hand is more exposed than the foot. The battle 
 was less doubtful. The woman was more remarkable than 
 the man. The climate is less agreeable than that of 
 Madeira. My brother is better to-day. The place was 
 more important but not so lucrative. The winter is more 
 agreeable than the summer. Henry is not so tall as 
 James. I want the trousers not so long, but wider. The 
 water is not so cold as it is in the hills. Longer in the 
 waist. This bed is harder than yours. His health is 
 icorse than mine. So much the worse. Europe is more 
 enlightened than Asia. These girls are better than those 
 boys. 
 
 * " Miiito" used adverbially in comparisons means both very 
 and too; e.g., "Miiito grande" may mean "very large" or "too 
 large," according to the context. " Mais melhor " is, though common, 
 an odious vulgarism. 
 
44 
 
 LESSON XLIY. 
 
 adjectives (coitPA"RATiYES continued). 
 
 Tao infeliz como grande. f As unhappy as great. 
 S. e mdis formosa que eu. S. is handsomer than I. 
 
 O mdis bravo dos dois. The braver of the two. 
 
 MaiorzinJio. j A little larger. 
 
 Menos preguicoso que eu. ! Less lazy than I. 
 
 Joao e mdis generoso que Carlos. Nada ha tao con- 
 tagioso como o exeiuplo. filho e mellwr medico que 
 o pae. Mdis cldro que o sol. Mdis hrdnco que a neve, 
 Muito mdis sujeitos a fadigas. O sol e mdis orillidnte 
 que as estrellas. Com miiita mdis furia e pressa do que, 
 etc. Uma casa mdis illustre do que rica. Um trata- 
 mento menos duro do que era usual. As mulheres pobres 
 com paciencia metis propria d'Allemas que de Portu- 
 guezas. Mdis que provdvel. Uma toalha mais fiua. 
 Joao e tao sdbio como seu irmao. 
 
 My patience is as great as yours. Mary is more 
 generous than Jane. The swain is happier than his mo- 
 narch. Iron is harder than wood. Mary is lazier than 
 Anna. Nothing is so white as snow. The son is as 
 learned as the father. The queen is more beautiful than 
 the countess. The sun is much more brilliant than the 
 moon. Homer was the greater genius. Yirgil the better 
 artist. The shorter road of the two. The poor women 
 are more subject to fatigue than the men. The bread is 
 better than ever. The more dangerous, the more ho- 
 nourable. 
 
45 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (STJrERLATIVES), 
 
 As metis bellas sao as que — 
 
 Com o mdis prqfmdo respeito. 
 
 ~Bdbr&t'issimo. Optimo. 
 
 Os paizes mdis ciiltos. 
 
 Nem o menor favor. 
 
 A maior opposicao possfvel. 
 
 The handsomest are those which . . . 
 
 With the greatest respect. 
 
 Very cheap. Very good. 
 
 The most civilized lands. 
 
 Not the least favour. 
 
 The greatest possible opposition. 
 
 As mdis vivas sympathias. Os poritos mdis expdstos 
 ao sol. Com a maior affabilidade. Eazendo os maior es 
 mas os mdis bem merecidos. E-einava a melhdr intelli- 
 gencia entre os Erancezes e Inglezes das duas esqua- 
 dras. O principe tern mostrado grandissima actividade. 
 Em todos os paizes mdis adiantddos na carreira da civili- 
 sacao ha o maior desvelo, etc. Admiraveis exemplos do 
 mdis esclarecich zelo. O governador e sem diivida pessoa 
 da maior respeitabilidade. Tern havido sempre a melhdr 
 vontade de acabar com o trafico da escravatiira. 
 
 The greatest possible favour. The most civilized coun- 
 try. The most lively sympathy. Tour friend is doubt- 
 less a person of the greatest respectability. She was my 
 best pupil. This wine is very cheap. The house most 
 exposed to the sun. He is my best friend. Show me the 
 best cloth you have. The lest deserved praises. The most 
 polite attentions. Not the least opposition. The best 
 understanding between the pupils. The tiger is very 
 cruel. The Queen has exhibited very great activity. The 
 country is the most advanced in civilization. The hand- 
 somest flowers. 
 
46 
 
 LESSON XLYI. 
 
 adjectives (superlative continued). 
 
 A guerra a mdisfeliz. 
 O mdis sdbio de tddos. 
 Os inimfgos mdis per igosos. 
 Virgilio e mux grdnde poeta. 
 
 The most fortunate Tvar. 
 The wisest of all. 
 The most dangerous foes. 
 Virgil is a very great poet. 
 
 Homero e um poeta grandissimo. \ His are exceedingly great poem 
 
 O Capitolio era o mais celebre edificio de Roma. Na 
 parte mais oriental da cidade. O sol esta brilhantissimo. 
 O sol e o mdis brilliante dos astros. Yarrao foi o mdis 
 douto dos Romanos. A mdis importdnte noticia. O modo 
 mdisfdcil para os cultivadores. As durissimas guerras. 
 Nesta gravissima historia. Uma das qualidades mais no- 
 tdveis. Um cavalleiro mui illustre, chamado Ermigio. 
 Uma cousa certissima. A sciencia dos mdis habeis cirur- 
 gioes. As profimdezas mdis obscuras do universo ideal. 
 Utilissimos servicos. 
 
 The newest works in the language. The most skilful 
 engraver. The newest patterns. The most beautiful 
 flowers. The most eminent authority. The civilization 
 of India is the most ancient of the old civilizations of 
 Asia. In the most western part of the city. The moon 
 is very bright. Cicero was the most eloquent of the 
 Romans. The most important service. The nearest way. 
 The fields are very fertile. One of the most illustrious 
 cavaliers. The eyes of the Portuguese are very black. 
 The most remarkable qualities of the poet. The most 
 certain proofs. 
 
47 
 
 LESSON XLVIL 
 
 ADJECTIVES (iKEEOTLAR IN" COMPARISON). 
 
 ( o maidr, max- 
 Grande, maidr, •< imo. 
 
 (. grandissimo. 
 
 P6uco, menos, \ P°^ s ™> 
 
 Quente, mais i quentissimo. 
 quente, ( o mais quente. 
 
 •I 
 
 Great, greater, 
 
 ' B ' (very great. 
 
 Few, fewer, (fewest, 
 
 Small, \ very few. 
 
 Hot, hotter, J hotte J* ' 
 
 ' 7 ( very not. 
 
 Com grandissimo difficuldade, A maior das pracas e 
 a de Luiz XV. Menos orgiilho. Grandissimo gosto. Urn 
 inimigo acerrimo. Proximo a ruina. Urn asperrimo 
 castigador. Um poeta celeberrimo. Yossa Magestade 
 Christianissima. Palavras dulcissimas. Um clima frigi- 
 dissimo. Humilliwia miseria. De pouquissima impor- 
 tancia. Perpetua era pobre, pobrissima. IJma porcao 
 tenuissima. Uma cidade antiga. IJma antiquissima 
 villa. Os ultimos momentos do artista. O rei fidelis- 
 simo. Os Eomanos onagnificentissimos nas obras publicas. 
 
 The greatest soldier. The largest of the cities. Byron 
 was a very celebrated poet. The climate of Canada is very 
 cold. A most ancient castle. A very bloody battle. A 
 most cruel punishment. "With very great eloquence. A 
 very bitter enemy. A most noble intellect. The largest 
 of the trees. The greatest danger. The Greeks very 
 magnificent in temples, This holds less liquid than that. 
 Very near death. The need century. A very cold climate. 
 The house next to the castle. Less vanity. A very cele- 
 brated author, She is very poor. 
 
48 
 
 LESSOX XLVIII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (IREEGTJLAB BOTH IN ENGLISH AXD 
 
 Portuguese). 
 
 Born, melhdr, 
 
 o melhor. 
 
 ( o dptimo. 
 Man, } . , ( o peior. 
 
 Ruirn, ) 1 ' ( o pessiino. 
 
 C o rnais pe- 
 Pequeno, menur, < queno. 
 
 (. o mmimo. 
 
 G-ood, better, best. 
 Bad, worse, worst. 
 Little, less, least. 
 
 O sol e mawr que a terra. Indo na melhor ordem. 
 Que melhores documentos ? As terras negras sao as me- 
 lhores. Este instrumento e melhor que o outro. O filho 
 e peior que o pae. O vinho commum e pouco horn. Al- 
 guma cousa peior. lienor quantidade. A Eurdpa e 
 menor que a Asia. Com a maior clareza. A plebe pela 
 maior parte e poire. melhor meio de ser feliz. Cora 
 pequenas excepcoes. Eaz muitissimo frio. melhor de 
 mens amigos. Com wzh'fopressa. Da melhor qualidade. 
 Elle tinha metis que os outros. As melhor es hospedarias. 
 
 Last, test, and greatest. In the worst inn's uws£ room. 
 The earth is greater that the moon. The house is in the 
 lest order. A greater service. Freedom's lest and bravest 
 friend. With the least difficulty. The streets of the 
 city are in the lest order. Black soil is the lest. The 
 wine is of the lest quality. The lest things are in the city. 
 The houses are very lad. The streets are very good and 
 clean. One of the most amiable men. The first of his 
 class. One of the most lamentable instances. Patriot- 
 ism is the worst counsellor of the historian. These are 
 good and lad. A planet is greater than a satellite. A 
 smaller number. 
 
LESSON XLIX. 
 
 ADJECTIYES (nUMEEAL). 
 
 lfvros, diias cartas. 
 
 XJm Ifvro, uma carta. 
 
 Dois 
 
 Dous 
 
 O primeiro dia, a segunda vez. 
 
 So, o diiplo, o triplo. 
 
 12 de Maio de 1852. 
 
 One book, one letter. 
 
 Two books, two letters. 
 
 The first day, the second time. 
 Single, double, treble. 
 12th Mar, 1852. 
 
 Cento e um. Trezentos e cincoenta e cinco. Em segundo 
 logar. Livro primeiro. Capitulo quinto. Jorge Quarto. 
 Luiz Quatorze. Em cinco de Julho. As duas primeiras 
 cartas. O terco. Um dos primciros deveres do hdmem. 
 Em vinte e nove dias. Dous mil quinhentos e trinta e 
 qudtro homens. Mil e quinhentas casas. A carta e 
 datada de vinte e dous de Marco. Em quinze de Maio. 
 E uma hora. Sao duas horas menos um quarto. As 
 qudtro. Tres arrateis. Setenta e dous francos. De tres 
 bracas de comprido e duas e meia de largo. Uma decima 
 septima. 
 
 Four hundred and fifty men. "William the Fourth. In 
 the third place. Chapter the sixth. In the fourth place. 
 The letter is dated the twenty-second of January. On the 
 fourth of July. Three pounds of coffee. Monday at two 
 o'clock. Three leagues long and two broad. Four thou- 
 sand two hundred and forty houses. It is a quarter to 
 three o'clock. Twelve to fourteen leagues. The fourth. 
 The seventh of March. In three minutes. 7th January, 
 1850. In the year 1824. Peter the First. Two-thirds 
 of the nation. Five thousand persons. Not a single 
 word of truth. Two hundred and ten soldiers. The 6th 
 of January, 1854. 
 
50 
 
 LESSON L. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (INDEFINITE, DECLINABLE). 
 
 Todo, total, ambos. 1 All (or the -whole), total, both. 
 
 Os inais, todos os nidis. The rest, all the rest. 
 
 Algum,* nenhum. | Some, an) 7 ; no one, no, none, not 
 
 Certo, rruiito, qualquer. 
 
 any. 
 cert 
 ever. 
 
 Todos os dias. Todos os povos. Algwns navios da es- 
 quadra. Tula a tarde. TCdas as novidades. A ruina 
 toted. Alguns defeitos. Algumas peras. Nenhwn dos 
 juizes. < trio homem diz. ]S 6s todos. Todos elles. 
 Muita gente. Miiitos livros. Alguma pessoa. Pessoa 
 algum a. A somma total. Tdl amo, tdl crm&o. ~Ne\x\um, 
 nera outro. Alguns cem soldados. Ambos cemtao o 
 mesmo ciiso. JSao facas tdl. Por outra maneira. O 
 outro dia. Os bispos Ano-|h-anos sao ricos, os outros ec- 
 clesiasticos pobres. Muitas razoes. Os mats. Ntnhwm 
 dos dons. Sem nenhum vestigio. 
 
 All the family. Every day. Another time. So much 
 work. Something. All of us. Many letters and many 
 books. The sum total is 4-00 dollars. M. Such-a-one 
 says. One brother is in Canada, the other in Madeira. 
 Some geographers. Any man. No man. Not much 
 warmth of imagination. The first of all the Soman 
 kings. Some time. As the parent, so the child. Others 
 say. To such a woman. All the rest. They are all our 
 friends, as-many-as you see. Some of the men. I do 
 not remember such. Some inscription. Some letters. 
 Without any vestige. 
 
 * It has a negative force after the noun. " Arvore alguma se 
 encdntra nos desertos d' Africa," " No tree is met within the 
 deserts of Africa." 
 
51 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (INDEFINITE, INDECLINABLE). 
 
 Cada : niais, cada urn. 
 Nada,* tudo. 
 Ninguem, outrem. 
 
 Each, every ; more, every one. 
 Nothing ; everything, all. 
 None, nobody, no one ; another. 
 
 Alguein ; quemquer. I Anybody ; -whoever, whatever. 
 
 Cdda dia. Mdis crimes que virtiides. Tudo esta 
 perdido. Cdda um para si. Men tudo ! Mais vinho que 
 agua. Ninguem e feliz. Aquillo que pertence a outrem. 
 Ninguem d'elles. Se alguem vier — . Pela resposta de cdda 
 pergunta. Cdda vez mais. Quantos medicos, mdis mo- 
 lestias. Nao e ndda. Ndda menos. Homem capaz de 
 tudo. Ndda de novo. Cdda periodo da vida tem prazeres. 
 Mdis gloria que proveito. Em cdda julgado ha um juiz. 
 Outro qualquer meio. Quemquer que esta ahi, 1'a.lle. 
 Alguem cliz o que nao sabe. Quer ir ? Nada* 
 
 Every night. More money than wit. All is done. 
 Every man for himself. John is my all. No one in this 
 world is happy. Nothing new in the papers. Every man. 
 Every tenth soldier. She had more knowledge than the 
 others. "Will you go ? By no means* All was going 
 well in the ship. He is a nobody. In generosity he yields 
 to no one. In every city of the kingdom. More water 
 than wine. More and more. Every language has its 
 defects. Every word and action. If any one comes. 
 My all. Any other away. It is nothing. Every period 
 of life. All is lost. 
 
 * Often used, in denying emphatically, for " nao" {t por r.wdo 
 nenhiim" " not at all," " by no means." 
 
52 
 LESSON LII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (PEC-PEE).* 
 
 O publico Porttiense. 
 A nacao Portugueza. 
 Sua magestade Britdnnica. 
 O general Austriaco. 
 O governo Saxonio. 
 Um comniissario Twrco. 
 
 The Oporto public. 
 The Portuguese nation. 
 Her Britannic Majesty. 
 The Austrian general. 
 The Saxon government. 
 A Turkish commissioner. 
 
 Uma peca de panno Hespanhol. Hiate Portuguez Oli- 
 ve ira. ~Brigue Biglez Alpha. Umafragata Ingleza. Biirca 
 Prussidna Lucifer. Uma galeota Hollandeza. Luas 
 escimas Inglezas. Urn barco de vapor de guerra Srasi- 
 leiro. A associacao industrial Portuensc. As tropas 
 Austrian as. As potencias Allemds. O embaixador Pusso. 
 O publico Lisbonense. Sua magestade Belga. As malas 
 Poruguezas. Os generaes Pussos. O governo Francez. 
 As cortes Allemds. Os generaes sao todos emigrados 
 Poldcos, Hungaros e Italianos. Brigue Sueco Maryanna. 
 A bandeira Americana. 
 
 The Saxon general. The Spanish mails. The English 
 government. The Portuguese ambassador. The Prussian 
 troops. The Hungarian generals. The 'Brazilian par- 
 liament. The Russian flag. Three French schooners 
 and an American war-steamer. The German generals 
 and the French ambassadors. The British nation and the 
 Portuguese government. The Banish public. The Greek 
 language. A French brig and three English frigates. 
 Many Hungarian and Italian refugees are (estao) in the 
 Turkish armies. A Banish family is (esta) in the Ameri- 
 can steamer. 
 
 * Portuguese authors sometimes write proper adjectives with 
 capital letters ; sometimes not. The former practice is more Portu- 
 guese, the latter more French. 
 
LESSON LIIL 
 adjectives (peoper continued.) 
 
 As ilhas Britannicas. 
 Cinco reis Mouros. 
 A dynastia AvMriaca. 
 O iinperio Grego. 
 Varias tribus Indias. 
 
 The British Islands. 
 Five Moorish kings. 
 The Austrian dynasty. 
 The Greek empire. 
 Various Indian tribes. 
 
 arsenal do exercito Fortuguez. Exposicao da in- 
 dustria Madeirense. TJm rico fidalgo Genovez. A monar- 
 chia Hespanhola. AconquistaiiWcm#. A lingua Hebrdica. 
 A musa Homerica. governo Britdnnico. A igreja An- 
 glicdna. A raca Hottentote. O verdadeiro camello Arabe. 
 Nas Indias Orientdes. Chandernagor, capital dos esta- 
 belecimsntos Francezes no territorio Bengalim. IMbens, 
 graude artista Flamengo. A lingua Allema. Oscaracteres 
 do alphabefco Germdnico. Na provincia Fussidna de Ozen- 
 burgo. Esta casta Africdna. O publico Lisbonense. 
 
 The British army. The Madeira people. The Latin 
 language. The Arabian horse. The English establish- 
 ments in India. The Russian forces. The Caspian sea. 
 A great Roman bridge. A superb Gothic cathedral. 
 The French Empire. The German confederation. The 
 Teutonic knights. The German states of Austria. Eng- 
 lish horses. The Lisbon Cathedral. Some Greek monks. 
 The Portuguese flag. The French republic of 1848. The 
 Lisbon press. The Banish territory. The Judaic law. 
 He is a Flemish painter. The Hebrew text. 
 
54 
 LESSON LIV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (COMPOUND). 
 
 Recem-chegadOj recern-vmdo. ' Newly-arrived, newly-come. 
 
 Bemaventurado, bemdito, bem Fortunate, blessed, well-born. 
 
 nascido. 
 
 Siipracitado, bem vindo. | Above-quoted, welcome. 
 
 Abaixo assignado. j Undersigned. 
 
 Mal creado, mal dizente, malfeito. j Ill-bred, evil-speaking, ill-made 
 
 Sempre-viva, sempre-verde. ' Ever-living, ever-green. 
 
 Guide para esta cella o recem-chegado. Diante dos 
 freguezes recem-vindos. Os filhos rccem nasci'dos. Aquel- 
 laa ilhas hemaventurddas. Os campiuos ficarao cabisbdixos. 
 O author da carta supracitdda. Os abdioco assignddos. 
 G-16ria sempre-viva. Eriicta sem-sabor . O man to awri- 
 fulgente. O homem e recem-defuncto. Bemdito seja 
 Deos ? E miiito mal creddo. Herva sempre-verde. 
 Alma bemfazeja. JBenemerito de penna. Unia planta 
 sempre-viva e uma planta que se conserva verde todo o 
 anno. E urn homem semsahor. 
 
 The child is newlg-dead. The new-comer is my bro- 
 ther's friend. The new-born child is very strong. In- 
 sipid wine. In a fortunate hour. A benevolent heart. 
 Deserving well of his country. The words of the above- 
 quoted letter. The tricolor flag. Animals carnivorous 
 and herbivorous. The' young man is very ill-bred. The 
 antepenultimate syllable. The benevolent soul of the old 
 man. Blessed be God. Those happy lands. The trees 
 ever-green. The poor sailor was half-dead. The under- 
 signed members of the society. "Well deserving of punish- 
 ment. He is welcome. 
 
55 
 
 LESSON LY. 
 
 ADJECTIVES (AUGMENT ATI VES AND DIMINUTIVES), 
 
 Sosmho, friosmho, bomzfnho. 
 Innocentfnho, fraqumho, doen- 
 
 tfnho. 
 Baixmho, tenrmho, acabadmho. 
 Soberbao. 
 
 Cabeciido, nerviido. 
 Doutoraco. 
 
 All alone, cold, good. 
 Innocent, weakly, poorly. 
 
 Short, tender, done. 
 
 Proud. 
 
 Blockhead, strong-nerved. 
 
 Wiseacre. 
 
 TJm cavalleiro chegou sosmho a porta. A filha inno- 
 centinha. A velha comecou a fallar baixmho. Sua mes- 
 quinha irma. Os cavalleiros forao sahindo do paco tris- 
 tonhos. IJnia roseirinha pequenina, bonitinha. Hdinem 
 cabegudo. Ha iiuias certas boquinhas gravesinlias e es- 
 premidinhas pela doutorice. . . Estamos sosinhas nos 
 diias neste mundo. Elle bateu devagarinho. Elle tem 
 olhar de soberbao. Tem-se em conta de doutordgo- XJma 
 casa lindinha. coelho e mviito tenrmho. O velhinho 
 esta muito acabadinho. Tem bracos nervudos. 
 
 He is a good Utile fellow. We were all alone in the 
 house. She is a sweet little innocent. The daughter of 
 the little man is pretty. The child is weakly. Little 
 John is naughty. The poor little blind girl. The little 
 negress is poorly. His little feet are cold. Your frock is 
 new and clean. The boy began to speak loiv. My neat 
 little house. My brother knocked softly. Thomas considers 
 himself a learned man. The melancholy cavaliers. He 
 reached the gate all alone. We two are all alone. That 
 wicked little monkey ! She has a siveetly pretty bonnet. 
 Such a darling child. 
 
 * The diminutive power of the adjective often qualifies the noun 
 with which that adjective agrees. 
 
o6 
 
 LESSON LVI. 
 pEowoxrars (pebsoxal). 
 
 Eu, de mini, a mim, mim, rac. 
 Nds, de nds, a nds, nds. 
 Tu, de ti, a ti, ti. 
 Vds, de vds, a vds, vds. 
 Elle, delle, a elle, elle * 
 Ella, della, a ella, ella. 
 Elles, delles, a elles, elles (ra.). 
 Ellas, deltas, a ellas, ellas (f.). 
 
 I, of ine, to me, me, me. 
 We, of us, to us, us. 
 Thou, of thee, to thee, thee. 
 You, of you, to you, you. 
 He, of him, to him, him. 
 She, of her, to her, her. 
 They, of them, to them, them. 
 They, of them, to them, them. 
 
 Elle e generdso. JSfos somos venturdsos. Elles estao 
 occupados. Nao sou siirdo. Dous delles. Tu aban- 
 donas os amigos. Eu o chamo. Eu amo. Elle esta 
 prompto. Elle ia corn elles. Elles fallao de mini. Eu 
 nunca fallo delles. Elle e inais 111690 que eu. Eu o 
 amo. Amo-o como meu prdprio irmao. Nds os moder- 
 110s. Elle e mais rico que elles. O assiimpto em que 
 V. S. ine tern fallddo. Eutre elle e mim. Nds o cham- 
 amos. Ellas amao. Elle Hies disse. A onion. Belle. 
 Lembro-.we delta. Eu por mim. No meio delles. 
 
 J have a knife. I have no husband. Thou hast a 
 fork. He has 110 shoes. We have good wine. He is 
 deaf. She is blind. We are lazy. Thou lovest the 
 friends. I love him. He loves her. She is my sister's 
 friend. The women are beautiful, and they are sisters. 
 He has spoken to me. We love him. He is in the midst 
 of them. My mother who sent one with them. She is richer 
 than he. They (f.) love their father. With me. With 
 thee. They (m.) are ready. Of her. Without one. 
 Without him. She loves tcs. We love her. She is good. 
 
 * O, a, os, as, are often used for the accusative of the third per- 
 sonal pronouns. " Eu o chamo," I call Mm ; " N ao a vejo," I do not 
 see her, etc. 
 
57 
 
 LESSON LVIL 
 
 PEONOUNS (CONJUNCTIVE). 
 
 Me, te, se, The. 
 
 JSos, vos, Dies. 
 
 Me, te; o,* a,*lo,*la.* 
 
 Nos, vos, 08,* as,* los,"*" las.* 
 
 Comigo, com-tigo, coni-sigo. 
 
 To me, to thee, to him, her, it. 
 To us, to you, to them. 
 Me, thee ; liim, her, it. 
 Us, you, them. 
 With me, thee, etc. 
 
 Di-lhe uma penna. Nao Ihe digo. Eaca-?ȣ o favor. 
 V. S. pode fazer-me um grande servico. Yico-lhe muito 
 obrigado. Agradeco-Z/j<s infiuitamente. Sinto dar-//*<? 
 tanto incommodo. E o que Ihe posso dher. Eu o sup- 
 ponko. ^ JSTao o creio. Eu o quero. Elle deu-me um 
 livro. Elle falla contra mim. Elle deu-nos duas patacas. 
 Ella dea-lhes miiito dinheiro. Com-Wsco. Levei o cao 
 ao rio, e lancei-o na agua. Montei a egua, e levei-a ao 
 rio. DigSL-me. Diga,-lhe. T)iga,-lhes. Quero ve-lo. JNao 
 posso Ye-la. Eaca-we um par de bdtas. 
 
 It seems to me. I give you these books. Do him the 
 favour. Give me the new pens. I am much obliged to 
 you. I thank them. It is what I can tell you. She gave 
 me two beautiful books. Tell them that the money is 
 good. Zwish to see her. /cannot see them. Make me 
 a pair of shoes. I do not believe him. He gave one a 
 dog, and I threw it into the river. Give him a book. 
 You can do him a great favour. She gave him a pen. Tell 
 him that I cannot give him the horse. He gave them a 
 pair of boots. They speak against me. I am sorry to 
 give them so much trouble. 
 
 * Used after in 
 rectly "amal-o." 
 
 as " JSTao pdsso ama-/o," or more cor- 
 
58 
 
 LESSOR lyiii. 
 
 PBONOTTEFS (MIXED CONJITN CTITE) .* 
 
 M'o, m'a. I It or him to me, lier to me. 
 
 M'os, m'as. Them to me. 
 
 T'o, t'a, t'os, t'as. I Him, her, it or them, to thee. 
 
 Lh'o, lli' a, lh'os, lh'as. | Him, her, it or them, to you. 
 
 Dai-in'o. En comprei-o para ddv-Wo. livro e novo, 
 eu Wo darei. A penna e boa, elle m'a dara. Elles Ilia 
 le\arao. Eaca-w'^s largas. De-m'as. Disse-ra'o certa 
 pessoa. Deixe-m'o ver. JNao Wo direi. Assim m'o dis- 
 serao. Nao Wo diga. Perdoa-w'o, se o fiz. Dizia-ZA'o 
 o seu espelho. Perguntai-?;2'0 a mim. Nao Wo posso 
 dizer. Eu ZA'o darei. Mtiito Wo agradeco. Deixe~?;z'o 
 alguns dias. Eu Wo tenho dito. Faca-m'os ver. Quan- 
 do m'os podera dar ? Eu Wos mandarei. De-me lic&nca 
 de Wos provar. Eu Wo affianco. Pois dir-w-Zo-hei eu. 
 
 Give it me. Give it him. Give it them. I bought it 
 to give it to them. These pens are good, give one them. 
 The mare is beautiful, and I gave her to him. The letter 
 is beautiful, let me see it. Is the book good ? I will give 
 it you. Give me leave to show them to him. I shall pay 
 ■it you. I will give it you for less. The rings are pretty, 
 I will show them to thee. I thank you much for it (m.). 
 "When shall you be able to show them to me ? I assure 
 yon of it. I shall tell you it. He gave it me. The house 
 is new, I will it to you. The horse is gentle, will you 
 give it to her ? Give him leave to try them for me. 
 
 * These pronouns are compounds of the dative of the person 
 with the accusative of the thing. Il'o stands for me o, it to one, the 
 accusative of course agreeing with the noun to which it refers. 
 
59 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 pronouns (possessive). 
 
 Meu, meus ; minha, mmhas. I My, mine. 
 
 Teu, teus ; tua, tiias. i Thy, thine. 
 
 Seu, seus; sua, suas. j His, her, its, their, your.* 
 
 Ndsso, nossos ; ndssa, ndssas, ' Our, ours. 
 
 Ydsso, vdssos ; vdssa, vdssas. ! Your, yours. 
 
 Meu pae, minha mae e minlias irmas estao no campo. 
 Seu filho e sabio. Seu irmao e moco. Of seu jardim e 
 maidr que o meu. Vdsso amigo e o meu. Este chape u e 
 meu. Com os seus parentes. Como esta minha irma. 
 Os nossos amigos nos abandonao. Sua Magestade. No 
 seu leito. seu primeiro impulse TJma das suas maos. 
 (Tm meu patricio. % Dons amigos seus. No uieio dos seus 
 concidadaos. A energia da sua alma. Meus amigos. 
 Londres tern suas bellezas. Os seus mais pequenos mo- 
 vimentos. Yan-Dyck foi o seu melhor discipulo. 
 
 My mother and my brothers are in the garden. His 
 son is young. Your house is larger than mine. He is 
 my friend. He is one of my friends. One of your coun- 
 trymen. In the midst of his friends. The image of my 
 mother. He was the victim of the ideas of his time, as 
 so many are of those of ours. With his hand between 
 hers. Two volumes of this our journal. One of my legs. 
 My aunts. With all my heart. Three friends of his. 
 This house is mine. l£is garden is large. In other 
 countries, especially in ours. 
 
 * When speaking to any one in the third person, seu stands for 
 your, e.g., " Grdsto do seuestylo," I Yikeyour style. When speak- 
 ing to a person of another person, use d'elle, " Grdsto do estylo 
 d'elle/' I like Ms style. 
 
 t The article is prefixed to the possessive when emphasis is 
 required. 
 
 X One of my countrymen. 
 
60 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 pronouns (demonstrative). 
 
 Itste, esta; estes, estas; isto.* j This; these; this.* 
 
 Esse, essa; esses, essas; o,f a, ' That; those; that ;f that.* 
 
 os, as ; isso.* 
 
 Aquelle, aquella; aquelles; aquel- '■ That; those; that. 
 
 las ; aqufllo. 
 
 Est'outro, ess'outro. | This other ; that other. 
 
 JEste tapete. Aquella arvore. Estes livros. Aquelles 
 homens. Essa casa. Esses rios. JEste quadro e liudo. 
 Isto* e para lnim. Estas botas sao de Paulo. JEste e o 
 seculo das revolucoes. Aquellas mulheres nao sao tao 
 boas como estes homens. JEste homem e o author deste 
 livro. Sou desta opiniao. Nadadi'sfo* e assim. Urn dia 
 destes. Como e isto* possivel ? Nao gdsto disto. No- 
 quelle logar. No aspecto daquellas lindaspaizagens. Por 
 este vil preco. Nesta capital. Neste momento. Isto* 
 nao e provavel. JEssas representacoes. Esta especie 
 cruelissima. 
 
 This house. TJiat tree. These houses. Those trees. 
 This book is beautiful. Of this house. Of those books. 
 In these representations. Those books are John's. This 
 is for him. In these rivers. This is not possible. The 
 leaves of those beautiful trees. These (f.) are not good. 
 He is of that opinion. Of these two men. In this case. 
 This other one has a disagreeable voice. Those cavaliers. 
 In that. Of this. The ground is that of a Eoman town. 
 The voice is that of a man. One of these days. Those 
 sheets are damp. The door of this house. 
 
 * Isto and zsso, this and that, are used without nouns, like ceci 
 and cela in French. 
 
 f In contrasted allusion : "Oar da cidade e man ; o do campo, 
 "bom," — The air of the town is bad ; that of the country, good. 
 
61 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 
 PEONOUNS (RELATIVE), 
 
 O qua!,* os quaes; a qual, as 
 
 quaes. 
 Cujo, uuja; cujos, ciijas; de 
 
 quem. 
 Q.uem ; o que. 
 Que,t a quem. 
 Aquelle que, aquella que ; o que. 
 
 Who, which. 
 
 Whose. 
 
 Who, he, who, whoever ; what. 
 Who, which, that, whom. 
 He who, she who ; that which, 
 what. 
 
 Encontrei um homem, o qual me reconheceo. O 
 novo relogio que elle tem. O passaro que canta. A mulher 
 que eu estimo. O homem de cujo cavallo lhe fallei. Deus, 
 ciijas obras admiramos. Camoes, cujo merito conhe- 
 cemos. IJma nor, cujo cheiro e agradavel. Quem mais 
 tem, mais deseja. E lima cousa de que elle nao e capaz. 
 As circunstancias em que, etc. Somos quem somos. Os 
 que sao sabios sao felizes. Esta Y. S. certo do que diz ? 
 A penna com que eii escrevo. Os que pensao. negocio 
 de que trato. Isto e tudo o que elle me disse. 
 
 He saw a man in the house, wlw said, etc. The situa- 
 tion in which. To know what was the substance of the 
 petitions. In every place in ivhich. Lorenzo was he 
 who knew him. Yery different from what it at present 
 appears. One of those men in whose hands. If I judge 
 by what I see. He who is religious knows, etc. Whoever 
 has most, wants most. This sea whose waves, etc. I am 
 sure of what I say. The pencil with which I write is 
 yours. He that has most, wants most. The man that is 
 in the garden is my friend. The house in which he lives. 
 
 * Qual preceded by the article corresponds to the Latin qui, not 
 quis or qualis. It is like the old English, " the which" or to the 
 French " le quel,'" and reproduces the idea of the object already 
 designated. 
 
 f Que is equal to ivho, tvhich, that, and whom t and is inde- 
 clinable. 
 
62 
 LESSON LXIL 
 
 PRONOUNS (INTERROGATIVE). 
 
 Qual* destes ? | Which of these? 
 
 What man is this ? 
 What troops are those ? 
 Who is it ? What ? 
 
 Que homem e este ? 
 
 Que trdpas sao essas ? 
 
 Quern e ? que ? 
 
 ^e quern. j aquein _ ? | Whose? To whom ? Whom? 
 
 Quern e? Quern esta alii ? Qudl de seus irmaos? 
 Que livros tern o rapaz ? Qudl delles ? Quaes sao as 
 suas razoes ? Quern esta a porta ? Qwew serao os paes 
 destes meninos ? De quern e este quadro ? Ellas sao 
 dtias irmas : a quern da V. S. a prefere'ncia ? Que e isso ? 
 Q«e horas sao ? Quern sao elles ? Qwe vergonha ! Qudl 
 dos ddus? Que lhe parece disto? Q Mm t'o disse? Que 
 novidades? Que boas novas ha? Que e a virtude ? 
 Quern sabe se essas sao verdadeiras ? Que idade tern 
 sen tio ? Q^ e o meu livro ? JS'enhum destes. Em 
 torn de quern quer ser obedecido. Quern forao os pri- 
 uieiros. 
 
 Which of your sisters ? What is that ? What books 
 have the girls ? What woman is that ? What a pity ? 
 Whose hat is this ? Wliat age is your son ? Which of 
 them ? Who is in the garden ? They are brother*, 
 which do you prefer ? What ship is that ? To whom ? 
 Who knows ? What news to-day ? What o'clock is it? 
 Whose pen is this ? What are your reasons ? What is 
 truth ? What horse is this ? Who art thou ? Who is 
 the master of the house ? Which of these monuments ? 
 What are the requisites of a good soldier ? Who were 
 the second boys ? 
 
 * Qudl, interrogative, corresponds nearly to the Latin ."quails." 
 
63 
 
 LESSON LXIII. 
 
 PRONOUNS (EEPLECTITE AND INTENSITIYE) . 
 
 Eu mesmo, elle mesmo. 
 Ella mesma. 
 Elles mesmos. 
 
 I myself, lie himself etc. 
 
 She herself. 
 
 They themselves (m.). 
 
 Ellas mesmas. \ They themselves (f.). 
 
 Jfe, fe, .*?. ! MyseZ/; thyse//; hhnseZ/'. 
 
 De si mesmo. ! Oi one's self 
 
 Contentar-»o,?, em si. ; To content oiirself ; in ^seZ/*. 
 
 I To, for, of, by one's self; 
 
 A, para, de, por si. i himself 
 
 Falla-se de paz ; por si so. i 27ie?/ speak of peace ; alone. 
 
 Eu mesmo o fiz. A mini mesmo. Lembro-wzi? disso 
 no mesmo dia. Qi^aZ e o homem que minca se engana ? 
 Elle fez-se soldado. Eaz-setarde. Limito-we a questao. 
 Desejo-rae no catnpo. You.-me para casa. A falsidade e 
 odiasa em si mesma. Isto por simesmo esta claro. Lan- 
 odu longe de si a arma fatal. Ellas mesmas m'o disserao. 
 Aqui mesmo. Como se chama isto ? Elle nao esta em 
 si. Chama-se milho. Ealla-se, conversa-se, e o tempo se 
 passa. Fazem mal a si os que abusao da saiide. Nao se 
 sabe. A mim mesma comeca a turvar-se-we a cabeca. 
 
 I do not remember this. In itself. Alone. He limits 
 himself to the fact. "Whose origin is unknown. I saved 
 7/er, and he saved himself He became a sailor. They 
 are of importance to we. [Nothing subsists by itself 
 yave God. I myself was present. I o«j going home. 
 Yice is odious in itself The women themselves went 
 away. Henry killed himself. He said to himself. He 
 threw far from him the gold. That wine is called " bual." 
 I forgot to write the letter. They themselves said it to 
 him. He did it himself I limit myself to this question. 
 To content themselves. 
 
64 
 
 LESSON LXIY. 
 
 PEES0NAL AND CONJUNCTIYE PKOtfOUNS WITH 
 INDICATIVES. 
 
 Doixao-rov a honra. 
 
 Dax-me-haa prazer. 
 
 A mim me daras, etc. 
 
 Deus apraz-.se da humildade. 
 
 Assim o prometterao. \ So they promised it, 
 
 En ro-lo digo. i I tell you it. 
 
 Addrao-no,* na, nos } nas. i They adore Mm, her, them. 
 
 They leave you the honour. 
 Thou wilt gire me pleasure. 
 To me myself thou wilt give, etc. 
 God delights in humility. 
 
 Perdoae-we. Gabas-me o bom genio. Affigurava- 
 se-me que ella estava junto de mim. Depois ergueu-s^, e 
 assent bu-se-llie ao lado. Elle obrigou-o a tomar alguma 
 refeicao. Elles matarao-w'o. Ca\e\-me. T)e\i-me uma 
 das siias maos, levei-« a boca, e beijei-#. Esta palavra 
 senti-« soar, palpava-#, via-a escripta, affigurava se-me 
 convertida em efieito. Arripiarao-su-we os cabellos. 
 Aqui me matarao urn fillio. Encaminhei-we para a porta. 
 Bepito-f<? que nao me importa. Elle assent on- se-me ao 
 lado. Elles matarao-na. 
 
 I went to led, but could not sleep. I told him all. 
 It remains for us to know. Without his knowing it. 
 His bands, above all, incommoded him. He gave me one 
 of his bands ; I pressed it between mine, raised it to my 
 mouth, and kissed it. A dagger glittered in my band. 
 My pulse beat with feverish force. I told Mm I was 
 ready. Let them leave us the honour. Eame lias exalted 
 Mm. They love Mm. They honour Tier. These men 
 leave Mm the glory. They killed my daughter here. 
 The heathen adore her. The old man seated himself at 
 my side. 
 
 * The " n" is for the sake of sound, instead of addrao-o. 
 
65 
 
 LESSON LXV. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE PBONOUNS WITH INEINITIVES. 
 
 Quero perdoar-Z7ie. 
 
 Que perigos se me pddem offe- 
 
 recer ? 
 Pois mais vos quero dizer. 
 Vim de casa para te ver. 
 Quiz ve-lo* \e-la } ve-los, \e-las. 
 
 I wish to pardon him. 
 What dangers can present them- 
 selves to me ? 
 Then more I wish to tell you. 
 I came from home to see thee. 
 I wished to see him, her, them. 
 
 Kaleb sahiu da cidade, fingindo abandona-Z<z de tddo. 
 O velho vein acoinpanhal-o. bom do monge eorreu 
 a abracal-o. Gusto \i-me a conhecer-ZA<? as feicoes. Ye- 
 Zo-heis ja. Pensa-Zo e faze-Zo sao cousas bem differentes. 
 JNao queria demorar-?w<? alii mais. Custava-me a cre-Zo 
 O aspecto far-tws-ha crer. Enganar-vos-heis. Ve-Z«-heis. 
 O sol eomecava a tingiv-me a cama de todas as cores das 
 vidracas de lima fresta que me ficava fronteira. Cortar- 
 ZAe-hemos uma talhada. Disse-^<? que seu senhor preci- 
 sava de idllkv-me. Ouvi, sem irvit&r-me. 
 
 After giving him. He resolved to ask her in marriage. 
 "We are going to help you to raise it. No one dared to 
 contradict me. I wish to spare you some trouble. I 
 began to observe myself, % and to study myself, in order 
 to know myself They come to consult him. I cannot 
 bear you. He offered to give him the horse. The good 
 priest ran to tell him. He desires to see them. I came 
 from Lisbon to see you. He told me that the duke wished 
 to speak to we. I can hardly believe him. After par- 
 doniug him. To say it and to do it are not the same 
 thing. I wish to see you at home. 
 
 * Ve-lo is contracted for ver o, or ver lo. 
 
 t Often divided " abandonaZ-a" instead of " abondan«-Z«." 
 
 % Rendered by "me." 
 
 3? 
 
66 
 
 LESSON LXYI. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE PEONOTJNS WITH IMPEBATIVES. 
 
 Deus vos prospere ! 
 6ra nao* me importune. 
 Faca-we este favor. 
 T)e-me lima rdsa. 
 Traga-wo-fo. 
 Nao Hie diga isso. 
 
 May God prosper yow ! 
 Now, do not teaze me. 
 Do me this favour. 
 Give me a rose. 
 Bring v.s some. 
 Don't tell Awn that. 
 
 Abraca-we, falla-we de meu pae. Tragn-me. De-me 
 de que beber. JS"ao se mova d'ahi. Traga-wos azeite. 
 Traga-wo-Z«5. Eaca-wz<s o banho mais quente. Ya-one 
 busear lima carruagem. Diga-Uie que me tr&ga os sa- 
 patos. Senhor, salvages. Segue-one. Expliea-^os essa 
 parabola. Levantae-t'os. Paga-«?e o que me deves. 
 Tira-fe d'ahi. Dae-one esse livro. Yeste-me. Traga-we 
 as meias. Deixa-o entrar. Assente-se ao pe do lume. 
 M6stre-w<? o melhor que tiver. Acorde-nos cedo. Diga- 
 Uies que me tragao o meu bahu. Eaca-w<? obsequio de 
 dizer. 
 
 Give Mm a tulip. Don't leave me. Don't tell mc 
 tbat. Speak to me of my friend. Bring me a glass of 
 water. Tell Mm to bring me my coat. Follow one. Pay 
 we the money. Do one this kindness. Bring us some 
 wine. Embrace him. Give Am some drink. Don't 
 move from this house. Explain to one this history. Give 
 Mon these new books. Let tliem come in. Sit down 
 here. Show /?m the best cloth you have. Do us the 
 favour to show it to Mon. Do not strike tliem. Tell Mm 
 to bring one the new boots. Do one the favour to tell 
 Mon the way. 
 
 * In negative sentences the pronoun precedes. 
 
67 
 
 LESSON LXYIL 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS "WITH GERUNDS. 
 
 Proniettendo-me nao cakir. 
 Em vos vendo. 
 Estou-me aprestando. 
 Queimando-me* o cerebro. 
 'Pedindo-nos o ndsso vdto. 
 Tendo-os ouvido. 
 
 Promising me not to fall. 
 In seeing you. 
 I am getting ready. 
 Burning my brain. 
 Asking our vote. 
 Having heard them. 
 
 Elle fazendo-os cahir era uma cilada, os destrocou. 
 Obrigaudo-se a entregar Toledo. Pdndo-Me a mao no 
 hombro. Chegando-se ao pe do leito. Yoltando-se para 
 mim. Parece-we que o estou vendo. Comparando-we 
 a outrem. Ealtando-Z&e as forcas, retirou-se para a sua 
 cidade. Comparando-as. Elevando-0 acima das nuvens. 
 O servo lancando-se-ZAe aos pes. Tendo-os deixado, reti- 
 rou-se elle. Chamando-os. Assegurando-ZAe que achara. 
 Deixando-o cheio. Offerecendo-se-lhe a vista. Pondo- 
 nos de joelhos diante della. Pendurando-0. 
 
 Listening to him. Placing my band on Ms shoulder. 
 Asking me that. Promising me not to go. In hearing 
 you. Jam dressing myself. Asking Mm for Ms vote. 
 Having seen them. Sis strength failing, he went home. 
 The man falling at my feet. Palling on my koees before 
 Mm. Hanging them. Cutting my hand. Raising him 
 above other men. Making me fall. Obliging them to 
 retire. Placing his hand on my head. Leaving them. 
 Having left one. Placing his foot on the ground. Com- 
 paring the one with the other. Seeing him. 
 
 * This form is often equal to a possessive pronoun. 
 
LESSON LXYIII. 
 
 PRCXN'OTJXS (dEIIOXSTRATITE EELATIYE). 
 
 Por o serem. I On account of then being so. 
 
 Sem o* serem. Without their being so. 
 
 As casas contrastuvao com as The houses contrasted with those 
 
 que — which — 
 
 As mais bellas sao as que — ; The handsomest are those which — 
 
 Sem a ouvir. i Without hearing it. 
 
 E realmente o nao e. j And really it is not so. 
 
 Os meios erao os da persuasao, nao os da forca. 
 3Sssas sao as minhas razoes, boas ou mas digo-as como as 
 sinto. O mimero daquelles e mui pequeno, o destes in- 
 finito. Quando a nossa razao discdrda da dos outros, 
 etc. Os males da primeira vida sao nada comparados 
 com os da segunda. Ha verdades que a nos o nao 
 parecem. A esperanca terrestre e fragil, como o* sao 
 todas as cousas da terra. Que hymnos podem entrar em 
 parallelo com os que David cantava ? A situacao nao e a 
 da duvida. Uma so ainbicao, a de agradar a l)eus. 
 
 This condition is worse than that of excited passions. 
 Its sphere is inferior to that of truth. Some books, as 
 those of the Egyptians, etc. The handsomest flowers are 
 tlwse which perish soonest. The number of servants 
 exceeds that of the masters. I know the end of the story 
 without hearing it. It is necessary to be just, and in 
 order to be so, it is indispensable, etc. Political questions 
 are those which, etc. I say them as I feel them. The 
 more I am contented with my heart, the less I am with 
 my pen. The situation is not one of difficulty. My opi- 
 nion is not that of the Court. 
 
 * Lite the French " sans Tetre." 
 
69 
 
 LESSON" LXIX. 
 
 PRONOUNS (CONJUNCTIVE AND PERSONAL, REELECTIYE 
 EOR POSSESSIYE). 
 
 Ahaixar-lhe a soberba. 
 
 'Va a casa delle.* 
 
 ITica-me o pe mais a vontiide. 
 
 Arranhou-we a orelha. 
 
 ~D6e-me a garganta. 
 
 Em The morrendo o pae. 
 
 To lower Ms pride. 
 
 Gro to Ms house. 
 
 My foot is easier. 
 
 You have scratched my ear. 
 
 My throat is sore. 
 
 As soon as Ms father is dead. 
 
 Arripiarao-se-me os cabellos. Gusto u-we a conhecer- 
 Jlie as feicoes. Eic6u-»ie bem estampado na memoria. 
 JNTotei que os besteiros me vigiavao os passos. Ergui 
 o punhal, e cravei-ZA'o diias vezes no peito. O suor corria- 
 me da fronte. Elle devia seguir os passos do homem, 
 vigia-lo, escutar-ZAe as palavras, e estudar-ZAe o menor 
 gesto. Os cabellos ericaraq-se-ZAe de horror. Viao-se-ZZje 
 na testa rugas, que, etc. Elle Ihe falla ao ouvido. Quer 
 que Ihe leve a sua mala ? Tenha a bondade de m'os 
 mandar a casa. Elle tocou-Z7*e na mao. 
 
 These sounds, instead of causing me pleasure, made 
 my hair stand erect. A smile played on his lips. To 
 lower his pride. My head aches. To diminish their im- 
 portance. My head begins to turn. He seated himself 
 at my side. It puzzled me to recognize his features. 
 He touched their eyes. To remedy an evil, one must 
 know its causes. He took the ring from his* own hand, 
 and put it on his* (another's). He put around his neck 
 a collar of gold. I closed his eyes. "Will you cut ony 
 hair ? The scene remained impressed on my memory. 
 She touched my hand. 
 
 * It is important to note the difference between "sua casa" and 
 casa delle." See p. 59, note. 
 
70 
 
 LESSON LXX. 
 
 SfiE — TO BE (indicative, always) . 
 
 Sou, es, e ; somos, s6is, sao. : Am, art, is ; are, are, are. 
 
 !Era, eras, era ; eramos, ereis, | Was, wast, was ; were, etc. 
 
 erao. 
 Pui, foste, foi; fomos, fostes, ! "Was, wast, was; were, etc. 
 
 forao. 
 Fora, foras, fora ; foramos, foreis, Had been, Ladst been, bad been. 
 
 forao. 
 Serei, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. '' I snail l>?, etc. 
 
 Sou siirdo. Sou monge. JEs inglez. Eu sou Jose. 
 JE tempo de dizer-lhe adeus. JE urn facto. JE certo 
 que .... JE uma histdria. Isto e impossivel. JE bem 
 triste. Que feliz que sou ! Nao e tarde. Os dias sao 
 curtos. Era o Mo excessivo^ JE este o caminho ? 
 E o mais curto caminho. JElle era medico. JEWe e 
 dos ndssos. Isto e natural. Que boras sao ? JE ver- 
 dade. Sou apaixonado delles. Sou eu em pessoa. Sou, 
 um delles. Urn so sera bastante. Eu serei pintor. 
 !N6s seremos sapateiros. Como foi isso ? Cesar foi um 
 grande general. O irmao delle e soldado. 
 
 I am an Englishman. She is Erench. He is blind and 
 deaf. It is improbable. The evenings are long. This 
 needle is too large. The flowers are beautiful. It is 
 I myself. It is nothing. This pen is bad. The bed is 
 good. These chairs are very beautiful. It is more than 
 probable. It is ten o'clock. "What is the price ? Is he 
 a German ? It was night. John and Henry were the 
 sons of Charles. It is late. It is time to go, It is 
 possible. I am fond of it. John will he a soldier. Is 
 it all the same ? Hannibal was a very great general. 
 
 * et Ser " expresses attributes or permanent qualities. "Sou 
 doente" is, " I am always ill, an invalid ;" but "JEstou doente" means 
 " I am at present unwell." 
 
71 
 
 LESSON LXXI. 
 SEE,— TO be (subjunctive). 
 
 Que eu seja, as, a ; amos, ais, ao. j That I be, or may be. 
 
 Se eu fosse, es, e ; emos, eis, em. | If I were, or might be. 
 
 Se eu for, es, for ; mos, des, em. | If I be, were. 
 ,F6ra, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. Would be ; were, had been. 
 
 Se eu for, etc. If I should be, or were. 
 
 Sena, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. I should be. 
 
 E possivel que assim seja ? A fim de que eu seja 
 rico. Se isso fosse comigo. E preciso que ella seja 
 prudente. Era preciso que fosse niais modesta. Se a 
 manteiga/or boa, traga quatro arrateis. Importa que os 
 trabalhos sejdo acabados. E possivel que nao seja feliz. 
 Sefor da sua vontade. Sentiria que fossem recusadas. 
 Era possivel que fossemos diligentes. Que as bdcas 
 sejao de bom cabedal. E necessario que V. S. seja apre- 
 sentado. A diseussao entre nos for a impossivel. Se eu 
 for em seu logar. Sentiria que V. S. fosse cansado. 
 Importa que a obra seja completa. Fosse o que fosse. 
 
 It is impossible it can be so. That I may be wise. 
 It is necessary that be should he good. You must he 
 diligent. Discussion would he improbable. If I were 
 prudent. I am sorry that the story is so short. He 
 will he our friend, li he were a rich merchant. It was 
 necessary he should he more diligent. I am sorry they 
 are refused. Let the gloves he good. If the cheese is 
 good, buy it. It is not possible for you to he quiet. 
 You. must he presented to the king. In order that he 
 may he Happy. Let the shoes he ol" the best leather. If 
 I -were in his place. 
 
LESSON LXXII. 
 
 SEE — TO BE . (tSTIKITITE, IMPERATIVE, PARTICIPLES). 
 
 Ser ; ser eu, seres tu.* 
 
 Ser elle, ser ella. 
 
 Sermos nds, serdes vds, serem 
 
 elles. 
 Sendo, sido ; em ser. 
 Se tu, seja elle; sejanios nds, 
 
 sede vds, sejao elles. 
 
 To be ; my being : thy being. 
 His being, her being, its being. 
 Our being, your being, their 
 
 being. 
 Being, been ; in being. 
 Be thou, let him be, let us be. 
 
 Ser feio. Nao ser bcmito. O que tem de ser nao sc 
 pode evitar. Tenho de ser julgado. Para sermos julga- 
 dos. Eu estive sendo o guarda. Pois bem, seja assim. 
 O seres tu formosa. As feias, nem por o serem. O re- 
 sultado foi o serem exterminados. Os sentimentos nao 
 podiao deixar de lhe serem presentes a memdria. Que 
 nao seja tao comprido. A ser assim. /Ser-lhe-hei reco- 
 nhecido. Sejanios virtuosos, e seremos felizes. Sendo 
 tao tarde. Em ser inais usado. Em ser o amigo d'elle. 
 Para sermos amigos. Que lhe parece sejvramos dar um 
 passeio. Sendo assim. 
 
 Not to he brave. "What has to he done, must not he 
 neglected. The man must he judged. In being punished. 
 Whatever it might he. Let us he good, and we shall he 
 happy. The youth heing better taught, will he more 
 competent. In order to their heing friends. To he 
 old. In heing more useful. The result was our heing 
 almost exterminated. Ear from heing. In spite of my 
 stature heing rather diminutive. It was no great merit 
 my heing good. In spite of my heing a child. If it is so. 
 This heing so. Our being English. Being early. Yery 
 good, let it he so. 
 
 * A peculiarity in Portuguese is the possession of a personal or 
 declined infinitive, equal to the English L participle with a possessive 
 pronoun. 
 
73 
 
 LESSON LXXIIL 
 
 SEE — TO BE (compound tenses). 
 
 Eu tenho sido, tu tens — , elle 
 
 tem — . 
 Eu tinha sfdo, tu tmhas — , elle 
 
 tfnha — . 
 Eu heide ser, tu hasde ser, elle 
 
 hade ser. 
 
 I liave been, thou hast ■ — , lie 
 
 has — . 
 I had been, thou hadsfc — , he 
 
 had—. 
 I shall be, thou shalt — , he 
 
 shall—. 
 
 Tenho sido nrni infeliz. Tu Ms de ser minha esposa. 
 Elles terao sido mais fortes. Terias sido sua victiina. 
 Eu nao tinha sido o primeiro. Eu. nao teria sido com- 
 merciante. O futuro ha de ser crente. Aquillo nunca 
 ha de ser. Teve grande felicidade em nao ser descoberto. 
 Se assiin tiver de ser. Se tiveres saudades de mim. Ser- 
 me-hia impossivel. Nao ter sido vencido. Osca ficou 
 sendo o centro da reforma intellectual. N'uma velha 
 estrebaria que tinha sido habitada por tima vaca. rapaz 
 teria sido o amigo d'elle. 
 
 He will be my husband. The boy lias teen very un- 
 happy. That will never he. He was fortunate in not 
 being punished. If such take place. He had a house 
 which had been inhabited by robbers. It will be impos- 
 sible for him. If I had been a Frenchman, I should have 
 paid the money. If I had been blind, I should have been 
 very unhappy. He would not have been a soldier, if he 
 had been the heir. The sun, being the centre of the 
 system. She has been very unhappy in not being 
 rewarded. It would have been impossible for me to pay 
 the money. He would have been the victim of the 
 robber. 
 
74 
 
 LESSON LXXIY. 
 ESTAE,— TO BE (at present, indicative). 
 
 Estou, as, a; amos, aes,* ao.t | Am, art, is; are, 
 Estava, avas, ava ; avanios, aveis, 
 
 avao. 
 Estive, iveste, eve ; ivemos, 
 
 ivestes, iverao. 
 Estivera, iveras, ivera; iveramos, 
 
 ivereis, iverao. 
 Estarei, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. 
 
 Was, wast, was ; were. 
 Was, wast, was ; were. 
 Had been, hadst been, etc. 
 I shall be, thou, etc. 
 
 Estou doente. Estou, contentissimo. Como estd V.S. ? 
 A porta estd aberta. O tempo estd bom. Estou can- 
 sado.J Estd dormindo. A agua estd quente. Estdva 
 viuvo. O almoco estd prompto. Todos estdo em casa. 
 Onde estd o livro ? Aqui estd a carta. Estdo ricos. 
 As toalhas estdo na gaveta. JNTisso estdva toda a diivida. 
 Oh ! que dura que estd ! Minha irma estd em Alle- 
 manha. Estdmos no inverno. A sala estdva cheia. 
 Estd o sol no zenith. O Senhor B. estd em casa ? Eu 
 nunca estive em Inglaterra. Estou de saiide. Estarei 
 aqui dentro n'um mez. 
 
 I am old. She is at table. He is not ill. The door 
 is not open. The water is cold. Where is the letter ? 
 The book is in the drawer here. I am pleased with him. 
 They were rich. Dinner is on the table. Here is the 
 boy. They are afflicted. All the ladies are in the hall. 
 My brother is in England. I was there last month. 
 She is much better. He is so-so. I am angry. The 
 weather is showery. He is delighted. My friend is in 
 Prance. I was at my brother's. He is ill. We are 
 in a very difficult case. He will be here within a week. 
 
 * Often ais. f Am is more usual. 
 
 % Estdr refers to accidents, or temporary states, qualities, posi- 
 tions, circumstances. Hence "Estou, cansado," but "So%i Inglez." 
 
75 
 
 LESSON LXXV. 
 ESTAH — TO be (subjunctive), 
 
 Esteja, as, a ; amos, aes, ao. . That I be, may be 
 
 fee estivesse, ses, se ; semos, seis, 
 
 sem. 
 Se estiver, es, er ; mos, des, em. 
 Se estivera, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. 
 
 If I should be, were. 
 
 If I (shall) be. 
 
 If I were, had been. 
 
 Estaria,* as, a ; amos, eis, ao. I I should be. 
 
 ]Nada tenho que nao esteja as drdens de Y. S. Muito 
 me alegro que esteja a seu gosto. Espero que esteja bem 
 disposto. Esteja quieto. Nao sabia que elle estivesse 
 doente. Se o coronel estivesse aqui, etc. Se estivermos 
 longe. Esteja a sua vontade. Se estivera no seu logar. 
 Hoje nao havera estrella, por pouco importante que seja, 
 que nao esteja comprehendida em alguma das constella- 
 tes. Eaca como se estivesse em sua casa. Esteja o 
 jantar prompto as seis horas. Se estiveres pelo que dfgo, 
 estd justo. Elle faria isso, se estivesse, etc. Estava^ 
 eu bem servido ? 
 
 If be were in my place, be would not pay the money. 
 If my friend had been here, I should bave been quite 
 bappy. Be quiet. Let dinner he ready at five o'clock. 
 I did not consent tbat she should be here. If he were 
 here, be would sing. I should be content, if I could see 
 my brother. He has nothing which is not at your ser- 
 vice. If I were in your place, I should not go to Lisbon. 
 Let the horse be ready at 4 o'clock. If he agrees to what 
 I say, the thing is settled. He would do this, if he 
 tvere at home. Be quiet, if you can. 
 
 * The imperfect is often used for the future conditional, i. e., was 
 for " would bej' e. g., "Desejdva muito vel-o," instead of "Desejarz'a ;" 
 like the French, " Sifallais," or the English, " If I went, I should 
 get wet." 
 
70 
 
 LESSON LXXYI. 
 ESTAK TO BE (infinitive, imperative, and 
 
 PAKTICIPLES). 
 
 Estar ; estar en, estares tu.* 
 
 Estar elle, estar ella. 
 
 Estarmos nds, estardes yos, esta- 
 
 rem elles. 
 Estando, estado, tenho estado. 
 Esta tu, estae vos. 
 
 To be ; my being, thy being. 
 
 His being, ber being. 
 
 Our being, your being, their 
 
 being. 
 Being, been, haying been. 
 Be, be you. 
 
 O estares padre, a mini m'o deves. Estar para mor- 
 rer. Nao podem os homens estar alegres sem contender ? 
 O estar em elles aqui nao me impdrta. Deixe estar. Es- 
 tejak sua vontade. Apesar de estar sentado ao seulado. 
 Em urn hdmem estando contente, tudo vae bem. Ha 
 ~V. S. de estar em casa ? Para estarmos satisfeitos falta 
 pouco. Estar eu aqui nao vos incommode. Estde certos 
 do que vos digo. O desejo de estar na sua companhia. 
 Ella tern estado a chorar. Estando 611a melhdr, tudo se 
 faz. Estdrem elles tristes, a si o devem. 
 
 My being sure of his aid. In order that we may be 
 satisfied. Their being warm does not depend on me. To 
 be about to fall. In spite of being satisfied. "Without 
 being clear. Their being unhappy is owing to their 
 laziuess. Eor our being happy, little is needed. Your 
 being a soldier you owe to him. Can the boy not be 
 quiet ? Let it be. The desire of being with me. The 
 sky begins to be clear. My being here is not agreeable. 
 In spite of being in my house. Their being unwell is not 
 my fault. In order to our being certain. 
 
 * This declined or personal infinitive is peculiar to the Portuguese 
 It is often used, as in Greek and German, with the 
 article prefixed. It seems best rendered by the present participle, 
 and a possessive pronoun. 
 
77 
 
 LESSON LXXVII. 
 ESTAE, — to be (compound tenses). 
 Tenho estado, tens — ■, tern. — . 
 Tmha estado, trnhas — , tniha — 
 Hei de estar, has de — } ha de — 
 Terei estado, teras — , tera — . 
 
 Teria estado, e(c., etc. 
 Se eu tiver estado. 
 Se eu tivesse estado. 
 
 I have been, thou hast — , he 
 
 has — . 
 I had been, thou hadst — , he 
 
 had — . 
 I shall be, thou shalt — , he 
 
 shall — . 
 I shall have been, thou shalt — - 3 
 
 he shall (or will) — . 
 I should have been. 
 If I had been. 
 If I should have been. 
 
 s Tenho estado muito doente. Eu tinlia estado em casa. 
 Eli teria estado, em casa, com aviso teu. Hei de estar 
 militar ainanha. Terei estado la. Elle ha de estar bom. 
 Elle nao soube que eu thiha estado la. Ter estado. 
 Se eu tivesse Id estado, nada acconteceria. Quando eu 
 tinlia estado a mesa, etc. Depois de ter estado tao alegre ! 
 Se eu tiver estado la, niinca mais o chegue a ver. Nao e 
 o cuco que estou ouvindo ? Tera estado uo templo. Ellas 
 teem estado no escriptorio. Depois de elles terem estado 
 tao tristes. Ha de estar em casa antes de elles chegarem. 
 
 He has leen very ill. "We have leen quite well. 
 Having been in bed. They had leen in the street. He 
 will he a sailor next week. If he had leen on horseback, 
 be would have gone quickly. If I had leen rich. If the 
 weather had leen bad, I should have staid at home. If 
 the lady had leen well, she would have gone to the 
 country. To have leen at home. He has leen. We 
 have leen here. I should ham leen in church. He has 
 leen well. After having leen very ill. We had leen 
 there. The men had leen with you. To have leen at 
 home. 
 
78 
 LESSON LXXYIII. 
 
 TEE — TO HATE (INDICATIVE). 
 
 Tenlio, tens, tem; temos, tendes, j Have, hast, lias ; have. 
 
 teem.* 
 Tfhha, tmhas, tfhha ; tinhanios, . Had, hadst, had ; had. 
 
 tinheis, tinhao. 
 Tfve, tiveste, teve ; tivcmos, ; Had, hadst, had ; had. 
 
 tivestes, tiverao. 
 Tivera, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. | Had had. 
 
 Terei, as, a; emos, eis, ao. ' Shall have. 
 
 Tenlw uvas. Ellafeirafigos. Elle fe//£laranjas. Temos 
 vinho. Tendes cerejas. Elles teem nozes. Nao tenlio 
 meias. Nao tenlio chapeu. Nao temos sapatos. Ellas 
 nao teem rendas. Eu tinha lima folha de papel. EUe 
 tinha urn chapeu de pallia. Tern ella lima faca ? Tem 
 vinho Ft Temos nos pennas ? Tinha el\e am prato ? 
 Elles nao tinhao luvas. Nao tenlio eu um cao ? Nao 
 teremos nos chiivas ? Que ida.de tem V. S. ? Tenlw vinte 
 annos. Nao the tempo para ir. Tenho esperancas de 
 ser o primeiro. Ja o tenlio. Nao term eu a desgraca ? 
 
 "We have a fine morning. We have time enough. 
 Have you change ? Every thing has an air of life. I 
 shall have the honour. "What disease have you ? Shall 
 we have time ? "We had no winter this year. We shall 
 have rain. I have a great weakness. I had a sore throat. 
 He had had a headache. Has he ? Will you have the 
 goodness ? I should have much pleasure. We shall not 
 have a fine day. I shall be very angry. Would you 
 have the goodness to ? How old are you ? I am thirty. 
 I had not time. They have a sheet of paper. 
 
 * It is better to use teem or tem than tem for the plural. 
 
 f "Have you wine?" — the third person singular being often 
 employed without Y. M. or V. S. The Portuguese speak to each 
 other generally in the third person, as if, " Has he wine? 1 ' and yet, 
 strange to say, when they represent a dialogue, in a novel, they do 
 not give it in the language as spoken, but transform all the third 
 ■person singular into the second person plural, vos I 
 
LESSON LXXIX. 
 TEE — TO hate (stjbjukctiye). 
 
 Que eu tenha, as, a ; amos, aes, 
 
 ao. 
 Que eu tivesse, esses, esse ; esse- 
 
 mos, esseis, essem. 
 Se eu tiver, eres, er; ermos, erdes, 
 
 erem. 
 Se eu tivesse, etc., etc. 
 Teria, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. 
 
 That I may have, thou, etc. 
 
 That I might have ; if I had 
 
 etc., etc., etc. 
 If I (shall) have, etc. 
 
 If I (should) have ; if I had. 
 I should have, etc. 
 
 Que eu tenha cha. Que elle tenha nata. Que tenhd- 
 mos queijo. Tenlia a bondade de dar-me um bocadinho. 
 Que eu tivesse mostarda. Se eu tivesse cinco patacas. 
 Eeceio que tenhdmos um verao quente. A fim que elle 
 tenha bons exemplos. Nao creio que elle tenha fome. 
 Quero que meu filho tenha amelhor instruccao. Quando 
 eu tiver sede. Virei amanha, se tiver tempo. Sentiria 
 que os meus amigos tivessem frio. Temo que elle nao 
 tenha dinheiro. Ainda que nao tivessemos os livros, etc. 
 Qualquer for tuna que eu tivesse, etc. 
 
 That we may have coffee. That they may liave good 
 wine. Save the goodness to show him the book. If I 
 had money. If your brother had five pounds. I fear 
 we may have bad news. We do not believe that they are 
 hungry. In order that he may have new books. When 
 I am hungry, I shall have bread. If I have time, I shall 
 have that pleasure. They fear they may not have money. 
 I should be sorry if the poor boys ivere hungry. What- 
 ever fortune we might have. I fear I shall not have ten 
 dollars. I shall write to-day, if I have time. He wishes 
 his son to have the best masters. 
 
 * If I had, -where future (i. e., if I sliould have), is, tf {3e eu tiv- 
 esse;" whevepast (i. e., if I had had), " £e eu feW 
 
80 
 
 LESSON LXXX. 
 
 TEE — TO HATE (iNEIKITIYE, IMPERATIVE, PAR- 
 TICIPLES, ETC.). 
 
 Ter ; ter eu, teres tu. 
 
 Tor elle, ter ella. 
 
 Termos nds, tercles yds, terein 
 
 elles. 
 Tendo, tido, tendo tfdo. j Having, had, having had 
 
 Tern tu, tende vds. , Have thou ; have ve. 
 
 To have ; my having, thy having. 
 His having, her having. 
 Our having, your having, their 
 having 
 
 
 Tenho receio de ter necessidade de seu auxilio. Ter 
 algum medo. Ter fome. Ter sede. Nao ha de que ter 
 medo. E melhor ter muito que pouco. Parece-rne te-\o 
 alcancado. terem elles concebido esse projeeto. Nao 
 tenha susto. Este rio tern tres leguas de largo. Tenhd- 
 onos paciencia. Tenlia por certo o que lhe digo. Onde 
 vae ter esta estrada ? Sem £er-mos urn monumento. 
 Depois de ter acabado. Tendo de xnencionar os Erancezes. 
 Os que casao com Diulheres maiores no ser, no saber e no 
 ter, estao em grandissimo perigo. 
 
 "We begin to Jiave some hope. To he hungry and 
 thirsty. It is better to have hope than fear. My having 
 conceived this scheme was lucky. Without our having 
 money. The man begins to be hungry. After my having 
 the horse in the stable. This road leads to the palace. 
 There is nothing to be afraid of in the garden. Don't be 
 afraid. Sis having patience is important. The boy 
 begins to be thirsty. This house is fifty feet high. In 
 spite of their containing the money. Your having finished 
 this monument is a proof of your talent. That I may 
 have a new book. 
 
81 
 
 LESSON LXXXI. 
 
 T£lB TO HATE (COMPOUND TENSES). 
 
 Eu tenho tido, tu tens tido, elle 
 
 tern tido, etc. 
 Eu tmha tido, tu tmhas tido, etc. 
 Eu heide ter, tu hasde ter, elle 
 
 hade ter. 
 Eu terei tido, tu teras tido, etc. 
 Que eu tenha tido, etc. 
 
 I have had, thou hast had, he 
 
 has had, etc. 
 I had had, thou hadst had, etc. 
 I must (or shall) have, thou shalt 
 
 have, he shall have. 
 I shall have had, thou shalt — 
 That I had had, etc. 
 
 Tenho tido febre. Tu tens tido sede. Eu tinha tido 
 laranjas. Heide ter vinho. Tu teras tido um chapeu de 
 palha. Nao temos tido sapatos. Heide ter o gosto de o 
 ver amanha. Heide ter a satisfacao. Elle esta todo mi, 
 e Mde ter miiito frio. Heide ter noticias de men pai. 
 Nao terei a ousadia. . . Hade ter tiido as 8 horas. Heide 
 ter fdme. Tern tido medo. Esta rua vai ter a praca. 
 Come90 a ter vontade de comer. Se eu tiver tido di- 
 nheiro. Tenho tido miiito dinheiro. rapaz hade ter 
 uma fortiina immensa. Elles teem tido a molestia. Terei 
 tido o gosto de ver o rei. 
 
 I have had money. He has had hope. "We had had 
 friends. The boy must he thirsty. I shall be cold. 
 I shall have had the satisfaction. Having had the plea- 
 sure. If I had had a sword. Having had fever. They 
 had had news of my brothers. He has had the boldness 
 to — We shall have the satisfaction of — The children 
 must oe hungry. This street leads to the cathedral. We 
 begin to he hungry. You shall have the boots at 4 
 o'clock. We shall have hope. Having had. They have 
 had the pleasure of seeing the queen. He must have 
 news of his brother. They had had plenty of money. 
 
82 
 
 LESSON LXXXII. 
 
 HAVER* — TO HATE, TKEEE TO BE, MUST. 
 
 Hei, has, ha ; havemos,f haveis, 
 
 hao. 
 Havia, J havias, havia, haviamos, 
 
 havfeis, haviao. 
 Houve, houveste, houve ; houve- 
 
 mos, houvestes, houverao. 
 Haverei, as, a: emos, eis, ao. 
 
 Have, liast, has ; have. 
 Had, hadst, had ; had. 
 Had, hadst, had ; had. 
 Shall have. 
 
 Ha gente que. Ha dous annos. Hei de confessar. 
 Tu has de ir. Elle ha de ter muito frio. Que ha de ser 
 de mim ? Nao ha cousa mais provavel. Havia muita 
 gente. Ha nmito ouro no Brazil. JNao ha pennas. Ha 
 outras linguas. Houve vinte mortos. Havia lima mu- 
 lher. Ha orvalho. Ha de fazer-se. Que se ha de fazer ? 
 Quantas leguas ha d'aqui a Camacha ? Ha lima legua e 
 meia. Nao ha mais d'unia milha. Mostrar-lhes-7*e«20s. 
 Ha de ser um pouco tarde. Haverd muitos insectos este 
 anno. Nao ha perigo. Espero que haverd muita fructa. 
 
 TJiere are men that never pay. Eive years ago I was 
 in this house. You must confess that you have done 
 wrong. I have to read. We shall he very cold. What 
 will become of us? There is nothing more certain. There 
 were many people in the fields. How many leagues is it 
 to Lisbon. Is titer e danger on the road ? It is not 
 more than a league. There will be much fruit this year. 
 "We shall show (to) them the road to Lumiar. I hope 
 there will be many peaches. There teas a long interval 
 of profound silence. There was a feast. It is ten years 
 since I had that horse. Are there many soldiers ? 
 
 * Haver is principal and auxiliary ; but is now less used than 
 ter. Its chief use as an auxiliary is to form the compound tenses 
 of verbs expressing future actions or states, as "Wei de escrever ;" 
 also used by itself, "Se liowoer tempo." Impersonally, its use is 
 very general; Ha, "there is," with both singular and plural nouns, 
 e. g., " Ha vinho" and " Ha miiitas pessoasP 
 
 t Or hemos. 
 
 % Hia, or ia in compounds ; " Ser-me^a," but better " Ser-me-hia.' ' 
 
83 
 
 LESSON LXXXIIL 
 HAVEK — TO HA ye (subjunctive). 
 
 That I may have ; that there be. 
 
 Que eu haja, hajas, haja, hajamos, 
 
 hajai3, hajao. 
 Que eu houvesse, houvesses, 
 
 houvesse; houvessemos, hou- 
 
 vesseis, houvessem. 
 Se eu houver, houveres, houver ; 
 
 houvermos, houverdes, hou- 
 
 verem. 
 Se eu houvesse, etc. 
 Haveria, as, a ; amos, eis, ao. 
 
 That I might be ; that there 
 were. 
 
 If I have : if there were or be. 
 
 If I had ; should have. 
 I should have. 
 
 Tenho medo que haja grande poeira. E necessario 
 que haja premios para que haja soldados. Hajdmo-nos 
 por outra maneira. Nao e para admirar que eu nao haja 
 chegado a tempo ? Pode ser que haja. Haja saiide ! 
 Se eu houver de ir. Se houveres de ver. Queres que 
 hajamos saiide. Se houvesse de escutar, elle saberia. Se 
 elle houver de pagar. Ainda que isso me houvesse de 
 custar a vida. Se houvesse occasiao, eu lhe escreveria. 
 Se houver occasiao, eu lhe escreverei. Logo que haja 
 occasiao, escreva-me. Termos medo que haja um tem- 
 poral. Se elle houver de sahir esta noite. 
 
 I fear there may oe a shower. It is necessary to 
 rewards that we may have good scholars. It may be 
 there are. See if there is beer. If they woidd listen, 
 they would know. Good-bye. As soon as there is an 
 opportunity, write me a long letter. If there he (or is) 
 an opportunity, I will send you the money. "We must 
 manage another way. If he has to pay the money. Even 
 though this battle should cost me my life. If these boys 
 do anything of the kind, they must suffer punishment. 
 If a chance should occur, I should of course write. If 
 you have to go, you must go at once. 
 
84 
 
 LESSON LXXXIY. 
 
 HAYEK — TO HATE (infinitive, imperative, 
 participles). 
 
 Haver ; haver eu ; haveres tu. 
 Haver elle, haver ella. 
 Havermos nos, haverdes vds, 
 
 haverem elles. 
 Havendo, havido. 
 Ha, havei. 
 Haver, ter havido. 
 
 your having, their 
 
 To have ; my having, thy having. 
 His having, her having. 
 Our having 
 
 having. 
 Having, had. 
 Have, have ye. 
 To have, to have had. 
 
 Para haver de fallar. Haver mister. Saver eu dito 
 isso, nao me pesa. Haver elle ido nao pode ter causado 
 isso. Para haver de ser teu amigo, e preciso saber isso. 
 O havermos feito isso nao importa. Havei compaixao de 
 mim. Estao havendo muitas chuvas. Elle sabe como se 
 ha de haver. Ha de haver mister dinheiro. Nos ha- 
 vermos mister dinheiro. ISTio pode haver tal. Haver 
 pao importa-nos. Eu hei de haver dinheiro de fulano. 
 Ha-se de fazer o que elle quizer. Haver por bem. Para 
 haver de ouvir. Haver por mal. Havendo* chuva, nao 
 You. 
 
 My having done that does not affect me. In order 
 to bug. He knows how to behave himself. In order to 
 speak. To have good wine is important for us. His 
 having said that does not grieve him. I am to receive 
 twenty dollars from Mr. Stuart. A good deal of rain is 
 falling. The queen has thought Jit. He is determined 
 to take it amiss. The troops have need of money. To 
 nave said so much to the poor boy was very bad. The 
 tailor has to get fifty dollars. His having spoken was 
 unfortunate. Your having money gives me pleasure. 
 
 * Havendo has a future meaning, e.g., " havendo mdo tempo" 
 means, " there being had weather," that is, " if there is bad weather." 
 
85 
 
 LESSON LXXXY. 
 HAVEB TO HATE (compound tenses). 
 
 Tenho havido,* tens — , tern — . 
 Tinha — , tmhas — , tinha — . 
 Hei de haver, has de haver, etc. 
 Terei havido,* teras — ,tera — , etc. 
 Teria havido, terias — , etc. 
 Que eu* tenha havido. 
 Se eu tiver havido. 
 Se eu tivesse havido. 
 
 I have had, thou hast had, etc. 
 
 I had had, thou, etc. 
 
 I shall have ; it will be. 
 
 I shall have had. 
 
 I should have had. 
 
 That I may have had. 
 
 If I have had. 
 
 If I had had. 
 
 Tern havido muitos naufragios. Tinha havido grande 
 secca. Tinhamos havido estas noticias. !N"ao ha de haver 
 nada. Sei de haver livros de fulano. JNao sei se tera 
 havido muita neve este anno. Erros, A^e-los-haf neste 
 volume, mas nao os conhe9o. Erros, ^«ve-los-hiaf me- 
 ndres, se os homens aprendessem. Tendo havido muita 
 secca por falta de cMva. Se tivessem havido flores, 
 teria havido friictos. JSTao sei se tera havido muito vinho 
 este anno. Sabe, se tera de haver festa ? Cea have- 
 la-haf boa. Pennas have-las-haf nesta gaveta, mas nao 
 as vejo. 
 
 There have been many fires in Constantinople. I know 
 not if there has been much disease amongst the vines this 
 year. Errors there must be in the life of every man, but 
 he must reform. If there had been a good education, 
 we should have had good results. There having been no 
 rain, the ground was perfectly dry. There would be less 
 crime, if there were less ignorance. My brother had had 
 this news before the newspapers came. There had been 
 showers all day. There have been many shipwrecks this 
 year. If there had been industry, there would have been 
 money. 
 
 * Not much used in first person. 
 
 f Though these forms are of frequent occurrence, the best writers 
 write thus : JIavel-os-ha, havel-os-hia. 
 
LESSON LXXXYI. 
 I. CONJUGATION.— VERBS IN AS (INDICATIVE). 
 
 AMAB — TO LOTE. 
 
 I lore, thou lovest, loves ; love. 
 I loved, or was loving. 
 
 Amo, amas, ama ; amamos, amais, 
 
 araao. 
 Amava,* amaVas, amava ; aina- 
 
 vamos, amaveis, ainavao. 
 Amei,f arnaste, amou ; amamos, 
 
 amastes, amarao. 
 Amara, ainaras, arnara, amar- j I had loved, etc., etc 
 
 amos, amaveis, amarao. 
 Amarei, amaras, amara, amar- I shall love. 
 
 I loved, or did love. 
 
 emos, amareis, amarao. 
 
 Amamos. Jdgas. lldnddo. Lavdvas. Gastdvcio 
 Contei. Amdste. Fallon. Declararei. Abracard. Com- 
 prdrdo. Yoltei. Fagarei. Louvariamos. Fiquei (from 
 Jicdr). Ensinarei. Gritdvao. Level. Govemas. Ele- 
 vei. Feguldu. Frofessdra. Toquei. Ensinou. Fan- 
 cdvamos. Limpo os quadros. Solicitdmos um emprego. 
 Atei o animal. Fespejou o copo. Achdmos o homem. 
 Selldstes o cavallo. Eu estuddva a licao. Fechou as 
 janellas. Quebrdra a porta. Encontrei urn amigo. Ella 
 nomeou o matador do rei. Kao Jevantards falso teste- 
 miinho. 
 
 I play. Thou commanclest. He washes. I icas not 
 washing. The governor sjioke. I remained at home. I 
 was declaring. I shall teach. They will hug a horse. 
 They had returned. I should declare. I solicited an 
 office. The boy was cleaning the pictures. The girls 
 broke the windows. We met two friends. We bought 
 two gold rings. He tied the horse. I teas preparing. 
 I danced at the ball. The murderer will break the door. 
 Thou shalt love thy neighbour. They played. My brother 
 bought a fine horse. The port-captain visited the frigate. 
 
 * Amava, indicates a continued past action during a time, 
 t Amei shows an instantaneous action at a time. 
 
87 
 
 LESSON LXXXVIL 
 
 VERBS TN AR (SUBJUNCTIVE, INFINITIVE, IMPERATIVE, 
 AND PATICTPLES). 
 
 That I may lore, etc. 
 That I might love, etc. 
 
 Que eu ame, ames, ame; ameinos, 
 
 ameis, amem. 
 Que eu amasse, amasses, amasse ; 
 
 amassemos, amasseis, amassem 
 Se eu amar, amares, amar ; amar- 
 
 mos, amardes, amarem. 
 Eu amar, tu amares, elle amar, 
 
 nds amarmos, vds amacdes, 
 
 elles amarem. 
 Ama, amei. 
 Amando, amado. 
 Tendo amado. 
 Amar, ter amado. 
 
 If I love, etc. 
 
 My loving, thy loving, his loving, 
 om* loving, your loving, their 
 loving. 
 
 Love, love ye. 
 
 Loving, loved. 
 
 Having loved. 
 
 To love, to have loved. 
 
 Que elle grite para eu parar. Quando eu cJiamdr. 
 Muito folgo que me trdte com liberdade. Diga-lhe que 
 entre. JPdsse miiito bem. JEntremos nesta loja. Nao 
 chores, men filho. Que nao se engdne. A menos que eu 
 amasse este homem. Ficdr-Vae-liei miiito obrigado. 
 Coniinuemos nosso passeio. Mandou que se comecdsse o 
 ataque. Se tu obrdres bem. JSfao fdlle nisso. Amei os 
 parentes. Agua quente para lavdrmos a boca. Manddi-o 
 chamdr para me tomdr medida. Pdde tomd-\a>. O amdr 
 eu a poesia. Amdndo-me. Tel-o amado. 
 
 They call him to stop. Wneu we call always come. 
 I am very glad that you treat me with sincerity. Tell 
 them to come in. He takes whatever pleases him. Let 
 them go into this church. "When he iveeps comfort him. 
 Don't cry, my children. Our loving history is praise- 
 worthy. Some ivorh to gain a living. Water to wash 
 my hands. He hoped to find them at home. Lest I 
 should call the old man. Finding the men working . To 
 take my measure. He ordered them not to ivorh. 
 Loving him. Take this glass of wine. 
 
88 
 
 LESSON LXXXVIII. 
 
 VEBBS IN AK (COMPOUND ACTIYE TENSES). 
 
 Hei* (or) tenho amado. 
 Havia (or) t'mlia amado. 
 Houve (or) five amado. 
 Haverei (or) terei amado. 
 Haveria (or) teria amado. 
 Hdja (or) tenha amado. 
 Houvesse (or) tivesse amado. 
 
 I have loved. 
 
 I had loved. 
 
 I had loved. 
 
 I shall have loved. 
 
 I should have loved. 
 
 That I have loved. 
 
 That I had loved. 
 
 Ainda que hei visitddo nrnitas vezes a sua quinta, 
 niinca o encontrei. Haviamos encontrddo um amigo. 
 Qaando tinlia nomeddo o hdmein, todos se espantaram. 
 Oxala que eu tivesse comegddo mais cedo. Se tivesse 
 contddo com a satisfacao deter V. S. ajantar, teria man- 
 dddo fazer macarrao. Terei reparddo esta desgraca em 
 tres ou quatro dias. Elles terao rasgddo a carta, antes 
 de chegar a policia. No caso que V. S. tenha conservddo 
 essa can9ao, rogo-lhe que m'a preste. Duvido que o 
 rei tenha cliegddo. Depdis de haver chamddo orapaz deu- 
 ]he um recado. 
 
 He has visited my quinta to day. I had met my 
 sister. When he had repaired^ the loss. They had torn 
 the letters. The traitor would have declared all. In case 
 you have not torn the letters, I beg you will show them 
 to me. We should have given him the book. Would 
 that I hadjinished the work ! If I had calculated on the 
 pleasure of having you to breakfast, I should have had 
 something good. They would have travelled all night, if 
 necessary. He doubts the queen's having arrived. After 
 having spoken. He will have torn the book, before the 
 police-officer arrives. 
 
 * See note, page 82. f Translate by present subjunctive. 
 
89 
 
 LESSON LXXXIX. 
 
 VERBS IN AE (PASSIVE, PECXHtESSIVE, AND 
 EUTUEE EOEMS). 
 
 Est6u amando, estou a amar. 
 
 Estava amando, estava a amar. 
 
 Estou encantado. 
 
 Eiquei admirado. 
 
 Sou, era, tenho sido amado. 
 
 Ainda que eu fosse amado. 
 
 I am loving. 
 
 I was loving. 
 
 I am enchanted. 
 
 I was astonished. 
 
 I am, was, have heen loved. 
 
 Though I were loved. 
 
 Sempre estd cantdndo. O rio estd gelddo. Elle estd 
 zombdndo. A porta estdfeclidda. Ainda que eu seja ama- 
 do. Toda a cidade estd illumindda. O verde agradar- 
 me-hia mais. Urn pobre homem tinha sido accusddo 
 desse crime. Ellas fordo acompanhddas por Jorge. 
 JE estimddo de todos. ^ A perna estd quebrdda. Ella e 
 amdda de seii pae. Antes que tudo esteja arranjddo. 
 Estou enganddo. Cansei-nie de viajdr. Canso-nie de 
 ensindr. Estava admirado da sua simplicidade. Mquei 
 encantado de siias maneiras. 
 
 I am calling. He is finishing . The boys are 
 The queen is accompanied by the duke. The Thames 
 frozen. I am astonished. Though he tvas admonished. 
 He has been deceived. All the houses will be illuminated. 
 The governor is esteemed by all good men. The boy is 
 beloved by his father. Black would please me more. The 
 horse's leg was broken. To a were joking. Henry was 
 tired of speaking. Your friend ivas astonished, when he 
 entered the house. All the houses were brilliantly illu- 
 minated. He is tired of teaching. 
 
90 
 
 LESSOR XC. 
 
 VEEBS IN AE (eEFLECTIYES AND EECIPEOCALS), 
 
 Acho-me ; torna-ae. 
 Aproveitdr-me de — 
 Aquecendo-me ao sol. 
 Pdsso engandr-me. 
 Eu me teuho Usongeddo. 
 Elles se dmdo uns aos outros. 
 
 I find myself ; it grows. 
 To avail myself of. 
 Warming my self in the sun. 
 I may be mistaken. 
 I have flattered myself. 
 They love one another. 
 
 Eu me lisongeio. Elle aproxima-se a nos. Joao re- 
 tirou-se. Elle se Iduva a si mesmo. Elle ausenta-se da 
 minha casa. Levdnto-me sempre as seis horas. Se nao 
 me levdnto logo, torno a adormecer. Miiito me alegro. 
 E miiita amabilidade terse lembrddo de nos. Peco-lhe 
 que se assente. Nao posso demordr-me. Come9ava a 
 impacientdr-me. Elle se Umbra. Sao horas de levantdr- 
 me. Assente-se aqui. Terei o gosto de aproveitdr-me 
 de seu amavel convite. Levantdr-se cedo e a mais sau- 
 davel \ cousa. Elle apea-se do cavallo. Avisei-o para 
 que se caldsse. 
 
 "We may he mistaken. Henry retires. Warming 
 himself. Iflnd myself quite well. I do not remember 
 this. They absent themselves from my house. We flat- 
 ter ourselves. The girls drew near to (de) us. We get 
 up at 7 o'clock. The boy praised himself. If I do not 
 flatter myself. We cannot stay. It is time for us to 
 get up. He will have the pleasure of availing himself 
 of your offer. The soldiers alighted from their horses. 
 They have flattered themselves. I remember it well. Ho 
 you remember her ? Sit here. 
 
91 
 
 LESSON XCI. 
 
 VERBS IN AR (ACTIVES AND NEUTERS, REELECTIVES 
 IN PORTUGUESE AS PASSIVES IN ENGLISH). 
 
 Hoses are found. 
 
 It will be continued. 
 
 Less to be feared. 
 
 "We must part. 
 
 This is not to be wondered at. 
 
 You ought to be ashamed. 
 
 This is called — 
 
 Achao-ae rdsas. 
 Continudr-se-ha. 
 Menos de receidr. 
 E mister separdr-nos. 
 Isto nao e de admirdr. 
 V.M. devia 
 Isto chdma-se — 
 
 E se achard. Gastou-se toda a vela. O senhor en- 
 gdnar-se. Admira-me isto. Duvida-se muito desta no- 
 ticia. melhdr inglez fdlla-se em Londres. O tempo 
 serena. Abaixou-se a ponte levadica. que se da aos 
 mendigos. Esta distinccao funda-se na authoridade de 
 Cicero. Gonfirma-se a noticia. sol se mostra. Acabdr- 
 se-ha o culto divino, e pregdr-se-hdo heresias. Teni-se 
 derrotddo os inimigos. Nao sei se me atreva a perguntar- 
 lhe. Como se chdma isto ? Ghdma-se... Continudr-se- 
 ha amanha. Este cavallo e menos de receiar. 
 
 Gold is found in Brasil. This history will be conti- 
 nued. These men ought to be ashamed. The best Por- 
 tuguese is spoken in Coimbra. They ivill be found. This 
 news was confirmed. The first is modified by the second. 
 The moon appears. This distinction is founded on truth. 
 The thieves have been put to flight. What do you call 
 this in Portuguese ? . The sun will shoiv himself. The 
 glorious traditions of the nation were sought out. The 
 boys ought to be ashamed. Less to be praised. Hoses are 
 found in these mountains. The moou appears. 
 
92 
 
 LESSON XCII. 
 
 YEEBS IN" AE (iMPEESONALS).* 
 
 Fdlla-se. 
 
 Troveja, neva, gela. 
 Contuse, restu. 
 Notese, todavia. 
 Louvuse-Yke o valor. 
 
 It is said, they say, people say. 
 It thunders, snows, freezes. 
 It is related, it remains. 
 Be it observed, however. 
 They praised his courage. 
 
 Hontem anoite chovia. Comecava a trovcjdr, quando 
 me deitei. A quern estd causado, a cania parece boa. 
 Nao impurta. Bdsta. O fogo apdga-se. Kao nevuu du- 
 rante a tua ausencia ? JNao trovejard. Eesagrdda-me. 
 Ale'gra-me isto. Bastard que me lembre o seu nome. 
 Estd ameacando chiiva. E-me precise Eesta-me contar. 
 Eelampeja. Estd trovejdndo. A admiracao comecou a 
 tomdr-se mais moderada. joven tomou a caldr-se. 
 Ao cliecjdrmos ao fim de nossa viagem. Melhor e nao 
 falldr mos mais neste assiimpto. Conta-se, que o rei, etc. 
 
 They say that it thunders. It was beginning to snow 
 when I went to bed. It is thundering. "When one is 
 tired, a chair is agreeable. This will he enough. It was 
 raining all night. I must. On their arriving at the end 
 of their voyage. The heat "began to grow more moderate. 
 The old man again became silent. It is better for us not 
 to say more. It is said that the duke, etc. I was glad 
 of it. It lightens said thunders. I was displeased. They 
 praise her beauty. It is said there will be war. It did 
 not snow. The girl was again silent. 
 
 * Impersonal verbs are far more used in Portuguese than in 
 English. 
 
93 
 
 LESSON XCIIL 
 
 VEEBS IN AR (IDIOMATIC FOBMS), 
 
 Jfistdva a chamar. 
 Acdbo de tomar. 
 JEstdndo escrevendo fsto. 
 Tenho que estuclar. 
 E de desejar. 
 Acabdda a cea. 
 
 I was calling. 
 I h&vejust taken. 
 While writing this. 
 I have to study. 
 It is to be wished. 
 Supper being ended. 
 
 Esquecidos de todos os riscos, iao navegdndo. tempo 
 vdi aclardndo. E preciso separdr-nos. peixe acdba de 
 chegdr. JEstou a estudar. JNTada tern que receiar disso. 
 Acdba-se-me a paciencia. JSTao pre'sta pdra nada. Acdbo 
 de chegar de Lisboa. Tirdda a causa, cessa o effeito. 
 Estdndo disputdndo sobre a morte. Eu o vejo dangdr. 
 Acdbo de jantdr. Estou a trabalhar. Elle vde procurdr 
 a Y. S. Tenho de me embarcar. Tenho muito que es- 
 perar. Vejo urn homem cortdndo panno. Acabddo de 
 publicar-se. Acabddas as disposicoes necessarias, etc. 
 
 "We have just taken tea. Forgetful of his friends, he 
 went travelling. I have to finish my letter. It is to be 
 hoped that the wound will be nothing. I saw him leap- 
 ing. The mail has just arrived. This fish is good for 
 nothing. The duke has just dined. The colonel is at 
 dinner. The man is joking. He is going to call on you 
 to-morrow. I see a boy studying his lesson. We have to 
 go on board. Just published. The work being finished. 
 Dinner done. I must rest. The time having arrived. 
 Eorgetting every danger, she went through the battle- 
 field. 
 
94 
 
 LESSON XCIV. 
 II. CONJUGATION.— YEKBS IN ER. 
 
 TEMER— TO TEAK. 
 
 Fear, fearest, fears ; fear. 
 
 Feared, or was fearing. 
 
 Feared, or did fear. 
 
 Had feared. 
 
 Shall fear. 
 
 Temo, temes, teme ; tememos, 
 
 temeis, temem. 
 Temfa, temias, temfa ; teruiamos, 
 
 temieis, temiao. 
 Temi, temeste, temeu ; tememos, 
 
 temestes, temerao. 
 Temera, temeras, temera, temera- 
 
 mos, temereis, temerao. 
 Temerei, temeras, temera, temer- 
 emos, temereis, temerao. 
 
 Aprendo. JBebes. Corrompe. Devemos. Estendeis. 
 Fdzem. Descrevia. Padeciamos. Escondi. Aborreceu. 
 Erocederao. Vencera. Removerei. Erometterd. Re- 
 ceher tamos. Comeriao. Vendi. Ella vendeu. Elle re- 
 gerd. Erendi. Ellas conhecem. Meu irmao morreu. 
 Bebemos a sua saude. Ellas comerdo muito pao. Elle 
 combat eu pela liberdade. Tenho lido muitos livros. Isto 
 nasce da sua negligencia. Elle romjperd a negociacao. 
 Elle interrompeu ndssa conversaeao. Elle encheu o espaco. 
 O jardineiro escolhe os melhores. Isso nao depende de 
 mini. 
 
 I shall eat nothing. I teas fearing. They were drink- 
 ing. Thou liadst feared. I shall learn. I might extend. 
 We might receive. He eats and drinks. They drank 
 much old wine. He will interrupt our conversation. The 
 king will conquer. He suffers. The boy hides the moDey. 
 I shall not describe the town. The house fills the space. 
 He will die of hunger. The gardener's daughter will 
 cull the flowers. The general has conquered the difficul- 
 ties. The peasants fought for the cause of freedom. 
 My sister died yesterday. They interrupted us. 
 
95 
 
 LESSON XCY. 
 
 VERBS IN" ER (SUBJUNCTIVE, INEINITIVE, AND 
 IMPERATIVE). 
 
 Quetema, ternas,tema; temamos, 
 
 temais, temao. 
 Que temesse, temesses, temesse ; 
 
 temessemos, teraesseis, temes- 
 
 sem. 
 Se (quando) eu tenier, temeres, 
 
 temer ; temermos, teruerdes, 
 
 temerem. 
 Eu temer, tu temeres. 
 Teme, temei. 
 Temendo, temido. 
 Tendo temido. 
 Temer, ter temido. 
 
 That I may fear, etc. 
 
 That I might, could, would, 
 should, fear. 
 
 If (when) I fear, etc. 
 
 My fearing, thy fearing, etc. 
 
 Fear, fear ye. 
 
 Fearing, feared. 
 
 Having feared. 
 
 To fear, to have feared. 
 
 Que eu beba. Que elle deva. Que nos escrevessemos. 
 Se eu esqiiecer. Se nos temermos. Para saber. Tre- 
 mendo. Comido. Hei de vender. Se quizer chegar. 
 Vendo as lagrimas. O monge comecou. a descer a escada. 
 Nao ha tempo a perder. JProhibem-lhe o beber "vinho. 
 la a condescender com o seu rogo. Um hdmem trerner ! 
 Chegou antes Ranoitecer. Fendendo as ondas. Vai-se 
 fazendo tarde. Ouco hater. Se nao adormecer logo, lerei. 
 A agua esta fervendo. Tome o copo, e de-me de heber. 
 Permitta-me que lhe qfferega uma chavana de cha. 
 
 I must read. He must drink. She must eat. After 
 my death. That I may drink. If you wish to eat. He 
 began to drink wine. I must comply with his request. 
 When you know our way. Fearing the consequences. 
 He will not light the candles. I hear a knock. Allow 
 me to offer you a glass of wine. If he wishes to sell the 
 horse. It is growing late, and I have three letters to 
 write. Is not the water boiling ? That I might not lose 
 time. If he fears. If they fear. If I should forget. I 
 must sell that horse. A soldier to tremble ! 
 
96 
 
 LESSON XCVI. 
 
 VERBS IX ER (COMPOUND ACTIVE TENSE s), 
 
 Hei or tenho ternido. 
 Havia or tmlia temido. 
 Houve* or tive* ternido. 
 Haverei or terei temido. 
 Haveria or teria temido. 
 Haja or tenha temido. 
 Houvesse or tivesse temido. 
 
 I have feared. 
 
 I had feared. 
 
 I had feared. 
 
 I shall have feared. 
 
 I shoidd have feared. 
 
 That I have feared. 
 
 That, or if, I had feared. 
 
 Tenlio rccebido muitas cartas. commereio tern sof- 
 frido. TSmos lido. A lingua Franceza tern obtldo uma 
 certa universalidade, que a vai convertendo, por assiin 
 dizer, em lingua geral. Terei comido. Teras bebido. Sem 
 diivida terao comido bastante. Se tivesse escondido. Tinha 
 anoiteculo. Disse ter respondido. Tendo morrido seu 
 pae na guerra. Tenlio comido miiito, mais do que devia. 
 Declaro haver rccebido. Logo que V. S. o^ tiver lido. 
 Meu irmao tern recebido muitas cartas. Elle declara 
 haver recibido dez milreis reis. 
 
 I have eaten enough. I may have appeared careless. 
 The incidents which had occurred. If they had learned 
 to calculate the consequences. My brother had received 
 two letters. The health of the soldiers has suffered. 
 They have read my papers. The English language has 
 obtained a certain universality in America. The man has 
 eaten more than he ought. I declare I have received it. 
 If I had feared. If he had prohibited. I should have for- 
 gotten. He has offered. That orator has obtained a cer- 
 tain popularity. His brother having died in battle. 
 
 * Seldom used. 
 
97 
 
 LESSON XCVIL 
 
 VERBS IN EE (rEQ GEES SITE, PASSIVE, AND EUTUEE 
 EOEMS). 
 
 Est6u temendo, estou a temer. 
 Estava temendo, estava a temer. 
 Estou vencido. 
 Afnda que eu fosse vencido. 
 Havemos de nos divertir. 
 Escrever-lhe-hei, Ma. 
 
 I am fearing. 
 
 I was fearing. 
 
 I am conquered. 
 
 Though I were conquered. 
 
 We shall enjoy ourselves. 
 
 I shall write to him, should. 
 
 ~El\efoi absolvido da accusacao. Dever-se-ha abrir as 
 janellas. JProceder-se-ha assim. Tlnhamos sido mal re- 
 cebidos por seupae. Te-lo-ha Y. S. apprendido. JEstdva 
 elle convencido disso ? Em fim anoitecera. Vdmos a des- 
 cer. Sem dizer palavra, deseeu. V. S. me fez descer. 
 Depois de fallecer o rei. O emirado de Badajoz havia 
 sido submettido. Nao seriamos vencidos em generosidade. 
 Escrever-lhe-hei quarta-feira, se uao poder ir ve-lo na 
 segunda. Nao hei de soffrer tal. Que quer comer ? Elle 
 estava bebendo. Depois de eu morrer. 
 
 I shall write to them. I am writing. He is drinking. 
 They are learning . He is conquered. ^Without fearing the 
 consequences. After having written the letter. What do 
 you wish to drink ? After his death. I was convinced of 
 the truth. The enemy was conquered. I shall not suffer 
 this. After the death of the emperor. I was badly re- 
 ceived. After her death. I shall write to his brother. 
 He will write to you on "Wednesday, if he cannot call 
 on Tuesday. The Queen of Spain was badly received 
 at the theatre. The Emperor oi Russia was not convinced 
 of this. 
 
98 
 
 LESSON XCVIII. 
 
 VERBS IN ER (BEELECTIVES* AND EECirEOCALS). 
 
 Elle esquece-se de siias promessas. 
 O hdmem prudente corrige-se a 
 
 si mesmo. 
 Atrevo-me a pedir. 
 Logo ella se arrependfu. 
 EHes esquecerao-se de Ulysses. 
 
 He forgets his promises. 
 The prudent man corrects him- 
 self. 
 I venture to ask. 
 She repented instantly. 
 They have forgotten Ulysses. 
 
 Elle esconde-se k justica. Abstenlw-me de beber vinho. 
 Bile se intromette nos meus negocios. Meu tfo mette-se 
 a fallar em politica. Venclo-se perseguido de perto, cessou 
 de defend er-se, Y6u-w?e wetter na cama. Nao one esque- 
 cerei. Aborrece-me isso. Este homem esqueceu-se de can- 
 tar. Nao se esqueca de vir logo que river jantado. E 
 necessario arrepender-se dos peccados. Ainda te atreves 
 a replicar-me ? historiaddr ve-se miiitas vezes per- 
 plexo. Para se valer do frio. Os Samoiedas estendem-se 
 pela Siberia. Atrevi-me na sua bondade. 
 
 The king never ventured to open the door. Seeing 
 himself obliged to keep a flock. I nave forgotten your 
 name. Save you forgotten me ? He has forgotten me. 
 In order to obtain rewards, they have recourse to (valer- 
 se) flattery and fraud. They were obliged to surrender. 
 Law is not required to repress luxury. Its defenders had 
 to retire to the castle. Not being able to maintain him- 
 self. In Eebruary, the city had surrendered. Do not 
 forget to pay the money, as soon as you have dined. 
 The boy hid himself in the stable. I venture to ask a 
 favour. I repent of my sin. 
 
 * A reflective in Portuguese is often simple in English. 
 
99 
 
 LESSON XCIX. 
 
 VERBS IN EE, (ACTIVE AND REELECTIVE W PORTUGUESE ; 
 
 r= PASSIVES IN ENGLISH). 
 
 O trigo vende-se a — 
 JEstSnde-se esta significacao — 
 !Nao se viao senao poucos mas- 
 
 teos. 
 Verfazer justica. 
 A lenha se reduz a cinzas. 
 Tremeudo-Z/ie a vdz. 
 
 Wheat £s sold at — 
 
 This meaning is extended to- 
 
 A few masts only were seen. 
 
 To see justice done. 
 
 The wood is burnt to ashes. 
 
 _5er voice trembling. 
 
 A meihor beMda que se pode fornecer a urn doente e 
 agua piira. O museu se ha de estender. Viao-se as ilhas 
 levantar seus climes. Onde se ve o tumulo. Desejo ver 
 fazer justica neste negdcio. Para se conhecer a causa 
 provavel. Os vapores se estendiao. A cidade e celebre 
 por siias feiras, que se fdzem sobre a neve. Vendem-se 
 em Moscou casas de madeira, que se armao e desarmao 
 segiindo se quer. Aqui se colhe excellente vinho. All 
 se faz um grande commercio de cobre. O amor so e 
 mais para se temer do. . . 
 
 Sugar is sold at sixpence a pound. Is wine sold 
 here ? Eussia extends to Germany. A few men only 
 are seen. The bouse is seen amongst the woods. He 
 wishes to see justice done to these poor sailors. Very 
 good books are sold here. The house was reduced to 
 ashes in less than three hours. The fair is held in the 
 forest. A great trade in iron was carried on in this dis- 
 trict. The best wine that can he furnished is Bual. The 
 mountains were seen afar oft'. I must see justice done to 
 that poor negro. His hand trembling. 
 
100 
 LESSON C. 
 
 VERBS IN EE (iMPEESONALS). 
 
 Convem, succede. 
 
 Chdve, parece. 
 
 Sabe-se. 
 
 Vale. 
 
 Faz vento ; dao relampagos. 
 
 Escurecer-se. 
 
 It suits, it happens. 
 
 It rains, it seenis. 
 
 It is known. 
 
 Is worth. 
 
 It is windy ; it lightens. 
 
 To grow dark. 
 
 Ensinando, se aprende. Quern nao apparece esquece. 
 Ao amanhecer. Faz-se tarde. Hqje choverd. Chove. 
 Diz-se. Fstd-me bem. Parece ser verdade o que elle 
 diz. Que Ihe parece ? Nao vale a pena. Nao se sdbe 
 quando jantara. Chove miiito. Dao trovoes. Faz um 
 calor terrivel. Quando se faz de vela ? Antes ft ama- 
 nhecer. Nao convem que neste momento vejas Beatriz. 
 O que mais convem a um rei e ser justo. Convem des- 
 pertar a attencao piibliea. Tenho cousa que convem. 
 Nem sempre succede segundo os nossos desejos. 
 
 At day-break the Russian troops appeared near the 
 church. I must go home, for it is late. It is said that 
 Admiral Napier has attacked Cronstadt. It is not known 
 when the French frigate will arrive. I cannot leave the 
 house : the heat is so terrible. What is most becoming 
 in a parent, is to be just and kind. It is proper to rouse 
 the attention of these men. "What do you think ? If it- 
 is windy, shall I go ? It seems to be true what she says. 
 In teaching, one learns. It is not worth while to go, for 
 it will rain. It is well known that the man will not pay 
 the money. 
 
101 
 
 LESSON CI. 
 
 YEEBS IN ER (IDIOMATIC FORMS). 
 
 Tive que escrevSr. 
 Tornou a ler a carta. 
 Sem qua eu o percebesse* 
 Sera mister que mefd^a, etc. 
 Elle estd para morrer. 
 
 I had to write. 
 He read the letter again. 
 * \ ithout my perceiving it. 
 You must make me, etc. 
 He is about to die. 
 
 Torne a escrever a carta. Estou morrendo de sede. 
 De-Hie de beber. A seuhora tornou a dizer-lhe. Sentiu 
 muita alegria ao #e-lo entrar ria *>ala, O bariilho que da 
 a conhecer. Sem que nos o percebessemos. Em chovendo * 
 E possivel que torne a ver-te ? A^sim torndsse eu a rer 
 Ulysses ! Vierao lamber-ihe os pes. Nao podendo soffrer 
 em sileneio. Dizein que o Senhor JST. deve fazerf o pri- 
 meiro papel. Antes de morrer, Atlbnso declarou, etc, 
 Fallecidj o conde. Em no^so entender. Meu parecer e 
 que — Sem que o cavalueiro o tiv esse percebido. 
 
 He has to write to England by the Brazil steamer of 
 the 8th. hist. He read the booiv again, but he is not yet 
 convinced of the truth. Sue lefc the room without my 
 perceiving it. The old general is about to die. As soon 
 as the king was dead, the duke left Lisbon. The poor 
 traveller was dying of thirst My opinion is, that we 
 ought to go home by the tirst steamer. They say that 
 Mario is to perform the principal part. Before dying, the 
 prisoner declared his innoceuce. If it rains. You must 
 write that letter again. I rejoiced to see her enter the 
 house. The thief came in, without your seeing him. 
 
 * Translate, " if it rains." See p. 132, 
 f Fazer papel) play a part. 
 
102 
 
 LESSON CII. 
 
 III. CONJUGATION YEEBS IN IR. 
 PUNIE, TO PUNISH. 
 
 Punish, punishest, punishes. 
 Punished, or was punishing. 
 Punished, or did punish. 
 
 Piino, punes, pdne ; punfmos, 
 
 punis, piinem. 
 Puma, pumas, punfa; puniamos, 
 
 punieis, puniao. 
 Puni, puniste, puniu; punimos, 
 
 punistes, punirao. 
 Punira, puniras, -a; -amos, -eis, -ao 
 Punirei, -as, -a; -emos, -eis, -ao. 
 
 Had punished. 
 Shall punish. 
 
 Traduzo. Applaud imos. Abriria. Abria. Admittiao. 
 Admittirao. Apflaudiramos. Applaudiremos. Admttto 
 isso. Eu o introduzi. Elle pede vinho. O Conde re- 
 sidiu sempre em Portugal. A enfermidade que conduziu 
 AiFonso a sepultura. JPedi-\he a sua proteccao. Abriu 
 passo pelo muro. Eaimiindo decahiu da gnica do rei. A 
 morte destnuu as esperai^as que Henrique concebera de 
 obter o dominio de Toledo. O official seguiu o seu con- 
 ductor. Como ja advertimos. Frigiu ella o peixe ? 
 Oumprirei com o promettido. 
 
 He repeated some words in a low voice. He called 
 for beer. The king resided for some time in "Windsor. 
 He destroyed all the fortifications. The child followed 
 the guide. She has not fried the fish. The impartial 
 public applauded. I prefer coffee. I have lost* my 
 book. The Turkish government asJcs for the evacuation 
 of the provinces. An earthquake has destroyed the town. 
 He translated Herculano's History of Portugal into Eng- 
 lish. He will not fulfil his promise, I am sure. He fell 
 into disgrace. He fell from the Queen's favour. I do 
 not admit that. 
 
 * As if " I lost." 
 
LESSON cm. 
 
 verbs in ie (subjunctive, imperative, and 
 infinitive). 
 
 Puna, punas, puna; punamos, 
 
 punais, punao. 
 Punisse, punfsses, punfsse ; pu- 
 
 nissemos, punfsseis, punfssem. 
 Se punfr, punires, punfr ; punfr- 
 
 mos, punirdes, punirem. 
 Punirfa, -fas, -fa, -faruus, -feis, fao. 
 Pune, punf. 
 Punfndo, punfdo. 
 Punir, ter punido. 
 
 That... may punish. 
 
 That... might punish. 
 
 If... punish.. 
 
 Should punish. 
 
 Punish (thou), punish (ye). 
 
 Punishing, punished. 
 
 To punish, to have punished. 
 
 V. Ex. a rue diz que suba. Advirta* disso seii irmao, 
 Traduza* isto em inglez. Que destrudmos a dbra. Que 
 traduzissemos. Suba V. M. Permitta-me que me retire. 
 Vamos dormir a Santarem. Conduza estes senhores 
 para a sala graade. Ao ouvir urn tal discurso. Para 
 me conduzir a cidade. Fazendo promessas que depen- 
 dem do tempo para se cwmprirem. Os soldados chamao 
 o pobre pateta j»ar# se diver tirem com a sua tolice. JSTao 
 pode competir com elle. Henrique foi persegui-lo no seu 
 leito de mdrte. Se punir mos estes ladroes. 
 
 Translate that letter into French. Allow me to finish 
 the book. On hearing these words, he fell to the ground. 
 I cannot compete with him. The monk went to warn him. 
 In order to conduct him to the palace. I shall go mi^. ful- 
 fil my duty. Reduce everything to figures. Allow me 
 to go home now. He called the boy to him, to amuse 
 himself with his folly. On hearing the voice of my father, 
 I left the room. Fulfil your duty. Show the count into 
 the drawing-room. That I may translate the king's letter 
 into German. Punish the boy. 
 
 * The subjunctive is (politely) used for the imperative.. 
 
104 
 LESSON CIY. 
 
 YEEBS IN IE (COMPOUND TENSES ACTITE). 
 
 Hei ou tenho punido. 
 
 Havia, houve ; tinha, tive pu- 
 nido. 
 
 Haverei, or ia ; terei, or ia pu- 
 nido. 
 
 Haja, tenha punido. 
 
 Houvesse, tivesse punido. 
 
 Quando houver, tiver punido. 
 
 I have punished. 
 I had punished. 
 
 I. shall or should have punished. 
 
 That I have punished. 
 That I had punished. 
 When I have punished. 
 
 Tenho dormido. Elle tinha apparecido. llllle tinha 
 imprimido a sua obra. Nao tinhao elles comido a fruta ? 
 ]Sao ba traduzido a tabula ? Eu tenho ouvido dizer. Em 
 breve teremos concluido a Jornada. Tenho ouvido tudo. 
 criado que se havia decidido a seguir seu amo, etc. 
 Havendo ate ahi seguido. Assim tern resohndo o conselho. 
 Convertida a guerra civil em guerra estrangeira. Que 
 elles tivessem sacudido o pd. You perder quanto tLha 
 adquirido. Tal pregador niinca eu o tinha ouvido. Elle 
 tern servido muito a meu contento. 
 
 He bad slept. They had slept in an humble inn. The 
 man had suddenly appeared. The sovereigns being con- 
 verted into silver. Has he eaten all the strawberries ? 
 Had your friend printed his book before, etc. "When I 
 have translated that speech into Portuguese, etc. Erance 
 has not competed with England. They have not perse- 
 cuted the men. "When the soldiers destroy the bridge. 
 They had opened the windows. He had not fulfilled 
 his promise. Did you hear that the French had taken 
 the Malakoff? 
 
105 
 
 LESSON CV. 
 
 VERBS IN IR (PROGRESSIVE, PASSIVE, AND FUTURE). 
 
 Estou punindo, — 
 Estava punindo, — a 
 Estou caido. 
 Estou resolmdo. 
 Ser eu punido. 
 Ao abrir da porta. 
 
 I am punishing. 
 
 I was punishing. 
 
 I have fallen. 
 
 I am resolved. 
 
 My being punished. 
 
 At the opening of the door. 
 
 Por suas cuLpas nao serem punidas. Elle tinlia sido 
 despedido. Tu teras sido vestido. A empreza teria sido 
 differida. Elle e applaudido de toda a geute. Nao sen do 
 interrompido o sorn. Estava vestido de purpura. Elle 
 vai sahindo bem do negocio. iSendo miiito instruido. 
 Se estas cousas nao forem reprimidas. A casa e bem 
 conhecida de todos. Nao os condemnem, sem serein 
 ouvidos. Nao quero que seja perseguido. A casa teria 
 sido demolida. A lei esta abolida. Nao o ha de punir ? 
 Elle os ha de reduzir. Estou resolmdo afalldr. 
 
 He has fallen into my net. Their not being punished 
 for their faults was owiug to their being powerful. The 
 king was clothed in purple. The lad, being well in- 
 structed, has translated the book accurately. Has the 
 law been abolished ? This castle was built in the reign 
 of George III. I shall not have to punish him. The 
 old castle has been demolished. The rebellion was sup- 
 pressed. He was punishing the boy. Our being perse- 
 cuted was the result of the king's command. He was 
 punished without being heard. Repeated times. "We wish 
 to start. 
 
106 
 
 LESSON CYI. 
 
 VERBS IN IB (BEFLECTIYES AND BECIPEOCALS). 
 
 Vou despedir-me de Y. S. 
 Unem-se os labios da ferfda. 
 Rindo-se, sorrindo-se. 
 outras terras se sumirao. 
 Sinto-me indisposto. 
 TPingir-se cego. 
 
 I must take my leave of you. 
 The lips of the wound unite. 
 Laughing ; smiling. 
 Other lauds disappeared. 
 I fjel unwell. 
 To feign himself blind. 
 
 O cavalheiro dirigiu-se para o loo:ar. !Nao sefen'rao 
 elles ? museu se ha de abrir a quinze de marco. Lhe 
 respondeu o soldado rindo-se. O azougue une-se com o 
 ouro. Sorria-se na terra a Primavera. Queira servir-se 
 disto. Vdi-se pondo o sol. FCi-se como urn passarinho. 
 Fugiu-me da vista. Os Lapoes se se'rvem da renna nas 
 suas viagens, e se cobrem com sua pelle. Como se dis- 
 tinguirdo os Persas ? Deixa-we ao menos despedir de 
 Eucharis^ Vai divertir-se. Eu me incumbo desse ne- 
 gocio. Elle escapou-se da vista de seu pae. 
 
 He went out smiling. The soul is about to say fare- 
 well. Six pieces of artillery followed. I must take my 
 leave of you. The lady feels herself unwell. The soldier 
 feigned himself deaf. The child, laughing, went out. 
 The moon is setting. The man fed from my sight. The 
 Indians use rice. The Caffres cover themselves with the 
 skins of lions. He will take charge of these affairs. He 
 amuses* himself iu deceiving me. I take my leave. My 
 brother feels unwell. He feigns himself lame. I am 
 going to take leave of my frieuds. The hoy feigned him- 
 self blind. 
 
 * Divertir. 
 
107 
 
 LESSON CYIL 
 
 VERBS IN IE (ACTIVE AND REFLECTIVE ; PASSIVES AND 
 NEUTERS IN ENGLISH). 
 
 A Irlanda divide-se em — 
 Ndtre-se a alma. 
 Rtndo-se ; de ss abrir. 
 A que horas parte o vapor ? 
 
 Ireland is divided into — 
 The soul is nourished. 
 Laughing ; of being opened. 
 When does the steamer start ? 
 
 jue-se que — It follows that — - 
 
 Sentiu-se um grande rufdo. I A great noise was heard. 
 
 "Calmar" onde se concluiu o celebre tratado. Divi- 
 dem-se as opinioes. Quviao-se os passarinhos chilrando. 
 Porque se preftre esta estrada a outra ? Pdrte-se o co- 
 racao. Vde-se concluindo. Zunem-Vue os onvidos. Em 
 apparecendo o sol, as estrellas somem-se. Sentiu-se um 
 grande tremor. JPartido-se em varias opinioes. Estes 
 navios se partem tao arrebatadamente. Sentiu-se grande 
 abalo no navio. Nao me sinto com forcas para isso. 
 Queira servir-se disto. Divide-se a casa em quartos. O 
 mestre despediu-se. A que floras parte o diique ? 
 
 England is divided into forty counties. At what 
 o'clock does the steamer leave the port ? It follows that 
 you must go immediately. The poor child is drawing 
 near its end. Why is this house preferred to the other ? 
 Opinions ivere divided. A great motion was felt. Pray, 
 help yourself. The work is divided. The necessity of 
 roads being opened. The city is divided into seven quar- 
 ters, or districts. The King of Portugal took his leave 
 at 4 o'clock. She is not strong enough for this. The 
 patient is dying. I do not feel equal to this. The garden 
 is divided into three parts. 
 
108 
 
 LESSON CYIII. 
 
 VERBS IN IE (iMPEESONAL). 
 
 Cde neve ; chove pedra. 
 Cae-lhe a espada da mao. 
 Doe-vae a perna. 
 Cumpre-nos narrar. 
 Chovem-me kigrhnas dos dlhos. 
 Cumprmdo-se com os preceitos 
 da lei. 
 
 It snows ; it hails. 
 His sword fell from his hand. 
 My leg pains me. 
 It is our duty to narrate. 
 Tears flowed copiously. 
 Fulfilling the requirements of 
 the law. 
 
 Cw^retomarumaresolucao. Cde muita pedra. Esta 
 caindo neve ? Cdem grand ess iiocos. Hqje cumpre osten- 
 tarmos-o. Gde-me a penna da mao. O ceu gea, neva, 
 abraza, e chove. Ckoveu enxofre do ceu. Chove a can- 
 taros. Cam uina grand e pancada d'agua. Esta caindo 
 pedra. Esta chore ndo neve. Cam bastante neve. Cam 
 geada. Cdem algiimas gotas d'agua. Cumpre escrever 
 aquella carta antes de sair o vapor. Dde-me o hombro 
 miiito. Esta caindo muita neve. Cam hontem muita 
 pedra. Cu??ipre-me dizer-lhe coin franqueza. 
 
 It was snowing all night. I cannot go, as it rains and 
 hails. It is my duty to tell you. My left hand pains 
 me. It will snow to-morrow. It was raining all night. 
 It is pouring. It is our duty to go, if it does not rain. 
 It is hailing. It will snow to-morrow on the hills, but 
 we shall have fine weaiher in town. Fulfilling the com- 
 mandments of my superior officer, it is my duty to inform 
 you. Tears fell from her e\ es in showers. I am bound 
 to write that letter. 1 have a sore throat. You must 
 take a resolution. Much snow is falling. 
 
109 
 LESSON CIX. 
 
 YERBS IN IR (IDIOMATIC FORMS). 
 
 Tenho de partir. 
 
 Acdbo de ouvir. 
 
 Se estdva prompto para partir. 
 
 Ouvfu lima vdz pedtr. 
 
 !Nao pddem deixdr de sentir. 
 
 Estdva para pedir. 
 
 I have to go. 
 
 I have just heard. 
 
 If he was ready to start. 
 
 He heard a voice call. 
 
 They cannot help feeling. 
 
 He was about to ask. 
 
 Se bem tenho entendido o que acdbo de ouvir. !Eis- 
 nos partidos. Vae-se partir. V. S. nao esta em estado de 
 repetir a sua licao. PedirAhe-hei lima fatia, se me faz 
 favor. Santarem nao tardou a cair-lhe nas maos. Posso 
 servir-te com algiima hortalica ? De que quer que o 
 sirva ? Ir diminuindo. O pobre ho mem esta a concluir. 
 A primavera es&i rindo nos jardins. Dividir doze por 
 tres. Estdmos para partir. Acdbo de partir. Faz mau 
 tempo para se sajr. O cair* da t'olha. Nao posso deixar 
 de foliar neste assiimpto. rapaz nao estd prompto para 
 partir. 
 
 I am mzJy to start. I have to go to England by the 
 steamer. The boy has just heard that his father is dead. 
 I cannot help asking you. We are off. We have to go to 
 Lisbon by the Gral^o. They had to repeat all the lesson. 
 The town was not long in falling into the hands of the 
 Erench. May I offer you some beef ? The poor invalid 
 is dying. I have just heard that the steamer goes about 
 four o'clock. I cannot help falling. What shall I offer 
 them ? He was about to ash for water. We have just 
 heard of the victory. He cannot help speaking. 
 
 * The Portuguese often use the infinitive instead of a noun. 
 
110 
 
 LESSON CX. 
 
 A 
 
 POE — TO PUT (and its compounds). 
 
 I put, thou puttest, he puts, etc. 
 
 Ponho, poes, poe ; ponios, pon- 
 
 des, poem. 
 Punha, as, a ; amos, eis, So. 
 Piiz, este, 6z ; emos, estes, erao. 
 Puzera, eras, era ; eramos, ereis, 
 
 erao. 
 Porei, as, a ; emos, eis, ao. 
 
 I put, or was putting, etc. 
 I put, or did put, etc. 
 I had put, etc. 
 
 I shall put, etc. 
 
 Punhamos. Puzeramos. Porei. Pomos. O homem 
 poe, e Dens dispoe. A gallinha poe ovos. Eu punha o 
 pe no estribo. ^ Elle poz a mao na testa. Eu puz a es- 
 pada a cinta. Elles puzerao os vestidos. ^wpuztra toda 
 a diligencia. JPorei fim a dbra. JPord o homem na rua. 
 Compomos livros. Ella cofnpoe acasa. O padre compora 
 as dissensoes. Compoz-se com a sua sorte. Este Jivro 
 compoe-se de tres partes. general dispoe as peens em 
 bateria. Swpponho que nao. Eu o supponho. ~E\ie poz- 
 se em pe. Elle impoz lirna condicao. 
 
 He put his hands on the boy's head. They imposed 
 severe terms. She put a sealed letter into my hand. 
 "Where have you. put my hat ? I shall put the books on 
 the table. The year is composed of days. Iu you he 
 places all his confidence. She ys'\\\ put some coal on the 
 fire. He has not put the bridle ou the mare. I shall 
 dispose of my house. "We suppose not. They will put 
 the papers into my hands. He disposed of his goods. He 
 put it here. They laid down their arms. The rebels de- 
 posed the king. The gardener transplanted the trees. 
 He will suppose. I composed a book. 
 
Ill 
 
 LESSON CXI. 
 POE — to put (subjunctive). 
 
 That I may put, etc. 
 That I might put, etc. 
 If I put, etc. 
 If I had put, etc. 
 I should put, etc. 
 
 Que eu p6nha, as, a ; amos, 
 
 ais, ao. 
 Que eu puzesse, es, e ; essemos, 
 
 eis, em. 
 Se eu puzer, es, er; mos, des, 
 
 em. 
 Se eu puzera, as, a ; amos, eis, 
 
 ao. 
 Porfa, fas, fa ; famos, feis, fao. 
 
 Se puzer miiito carvao, hade apagar o fogo. Diga-lhe 
 que ponha o livro na mesa. Se puzerinos o navio em 
 perigo. Se o general puzesse os soldados a ferro. Man- 
 dou aos afficiaes que repozessem o dinheiro de cada urn 
 nos sens saccos. Ponha a roupa a enxugar. Ponhamos 
 a panella ao ltime. Se expozermos estas duvidas. Se eu 
 pozesse o homem na rua. Se elle se poze'r a cavallo. Se 
 as meninas se pozerem a chorar. Se os astros se pozessem. 
 Se em. duas horas me pozesse em Lisboa. Se Y. M. 
 pozer tanto tempo em fazer isto. Elle nao o comporia. 
 
 If the ho j puts too much water. Tell him to put the 
 wine on the table. I told him to put out the dog. Let 
 us suppose it so. If the sun sets at seven o'clock. Tell 
 him to mount his horse. I know not to what to attribute it. 
 If the captain puts the ship in danger. If he can be in 
 Ennchai in three hours. Tell the maid to lay the cloth. 
 Tell him to put the hammock on the ground. Let us 
 put the pan on the fire. Put the shirts to dry. If she 
 should put on mourning. Lay the cloth at six o'clock. 
 The hen would lay eggs. He would impose terms. 
 
112 
 
 LESSON CXII. 
 
 POR— TO PUT (IMPERATIVE, INFINITIVE, AND 
 PARTICIPLES). 
 
 P6r, ter posto. 
 
 Por eu, pores tu, por elle. 
 
 Pormos nds, pordes vds, porem 
 
 elles. 
 Poe, ponde. 
 Pondo, posto. 
 Por, ter, posto. 
 
 To put, to have put. 
 
 My putting, thy putting, his 
 
 putting. 
 Our putting, your putting, their 
 
 putting. 
 Put (thou), put (ye). 
 Putting, put. 
 
 Por o homem por p-overnador. Ter posto o navio em 
 perigo. Poe de parte a vai'iade. Sera eu por crvestido. 
 Porem-se os astros. O pormos toda a diligencia nem 
 sempre da bons suceessos. Depois de elle ter posto a 
 mesa. Posto o medo. Uma cousa supposta. Para o 
 Bi^po impor as maos. Impondo tribute-. Sem ellas 
 terem disposto da sua fazenda. Dispondo os paineis na 
 sala. Sem eu dispor estas arvores. Depois de o capitao 
 ter tudo disposto para a empreza. Sem compormos as 
 disputas. Marquez era todo composto de bondade. 
 
 Having placed tbe lad as inspector. Lay aside the 
 book. "Without his putting off his coat. Our composing 
 books will not pay the labour. After the king's im- 
 posing tribute. "Without my disposing of my house. After 
 your settling your disputes. Your father was made of 
 honour. He is reconciled with the doctor. After his 
 having placed the pictures in the gallery. "Without her 
 having composed a poem. My having laid the cloth gave 
 him pleasure. After our having transplanted these 
 bushes. Without putting his life in peril. 
 
113 
 
 LESSON CXIIL 
 
 POE — COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Hei ou tenho posto. 
 Havia, tinha posto. 
 Haverei, haveria, terei, teria, 
 
 posto. 
 Haja, tenha posto. 
 Houvesse, tivesse posto. 
 Quando houver, tiver posto. 
 Ter posto, haver de por. 
 
 I have put, etc. 
 
 I had put, etc. 
 
 I shall, or should, have put. 
 
 That I may have put. 
 That I might have put. 
 When I have put. 
 To have put ; to have to put. 
 
 Eii tenho posto o chapeu na cabeca. Heide por o ho- 
 mem fora. Temos posto a casa em perigo. Ellas haode 
 por-se a cavallo. Que eu tenha posto o piano em execucao. 
 Se elle tivesse posto o criado na riia. Se elles tivessem 
 posto os pes ao caininho. Se as aves tivessem posto os 
 dvos no ninho. Quando eu tiver posto a mesa. Ter posto 
 todo a cuidado. Estd posto a trabalhar. Tendo composto 
 um livro. Estdr composto com elle. Tinha composto o 
 semblante. Eu teria disposto as estatuas na galeria. Se 
 elle tivesse disposto do dinheiro. 
 
 He has put the bat on his head. I shall put the boy- 
 out of the house. They have placed the kingdom in dan- 
 ger. I have arranged the pictures in the hall. When 
 the birds have laid their eggs. The servant had laid the 
 cloth. I shall have composed some verses. These young 
 ladies have mounted their horses. "When he has put the 
 plan in execution. Saving composed a good book. If I 
 had put my hat on the table. I shall have to compose 
 verses. I should have prepared all for the enterprise. 
 He had put every confidence in his friend. If he had 
 put on the boots. 
 
 f 
 
114 
 
 LESSON CXIY. 
 IEBEaULAR yekbs in AE. 
 
 "Bmcdr, biisque ; tocdr, toquei. 
 Folgcir, folgue ; eniregdr, en- 
 
 tregue. 
 Arrancar, buscar, atacar, edificar, 
 
 embarcar, ficar, peccar, repli- 
 
 car, suffocar, tocar. 
 Alugar, carregar, cegar, castigar, 
 
 chegar, empregdr, etc. 
 
 Car changes c into qu before e. 
 Gar takes u after g before e. 
 
 Pull up, fetch, attack, build, em- 
 bark, stay, sin, reply, suffocate, 
 touch. 
 
 Hire, charge, blind, chastise, 
 reach, employ, etc. 
 
 Ataquei o inimigo de flanco. Busque o chapeu. Di- 
 ga-lhe que arrdnque as arvores. Edifiquernos uma ponte 
 aqui. Embarquei-me no negocio sem reflectir. Pequei 
 miiitas vezes. Nao replique ! Sziffoquei-o nos meus bra- 
 90s. Toque a campainha. JNao alugei a casa. Carreguei 
 os batalhoes inimigos. Que elles ceguem* a artilheria. 
 Castiguemos esses rapazes. Chegue-se ao pe do kime. 
 Empreguei todo o tempo no estudo. Estraguemos todas 
 estas mas hervas. ~M.mko folguei de a ver. Ldrgue isso. 
 Pdgue o dinheiro. Ja paguei. Eegue na pa. Pegue 
 n'isso. 
 
 Ring tbe bell. Don't stay in the house. Let go the 
 bridle. I rang the bell three times. Do not touch me. 
 Fetch the hammock-men. Tell him to stay in the gar- 
 den. Don't reply. Spike the guns. Let us load the 
 car. Let the man build the bridge. Do not tear your 
 new dress. I spoiled that boy. My duty requires me 
 to confiscate the lace. I approached the fire. I suffo- 
 cated the lion in my arms. Take the reins, and stay 
 here. I embarked in a ship of war. I did not load the 
 gun. Let us pay the money. I reached the chamber, 
 attacked the thief, and chastised him severely. Tear the 
 paper, a,nd put out the light. 
 
 * Blind, i.e., spike the guns. 
 
115 
 
 LESSON CXV. 
 DAE* — to give. 
 
 Don, -as, -a, -amos, -ais, -ao. 
 Dav#, -as, -a, -amos, -eis, -ao. 
 Dei, -este, -eo, -emos, -estes, 
 
 -erao. 
 Dera, -as, -a, -amos, -eis, -ao. 
 Darei, etc. Daria, etc. 
 De, -es, -e, -emos, eis, em. 
 Desse, desses, etc. 
 Se der, etc. 
 Da, dai. 
 Dar, ter dado, dando, dado. 
 
 I give, thou givest, he gives. 
 I was giving, etc. 
 I gave, or did give. 
 
 I had given, etc. 
 I shall give. Should give. 
 I may give. 
 I might give. 
 If I give. 
 
 Give (thou), give (ye). 
 To give, to have given, giving, 
 given. 
 
 Ddmos. Deste. Deu. Demos. Ddva. Darei. Daria. 
 Tinha dado. Se eu der. Se eu desse. Dera. Ter dado. 
 Se tivesse dado. Dou-\he os parabens. Eu nao dou 
 tanto. Dou-\he a minha palavra. Ella me ddva pequena 
 soldada. Ainda nao deu lima hora. As vinhas nao derdo 
 este anno. Elle nao me deu noticias. Ja derdo oito ho- 
 ras. Da licenca que — De-me esse chapeu. Dai pao 
 ao senhor. Preciso que me de as siias chaves. Ddr-me- 
 hia miiito prazer o conversarmos. Ddr-lhe-hei em trdca 
 este relogio. Quanto me da pelo meu ? 
 
 He gives. We give. Thou givest. 1 gave. We were 
 giving. I had given. I shall give. He might give. I 
 shall not give a dollar. The man gave good wages. It 
 has not yet struck two. Pears have not yielded well this 
 year. Give me leave to — Give wine to the men. I 
 shall give you a book in exchange. It has already struck. 
 I can give it you for two dollars. You must give them 
 to be mended. You must give him your papers. They 
 gave me good news. It would give me much pleasure to 
 meet. If I give. I shall not give so much. Give it me. 
 
 * Only the most important parts of the irregular verbs ar< 
 given. They should be carefully committed to memory. 
 
116 
 
 LESSON CXYI. 
 DAE — TO GIVE (idiomatic foems).* 
 
 Ddr dfa e hdra. 
 Ddr licao ; clar costas. 
 Deu-me que entender. 
 Ddr comsfgo no chao. 
 No qual me dd conta de. 
 
 Ddr-se por culpado. 
 
 To appoint a meeting. 
 
 To say a lesson ; to turn the back. 
 
 He gave me to understand. 
 
 To fall to the ground. 
 
 In which you give me an account 
 
 of. 
 To admit his guilt. 
 
 Ddr o sim. Deu fogo. Elle deu a vida por seu amigo. 
 Dd licenca. Ddndo ouvidos. Nao derao quartel. Ella 
 dd uma olhada. Nao poder ddr urn passo. Mais vale 
 urn " torn a la" que dois "te dareiT De aonde der. A 
 riia vai ddr a praca. Dddas as maos. O relogio dd hdras. 
 Ouve-o ddr horas ? Nao ainda : de-\h.e corda. Quando 
 dd a vela ? Ddr de esporas. Ddr em bebado. navio 
 dd n'um banco. O barco nao dd pelo leme. Don por 
 eoncluido este negdcio. Ddr as maos. Nao se me dd 
 nada. Ddr-se-hi caso ? Dd-se como certo. Dou-me 
 bem neste clima. Demos que assim seja. 
 
 To shake hands. I gave him credit. The king gives 
 audience. He gave me his hand. They gave him some- 
 thing to drink. I put an end to the affair. They gave 
 thanks. The soldiers turned their backs. Minos gave 
 laws. Shall I say my lesson ? They gave no quarter. 
 He tore witness. He gave a glance. He could not walk 
 a step. He gave me to understand that. They gave 
 proofs of— To give and take. Whatever may happen. 
 To knock the head against the wall. Give him my re- 
 gards. He could not advance a step. Having shaken 
 hands. 
 
 * These are hut a few specimens. Consult Constancio's Dic- 
 tionary, " Bar." 
 
117 
 
 LESSON CXVIL 
 IREEGULAE verbs in EE. 
 
 Ger changes y into^' in the first pers. sing. pres. ind. and subj. 
 
 Cer changes c into g. 
 
 Oer changes o into 6, when followed by o or a. 
 
 Perder, changes d into c, in first pers. sing. pres. ind. and subj. 
 
 Jazer, makes jazo- 
 
 Abrdnjo todo o genero humano. D6o-me de urn pe. 
 Pancadas que dodo. Urn eleitor pdde dizer "eu elejo." 
 Nunca jdzo na cama depois das 6 horas. Moo o milho 
 todos os dias. Moao a carina de assucar la em cima. 
 Certifico-lhe que perco n'isso. Nao perca tempo. JSTao 
 percdmos niinca de vista esta lei. Que eu nao perca esta 
 occasiao. Banjo os dentes com frio. Bdnja o cao, nao 
 me impdrta. Tdnjo a trombeta. Tanjdmos os instru- 
 mentos. Niinca tor go o rosto ao inimigo. Torcdmos as 
 redeas aos cavallos. Perca os seus bens. 
 
 I elect my governors. I lie in bed eight hours every 
 night. I lose time in hearing this story. That the boy 
 may not lose this opportunity. I play the usual instru- 
 ments. Let him not twist my meaning. Tell him not 
 to lose time. My hand pains me. Let him grind the 
 wheat every morning. Let us not lose the advantage. 
 I gnash my teeth with fever. Let the door creak on its 
 hinges. As soon as the church bell rings I shall go 
 home. The Queen may say " I reign?" Tell the girl 
 not to twist the strings of the harp. Tell him to elect 
 the most faithful deputy. Let us lie in peace till the 
 enemy disappears. Let him not lose the dollar. 
 
118 
 
 LESSON CXVIII. 
 
 CABER — TO BE CONTAINED, EIT, SUIT, BE EQUAL TO, 
 BE THE BUTT OF, HAPPEN. 
 
 I fit, suit, etc. 
 
 Caibo, cabes, cabe ; cabemos, 
 
 cabeis, cabem. 
 Cabia, -fas, -fa; -famos, -feis, -fao 
 Coufe, -este, -be; -emos, -estes, 
 
 -erao. 
 Coubera, -as, -a, etc. Caberei, 
 
 Caiba, etc. Caberia, etc. Cou- 
 besse. 
 
 I fitted, was fitting. 
 I fitted, did fit. 
 
 Had fitted, will fit. 
 
 May, should, might suit. 
 
 vinho nao cabe na garrafa. A gente cabe na casa. 
 Nao cabe n'um hornem de bem o mentir. Este officio 
 nao me cabe. Nao ine cabe aconselhar os mais velhos. 
 Isto me coube por sorte. Isso so cabe ao sabio. Nao cabe 
 na minba penna escrever o que vos couber na boca. Creio 
 que nem no mundo todo poderiao caber os livros. Deve- 
 mos obstar quanto em nds couber. Couberao as aucto- 
 ridades na casa da camara. Coubera trigo nos saccos. 
 Caberiao ambos os batalboes no mesmo quartel ? Coube 
 me atalbar o mal. Seria bom, se coubesse. 
 
 The wine was not contained in the bottle. Many per- 
 sons met in the college. It fell to my lot to be first. 
 It does not become a man of honour. So many people 
 cannot be contained in this room. This office does not 
 suit him. The pupil3 assembled in the school. The sacks 
 contained barley. If the people cannot be contained in 
 the cathedral, they must stay outside. I inherited a 
 house (lit. a house fell to me in heirship). The greater 
 part/e/£ to me. He stands well with the minister. If 
 it suits. The theatre will not hold the people. It does 
 not become me. The house will not accommodate the 
 family. 
 
119 
 LESSON CXIX. 
 
 CBEB. — TO BELIE YE. 
 
 Creio, ores, ere ; -emos, -eis, -em. 
 Cria, -fas, -ia; -famos, -feis, -fao. 
 Cri, creste, creu. ; cremos, crestes, 
 
 crerao. 
 Crera, -as, -a, etc. Crerei, -as, -a. 
 Creia, -as, -a, etc. Creria, -as, etc. 
 
 Cresse, etc. 
 
 Believe, believest, believes. 
 Believed, was believing. 
 Believed, did believe. 
 
 Had believed, shall believe. 
 May, should, might believe. 
 
 Creio que sim. Creio que nao. Eu o creio. Eu se 
 que ores. Creio bem. JNao o creio. Ciista-me a cre-lo. 
 Quern o creria? Creio que nos podeoios levantar. Os 
 Judeus nem criao em Christo nem a Christo. Crtio que 
 e esta a causa. Crer em sonhos. Ninguem Ih'o cria. 
 Eu lh'o creio. Para que creiao. Crede no Evangelho. 
 Como me crereis. Se tu creres, veras a gloria. Nao o 
 crestes. Podem cre-lo a Y. S. Crer em Christo e crer 
 nelle ; crer a Christo e cre-lo a elle. Creu Abrahao a 
 Deus. Eu cri, por isso fallei. Elles crerao na Escrip- 
 tiira. 
 
 I believe. He believes. I believe so. I don't believe 
 it. I can't believe it. Who would believe that man ? I 
 believe in the Supreme. In order that you may believe. 
 He had not believed. He believed and spoke. To make 
 themselves believed. He does not believe me. I do not 
 believe him. Believing him. Having believed. If I 
 should believe. That ye may believe. Many believed in 
 his name. That many may believe. If thou believest, 
 thou shalt see heaven. If he believes. I cannot believe 
 what he says. Some believe too much, others too little. 
 Believe me, it is not so. 
 
120 
 
 LESSON CXX. 
 
 DIZEK — TO SAY, TELL, AXD COMPOUNDS. 
 
 Digo, -dizes, -diz ; -emos, -eis. 
 
 -em. 
 Dizia, -fas, -fa ; famos, -feis, -lao. 
 Disse, disseste, disse; -emos, 
 
 -estes, -erao. 
 Dissera, -as, -a. Direi, -as, -a, etc. 
 Diga, etc. Diria, etc. Dissesse. 
 Dize, ei; se disser; dizendo, dito. 
 
 I say, sayest, says. 
 
 Said, was saying. 
 Said, did say. 
 
 Had said. Shall say. 
 May, should, might say. 
 Say ; if I say ; saying, said. 
 
 Digo que sim. Digo que nao. A lei diz. Nao digo 
 rnenos d'isso. Diz-se. Nao sei o que dizes. Diziao isto 
 os Judeus. ■ Os homens lhe disserdo. Disse lhe Martha. 
 Dissemos. Elle diria. Pode crer o que lhe eu digo. Dis~ 
 serao-m'o. Todos o dizem. Quern lh'o disse. Os gestos 
 condiziam com a pessoa. Nao e necessario dize-\o agora. 
 Niuguem diga. Tornou pois elle a dizer-lhes. Nao lhe 
 diga isso. Eu lhe direi. Diga-lhe que entre. Dir-\he- 
 hei. Quer dizer. Que querem dizer estas palavras ? 
 Muito ha que dizer. Para melhor dizer. 
 
 I say so. I don't sag so. It is said. Everybody 
 sags so. What do you sag ? Did he tell it you ? I 
 heard sag. Who told you ? What did he sag to you ? 
 I don't know what he sags. The women told him. Let 
 no one sag. Did you sag that ? No, I did not sag it. 
 To tell you the truth. Tell me frankly. I have just told 
 you. This said, he went out. If he sags. Let no one 
 sag. If they sag. Tell them to come in. I must tell 
 you a story. If I might tell the truth. That is to sag. 
 I don't understand what you sag. I shall sag. If I 
 should sag. He began saging. 
 
121 
 LESSON CXXI. 
 
 EAZ^EB — DO, MAKE. 
 
 Faco, fazes, faz; fazemos, -eia, -em. 
 Fazia, -fas, -fa j faziamos, -eis, 
 
 -ao. 
 Fiz, fizeste, fez 5 fizemos, -estes, 
 
 -erao. 
 Fizera, -as, -a. Farei, -as, -a,- etc. 
 Faca, -as, -a. Farm. Fizesse, etc. 
 Se fizer, fazendo, feito. 
 
 I make ; makest, make, 
 Made, was making. 
 
 Made, did make. 
 
 Had made, shall make. 
 May, should, might, make, 
 If I make, making, made, 
 
 'Na.ofdgo nada. Fdco esmolas. 'Nao/ape^caso dissa- 
 Elle fdz^ guerra. Isso nao me fdz nada. Elle fazia a 
 barba. Elle fez a cama. Fizera urn livro. Se eHeJlzer 
 diividas, Jbao fdz-se velho. M Fdz hia, vento, calor, frio. 
 O mendigo se fdz siirdo. Eu fazia~o por brincadeira, 
 que esta feito esta feito. Fdga-me este favor, preco 
 fdz-me medo. Fdr-me-hia, o favor. QraQfaremos? Fa- 
 rm melhor se. . . Nao/iptf tal. Tdrna afazer sol. Fdz 
 poeira. Desejo que fdca a sua fortiina. Ydga-lhe os 
 meus comprhnentos. .Fa-lo-hei com prazer. Nao posso 
 fazer isto. Teria feito isto. 
 
 He yiv&« alms. "We £%m£ nothing of that. They 
 make war. He shaves. She will m#&e the bed. Louisa 
 grows old. John grows proud. Do me the favour to give 
 me. ^STh.0 plays the part of Cato S The moon shines. I 
 did it for fun. They would do better, if — He will do 
 it with pleasure. The horse frightens me. Do nothing 
 of the kind. They had a good voyage. Tour friend 
 wrote a book. It is cold here. He does nothing. This 
 story does not concern me. Let him do so. The beg- 
 gar feigns himself blind, Doing, done, 
 
122 
 
 LESSON CXXII. 
 
 LEE, — TO READ. 
 
 Leio, -les, -le ; lemos, ledes, leem. 
 Lia, -fas, -fa ; iamos, -feis, -fao. 
 Li, leste, leu; lemos, lestes, 
 
 lerao. 
 Lera, -as, -a. Lerei, -as, -a, etc. 
 Leia, etc. Leria, etc. Lesse. 
 Le. lede. Se eu ler. Se elles 
 
 lessem. 
 Lendo, lido. 
 
 Read, readest, reads. 
 Read, or was reading. 
 Eead, or did read. 
 
 Had — . Shall — . 
 
 May, should, might. 
 
 May ; if I read ; if they should 
 
 read. 
 Reading, read. 
 
 Leio philosophia. Leriamos. Se eu ler. Se elles 
 lessem. Como les tu ? Lemos. Leu o cartel ? V. S. 
 nao le bem. A passagem que lia era esta. Le esse livro. 
 Nao sei ler. Tomando o livro, leu. Elle tomou as cartas, 
 e Zez^-as. Os propbetas que cada sabbado se leem. Lerds 
 as palavras desta lei. Ler com seria attencao. Enten- 
 des o que estas Undo ? Entenda o que le. Elles lerao 
 no livro da lei, e o povo entendia quando se estava lendo. 
 Leia devagar. Sei ler, escrever e contar. Depois de a 
 ler. £u vos conjiiro que ledis esta carta. 
 
 I read the classics. He reads philosophy. They are 
 reading Byron. I was listening, when he was reading. 
 I read the book yesterday. He has read it frequently. 
 The papers are read every day. When you have done 
 reading. Having read the letter. He received the let- 
 ters and read them. What is he reading ? I advise you 
 to read. The king ordered him to read the proclamation. 
 Mead this beautiful letter. He must read slowly. If he 
 reads well. Beading the letter. After reading it. These 
 memoirs will be read and appreciated. 
 
Pdsso, pddes, pdde; podemos, 
 
 podeis, pddem. 
 Podia, -fas, -fa ; famos, -feis, -fao. 
 Piide, deste, pode ; emos, estes, 
 
 erao. 
 Podera, -eras, -era, etc. Poderei, 
 
 -eras, -era, etc. 
 Pdssa. Poderia. Podesse. 
 Se poder. 
 Podendo, podido. 
 
 123 
 LESSON CXXIII. 
 
 PODEE TO BE ABLE. 
 
 Can, canst, can. 
 
 Could, couldst, could. 
 Could, couldst, could. 
 
 Had been able, shall be able. 
 
 May, could, might be able. 
 
 If I can. 
 
 Being able, been able. 
 
 ~Naopdsso soffreristo. Nao pdsso erer. ~Nslo pdsso mais. 
 O pouco que pdsso. Nao lhe pdsso dizer. Agora nao 
 pdsso. Pdde ser. ~N&o pdde ser. Elle nao pdde sair do 
 quarto. Se tu queres, bem me pddes alimpar. Podeis vds 
 beber o calix ? Como se pdde isto fazer ? Ja nao podia 
 ver. Nao se pdde. Pdde ser que parta amanha. Nao ^?o- 
 ^m'« nega-lo, ainda quando quizesse. Ainda que tenha- 
 mos podido ve-los. £lu nao lhe pude chamar. Nao pode- 
 rds ver. Quero panno que se pdssa lavar. O mais de- 
 pressa que poder. Sinto muito nao poder. Podera ! 
 
 He cannot believe. "We cannot suffer this noise. All 
 I can. I can't at present. It can't be. Can you eat fish ? 
 The thief could not deny it. The old man could not see. 
 He will not be able to write. I am sorry I can't. It 
 can't be done. Can you let me see those letters ? CWyou 
 give us supper here ? May I ask you if — My brother 
 cannot leave his room. The lady could not hear. I shall 
 be able to take it. If I could not. If I were able. Being 
 able. Can one pass this way ? That cannot be the case. 
 The thief could not deny the accusation. 
 
124 
 
 LESSON CXXIV. 
 QUEEEE*— to want, wish. 
 
 Quero, queres, quer ; queremos, 
 
 quereis, querem. 
 Queria, -ias, -ia ; iamos, -fes,-iao. 
 Quiz, estes, -is ; emos, estes, erao. 
 Quizera, -as, -a. Quererei, -as, -a. 
 Queira, quereria, quizesse. 
 
 Se quizer, querendo, querido.* 
 
 Want, wantest, wants. 
 
 Was wanting. 
 
 Wanted, did want. 
 
 Had wanted, shall want. 
 
 May want, should want, might 
 
 want. 
 If I want, wanting, wanted. 
 
 Quero um cavallo. Que'ro-me ir deitar. Elle quer fal- 
 lar a V. S. Que-Vas justas ? Que'ro-as bem justas. Quer 
 fazer-me um favor ? Nao quer sentar-se ? Que'r-me es- 
 covar a casaca? Que papel quer V. S.? Quizera uns 
 sapatos. Murmurem quanto quizerem. Quizera ter um 
 exemplar de Camoes. Seja como quizer. Quizera que 
 Y.M. me trocasse os oculos. Quanto quer por elle ? 
 Queria comprar panno. Quereria antes que fosse verde. 
 Dar-lhe-hei outro, se quizer. Pode vir quando quizer. 
 Se ellas quizerem vir com-ndsco. Como quizer. 
 
 I want a glass. He ivants to go to bed. The boy at 
 the door wishes to speak to you. Will you do me a ser- 
 vice ? Do you wish me to bring the horse ? What book 
 do you want ? I should like to have a cup of tea. How 
 much do you want for the book ? As you please. I will 
 give you this, if you like. I should prefer it green. If 
 the boys wish to go to Lisbon. He ivill not stay. Do 
 you want beer ? I should like to go, if you would take 
 me. I should like you to bring my books. He prefers 
 the blue cloth. They may come, when they like. 
 
 * " Querer" sometimes means " to love," and so " querido" sig- 
 nifies " dear," or " beloved." 
 
125 
 
 LESSON CXXV. 
 REQUEUES — to require, demand. 
 
 Require, requirest, requires. 
 Required, was requiring. 
 Required, did require. 
 Had required, shall require. 
 May, should, might require. 
 
 Requeiro, requeres, requer ; 
 
 emos, -eis, -em. 
 Requeria, -fas, -fa; famos, -feis, 
 
 -fao. 
 Requeri, -este, -eu ; emos, estes, 
 
 erao. 
 Requerera, -as, -a. Requererei, 
 
 Requeira, -as, -a. Requererfa, etc. 
 
 Requeiro o meu direito. INao requeiro o pagamento. 
 homem requer de seu amigo iim favor. Esta doenca 
 requer grande cuidado. Esta empresa requer mtiita pru- 
 dencia. Eu requererei a vida do homem da mao do ho- 
 mem. Tiido o que se furtasse, de mim o requererias. 
 Requererei as vossas primicias. Eis-ahi se requer de nds 
 o seu sangue. Quern requereu estas cousas de vossas 
 maos ? JNao requer a lei para mestres de escola hdmens 
 de engenho superior. Segundo requer em as circunstancias. 
 Os advogados requerem em favor dos clientes. 
 
 I demand justice. He does not require payment to-, 
 day. The boy accuses the men of theft. These diseases 
 require great care and attention. Who has required this 
 money r To demand tribute. Looking for materials. 
 Such an undertaking would require the greatest skill. 
 As the necessity of the case may require. If I demand 
 the money. Exacted by superior authority. Demanding 
 from the magistrate what is dne to him. She demanded 
 from the king what was due to her. This undertaking 
 demands great perseverance. I demand payment imme- 
 diately. 
 
126 
 
 LESSON CXXYI. 
 SABEEr— to kxow. 
 
 Sei, sabes, sabe ; -emos, -eis, -em. 
 Sabia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -feis, -iao. 
 Soube, -este, -e ; emos, estes, eriio. 
 Soubera, -as, -a. Saberei, -as, -a. 
 Saiba, etc. Saberia, etc. Sou- 
 
 besse, etc. 
 Se souber. Sabendo. Sabido. 
 
 Know, knowest, knows. 
 Knew, knewest. 
 Knew, did know. 
 Had known, sball know. 
 May, should, might know. 
 
 If I know ; knowing, known. 
 
 Nao sei quasi nada. Sei ler. Sei fazer vestidos, 
 Ja se sabe. Com o tempo tudo se sabe. Sdbe montar a 
 cavallo ? Nao sei. Sabe que horas sao ? Sdbe Deus. 
 Elle soube-o. P6de-se saber? Elle bem sabe o que faz. 
 ]S T ao sdbe o seu papel. Nao que eu saiba. Elle uao sabia 
 d'oude lhe viera. Dizemos o que sabemas. jSTao ha nin- 
 guem que o nao sa'i&«. Para sabermoso tempo. You tocar 
 para saber. Para que saiba. Para que soabesses que — 
 Sem eu o saber. Sem elles o saberern. Se eu souber de 
 certo. Se o pai de familia soubesse. 
 
 I know it. I don't know. I know nothing new. I 
 knew nothing of this. Not that I know of. I don't 
 know the truth. He can swim. Can he ride ? Can you 
 speak English ? I did not know that she was ill. It is 
 not known. Do you know were Mr. S. lives ? Do you 
 know what o'clock it is ? We knew. I shall ring to 
 know if breakfast is ready. Without his knowing it. 
 He says what he knows. If he knew it exactly. He does 
 not know what you mean. Without our knowing it. 
 If Henry had known. Every one knows. Not knowing 
 the law. Let it be known. I should have told you, if I 
 had known. 
 
127 
 
 LESSON CXXVIL 
 
 TEAZER — TO BEING, EEAB, FETCH. 
 Bring, bringest, brings, 
 
 Trago, trazes, traz ; trazemos, 
 
 trazeis, trazem. 
 Trazia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -feis, -iao. 
 Trouxe, -este, -e; -emos, -estes, 
 
 -erao. 
 Trouxera, -as, -a. Trarei, -as, -a, 
 
 etc. 
 Traga, -as, -a. Traria, -as, -a, -etc. 
 
 Se trouser, trazendo, trazido. 
 
 Was bringing. 
 Brought, did bring. 
 
 Had brought, shall bring. 
 
 May bring, should bring, might 
 bring. 
 j If I bring ; bringing ; brought. 
 
 Trdgo isto na memoria. Eaca-a como agora se trazem. 
 Que accusacao trazeis ? Traz fazendas prohibidas ? 
 Trdga-me. Este vento traz ch&va. Trouxerdo os ramos, 
 Trazei "dma pouca d'agua. O auctor trouxe muitos ex- 
 empios. Henrique trazia sua descendeneia dos G-ddos, 
 Importa que eu as traga. Edi elle e trouxe-o. Vendo o 
 cestinho, mandou lima das criadas trazer-W^o. Tragdmos 
 a Area, Quando os tiver trazido dois dias. Trdga-110- 
 lo. Trouxe tiido ? Trazendo no bico urn ramo, Trdze- 
 m'o para comer. Trazei-me ca vosso irmao, 
 
 He hears that in mind, Make my trousers as they 
 are now worn. The man was carrying contraband goods. 
 That wind will bring rain. The orator or ought forward 
 examples. He brought them to Adam, Bring me hot 
 water. Bring us some wine. He went and brought them. 
 If I do not bring him, I will pay you 50 dollars. He 
 will not bring an accusation. Has he brought the wine ? 
 I ordered him to bring the basket. He must bring the 
 books. Let us fetch the water. Bring it to me to drink, 
 Bearing laurel. Tell him to bring the horse. 
 
128 
 
 LESSON CXXVIII. 
 
 YALEK TO BE WOKTH, AVAIL. 
 
 Valho, vales, vale ou val ; vale- 
 
 mos, -eis, -em. 
 Valia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -feis, -fao. 
 Vali, -este, -eu ; -emos, -estes, 
 
 -erao. 
 Valera, -as, -a. Valerei, -as, -a, 
 
 etc. 
 Valha, -as. Valeria. Valesse, etc. 
 
 Se valer, valendo, valido. 
 
 Am worth, art — , is — , are — , 
 
 etc. 
 Was — , wast — , was — . 
 Was — , wast — , was — . 
 
 Had been — . Shall be — . 
 
 May be — . Should be — . Might 
 
 be—. 
 If I be — . Being — . Been — . 
 
 O saber nao vale na praca. Vale mais. Valia o vi- 
 nho muito. Nao vdlem cem prazeres um dos seus des- 
 gostos. A terra vale 400 siclos de prata. Pelo preco 
 que ella vale. Vdlha-me Deus ! Nao vale a pena. Elles 
 se valido dos meios. Tanto vales quanto has. Valer-se 
 do frio. Devemos valer aos desgra9ados. Yaleu-me neste 
 aperto. Se o negocio valia a pena. Valei-me aos des- 
 maios. Mais valeis vos que miiitos passaros. A minha 
 penna nao vale nada. Valer-se de todos os meios. Vale 
 mais um passaro na mao do que dois yoando. 
 
 Wit won't sell in the streets. Wine is valuable now. 
 What is that bit of land worth ? Better late than never. 
 Wine is worth a great deal now. It is not worth while 
 to go to bed. These excuses are worth nothing. It is 
 really good for nothing. I avail myself of my friend. It 
 would be worth a large sum of money. The house was 
 worth more than the garden. Blankets to protect us 
 from cold. These peaches are valueless. It ivill be valu- 
 able. I avail myself of all the means. It is better. If 
 the profit is worth the labour. That old house is not 
 worth a sovereign. 
 
129 
 
 LESSON CXXIX. 
 
 VER — TO SEE. 
 
 Vejo, ves, ve ; vemos, vedes, veem. 
 Via, vias, via ; viamos, vfeis, viao. 
 Vi, viste, viu ; vimos, vistes, virao. 
 Vira, as, a, etc. Verei, as, a, etc. 
 Veja, as, a, etc. Yeria, as, a, etc. 
 
 Visse, etc. 
 Se vir ; vendo, visto. Ye, vede. 
 
 See, seest, sees. 
 
 Was seeing. 
 
 Saw, etc. 
 
 Had seen. Shall see. 
 
 May see. Should see. Might 
 
 see. 
 If I see ; seeing, seen. See. 
 
 Vejo homens. Tu o viste. En o vi. Elles virao as 
 obras. Nunca vi. Pelo que vejo. Como ve agora ? Nao 
 ha quern o veja. Sem ver ninguem. Vi "dma luz. Ja se 
 ve. Tu creste porque me viste. Logo que eu tiver visto. 
 Vamos vendo. Viu-se niinca cousa similhante ? Veja- 
 mos. Creio que foi ver a irma. Visto* a escassez de 
 cereaes. Ella ha de eytimar muito ve-\o. A meu ver. 
 Pode verse hoje o museu ? Desejo «;e-los antes de par- 
 tir. Veja se esta em casa. Se eu o tivesse visto. Tenho- 
 o visto passeiar. Ter o gosto de ver. Yai ver mundo. 
 
 I see the houses. He sees me. In order to see the 
 city. I have not seen the city. So far as I see, he is 
 honest. How did you see? Without my seeing it. 
 "Without their seeing me. As soon as I have seen him, 
 I shall go home. They saw him writing. They went to 
 see the world. I shall see him. We must see them, be- 
 fore we leave. Look at my hand. If I see him not, I 
 shall not go. I saw the queen. Can the church he seen 
 to-day ? Gro and see. I believe the countess has gone 
 to see her son. I shall see them to-morrow. To have 
 seen. 
 
 Visto" in the sense of "seeing" or " in consequence of." 
 
130 
 LESSON" CXXX. 
 
 IREEGTJLAE TERBS IN IE. 
 
 1. Oir changes g mioj in first pers. sing. pres. ind.; fug£r, ftijo. 
 
 2. Chrir drops the u, as distinguir, distingo. 
 
 3. 1? in the penultimate often becomes i ; sentrr, sinto. 
 
 4. Dormir makes durmo; pedir, pego; ouvir, ouqo ; medir, meqo. 
 
 Distingo facilmente a differenca. Consigo o meu in- 
 tento. Persigo o inimigo. Nao prosigo o argumento. 
 fiu o sigo, Siga-me. Dirijo a educacao d'este menino. 
 Exijo pagamento todas as semanas. Fiijo da tentacao. 
 Sinto muito. Assinto as condicoes. Consinto em fazer o 
 que me propoe. Dissinto da opiniao da maioria. Pre- 
 sinto os perigos. Nao confiro o titulo. Desfiro a es- 
 pada. Nao/m? ninguem. Sempre prefiro o cafe, ite- 
 /iro este phenomeno a mesma causa. Transfiro a leitura 
 para aruanha. rei que eu sirvo. 
 
 I do not distinguish colours. Dress me, if you please. 
 I follow them easily. I attain (conseguir) the same re- 
 sult. I follow (perseguir) the chase. I prosecute the 
 enterprise. I do not assent to the terms. I consent 
 with reluctance. I dissent from the opinions of the 
 chamber. I foresee violent revolutions. I confer the 
 bishopric on his sod. I unfurl the sails. I strike him 
 on the head. I prefer tea to coffee. I refer this effect 
 to its true cause. I postpone (transferir) the meeting 
 till Monday. The Queen whom I serve is Victoria. I 
 warn the boys of the danger. I turn this water into 
 steam. I divert the youth from bis studies. He says 
 that I pervert the sense. I do not subvert anything. 
 
131 
 LESSON CXXXI. 
 
 IEEEGTTLAE TEEES IK IE. 
 
 Those having u before b, d, g, 1, m, p, s, in the infinitive, change u 
 into o in the second and third, pers. sing, and in the third plur. 
 prescind.; also in the second pers. sing, of imper. : as acudir, anstver, 
 help ; bulfr, move ; cuspir, spit ; consumir, consume ; construfr, 
 ' build; destrufr, destroy ; engulir, swallow ; fugir, flee ; saeudir 
 shake ; sumir, lose ; tossir, cough ; subir, mount, rise. 
 
 O navio acode ao leme. Acodes a Joao. Os cavallos 
 acodem a espora. Acode tu com a respdsta. O vento 
 bole nos arvoredos. Nao buldmos n'isso. As folhas bd- 
 lem com vento. A capa cospe a chiiva. O homem cospe 
 miiito. As niivens cospem raios. Uns consomem as noites 
 em estudos. O fogo consome a lenha. O imperador 
 construe palacios e templos. tJma onda engole a nau. 
 Estes pobres engolem todas as affrontas. s F6ge o tempo. 
 Tu. foges a biz. O pe mefoge. Ella foge de mim. Os 
 cavallos fogem. As tempestades sacodem as grandes 
 arvores. 
 
 The horse answers the spur. Thou helpest Antonio. 
 Answer the bell quickly. The breeze shakes the leaves. 
 Tell him not to move in that affair. The cloud gives 
 forth rain. He spits all day, and coughs all night. The 
 philosopher consumes his nights in labour. The fire con- 
 sumes all things. The engineer constructs new fortresses. 
 The spendthrift consumes (engulir) all his capital. He 
 flees from the field of battle. They flee from dangers. 
 Time flies rapidly. He shakes the branches of the tree. 
 The horses shake off the riders. The moon sets. The 
 soldier mounts the ladder. The sailors mount the mast, 
 An idea comes into (subir) my mind. 
 
132 
 
 LESSON CXXXII. 
 CONDTJZlR— conduct, conduce— INDUZlR, etc. 
 
 Conduce, conducest, conduces. 
 
 Condiizo, condtizes, conduz ; con- 
 
 duzimos, conduzis, conduzem. 
 Conduzia, -fas, -ia; -laraos, -feis, 
 
 -lao. 
 Conduzi, -iste, -iu ; -imos, -istes, 
 
 -frao- 
 Concluzi'ra, -iras, -ira, etc. Con- 
 
 duzirei -as, -a, etc. 
 
 Conduced, was conducing. 
 Conduced, did conduce. 
 Had conduced, shall conduce. 
 
 O piloto conduz o navfo ao porto. A dieta conduz 
 nniito para a boa saude. Elle me induziu a deixar a 
 casa. A Africa produz elephantes. ^ A fome reduziu os 
 cercados a se darem ao inimigo. Elle induzira o rapaz 
 em erro. Segredos perpetuos indiizem suspeita. Se elle 
 introdnzir est» moda. A velhice nos reduz a meninos. 
 Traduzido. Um traidor guia poz-nos um atalho para 
 conduztr-nos a sitio onde estava o inimigo emboscado. 
 Esta reduzido a mendicidade. A molestia ameaca reduzir- 
 vos a miseria. 
 
 I shall lead the ship into port. Repose conduces to 
 recovery. The boy induced his friend to steal. The island 
 produces rich fruits. I shall translate this work into 
 Portuguese. His singular conduct excited the suspicion 
 of his friends. The man will be reduced to misery in his 
 old age. A terrible earthquake had reduced the castle to 
 ruins. The volume is translated The guide led the 
 soldiers into an ambuscade. Hunger will make the enemy 
 surrender. The countess should introduce the fashion. 
 Old age reduced him to childhood. Reduced to obedience. 
 
133 
 
 LESSON CXXXIII. 
 
 IE — TO GO. 
 
 Vou, vais, vai; vamos, ides, vao. 
 la, fas, ia ; iamos, feis, fao. 
 Fiii, foste, foi ; fomos, fostes, 
 
 -ram. 
 Fora, as, a. Irei, iras, ira, etc. 
 Va, as, a. Iria, as, a. Fosse. 
 Se for, indo, ido. 
 
 G-o, goest, goes. 
 Was going. 
 Went, did go. 
 
 Had gone. Shall go. 
 
 May go, should go. might go. 
 
 If I go, going : e-or 
 
 gone. 
 
 Eu vou, senhor. Para onde vds ? Vou pesa-la. Vou 
 mostrar-lhe. Elle vdi ao campo. Ella vdi para casa. 
 Vdmos para nossa casa. Vdmos a casa de Deus. Yd ver 
 que in e. Ja sefoi elle ? Vdmos. Elle ia adiante delles. 
 Nao iremos pelos campos. Vdi com elles. Vase. Ao 
 tempo que eilas ido. Vdi-te. Vase embora. ~Va. Queres 
 ir com este homem ? Irei. O rei vos nao ha de deixar 
 ir. Nos havemos de ir. Se vieres comigo, irei. Ide, 
 dai as novas a meus irmaos para que vao a Galilea. E/oi 
 com elle Simeao. Aonde fostes ? Nao vds la. 
 
 I am going. Go and see who it is. Go and open the 
 door. When are you go ing ? I have to go. They will not go. 
 The fire does not burn well. They went home. Go away. 
 I shall go to-morrow. They are going to build a bridge. 
 "Will you go ? I will go. He is going to the theatre. 
 He must go. Where does the steamer go ? Do not go so 
 fast. We went immediately. Let us go down directly. Shall 
 we go before dinner ? They ivould go, if they could. They 
 have gone. It is time to go to bed. I am going to show 
 you my watch. He ordered him to go. The governor 
 will let you go. Let us go and bathe in the sea. 
 
134 
 
 LESSON CXXXIV. 
 
 PEDlE- 
 
 Peco, pedes, pede ; pedimos, 
 
 pedis, pedem. 
 Pedia, -ias, -ia ; -iamos, -ieis, -iao. 
 Pedi, -iste, -fu; -imos, -istes, 
 
 -irao. 
 Pedira, -as, -a. Pedirei, -as, -a, etc. 
 Pe^a. Pediria. Pedisse. 
 Se pedir, pedindo, pedido. 
 
 -TO ASK. 
 Ask, askest, asks. 
 
 Asked, was asking. 
 Asked, did ask. 
 
 Had asked ; shall ask. 
 May, should, might ask. 
 If I ask ; asking ; asked. 
 
 Pego-lhe que se assente. Peco perdao. Peco-\\iQ por 
 favor. Pe'co-lhe que demore alguns dias. Peco-Yhe mil 
 perdoes. Este negocio pe de prudencia. Pedimos o que 
 se nos deve. Pedi, e dar-se-ha. Todo o que pede, re- 
 cebe. Se seu filho lhe pedir pao. Elle lhe proinetteu 
 que lhe daria tiido o que lhe pedisse. INao sabeis o que 
 pedis. Pe'ca-a. com fe. Ate agora nao pedistes nada. 
 Pediu-me o desculpasse pela sua conducta. Nao ha mais 
 que pedir. O pai dara bens aos que lh'os pedir em. 
 Pedindo-lhe alguma cousa. 
 
 I heg you will not stay. He legs pardon. He asks 
 him for what is due. This business demands caution. 
 If the girl asks him for a book, he will give it her. He 
 promises that he will give all she asks. Peter will ask 
 them for it. He does not know what he asks. There is 
 nothing more to be desired. Ask it of the king, and 
 he will give it to you. He asks a favour of us now. He 
 said, I heg pardon. Will you ask him for it ? He gives 
 to those that will ask. Asking. Haviug asked. If I 
 should ask. They may beg pardon, He will not ask. 
 
135 
 
 LESSON" CXXXY. 
 
 RIB, — TO LAUGH. 
 
 Rao, ris, ri ; rimos, rides, rieni. 
 Ria, as, a ; iamos, feis, fao. 
 Ri, risfce, riu ; imos, istes, irao. 
 Rira, as, a. Rirei, as, a. 
 Ria. Riria. Risse* 
 Se rir, rindo, rido. 
 
 Laugh, laughest, lauglis. 
 Laughed, was laughing. 
 Laughed, did laugh. 
 Had laughed- Shall laugh. 
 May laugh; should; might. 
 If I laugh ; laughing ; laughed. 
 
 ILlle se pode rir da vinganca. Joao afogou-se de rir. 
 Rimos ate alta noite. Como os padres de S. Roque hao 
 de Wr-se ! A clara jioite se lhe ri. Democrito de tudo 
 ria. Se elle rir. Elles rirao. Por que se riu elle ? O 
 que tendo ouvido Sara, se poz a rir. $u nao me ri. 
 Porque, tu riste-te ? Abrahao riu-se. Yds vos rireis. 
 A primavera esta rindo nos jardins. As rosas se vem 
 rindo delicidsas. Ha tempo de chorar e tempo^ de rir. 
 Ou se agaste, ou se ria, nao achara descanco. IJma voz 
 que bradava e ria. 
 
 He laughs continually. Laughing and talking. How 
 he will laugh at the story ! If he laughs to-day, he will 
 cry to-morrow. The flowers were smiling in the gardens. 
 Two years ago, I should have laughed with the rest. 
 Why do you laugh so immoderately? The little boy, 
 smiling, said to his mother, " I cannot help laughing." 
 When I heard that, I began to laugh. Your old friend 
 laughs at everything. If I had seen him, I should not 
 have laughed. We were laughing^ when he came in. I 
 shall laugh at you. I do not laugh. They were smiling. 
 
136 
 
 LESSON CXXXYI. 
 SAHIK, or SAIB — to go out, be like. 
 
 Go out, goest out, goes out. 
 
 Saio, sais or saes, sai or sae ; 
 
 safinos, sais, saem. 
 Saia, -fas, -fa ; -famos, -ieis, -fao. 
 Sai, -iste, -m ; -fmos, -istes, -irao. 
 Saira. Sairei. 
 Saia, Sairia. Saisse. 
 
 Was going out. 
 Went out, did go out. 
 Had gone out. Shall go out. 
 May — . Should — , Might- 
 
 Se sair. Saindo. Saido. I If I — . Going — . Gone. 
 
 Saio da escola. Muitas rezes o vi sair. Sde a seu 
 pai. Os signaes que no ceo saem. Saia o sol sobre a 
 terra. Nao saireis das portas. Ao sair do sol. Lazaro 
 sde para fora. Acaba de sair. Sae da area. Saiu pois 
 ]S"oe. Sairao todos os animaes. Eu sairei com meu pai. 
 Saidmos fora ao campo. Logo que o rapaz se foi, saiu 
 David do logar onde estava. Sairao da barca. Elle or- 
 deuou que todos saissem. Dize-lhe que deixe sair os 
 filhos. Depois disto sairemos. Ao sair. Elle saiu, e foi 
 a um logar deserto. 
 
 He comes out of school at 4. They go out every day. 
 At the rising of the moon. Come forth. Mr. S. has just 
 gone out. Then John ivent out. He will go out with his 
 father. The queen ordered all to go out. We shall not 
 go out. Both having gone out. He is like his mother. 
 As soon as he had gone out from the presence of the king. 
 Without their leaving the house. As soon as the young 
 man had left the presence of the emperor. My friend 
 having gone out, I must stay in the house. As soon as 
 the boy had gone, I went out of the room. 
 
137 
 
 LESSON CXXXVIL 
 
 SERYIR— TO SERVE. 
 
 Sirvo, serves, serve ; servimos, 
 
 servis, servem. 
 Servia, -ias, -ia; -iamos, -ieis, -iao. 
 Servi, -iste, -iu; -imos, -istes, -irao. 
 Servira, -as, -a. Servirei, -as, -a. 
 Sirva. Serviria. Servisse, 
 Se servir, servindo, servido. 
 
 Serve, servest, serves. 
 
 Was serving. 
 
 Served, did serve. 
 
 Had served. Shall serve, [serve. 
 
 May serve. Should serve. Might 
 
 If I serve ; serving, served. 
 
 Dens de queni sou, e a quern sirvo. Deus a quern tu 
 serves. Jacob serviu sete annos. Eu sirvo a lei. Se al- 
 guem me serve, siga-me. O mais velho servira ao mais 
 mo90. Os servos o servirao. Sirva-se de mini sera ce- 
 remonia. Quer que lhe sirva um pouco ? ^De que serve 
 isso ? Desejo servir os meus amigos. Elle serviu na 
 guerra. Sei servir a mesa. Atrevo-me a pedir a Y. S. 
 que se sirva conceder-me um momento. Poderei servir 
 de secretario. IJma mesa bem servida. Espera que o 
 Sr. K. se servira perdoar-lhe esta importunidade. 
 
 The king whom I serve. Henry served four years in 
 the army. If any one will serve me, let him follow me. 
 Thou knowest how I served thee. I am very glad to have 
 an opportunity of serving you. I hope that you may 
 serve me well. The lad can wait at table. I shall serve 
 as guide. I hope you will deign to grant me five 
 minutes' audience. I have served him four years. The 
 table of your friend is well served. Make use of me, 
 when you please. If he serves. Your brother is serving 
 in the Crimea. I am always happy to serve my friends. 
 
Subo, sdbes,sobe; subimos, subis. 
 
 sdbem. 
 
 Subia, fas, ia ; lamos, ieis, fao. 
 Subi, iste, m ; fmos, istes, irao. 
 Subira, as, a. Subirei, as, a, etc, 
 Suba, as, a, etc. Subiria, etc 
 
 Subisse, etc. 
 Se subir, subindo, subido. 
 
 138 
 LESSON CXXXVIII. 
 
 SUBIR— TO GO UP, EAISE. 
 
 Go up ; goest up, goes up. 
 
 Was going up. 
 
 Went up, did go up. 
 
 Had gone up. Shall go up. 
 
 May — . Should — . Might. 
 
 If I — . Going — . Gone — . 
 
 Subia-lhe a cor a face. A liia sobe, e o sol desce. O 
 vinho sobe a cabeca. Subia o fumo. Subindo pelo Tejo 
 acima. JNao subiu ao piilpito. Jorge Quarto subiu ao 
 throno em 1820. Subiu a urn monte. O niarinheiro su- 
 biu ao topo do mastro. Q.uer subira esta arvore ? O 
 globo subiu ao ar. Subiu-\he ao coracao o desejo de rei- 
 nar. Subirei, ao ceo. Subiste ao alto. TTma fera que 
 sobe do abysmo. Os anjos subindo e descendo. Gruardae- 
 vos de subir ao monte. Subirei. Nao siiba todo o povo. 
 Se disserem : u Subi para ca," subamos. 
 
 I go up tbe ladder. They go up the steps. He teas 
 mounting the hill. The colour mounts into my face. The 
 sun was rising. That brandy gets into my head. The 
 smoke will ascend. Going up the river. The preacher 
 had not mounted the pulpit. The Emperor Alexander II. 
 came to the throne this year. I shall climb the tree. 
 Corn rises in price every day. The wine does not amount 
 to more than a dollar a bottle. The king raised the 
 general to the highest dignities. The soldier will mount 
 the wall. Fortune raises some, and lowers others. An 
 idea arose in my mind. He rises daily in public esteem. 
 
139 
 
 Venho, vens, vem ; vimos, vin- 
 
 des, vem. 
 Yinha, -as, -a ; -amos, -eis, -ao. 
 Vim, vieste, veio ; viemos, viestes, 
 
 vierao. 
 Viera, -as, -a. Virei, -as, -a, etc. 
 Venha, -as, -a. Viria. Viesse, 
 
 ect. 
 Se vier, vmdo, vido. 
 
 LESSON CXXXIX. 
 
 YIB, — TO COME. 
 
 Come, comest, comes. 
 
 Was coming. 
 Came, did come. 
 
 Had come. Shall come. 
 
 May come. Should come. 
 
 Might come. 
 If I come ; coming ; come. 
 
 Venho da^igreja. E certo que vem. Vem bem a tempo. 
 D'onde vem V. S.f vento vem deste lado. ~N6s vimos 
 can9ados. Yds vindes. Jiilgo que vird. Dizem que veio. 
 Elle disse que viria. Na semana que vem. Venha ca. 
 Nao duvida que venha. Temo que nao venha. Gdsto que 
 viesse. Em vmdo a primavera. Temo que nao viesse. 
 Vem a saber-se. Eu soube que elle viera. Duvidei se 
 elle viria. Quando vier o inverno. Vindo a noite. Du- 
 vido se tera vindo. Logo que vier. Se alguem vier, di- 
 ga-lhe. ]STds a veremos, se elle vier. Vierao todos. 
 
 He comes from town. It is not certain that he comes. 
 The man came in time. The rain comes from the south. 
 I think she will come. They came to words. They say 
 the Duke came yesterday. They said that they would 
 come. I don't doubt his coming. I fear the post will 
 not come in time. Tell him to come. They would like 
 him to come. He vjill come to-morrow. Next month. 
 They came yesterday. Will you come witb me ? I came 
 by the steamer. When they come, I will pay them. 
 Letters came by the steamer. I shall see them, if they 
 come in time. 
 
140 
 LESSON CXL. 
 
 PEESEFT PARTICIPLES.* 
 
 Nao podendo viver. 
 
 Ecitdndo expressoes baixas. 
 
 A sua cabega naddndo em sau- 
 
 As ovelhas andao saltdndo. 
 
 Not being able to lire. 
 Avoiding low expression!?. 
 His head swimming in blood. 
 
 The sheep went leaping. 
 
 Tratdndo-me pelo meu n6me. ] Addressing me by name. 
 Promettendo-lkes rfcas offertas. | Promising them rich gifts. 
 
 Escrevendo a algum amigo. Communicdndo-lla' os. Os 
 zephiros respirdndo brandamente. As mulheres estao 
 sthnpre ou jtdndo, ou fazendo debiixos para as borda- 
 diiras, ou dobrdndo ricas sedas. Cupido, batendo as azas, 
 andava vodndo a roda da mai. Encontrdndo-os nas rnar- 
 gens do Douro. Alfonso, sabendo da vinda de Iiisuf mar- 
 chou a encontra-lo. As vantagens que obteria invadindo 
 aquella provincia. Pedindo perdao ao ceo. Tomdndo a 
 mao. Ficou imniovel olhdndo para o anciao. Levdndo 
 a taca. 
 
 Regulating the administration, and distributing justice. 
 Carrying the terror of its arms. Leaving this province 
 subdued. Saying these words. Doing this. Eolloicing 
 the windings of the stream. Making due allowance for, 
 etc. liaising the glass to the lips. The porter went run- 
 ning to the cell. Finding him assassinated. He passed 
 hours and hours praying. In writing this book. Gaining 
 time. Hindering him from returning (subj.). Hearing 
 this name. Entering the house. Opening the door. The 
 man, knowing the arrival of the steamer. 
 
 * Undergo no inflection. 
 
141 
 LESSON CXLI. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLES. # 
 
 Meu amddo Telemaco. 
 
 A eriabarca9ao ja concluida. 
 
 Antes cle subjugddos. 
 
 Depois de subniettida a cidade. 
 
 A victoria obtida pelo rei. 
 
 Veneido, pediu e obteve a paz. 
 
 My beloved Telemacus. 
 The vessel already finished. 
 Before being subdued. 
 After the city's submission. 
 The victory obtained by the king. 
 Conquered, he asked and ob- 
 tained peace. 
 
 A boca meio aberta como que queria acabar a palavra 
 comecdda. TJma ilha cercdda de mar. Tendo elle assim 
 fallddo. TJma guerra felizmente termindda. Lopes se 
 viu constrangido a ir buscar urn asylo. Cartas assignddas 
 pelo imperador. exercito capitaneddo por Pellissier. 
 O 111690 Scipiao, chamddo depois o Africano. Os Beberes, 
 antes de subjugddos pelos Arabes, seguiao diversas reli- 
 gioes. Ordonho, carregddo de despojos, voltou a Leao. 
 Os filhos do Teifallecido. Urn acontecimento inesperddo. 
 Tochas accesas. 
 
 Sebastopol surrounded by the sea. My dear friends. 
 In spite of being well garrisoned. The hill known by the 
 name of " Mamelon vert." The fleets laden with the 
 spoils of the world. Aivake, with my eyes open, I saw 
 Lopes blood-stained. Actuated by opposite feelings. Be- 
 fore the suppression of the monastery. With his mouth 
 half opened, he stood before the king. The conqueror, 
 laden with spoils, returned to Lisbon. Conquered, he 
 evacuated the town. The oration being concluded. He 
 read the proclamation signed by the emperor. 
 
 * When used actively as part of a compound tense, they undergo 
 no inflection. (See p. 143.) Used passively, or after the verb " to be," 
 or as adjectives, they agree hi gender and number with the noun to 
 which they refer. 
 
 t Observe this singular idiom. 
 
142 
 LESSON CXLII. 
 
 FOEM LIKE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Chegddo o tempo. 
 Consultddos os capitaes. 
 Tomddas as redeas. 
 Passddos tres annos. 
 FaJtdndo-lhe as fdrcas. 
 Ditas estas cousas. 
 
 The time being come. 
 The captains being asked. 
 The reins being taken. 
 Three years afterwards. 
 His strength failing. 
 These tilings being said. 
 
 Concluida esta expedite Sabida esta resposta. 
 Morta uma parte da guarnicao, e captiva outra, a for- 
 taleza foi reduzida a um montao de ruinas. Obtidas 
 novas vantagens, voltou a Cordova. Acdbddas as provas 
 piiblicas, etc. Acabdda a caedda, voltarao ambos. Paci- 
 Jicddo e ordenddo tudo, preparou-se para a guerra. Pas- 
 sddos quatro annos, elle voltou a Hispanha. Feita esta 
 oracao mental, o bom do chanceller apagou as duas tochas. 
 Tomdda a resolucao de que fallei. Passddos alguns dias. 
 Basgddos os vestidos. Tomdda a fortaleza. 
 
 Toledo being taken, all the chief towns fell into the 
 hands of the Saracens. Having taken the reins of go- 
 vernment. This answer being known, the town surren- 
 dered. Some months having passed. The revolution 
 ended, society breathes again. That done, I shall return. 
 Which being heard, Joseph wept. Dinner ordered 
 one day. At last, after four days, we left Semis. His 
 clothes being torn in the battle, he fled naked from the 
 field. New victories being gained, he mounted the 
 throne. The war being finished, the army came home. 
 
143 
 LESSOK CXLIII. 
 
 PARTICIPLES USED ACTIVELY. 
 
 Acreditddo,* agradecido. 
 Cangddo, confiddo 
 Hdmem cangddo. 
 Esquecido, experimentado. 
 Divertido, suffocado. 
 Feito isto, acabada a ceia. 
 
 Having believed, thanked. 
 Having tired, trusted. 
 A man who tires others. 
 Forgetful, experienced. 
 Amusing, suffocating. 
 Having done this, supper ended. 
 
 Ammo agradecido, Palavras agradecidas. Hdmem 
 atrevido no inar. O soldado arriscddo, Urn homem ca- 
 lado. As cangddas esckd&s. F}lle, conhecido da sua culpa, 
 Homem consider ado no que faz, Muito forte e deter mi- 
 nddo a soffrer. Urn genio dissimulddo. O seu amigo e 
 homem bem entendido. As jingidas gentes. Elleserao 
 lidos e versados nas Eseritiiras. Um animo ousddo. E 
 tb&oparecido com seu pae. E presumido da sua sciencia. 
 A idade vai-me fazendo esquecido. Durante boras esque- 
 
 A grateful souL A soldier daring in battle. The 
 man that tires. The sailor rushing into danger. The 
 fatiguing march. They, aware of their faults. This is a 
 man who considers things. Determined to die, he left the 
 house. A spirit prone to deceive. He has a daring mind. 
 She is like her mother. An amusing piece. These suffo- 
 cating nights of summer. The word of an experienced 
 man. A well-read man. The new comedy is very 
 amusing. Tried fidelity. Words thanking. He was a 
 silent man, but a daring soldier. She is very like her 
 father. 
 
 * Many of these adjectives are used both actively and passively, 
 e.g., " Homem cangddo" might mean a tired man, or a tiresome man. 
 
 f " Saving done this," is often rendered passively, as if " This 
 being done." 
 
144 
 LESSON CXLIY. 
 
 PARTICIPLES USED PASSIVELY. 
 
 Urn homem ferido. 
 
 Uma muXhcrfertda. 
 
 llomens fertdo.s,mu\]ieresferidas. 
 
 Os soldados que tenho aqui fert- 
 
 dos.* 
 Os soldados que tenho ferido.* 
 Acredifddo, agradecido. 
 Cangddo, conjiddo. 
 
 A wounded man. 
 
 A wounded woman. 
 
 Wounded men, wounded women. 
 
 The icounded soldiers I have here. 
 
 The soldiers I have wounded. 
 Being believed, thanked. 
 Being tired, bold. 
 
 Logar povoddo. Campos semeddos. O beneficio 
 agradecido. Uma empresa arriscdda. Uma noite caldda. 
 Eecebi uma resposta determindda. Uma mdrte dissimu- 
 lada. Uma obra bem entendlda. Lagrimas fngidas. 
 Uma esposa rica e bem parecida. territorio cercddo 
 pelo oceano. A porcao liabitdda pelos Celticos. As for- 
 cas capitaneddas por Scipiao, chamddo depois o Africano. 
 Deixando suhjugdda esta provincia. A adiantdda con- 
 quista. Um illimitddo poder. resultddo d'isto. Os 
 proscriptos. So os eruditos sabiao. 
 
 Populous places. Kindnesses appreciated. A hold 
 undertaking. A silent wood. He sent me a decisive reply. 
 A feigned illness. A building well planned. Situated on 
 the verge of Europe and defended by the Pyrenees. Beasts 
 accustomed to carnage. The facts contained in this letter. 
 He returned, accompanied by a friend, a person already 
 Icnoivn to the reader. The rector half asleep. The inha- 
 bitants tired of suffering. A battle gained. Persons re- 
 puted happy. The emperor has unlimited power. Be 
 kind enough to send a definite answer. 
 
 * The great difference is produced by ferido,? agreeing with sol- 
 dados. The Portuguese does not follow the French syntax in such 
 forms as "La lettre quej'ai ecrife." 
 
145 
 
 LESSON CXLY. 
 
 PARTICIPLES WITH TER E HAVEE. 
 
 Tenho ouvzdo fallar de — 
 Depois cle o termos comprddo. 
 Tenho escripto lima carta. 
 Os soldados que tenho ferido.* 
 Tern cahido muita chuva. 
 Tern havido nraitos naufragios. 
 
 I have heard speak of — 
 
 After our having bought it. 
 
 I have tvritten a letter. 
 
 The soldiers I have wounded. 
 
 Much rain has fallen. 
 
 There have been many wrecks. 
 
 Tenho acabddo a licao. Ella havia acabddo a tarefa. 
 Depois de haver dado varias instruccoes. Elle tinha es- 
 tudddo na sua infancia. Tendo completes ceni annos. 
 Os E/Omanos tinhao sujeitddo tiido. Scipiao se gabava 
 de nao ter deixddo urn so Carthaginez na Hispanha. 
 Elle tem-se envolvido naquelle negocio. Os dois tinhao. 
 obedecido. Elle havia-se assentddo n'uma grande pedra. 
 Elle tinha adquirido a experiencia. que tinha visto e 
 ouvido tinha-lhe ensinddo a moderar os seus desejos. 
 Tenho-lhe escripto muitas cartas. 
 
 He has finished the lesson. The boy has completed 
 his task. After having studied the Latin language. I 
 had written four letters. What they had seen and heard 
 had taught them to moderate their desires. They have 
 not acquired fame. The youth had subdued his will to 
 reason. He had involved himself in difficulties. To have 
 given many years to business. He has not left a single 
 enemy. The general had not acquired experience. The 
 troops had not obeyed. The boy had studied geography 
 four years. I have written three letters in Portuguese. 
 
 * The participle in a relative clause does not agree with the 
 noun to which it relates, unless it actually qualifies that noun. 
 The Portuguese differs from the French rule as to the past participle. 
 (See p. 147). 
 
146 
 
 LESSON CXLYI. 
 
 PARTICIPLES WITH SER, ESTAK, E EICAR. 
 
 Sou amado, atndda. 
 Somos amados, amdclas. 
 E9tou ferido,ferida. 
 Estamos feridos, fend as. 
 Fico-lhe muito obrigddo, — a. 
 Ficuinos-lhe agradecidos, — as. 
 
 I am loved. 
 We are loved. 
 I am icou tided. 
 We are iron tided. 
 I am much obliged. 
 We are much obliged. 
 
 Sou avisddo. Sou avisdda. Estou convencida. S'eras 
 cliamddo. Seriao cliamddos. Elle teria sido cliamddo. 
 Era, emfim, cliegddo o tempo. As accusacoes sao exa- 
 gerddas. A lingua Latina era ensindda por bons mestres. 
 A Peninsula estivera dividida em duas grandes provin- 
 cias. Elles erao considerddos como auxiliares. Esta 
 indigndda. Estou convidddo. Estou constipddos. Eicou 
 muito sentido com as novas. Os montanhezes resistirao, 
 mas o resultado foi o serem exterminddos. Ella ficava 
 convencida. u estiixn. junto com elle. A lingua Portu- 
 gueza e derivdda da Latina. 
 
 They are informed. The soldier is wounded. I was 
 called. The men were called. The women were called. 
 She had been called. The time was come. The Portu- 
 guese language was taught in England. England had 
 been divided. Occupations in which I am involved. The 
 business is concluded. Hugo was hilled in battle. His 
 scruples had been completely removed. His last words 
 were uttered in a firm tone. The sad distinction of being 
 feared and liated. Being ashed by the king. I was con- 
 vinced. He was considered as a friend. I was invited. 
 
 * After these verbs, and all passive forms, the participle agrees 
 as an adjective with the subject of the verb. But the participle, when 
 auxiliary, is not inflected, e.g., "Ella tern sido amdda" 
 
147 
 LESSON CXLVII. 
 
 IRBEGULAB PABTICTPLES USED ACTIVELY, 
 
 Tenho escripto lima carta. 
 (Tenho lima carta escripta.) 
 Elles teem gdsto dinheiro. 
 Tenho pdgo o trabalho. 
 Havia ganhddo * experiencia. 
 Tenho aberto as cartas. 
 Tenho as cartas abertas. 
 
 I have written a letter. 
 (I have a letter written.) 
 They have spent money. 
 I have paid the work. 
 He had gained experience. 
 I have opened the letters. 
 I have the letters open. 
 
 Depois de ter entregue a fortaleza. Os deputados que 
 tinhao eleito. Tendo escripto miiitos livros. Tendo-se 
 entregue com fervor ao esttido. Shnao nao tinha ga- 
 nhddo* muito no commercio que fazia. Entregue a 
 severidade da sua justica. A peste tern morto miiita gente. 
 Ella tinha coberto a mesa com panno. O meu amigo 
 tinha descripto a viagem. £lle tem^desfeito as pazes. 
 O portador tinha entregue a carta. Allies tinhao envolto 
 as^ maos no panno. Tenho gdsto miiito cabedal. Tendo 
 aceito este officio. 
 
 He has written two letters. I have paid the shoemaker. 
 After having given up the fortress, he was put to death. 
 The yellow fever has destroyed many people at Bio. The 
 governor had expended the capital and interest. The 
 poor old man had not gained much in the trade to In- 
 dia. The taking of Sebastopol has opened the eyes of the 
 emperor. I have a letter written, hut not sealed. Your 
 friend has described the voyage. After having gained 
 a large fortune in India, he returned to England. He 
 had spent immense sums. The cholera destroyed many 
 thousands in Madeira in 1856. 
 
 * Also "ganho." 
 
148 
 
 LESSON CXLYIII. 
 
 IEEEGULARS IN AH. 
 
 Quando a carta foi entregue. 
 Anirno, coracuo, piilso quieto. 
 O doente esta sdhy. 
 Urn rfo secco. Uma pessoa se- 
 
 gura. 
 Solto de lingua. Sujeito a lei. 
 
 When the letter was delivered. 
 Quiet mind, heart, pulse. 
 The patient is safe (saved). 
 A dry river. A safe person. 
 
 Loose-tongued. Subject to law. 
 
 Oracao, obra de Deus nmi aceita. Coraeoes bem 
 affectos. TJroa dignidade annexa a sua familia. TJma alma 
 captiva. Luz dispersa. Estou entregue da carta, olhos 
 enxutos. Saiu por lima porta escusa. Uin mandado ex- 
 presso. Fdrto de comer. Urn homem fdrto de honras. 
 Terras igndtas. Hypocrisia sempre infesta a virtude. 
 mar inquieto. Elle e isento de ir a guerra. Pastos 
 juntos deste rio. TJm espirito inquieto. Agua limpa. Ver- 
 dades manifestos. Morto de inedo. TJma cor mixta* Uma 
 planta murcha. Designios occultos. As dividas pdgas. 
 
 An accepted gift. A bishop expelled from his see. That 
 land is exempt. A dry purse is empty. In an unused 
 room. An unknown person. A climate hurtful to the 
 health. By express words. Exempt from his jurisdiction. 
 The garden joined to our house. Pure wheat. Dead with 
 fatigue. Mixed colours. These faded flowers. Hidden 
 thoughts. Troops paid. A loose life. Suspected of mur- 
 der. The wandering pilgrim. The poor man safe, I went 
 out by a forgotten door. An unquiet mind. Alms-giving 
 is a work acceptable to Grod. A few pages annexed to 
 the book. 
 
 Meesta. 
 
149 
 
 LESSON CXLIX. 
 
 IRREGULARS IN ER. 
 
 Ahsolvido de crimes. 
 Dommio absoluto. 
 Corrompido, corrwpto. 
 Envolvido, envolto. 
 Incorrido, incurso. 
 Bern ou mal quisto. 
 
 Absolved of crimes. 
 Absolute dominion. 
 Corrupted, corrupt. 
 Involved ; involved, mixed. 
 Incurred ; subject to. 
 Well or ill thought of. 
 
 Evora foi feita capital da Lusitania. ^lle devia ser 
 ahsolvido. Em absolute/, desordem. Miii attento criado. 
 Homem convicto de caliimnia. miindo esta corrupto. 
 Arvore defendida. Armas defezas. Elle tern escolhido 
 urn logar. Envolvido naquella accusacao. Historias en- 
 voltas em fabulas. Envolto em trevas. Os artigos con- 
 tidos nas folhas. Urn sermao extenso. Tenho incorrido 
 em culpa. Incurso na pena. Tern morrido miiita gente 
 de fome. Uma planta morta. Urn homem perverso. 
 TJma gente pervertida. Estou preso nesta cama. H6- 
 mens resolutos. 
 
 Absolved of sin. Absolute lord. Very obedient ser- 
 vant. He was convicted of theft. The minister is cor- 
 rupt. The forbidden garden. They have chosen a house. 
 A serpent involved in nets. He has incurred punish- 
 ment. Many people have died of fever. Dead water. 
 He has killed the enemy. A depraved man. An aban- 
 doned population. A sheep caught by the wolf. A man 
 resolute in business. Suspended in the air. Her loose 
 hair. A soul absorbed in sorrow. They had defensive 
 arms. He was made chief of the robbers. A pool of 
 stagn ant water. 
 
150 
 LESSON CL. 
 
 IBBEGULABS IK IE. 
 
 Abri'do, aberto. 
 Extinguido, extincto. 
 Incluido, inchiso. 
 Dirigido, directo. 
 Resolvido, resohlto. 
 
 Open. 
 
 Extinguished, extinct. 
 Included, inclosed. 
 Directed, direct. 
 Resolved, resolute. 
 
 ar aberto. Gruerra aberta. Eeridas abertas. Estou 
 abstrdcto. Ideas abstrdctas. Estou afflicto. corpo 
 coberto de pennas. Nocoes confusas. TJm estylo diffuso. 
 Um exercito diffuso. Uma contradic9ao direct a. Em 
 casas distinctas. Uma voz distincta. Diz Cesar que a 
 Grallia e dividida em tres partes. Uma igreja erecta aqui. 
 Uma fonte exhdusta de agua. ]S"iinca extincto sera seu 
 nome. Chamma extinguida. Incluido no niimero. tJma 
 carta inclusa em outra. Elle tinha aberto a porta. Esta 
 vai inclusa na sua. 
 
 The open sea. Open ears. He is absent in mind. 
 They are afflicted. The sky covered with clouds. A dif- 
 fuse discourse. Ideas distinct. A body exhausted of 
 blood. I have interrupted the relations. Our relations 
 are interrupted. He has oppressed me with calumnies. 
 He was oppressed with grief. He is much afflicted. They 
 have confused notions of the subject. That orator has a 
 very distinct voice. He was included in the number of 
 the victims. Several churches were erected here last 
 year. Ireland is ^m^^into four provinces. 
 
151 
 
 LESSON CLL 
 
 PEESONAL INFINITIVE. 
 
 Derxe-os divertir. 
 
 Para se preservdrem. 
 
 Elles, depois de terem assohido. 
 
 No caso de voltdrmos. 
 
 Antes de eu sair da prisao. 
 
 Para sabermos quern era. 
 
 Let them amuse themselves. 
 In order to preserve themselves. 
 They, after having destroyed. 
 In ease of our returning* 
 Before my going out of. 
 In order that we may know who. 
 
 INos so o conhecemos para chordrmos a sua falta, e 
 miiitos desejavao serem sepultados juntainente com elle. 
 Sem irmos buscar outra cousa. Todas as nymphas em si- 
 lencio se inclinavao a prestar ouvidos a Telemaco, e 
 faziao uma especie de meio circulo para melhor o escu- 
 tdrem, e para melhor o verem. Depois de termos admi- 
 rado este espeetaculo. A vinganca levou-os a buscdrem 
 a allianca dos Christaos. Os Mosarabes esqueciao a sua 
 lingua para so falldrem o arabe. Para os alumnos ad- 
 quirirem um conhecimento. 
 
 Vanities which, are far from having the value which 
 is attributed to them. Hence arises the necessity of our 
 describing. Toledo on the approach of the enemy, opened 
 its gates. The inhabitants lost all hope of their being 
 able to resist. On the approach of the Saracens. It 
 was the residence of the sultans, before their taking 
 Constantinople. The Saxons forced the Britons to re- 
 tire. A few hours before my going out of prison. He 
 obliged them to work gratuitously. After paying the 
 bill, we set out. In case of her retur 
 
152 
 
 LESSON CLII. 
 
 PECL'LIAHITIES OF INFINITIVE. 
 
 Muito valoroso 
 
 nidrte. 
 Bdsta urn so vicio para — 
 Nao tanto para temer. 
 A ponto de passdr por, 
 O S'h-des invejados. 
 O mesmo que dizcr que. 
 
 para temer a 
 
 Too brave to fear death. 
 
 One rice is enough to — 
 Not so much to be feared. 
 So much so as to be taken for. 
 Your being envied. 
 The same as to say that. 
 
 Muito pio para encontrdr a morte com horror. Bdsta 
 urn so \io,\o para fazer iniiteis rmiitas virtudes. A morte 
 nao e tanto para temer como os prazeres. Depende uni- 
 eamente da vdssa vontade o serdes invejados em vez de 
 invejosos. Assdz poderoso para produzir. O Creador, 
 aoformd-lo — Qualquer nao precisa senao de se recolher 
 em si mesmo para se convencer de, etc. Urn mero ou- 
 vir-dizer. A verdade e perigosa de dizer-se e desagra- 
 ddvel de ouvir-se. O pensamento e mui limitado para 
 os comprehender. 
 
 Words are too weak to tell my woe. It is too deep 
 for you to find. This expedient is powerful enough 
 to produce the best results. To conquer such an enemy 
 the militia is sufficient. He was on the point of losing 
 his sight. It is enough to enable us to make. Death is 
 not so much to he feared as dishonour. His being en- 
 vied was the cause of his death. The old general was 
 too brave to fear death. The steam was not sufficient 
 to work the ship. One leak is enough to sink the steamer. 
 The language is easy enough to he learned by the stu- 
 dious. 
 
153 
 
 LESSON CLIII. 
 
 PECULIAEITIES OE ENTENTTrVE, 
 
 Passei hdras a chamdr. 
 Um foliar de ventriloquo. 
 Elle ria a horn rir. 
 Dar de comer. 
 Acho que censurar. 
 JBastante jpdra saber que, etc. 
 
 I passed hours in calling. 
 A speech of the ventriloquist. 
 He laughed with all his might. 
 To give something to eat. 
 I find something to blame. 
 Enough to know that, etc. 
 
 Diias d'essas horas passei-as a chamdr* ao Senhor 
 que — Estava all um rapaz a chordr. E para louvdr a 
 Deus ! Estava a chover. Esta um calor de matdr. Os 
 banhos sao inui pequenos para se poder nadar. Nao e 
 seu filho que vejo aleni ajogdr ? Cornea por perder o 
 seu dinheiro. La esta a siia filha a ouvir um aventureiro. 
 Ouco hater. Para viver socegddo. No meu entender. 
 Yx&para ver este ajuntamento de rapazes ! A agua esta 
 a ferver? A saber isso. A ser assim. Auda a mdis 
 anddr. Ao meu ver. Ate nao poder mais. 
 
 It is a heat enough to kill you. He began by eating 
 oranges. In order to live quietly, we must go to the 
 country. In my opinion, the weather is too hot for walk- 
 ing. It was a sight to see such a gathering of troops. 
 The poor girl stood weeping in the street. The old sol- 
 dier laughed with all Ms might. I see a boy playing in 
 the garden. It is not in my power. Is the water boiling ? 
 He spent four hours calling on Grod. I hear some one 
 knocking at the window. He rode at full speed. There 
 is an old sailor begging in the lane. The room is too 
 small for dancing in. 
 
 * Or " clamar.' 
 
154 
 
 LESSON CLIY. 
 
 PAI1A WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 Para viver socegado. 
 Quartos para alugar. 
 Juizo bastante para saber. 
 Para lhe dizer a verdade. 
 Cavallos para vender, 
 lira para ver ! 
 
 In order to live retired. 
 
 Rooms to let. 
 
 Sense enougb to know. 
 
 To tell you tbe trutb. 
 
 Horses to sell. 
 
 It was a sigbt to see ! 
 
 Estamos nos aqui para beber ou para comer ? Para 
 la irmos era mister passarmos por Dijon. Para prevenir 
 a indigestao. Elle acha o\mke\Yopdrajogdr. Basta urn 
 so vicio para fazer inuteis muitas virtiides. Eicaremos 
 para ver a danca ? Quer near para jantdr comigo ? Vou 
 contar para ver se esta todo. Y ... aliiga livros para 
 ler ? You tocar para saber. Os abysmos abriao-se para 
 as receberem. Elle nos da azas para vodrmos. Os 
 auxilios necessarios para um Inglez poder escrever em 
 Erancez. Elle grita para eu pardr. Para eu ir. 
 
 In order to be seen. He has less reason to murmur. 
 To offend no one. Is it not astonishing ? That we may 
 go safely, it is necessary to start soon. It were much to 
 be desired that — How much will it cost me to go by 
 the steamer ? A single instance will serve to show. I 
 shall stay to see the siege. The boat was ready to receive 
 them. The articles needed for a Dutchman ,'to write 
 Greek. Will you remain to dinner with us ? He gave 
 us legs to walk. We were about to sail. I have horses 
 to sell. She has rooms to let. 
 
155 
 LESSON CLY. 
 
 POR WITH INFINITIVE. 
 
 For ser bom. 
 
 Por lhe nao ter sido possfvel. 
 
 Esta por pagdr. 
 
 Quartos por mobilar. 
 
 Quanto se paga por franquear ? 
 
 Sentenciado a mdrte por haver — 
 
 On account of its being good. 
 As it was out of his power. 
 It remains to be paid. 
 Unfurnished rooms. 
 How much is paid for, etc. 
 Sentenced to death for having- 
 
 Yimos um rapaz com a razao totalmente perturbada 
 por haver bebido em demasia. ]STao tarddu miiito em ser 
 castigado por se haver esquecido tanto do que devia a 
 seus pais. Esta por escrever. Tiido isto por nao ter re- 
 flectido nas consequencias. Dou gracas aos deusea^or 
 m'o haverem dado. Elles saiao gozosos por terem sido* 
 achados dignos de sourer. For ser Erancez. Elle gasta 
 o tempo por nao saber como o occupar melhdr. Por lhe 
 nao ser tao facil. For assim dizer. A gente ficou en- 
 cantada^or elle haver chegado. 
 
 On account of its being old. Punished/or having de- 
 serted the army. He was blamed for having forgotten 
 the letter. From its leing more difficult for me. So to 
 say. The work remained unfinished. In consequence of 
 having left the army without leave. Because of his being 
 bad. This little account is unpaid. How much must I 
 payjfor sending a letter to Setubal? He has unfurnished 
 rooms in his house. On account of being a Spaniard. He 
 wastes his money from not knowing how to spend it. It 
 remains to be written. Erom his having been much oc- 
 cupied. 
 
 * See note, p. 146. 
 
156 
 LESSON CLVI. 
 
 TEEBS IN THE NEGATIVE FOEM. # 
 
 Nao faltarei. 
 Nao ha diivida. 
 Nao me toque. 
 Nunca ouvf dizer. 
 Eu nao disse ndda. 
 Nao dfga nem palavra. 
 
 I will not fail. 
 There is no doubt- 
 Do not touch me. 
 I never heard it. 
 I said nothing. 
 Say not a word. 
 
 Nao quero. Nao e verdade. Nao posso beber mais. 
 Nao se mova d'ahi. A Senhora nao m'o disse. Nao o 
 creio. Elle nao me disse nada. Nclo lhes direi. JVSo 
 fdga biilha. Nao o entendo. Nao sei nada d'isso. JVao 
 que eu sa$«. iYao os conheco. V. ft«o aprende wa^d. 
 Elle wao pronuncia bem. Se V. tern tencao de me dar 
 algumas cartas, tenha a bondade de as wao fecJidr. Nao 
 importa. Nao gosto d'isto. JSldo fdlle n'isso. Nao Jia 
 pao. Nao come nada. Nao me lembro bem d'isso. iYao 
 se esquega. Eu w«o o penso. Parece-me que nao. 
 
 This knife does not cut well. This dollar is not good. 
 I have no change. Don't lose time. I cannot stay. 
 There is no water. I do not know them. He does not 
 know me. I suppose not. I think not. I do not believe 
 it. It cannot be true. That cannot be. There is nothing 
 more probable. I cannot write more. I am not sur- 
 prised. There is no news. I cannot stay. I do not 
 complain. Do you want nothing more ? I never let the 
 rooms for less than two guineas a-week. The monk said 
 nothing. The man said nothing. Have the kindness not 
 to give it to him. 
 
 * Observe : — 1. That the negative almost always begins the sen- 
 tence. 2. That in compound negatives (nao -nada) "nao" precedes 
 and " nada "follows the verb. 3. That a negative makes the pronoun 
 (in the accusative) precede the verb. 
 
157 
 LESSON CLVIL 
 
 VEEBS IN THE INTERROGATIVE.* 
 
 Que deseja V. S. ? 
 
 Ja acabou ? 
 
 V. S. entendSu-o. 
 
 Que lhe parece ? 
 
 Ja sefoi o seu mestre ? 
 
 Elle dtsse-lh'o ? 
 
 What do you toish for ? 
 Save you (force ? 
 -Did you understand him ? 
 What do you £A^& ? 
 Z? your master gone ? 
 Did he tell it you ? 
 
 Quern e que duvida ? que se ^0 defazer ? Com 
 quern /aZ/a Y. S. ? Sabe fallar Francez ? Que lhe fdlta ? 
 Que bulha sefaz all? PoWe-se-lhe perguntar? Zk al- 
 niocou ? Gosta do molho ? Quer um osso ? Jantou bem ? 
 Qual e a sua licao ? Quer vir comigo ? ifofct cancado ? 
 Faz calor ? Ouve-o dar horas ? Jdnta-se a bdrdo do pa- 
 quete ? Em que riia e ? Quanto devo pagar por isto ? 
 Entende-m.e bem ? Quer ter a bondade de lhe fallar ? 
 Quanto temos andado ? JEstdo feitas as camas ? Quanto 
 se deve ? Toma cha, ou cafe ? 
 
 Is it cold ? "What o'clock is it ? How much do you 
 ask a-week ? "Where does Mr. Jones live ? "Who knocks 
 at the door ? Will you speak with me ? Are the boys 
 gone ? Save you dined ? Do you take beer or wine ? 
 "What time do we dine to-day ? Save you ham ? Shall 
 we have fish ? Will you have soup ? Do you drink wine ? 
 Can I offer you some chicken ? Save you dined well ? 
 Do you like beef ? O^m you speak Portuguese ? -Do 
 you understand her ? IZiwe you beer ? Are the beds 
 made ? Which is my book ? Will you have cheese ? 
 
 * There is no peculiar form in Portuguese as in English. " Ja 
 acahou" means "Have you done? " or "You have done," according 
 to the tone and manner of the speaker. 
 
158 
 
 LESSON CLVIII. 
 
 YEEBS IN THE NEGATIVE INTEEEOGATIVE, 
 
 V. S. nao o disse ? 
 
 Por que nao responde ? 
 
 V. S. nao me entende ? 
 
 Nao falla Francez ?■ 
 
 Nao chamarei eu ? 
 
 EscreVe-lhe Y. S. nao e assim f* 
 
 Did you not say it ? 
 Why do you not reply ? 
 Do you not understand me ? 
 Don't you speak French ? 
 Shall I not call ? 
 You write to him, dorit you ? 
 
 Nao ha niuguem que pense em dar lima nova edicao ? 
 Nao receias que Mentor peleje por teres vindo a ca9a ? 
 Os sehis amigos nao o teem abandonddo ? Nao quer as- 
 sentar-se ? Nao teriao side bona soldados ? Y. . . woo 
 o entende ? Ainda nao acabou ? V. M. nao o entende ? 
 Nao o eonhece ? Os Senhores nao querent cear ? Por 
 que nao f Si V. M.? Por que nao esperou pela resposta ? 
 Por que me nao trouxe o cavallo ? iYao sm# melhor 
 que. . . Nao Suve o que estou dizendo ? JYao Ihe hei de 
 dar o dinheiro ? Nao viu o rei ? 
 
 "Why <fo you not go ? Will you not dine with me ? 
 Do you ft<?£ spea& Spanish ? Does he wctf understand Por- 
 tuguese ? jDo you not wish to have breakfast ? Did not 
 the soldiers abandon him? iZtfs the pupil not yet finished 
 the lesson ? Is no one at home to-day ? Will not the 
 gentlemen sup here to-night ? Do jounotfear ? Why <fo 
 you not speak English with these gentlemen ? Have you 
 not breakfasted yet ? Z)o you not understand me ? Shall 
 I wo£ eaZZ the boy ? Szue wo£ his friends understood 
 him ? Won't you si£ down ? #A#ZZ I not pay the money ? 
 Shall I fwtf yo to Paris ? 
 
 «?a£r ?" 
 
 Used like the French, " riest-ce pas ? " or the Grerman, " nicht 
 
159 
 
 LESSON CLIX. 
 
 VEEBS IN THE AEEIEMATIVE AND NEGATIVE 
 IMPEEATIVE. 
 
 Ah ra a porta. 
 Fdlle seffipre Portuguez. 
 Veja quaiitas hdras sao. 
 Nao vd tao depressa. 
 Nao dig a new palavra. 
 Nao mefdlte. 
 
 Open the door. 
 
 Always speak Portuguese. 
 
 See what o'clock it is. 
 
 Don't go so fast. 
 
 Say not a word. 
 
 Do not disappoint me. 
 
 Nao me toque. Leia de vagar. Venha d'aqui a pouco. 
 Vd tocar guitarra. Nao tenha receio. Besponda-me. 
 Naoyap^bulha. Nao se aquega. Dlga-me de que gdsta. 
 Nao me de mais do que metade d'isso. Trdga 6utra co- 
 llier. Nao o poupe. Vd-me buscar um. Leve esta carta 
 ao correio. Nao perca tempo. Fdga fav6r de me mos- 
 trar. NtLofdlte a siia palavra. Nao apdgue a luz. Sopre 
 o hime. Espere um pouco. Nao tfera^a siisto. Nao <ft- 
 y<ws a pessoa algiima o que vistes. Nao s#/tf$ ligeiro. 
 Nao te associes com quern nao conheces. 
 
 ite &W£? enough to tell me. Ask if Mr. J. is better. 
 Don't go so slowly. Bring hot plates. Go and get me 
 some fresh pears. Don't make so much noise in the 
 kitchen. Deliver this letter as soon as possible. Do not 
 lose time. Do me the favour to lend me a penknife. See 
 what o'clock it is, if you please. Go and fetch my gloves. 
 Bring lights and more wood. Let me know to-morrow. 
 Put the saddle further back. Tell him that I am ill. 
 Tell the servant not to come. Take the horse to the 
 stable. Don't let him drink. Don't lose a moment. 
 Don't speak to him. Do not stay. 
 
160 
 
 LESSON CLX. 
 
 SUBOBDINATION OF TENSES — PBESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Creio que ha um so Deus. 
 Conheco quanto devo. 
 Creio que a chamou Deus. 
 Creio que ficarei eoui este. 
 Estou certo que nao tardara. 
 Que qtcer que Ike offereca ? 
 
 I believe there is one Grod. 
 I know how much I owe. 
 I believe that Grod called her. 
 I think I shall take this. 
 I am certain he will not stay. 
 What shall I offer you ? 
 
 Sao jogos que pedem um exercicio continuo. Pare- 
 ce-me que estas condicoes sao moderadas. Creio que a 
 cama e boa. Faz arnanha um auno que nao te vi, que 
 nao ouvi a tiia voz. Espero que ouvira. ^ogo a V. S. 
 que me faca saber. Nao sei que diga. Ouves o que te 
 digo ? Bern ve que nao falta nada. Nao se sdbe quando 
 aira. V. S. sdbe que o moco esta em casa. R6go-\he 
 queira dar-me. Cre que ve tudo, e nada conhece. Elle 
 sdbe que sou lima boa fregueza. Digo que elle faz bem. 
 Digo que elle tern feito bem. Tenlio dito que Deus e 
 justo. 
 
 The general opinion is, that they were Italians. You 
 know where I live. I think we shall have rain. I sag 
 that he was doing well. I sag that he will do well. I 
 sag that he would have done well. He sags I play. I 
 hope there will be much fruit. I know well how much I 
 owe you. I said that Grod is just. I shall say that he is 
 innocent. I was saying that my son is unwell. They 
 sag that John has arrived. I know that he is coming. 
 Dost thou believe Divine justice sleeps? The wicked 
 man lies when he sags that he hopes. 
 
161 
 
 LESSON CLXL 
 
 IMPEBEECT* AND ITS SUBOEDINATES. 
 
 Dizta eu que elle e bom. 
 Estimdva que viesses. 
 Nao sahia que hdras erao. 
 
 Estimdva que Y. S. tivesse vmdo. 
 Ella julgdva que elle tinha par- 
 tido. 
 
 I was saying he is good. 
 
 I was glad you came. 
 
 I did not &»ow what o'clock it 
 
 was. 
 I was glad you had come. 
 She thought he had gone. 
 
 Tocdva admiravelmente quando tinha doze annos. 
 Em quanto Mentor fazia este disciirso, tomamos nos a 
 ilha. Dormia en tao bem quando V. M. me accordou. 
 Eu nao me persuadia que as cousas saissem tao mal. 
 Era necessario que eu pagasse. Sabia Narbal que Ba- 
 leazar nao morrera afogado. Tudo dizia que ahi havia o 
 espirito de um godo. Julia cuiddva que eu nao queria 
 voltar. Melhdr The estdva* se se calasse. Se o negocio 
 valia a pena. N'uma regata de vapores o nosso barco nao 
 ganhdva* de certo o premio. 
 
 I was saying that your brother is lazy. I was sorry 
 you came. He did not know that I was sleeping. I was 
 aware that he had gone. The figure was more slight 
 than powerful. His fine mouth gave him great anima- 
 tion : his delicate hands had an air of distinction. The 
 gestures of the priest Tiad a theatrical exaggeration. 
 Expecting a bow, but if he expected, he deceived himself. 
 I did not know that your brother had been ill. While 
 I was speaking, the machine exploded. It was necessary 
 that he should speak. 
 
 * Is often used for future conditional. 
 
162 
 
 LESSON CLXIL 
 
 PEETEEITE AND SUBOEDHSTATES. 
 
 JDisse eu que o meu amigo esta 
 
 a qui. 
 Estimei que viesses. 
 Eu escrevia quando elle part in. 
 Eu dtsse-Uhe que fdsse, 
 O monarcha acorddu. 
 Fedz que me pagasse. 
 
 I said my friend is here, 
 
 T mas glad you came, 
 
 I was writing, when he went, 
 
 I told him to go. 
 
 The king awoke. 
 
 I asked him to pay me, 
 
 Disse'rao-me que havia dois caminhos. Bern conlieceu 
 a Deusa que este era Telemaco. Fingirtio os poetas que 
 os gigantes tinhao feito guerra, etc. JPerguntei-\\\Q em 
 que consistia a auctoridade de rei. Disse-me que elle 
 viesse. Pedi que me deixassem estar so. Os pastores 
 quizerao que me cobrisse com a pelle. Perguntdrao qual 
 e mais glorioso ? Aconselhou-Yhe que fosse por terra. 
 Provou-se que ella fora quern envenenara e affogara o 
 rei. Perceberao os guardas que ella soffria. la chamar 
 soccorro, quando me deteve lima renexao. 
 
 I told him not to go. I asked him to come. The 
 peasant said there were two roads. The soldier Tcnew 
 perfectly well that it was his superior officer. The pil- 
 grims have feigned that the east is full of riches. I ad- 
 vised him to go to Lisbon by the Gralgo. They asked 
 which was the best road to Batalha. The shepherds 
 wished me to remain in the country. I told them to go 
 to their own houses. I legged the soldiers to let me go, 
 I was glad when my brother came. I said that my friend 
 would go by the steamer. 
 
163 
 
 LESSON CLXIII. 
 
 PLTTPEEEECT* AND SUBORDINATES. 
 
 O govem&dbvformdra o designio. 
 
 Praticou quanto dissera. 
 Quizera que fizesse este favor. 
 JEstimdra miiito de saber. 
 Eu o amdra, se elle fosse dfgno. 
 Se o cammho/<5m bom. 
 
 The governor had formed the 
 
 plan. 
 He practised what he had said. 
 I could wish you to do me — 
 I should be glad to know. 
 I had loved, had he been worthy. 
 Had the road been good. 
 
 Eu te amdra, se tu me corresponderas. Queixando-se 
 que a rainha tomdra tal auctoridade. Elle viu um fidalgo 
 que nao apparecera durante a accao, e perguntou-lhe 
 onde estivera em quanto se combatera. Estimdra que 
 estivesses com saude. Eu quizera ir, se tivesse logar. 
 Prouvera a Deus que me visse livre d'ella. Eu o pre- 
 midra, se elle o merecesse. O rei desejdra ir a caea, se 
 nao fora a chuva. O rapaz quizera pagar, se tivesse 
 dinheiro. 
 
 I should be glad to know that it is so. I could wish 
 that you would do me this favour. I should feel much 
 pleasure if you were well. I had loved him, had he been 
 worthy of love. This would be good, could it be realized. 
 If he had been good, he would not have done evil. If 
 the road were good, I should take a walk. If he had 
 known it, he would have done nothing. He said to one 
 who had offended him. He said that he had completed his 
 20 years. As soon as he had finished the work. 
 
 * Also used as a form of conditional, as is sometimes the case 
 in English: "Sad I known" for "If I had known;" "Had the 
 doctor come sooner, my brother had not died" for "If the 
 doctor had come sooner, my brother would not have died." 
 
164 
 LESSON CLXIY. 
 
 FUTTJEE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Farei o que V. S. deseja. 
 
 Que sera de mim, se elle partir ? 
 
 Estimarei que venhas. 
 JEstimarei se tiveres vihdo. 
 
 No fim ee vera quern perde. 
 
 I will do what you ask. 
 
 What will become of me, if he 
 
 goes. 
 I shall be glad if you come. 
 I shall be glad when you have 
 
 come. 
 In the end, it will be seen who 
 
 loses. 
 
 Irei para onde me mandarem. Amanha irei a casa 
 de V. S., se fizer bom tempo. Se tu obrares bem, serds 
 premiado. Se o fizerem, provardo o meu resentimento. 
 Perderei o friicto da minha viagem, se nao chegar a 
 tempo. Todo o favor que lhe fizer o receberei como feito 
 a mim mesmo. Y. S. perdoara. Creio que sera o desejo 
 de Y.S. Estiinard miiito que seu tio venha pelo vapor. 
 Nao irei amanha. Pagarei o dinheiro esta tarde. 
 Perderei o jogo. Perderd o cao na riia. Nao irei a casa 
 de Y. E. esta tarde. 
 
 He will do what they ask. "What will become of the 
 poor boy, if his father goes to the Crimea ? I shall go 
 wherever my general orders me. You will see to-morrow 
 who is right. If you study well, you will gain the prize. 
 I shall lose the steamer, if I do not reach Lisbon in time. 
 I shall start for London when you like. I shall be glad 
 if you go with me to my quinta. He will go to Camacha, 
 if it does not rain. I shall pay the men to-morrow. I 
 shall not go to Batalha till next month. They will go. 
 If it is a fine day, I shall visit the gardens. You will 
 see the museum next week. 
 
165 
 LESSON CLXY. 
 
 EUTUEE. 
 Hei de sir. I have to be, or shall be. 
 
 Elle hd de ter. 
 
 Nds havemos de amdr. 
 
 Pagdr-\he-Mi. 
 
 Achdr-me-ha em casa. 
 
 iMr-Jhe-nei.* 
 
 He must have, or shall have. 
 We have to love, or must love. 
 I shall -pay him. 
 You will find me at home. 
 I shall tell him. 
 
 Demordr-me-hei aqui algiins mezes. Hei de ter fome. 
 Aonde havemos de pardr ? Di-lo-hemos* amanha cedo. 
 ifa-lo-hei.t ifar-me-hei.f Como os padres haode rir-se 
 a esta hora! Dar-Wo-hemos, se o pagar. JELeide ficdr 
 com o panno. Como heide provdr no meu livro. Veremos 
 aonde tiido isto hade ir par dr. " O que heide fazer?" 
 exclamou o monge. Hd de se dar tima grande batalha. 
 Ella hade estdr anciosa de o ver. Para que heide mentir ? 
 E excellente mai : Deus hd de Wo pagar. Engana-se ; 
 hade vel-o. Heide dar-lhe lima noticia para a consolar. 
 
 I will follow thee everywhere. I must taste this new 
 dish. I shall tell him, when he comes. If you call at 
 my quinta (villa) at 4 o'clock, you will find me at home. 
 I shall stay at this village for some weeks. I shall pay 
 him the money, when he has finished the work. "Where 
 have we to pass the night ? "We shall see where all this 
 is to end? I must buy this cloth. There will be a great 
 battle. We shall stay there a few weeks. She must be 
 hungry. I shall do it with much pleasure. 
 
 * Contracted for dizer. f T? or fazSr. 
 
166 
 LESSON CLXYI. 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT.* 
 
 Tenho amado. 
 Tenho tfdo. 
 Elle tern estado. 
 Temos comido. 
 Elles teem cumprido. 
 !fillasi teem ido. 
 
 I have loved. 
 I have had. 
 He has been. 
 We have eaten. 
 They have finished. 
 They have gone. 
 
 A rapida narracao que temos feito, basta para se co- 
 nhecer que, etc. Tem-se feito miiita bulba. Gracas a 
 Deus, tenho tido amigos. JNas visitas que tenlw feito a 
 diversas escolas, tenlw tido occasiao de apreciar o mere- 
 cimento dos professores, etc. Tenho visto com verda- 
 deira satisfacao que, etc. Pelos servos que tern jpres- 
 tddo a Portugal. Tenho dito que Deus e jiisto. Digo 
 que elle tern feito bem. Tu tens tido. TJstd havido por 
 bomem de probidade. O bomem tern comido. Temos 
 cunvprido coin a nossa palavra. 
 
 I have been. He has had. They have loved. We have 
 seen. Tell bim be has done well. I have seen witb great 
 pleasure. The rapid voyage we have made, etc. He has 
 had many very good friends. He is considered a man 
 of great talent. He has not kept bis word. They have 
 said that Grod is just. That poor boy has been the sport 
 of bad fortune. There has been much noise. I have been 
 loved. We have been loved. I have seen the Queen 
 several times. Have you been often in Prance ? I have 
 had occasion. Have you dined ? 
 
 * In most cases the Portuguese use the 'preterite instead of the 
 compound of the present: "Euw," not '■'■tenho vistoJ' 
 
167 
 
 LESSON OLXVIL 
 
 COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT AND PRETERITE. 
 
 Elles havido acceitddo o jiigo. 
 
 Eu nao tinha amddo. 
 
 Elles havido confessddo. 
 
 Nao tinha sido possireL 
 
 Apenas tinha saido. 
 
 O hdmeni que se tinha rido de. 
 
 They had accepted the yoke. 
 
 I had not loved. 
 
 They had confessed. 
 
 It had not been possible. 
 
 Hardly had he gone out. 
 
 The nian who had laughed at. 
 
 Raymond fo'72^0 vindo a Hespanha tempos antes . O 
 Cid que os Arabes tinhdo tornado por capitao. Elles 
 tinhdo-me ensinddo a escrever. Tinha deixddo o meu ca- 
 vallo ao pagem. Julguei que o tinha per dido. Tinhao- 
 me dito que e. Havia muita gente que tinha chegddo pri- 
 meiro do que nos. Elle nao tinha ganhddo* muito no 
 commercio que fazia, mas tinha adquirido a experiencia. 
 O que tinha visto e ouvido tinha-lhe ensinddo a moderar 
 os seus desejos. Machado tinha tencionado escrever em 
 latim. Ellas havido sido olvidadas. 
 
 Centuries before, the greatest philosophers had con- 
 fessed their ignorance. Hardly had she gone out, when 
 the house fell. The man who had laughed at the justice 
 of the king. The man whom he had taken for his friend. 
 What I had seen and heard was enough. They had been 
 severely punished. That old man had taught the boy to 
 write. He had confessed the crime. Hardly had the 
 steamer left the port, when the man of war entered. 
 The merchant had accepted the offer. If our friend had 
 left his horse. 
 
 "Simao de Nantua," Part II., page 3. 
 
168 
 LESSON CLXVIIL 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE PKESEFT. 
 
 Diz-lhe qne entre. 
 Peco-lhe que se assente. 
 13 precfso que me vd. 
 Receio que tenhdmos. 
 Diga-me o que lhe deyo. 
 Estimo que teriha vindo. 
 
 Tell him to come in. 
 
 Pray be seated. 
 
 I must^o. 
 
 I fear we shall have. 
 
 Tell me what I owe you, 
 
 I am glad you have come. 
 
 De licenca que veja. Peco-lhe que demore algiins 
 dias. Logo que receba aviso, pagar-lh'a-hei de contado, 
 se o senhor quizer. Queira Deus que seja restituido a 
 seus pais. Permtita-me que lhe mostre est a caixinha. 
 Grosto que nao seja cozida demais, Que quer Y. S. que 
 lhe sirva? E-eceio que a cor nao seja fixa. Pdde ser 
 que hdja alguma pancada d'agua. Tenho medo que Tidja 
 grande poeira. Fdga como eu. O fogo nao tarda que se 
 accenda. Duvido que ew.p6ssaia.ZQT. Duvido que venha. 
 Temo que nao venha. Ainda que venha nao nos vera. 
 
 I am glad that you enjoy good health. I wish he may 
 come. I am very glad you are well. There is no man 
 so perfect, that has not his failings. I do not doubt but 
 he ivill do it. I doubt his doing it. I will not go thither 
 before he comes. Pray be seated. In case they should 
 not be up so early. Tell him to bring me the shoes. 
 Whatever may be their traditions. Who am I, to go to 
 Pharaoh ? Tell him to pay the money. Perhaps he may 
 go. Go home. Do as I do. I fear we shall have war 
 in 1860. Allow me to show you that picture. 
 
169 
 
 LESSON CLXIX. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE IMPEEFECT. 
 
 Pedfu-me o desc 
 Como se dependesse de, etc. 
 Procure! que fosse reeebido. 
 Ninguem, que eu soubesse, tmha. 
 Sem que elle me sentisse. 
 Oxala que eu houvesse sido ! 
 
 He apologized, to me. 
 
 As if depended on. 
 
 I aimed at his being received. 
 
 ISTo one I knew had. 
 
 Without his knowing me. 
 
 O that I had been I 
 
 Mandou que se comecdsse o ataque. Nao pude alcan- 
 car quern fosse aquelle. Receioso de que a sua vinda au~ 
 mentdsse as perturbagoes, elle tentou de impedi-la. No- 
 nieando um eabega* a que todos obedecessem, e que tivesse 
 bastante energia para Ihes dar a paz. Oxala que eu hou- 
 vesse sido estudioso. E-eceiando que torndsse a si, e a 
 obrigdsse a matar-se com elle. Havia-lhe Baleazar re- 
 commendado que se elle visse occasiao opportuna para 
 que torndsse, lhe manddsse um annel de ouro que lhe ser- 
 viria de aviso, do qual entendesse que era tempo de 
 voltar. 
 
 He waited till the priest ordered him to speak. Hin- 
 dering him from hilling her. As if the notion of a su- 
 preme being depended on a sound. If it were essential to 
 our nature. "Without a roof to shelter them. Even if it 
 were so. If we were perfect, we should be saints. If he 
 heard you ! Did he ask you not to say ? It was not ne- 
 cessary for you to tell. If for a moment I could suppose 
 him capable of meanness. The general ordered the 
 troops to begin the battle. He was afraid his speaking 
 might hinder the negociations. 
 
 * Cabeca is masculine, when it means chief, as " cabega da 
 familia." 
 
170 
 
 LESSON CLXX. 
 
 FUTURE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Diria, se podera. 
 
 Sentiria, se fossein. 
 
 Seria, se fosse. 
 
 Era melhdr, se — 
 
 Trmta annos seriao a idade. 
 
 Se fosse menos devdto, diria. 
 
 I would say, if I could. 
 I sliould be sorry, if they were. 
 It would be, if it were. 
 It would be better, if — 
 Thirty might be the age. 
 If he were less devout, I should 
 say. 
 
 A carta de V. S. ine consolaria, se en estivera em es- 
 tado de receber consolacao. Temiao que as portas esti- 
 vessem fechadas. JNTao poderia ella nega-lo, ainda quando 
 quizesse. Proniettera-lhes ella que so esposaria outro 
 quando posesse termo a um veu que estava tecendo. Eu 
 me contaria por mui feliz se podesse acompanhar-te. 
 Ealsario seria eu, se negasse a verdade. Eu a amaria, se 
 ella me amasse. Sentiria se fossein recusados. Se elles 
 viessem implorar piedade, negar-lh'a-7j£as tu ? Era me- 
 Ihor se elle pagdsse. 
 
 I knew they would employ force, if I resisted. I 
 should be inconsolable, if any thing happened to him. 
 It would he less severe, if I were supported with greater 
 fortitude. If he were less obstinate, I should say — I 
 should be sorry, if you were to leave the house. He 
 would be very happy, if he could go to India. Tour 
 kindness would comfort me, if I could receive comfort. I 
 should be glad, if you could call to-morrow. They would 
 not refuse, if you would ask immediately. I should 
 consider myself very happy, if I had health and a mode- 
 rate income. 
 
 * The imperfect indicative is often used for the future condi- 
 tional, see page 161. 
 
171 
 
 LESSON CLXXI. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE EUTUBE. 
 
 Se o fixer, pagar-lhe-hei. 
 
 Se nao adormecer, lerei. 
 
 Se nao poder ir so, ajudae-o. 
 
 Perderei, se nao chegdr a tempo. 
 
 Eu farei quanto poder. 
 Para quando voltdrmos. 
 
 If lie does it, I shall pay him. 
 If I don't sleep, I shall read. 
 If he can't go alone, help him. 
 I shall lose, if I don't arrive in 
 
 time. 
 I'll do what I can. 
 By the time we return. 
 
 Se V. S. sair, diga ao rapaz. Se o tomdr ao mez, dar- 
 lh'o-hei por menos. Quando tiver sede o que heide beber ? 
 Se examindrmos urn mappa do norte da Italia, acharemos 
 uma ramificacao dos Alpes, etc. Se me constipdr. Se all 
 lhe poder prestar algum servico, falo-hei com prazer. 
 Earemos como podermos. Se esta lhe nao bastdr, tenho 
 ainda mais ao seu dispor. Se o tempo correr bem, have- 
 mos de ter bastante friicta. Earei o que me pedes, se 
 poder. que V. qidzer. Em quanto o mundo durdr. 
 Se ofizer, agradecer-lhe-hei. 
 
 I shall do all I can to help you. He will sail at noon, 
 if the wind is favourable. If we always go at this rate, 
 we shall soon arrive. Certainly, if I return by Calais. 
 If you wish it, I will accompany you thither. If you 
 take it by the month, I will give it you for less. You 
 may come, when you please. If we give credit to what 
 he says. "When you least think so, you will find, etc. 
 While I breathe, I exist only for thee. If I do not see 
 you again. If we limit ourselves to the state. If the 
 lady catches cold. 
 
172 
 LESSON CLXXIL 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 fllle se teria easado. 
 fille lh'a houvera dado. 
 Se estivesse dado. 
 1311a teria morrido, se— . 
 Se eu tivesse tido. 
 Se eu tiver tido. 
 
 He would have married. 
 
 He would, have given her to him. 
 
 If it had been given. 
 
 She would have died, if — . 
 
 If I had had. 
 
 If I shall have had. 
 
 Eu te teria obsequiddo, se tu me tivesses obsequiddo 
 primeiro. Eu o teria avisddo, se elle m'o tivesse pedido. 
 IClle teria praticddo algum acto de extrema violencia, se 
 Mogueis nao Tiouvera tornado a defensa do accusado. 
 Teria tido muito gosto em faze-lo. Se a minha palavra 
 estivesse ddda, nao a quebrara eu. A estatura seria 
 desempenada, se o trabalho a nao tivesse curvddo um 
 pouco. Eu teria almogddo na sua quinta, porem o 
 tempo nao me permittiu. Se elle tiver tido. Oxala 
 que tivesse tido tempo. 
 
 He would have married her, if she had been younger. 
 If I had eaten the fruit, I should have been ill. I should 
 have advised him, if he had ashed me. If it had not 
 rained, I should have gone to the country. If they had 
 paid the money, the slave would have been set at liberty. 
 He would have had a fine figure, if work had not bent his 
 back. I wish I had had more time. She would have 
 gone to France, if she had had money. If his word had 
 been given, he would not have broken it. I should have 
 had much pleasure in dining with you. 
 
173 
 
 LESSON CLXXIII. 
 
 STJBJTTNCTIVE AFTEB, CEETAISr WOEDS.* 
 
 Tremo que o amor se apdgue. 
 Nao quero que ella core. 
 Tenho medo que elle conheca. 
 Qualquer que sSja. 
 Nao soffro que inddguem. 
 Talvez que seja assim. 
 
 I tremble lest love should cease. 
 
 I won't have her blush. 
 
 I fear his knowing. 
 
 Whatever may be. 
 
 I do not allow them to inquire. 
 
 Perhaps this may be so. 
 
 Nao quero que sejas victima da tiia delicadeza. Nao 
 quero que o padre espere por minha culpa. Qualquer 
 que seja o seutido em que se escreva. E natural que 
 chegue. Receio que do coracao venha a sua morte. 
 Sinto que talvez estas sejao as ultimas horas de felicidade. 
 Roguemos a Deus que auxilie o pobre homem. Se V. S. 
 sabe a quern falla, aconselho-o a que nao continue. Pdde 
 ser que elle venha. Pode acontecer que nos alcdnee. 
 Prohibo-lhe que sefdga vermelha. Nao feW que se abra 
 o chao e o sepulte ? 
 
 I fear that your sword is shorter than your tongue. 
 I dread her knowing that I love her so much. I do not 
 wish you to be the victim of your devotion. I do not 
 want you to wait on my account. Let us entreat the 
 king to pardon the poor soldier. It is natural that he 
 should weep. I advise you not to go on. Do you not 
 fear that the ground may open ? He may come. Perhaps 
 these are the last. Do you not fear that the earth will 
 open ? I feel that these are, perhaps, the last days of joy. 
 
 * Chiefly verbs of emotion, sentiment, hope, fear, asking, for- 
 bidding, doubt ; contingent words, as possivel, qualquer, natural, 
 talvSz, pode ser, bdsta. 
 
174 
 
 LESSON CLXXIY. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AFTEE CONJUNCTION, OE EELATTVE. 
 
 Quero que V. ~M.fdca isto. 
 Quem quizer, dirija-SQ. 
 So conheco um que possa. 
 Nao ha quemfdca bem. 
 Nao sao cousas que se digcto. 
 Diga-lhe que me trdga. 
 
 I want you to do it. 
 Whoever wishes, may apply. 
 I only know one who can. 
 There is none that doeth good. 
 These are not things to be said. 
 Tell him to bring me. 
 
 So conlieco um caminho que nos possa conduzir a 
 gloria. Quer que eu o sirva de legumes ? Eazem mal a 
 si os que abusao da saiide. Nao tenho nada que nao esteja 
 as drdens de V. S. Nao e um diccionario obra que do 
 primeiro jacto fossa sair perfeita. Nao ha quem entenda, 
 nao ha quem busque a Deus. Nao ha ninguem que nao o 
 s«i5#. Nao conlieco ninguem que me proteja e 0/2? <fe a 
 estabelecer-me. Eis-aqui o que me convinha bem ! Nao 
 devemos excluir idea algiima que tenda a elucidar a 
 questao. 
 
 
 He only knows one road that can lead him to Paris. 
 I know no one who can protect me. There is no one 
 that does not know the poet. He who abuses his health 
 injures himself. A picture is not a work which can be 
 perfect all at once. They want him to do it. Whoever 
 wishes to take this house, may apply to J. C, No. 2, King 
 Street. There is no one that seeks after God. There is 
 nothing done, that is not discovered. God grant that you 
 do not repent of it. These are not things to be said 
 before everybody. 
 
175 
 
 LESSON CLXXV. 
 
 IMBEBATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE BOB IMPEBAT1TE. 
 
 Mdnda que elle va. 
 Ollia eomo e formoso ! 
 Socegue ! Hettre'Sel 
 Nao se esquSga. 
 N"ao aeredite. 
 Tome sentfdo. 
 
 Order him to go. 
 /See how beautiful it is, 
 Be easy ! Retire ! 
 Do not forget. 
 Don't believe it. 
 Take care. 
 
 #<%&<? que so seras grande em quanto souberes aer 
 reportado. Diqa-lhe que me traga os me us sapatos. 
 JNao se assuste. Seja forte, anime-se ! Nao se faille mais 
 n'isso. Tome a reflectir : i>a de vagar. Fe/'a se me ajuda. 
 Ponha-YRQ o que quizer. Betire-se, quando nao sera 
 preso. Lemore-se de seu pai : veja o desgosto de sua 
 mai. Olhe para a sua consciencia, e lucte em quanto 
 tiver forcas. Ouga a voz do ceu. ^$|/& superior a des- 
 graca. Nao espere nada d'elles. JEncha o edpo e (?e^e 
 vinho a Joao. Bega licenca a sua mai. 
 
 Go immediately from my presence. Take care, the 
 river is very deep. Be my friend, and I shall always 
 protect you. Do jiot disturb the few days I have left. 
 Fill the glass, and pour water into the basin. Do not 
 speak any more on that point. See how absent he is ! 
 Do not make me weep. Tell me your name. Tell the 
 boy to clean the stable. Be superior to despair. Mil 
 that bottle with old wine. Don't forget to pay the bill. 
 See how handsome she is. 
 
176 
 
 LESSON CLXXVI. 
 
 ENGLISH INDICATIVE = ?ORTTJGUE8V SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Alegro-me que V. S. esteja bom. 
 Espere que elle venha. 
 Espero quo nao seja nada. 
 Temo que nao esteja assas cozida. 
 No caso que seja enganado. 
 Ate que Ihe pdguem. 
 
 I am glad you are well. 
 Stay till he comes. 
 I hope it will be nothing. 
 I fear it is not done enough. 
 In case you are deceived. 
 Till they 'pay him. 
 
 Preciso d'lima casa que seja grande e bella. Procure- 
 me urn criado que seja diligente. Elle se alegra de que 
 ella nao se tenha per dido. Acabemos antes que venhz 
 alguem. Peco-lhe que venha mais cedo. Nao quer sair 
 ate que lhe pdguem. Temo que nao estejdmos de volta 
 esta noite. JPor mais qaefdga nao pode destruir tudo. 
 E possivel que o jiisto pdgue pelo peccador ? Temo que 
 os dvos nao estejao assas cozidos. Espero que elle me 
 pdgue. Preciso d'um eavallo que seja manso. 
 
 I am sorry you are not well. Stay till your brother 
 comes. The doctor hopes it will he nothing. He is afraid 
 the beef is not done enough. In case he is deceived. 
 G-et me a pupil that is attentive to his studies. Let us 
 finish before the teacher comes. He begs me to come 
 sooner. He fears he will not return to town to-night. 
 It is possible the innocent may pay for the guilty. The 
 Count wants a palace that is large and well situated. I 
 will not leave the house till I am paid. I am waiting till 
 the people come. I am glad you are well. 
 
177 
 
 LESSON CLXXVIL 
 
 ENGLISH INFINITIVE = PORTUGUESE SUBJUNCTIVE.* 
 
 Diga-lhe que suba. 
 Nao lhe diga que venha. 
 Desejo que elle venha. 
 Peco-lhe que me dispense. 
 Edgo a V. S. que o nao fdca. 
 Nao sou tao tolo que o acredite. 
 
 Tell him to come up. 
 
 Don't tell him to come. 
 
 I wish you to come. 
 
 I beg you to excuse me. 
 
 I beg you not to do it. 
 
 I am not so foolish as to believe it. 
 
 Peco a Y. . . que o fdca. Diga-lhe que nao tdrde. 
 Diz-lhe que venha amanha. Perinitta-me V. S. que ca lhe 
 diga. Esta certo de que os lencoes estejao bem seccos. 
 Estimo que esteja a seu gosto. Peco-lhe que nao nos 
 fdca esperar. Tome sentido nao se qiieime. Tome cui- 
 dado nao me corte. Eu desafio a alguem que me tire o 
 ineu. Da licen9a que os prove. Permitta-me que lhe 
 mostre este livro. Que quereis que el-rei fdca ? Per- 
 mitta-me que eu dhra a janella. Peco-lhe me fdga a 
 barba. JSTao tenho expressoes com que descreva. 
 
 I beg you not to make me wait. Do you wish, me to 
 do it ? Tell him to come to-morrow. He begs me not to 
 do it. I beg you will come. Allow me to show you this 
 watch. I beg you not to keep us waiting. Pray, try 
 them. If he does not understand what I am, it is not 
 worth while to tell him. I have not words to tell the 
 force, etc. I beg you to tell him. I am sorry it is not 
 to your taste. I wish you to shave me now. Give me 
 leave to try these cherries. Take care not to cut my face. 
 
 * To one familiar with classical or foreign languages, this prin- 
 ciple presents no difficulties ; but the merely English scholar must 
 carefully study examples of the rule, that in the subordinate clause 
 of a sentence the infinitiveva. English is generally represented by the 
 subjunctive in Portuguese. 
 
178 
 
 LESSON CLXXVIII. 
 
 ENGLISH INFINITIVE = PORTUGUESE SUBJUNCTIVE.* 
 
 Eu disse-lhe quefosse.f 
 Pedi-lhe que nao fosse la. 
 Pediu-lhe que lhe desse. 
 Quizera que me trocdsse. 
 Ella lhe obtestou quizesse ter 
 
 d'ella compaixao. 
 Pedindo a Deus salvdsse a alma. 
 
 I told him to go. 
 
 I begged him net to go there. 
 
 He asked him to give. 
 
 I should like to change. 
 
 She implored him to have pity. 
 
 Praying G-od to save the soul. 
 
 Dava motivo a que todos falldssem mal d'elle. Dis- 
 serao-lhe que nao tivesse receio. Eecommendei-lhe que 
 nao tarddsse. Impedi-lne que fossem. Mandei-lhe que 
 fosse para casa. Pediu a sua mulher que lhe desse um 
 copo d'agua. Eogarao-lhe que o nao jizesse. Eecom- 
 mendou ao criado que o acorddsse as seis boras. Orde- 
 nou-lhe que saisse. Disse ao comprador que vie'sse ver 
 a quinta. Ordenou que pedissetn o que quizessem. Pe- 
 dindo-lhe que procurdsse o liyro. Quizera que os dedaes 
 tivessem um estojo. 
 
 He requested them to bring him two new books. 
 He made every one speak ill of him. He told me not to 
 he afraid. I exhorted him to behave well. The boy pre- 
 vented me from going. She ordered him to bring the 
 wine. The king ordered him to make restitution. I 
 begged them not to go there. The general had prohibited 
 the soldiers from playing. I recommended him to hide 
 himself. Minos wished his sons to succeed him in the 
 kingdom. Tell him to bring my hat. 
 
 * Many words take the infinitive, as impedir, prohibir. 
 f When the ivhole transaction is past ; but when he has not gone, 
 va, instead. 
 
179 
 
 LESSON CLXXIX. 
 
 ENGLISH PARTICIPLE = PORTUGUESE INFINITIVE OR 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Eu o vi passedr. 
 
 Vejo um hdmem a cortdr lenha. 
 
 Em logar de* dizer. 
 
 Em comer* e beber. 
 
 Util para* escrevSr. 
 
 Sem que ninguem Ihefalldsse. 
 
 I saw him walking. 
 
 I see a man cutting wood. 
 
 In place of saying. 
 
 In eating and drinking. 
 
 Useful for writing. 
 
 Without any one speaking. 
 
 Perdem-se muitas cousas por falta de perguntdr. Es- 
 tou cancado de lev. Nao pdsso fallar sem rir. Sem que 
 ninguem o suspeitdsse. Sem que elles o percebessem, 
 Depois de tomdr Sevilha. Nao^contente com se fazer 
 temido. Depois de fazer isto. Antes de expirdr. Terei 
 o gosto de o tomdr a ver. Depois de ter estado tao 
 alegre. JNTao os condemnem sem serem ouvidos. Em vez 
 de se instruir, esta jogando. Abstenho-me de beber vi- 
 nho. Calais, notavel por ser a passagem mais curta, 
 Longe de ser. 
 
 Happiness consists in never being ill. I saw a man 
 writing a letter. In place of speaking, he writes. He 
 spent the night in playing and singing. He went away, 
 without any one's telling him. After taking Toledo, he 
 marched against Madrid. Instead of studying his lesson, 
 went to the ball. After having been remarkable for being 
 the most splendid theatre in Europe. Without losing 
 time. She accused Marbal of having been an accomplice. 
 Having money is a crime in Tyre, and having virtue is a 
 greater. 
 
 * Notice that prepositions govern the infinitive, not the present 
 participle. 
 
180 
 
 LESSON CLXXX. 
 
 ENGLISH PAST AND COMPOUND PERFECT = POBTTJGrESE 
 SIMPLE PERFECT. 
 
 Cortou-me. 
 
 J a almogou ? 
 
 A senhora c7iamoi<-me ! 
 
 Quando cliegou V... 
 
 Seu irraao morreu. 
 
 Ja veto o sapateiro ? 
 
 You have cut me. 
 Hare you hreol fasted ? 
 Did you call me, ma'am ? 
 "When ffr'rf you come ? 
 His brother as rfe«tZ. 
 Has the shoemaker co?#e ? 
 
 Ja vezo por esta estrada ? seu amigo ainda nao 
 entrou. Ahnocei mui beni. Ja chegou o correio ? A 
 senhora mandott-me dizer que viesse. tempo quefugiu 
 nao volta. morto, eujo pulso cessou de bater. Deus 
 mostrou a Farao o que hade fazer. Ja acabou ? Aoude 
 ficou hontem ? Ja bebes vinho ? Mudou o tempo. Ja 
 sefoi. Creio que foi ver a irma. Como passou V. S. a 
 noite ? Ella ainda nao dancou. A nacao desappareceu 
 da face da terra. seu amigo ainda nao entrou. JSfasceu 
 em Munich no dia 2 de Outubro. 
 
 He has fulfilled all his duties. The boy has cut me. 
 Have you dined? "When did your brother return from 
 Lisbon ? Has my father returned ? The poor wounded 
 soldier, whose pulse has ceased to beat. Time past, never 
 returns. The boy has drunk wine. Tour nephew has 
 sworn my death. The steamer lias arrived. They are 
 out. Has your master arrived? What has passed does 
 not return. His friend has not returned. Have you 
 taken tea ? I believe my uncle has gone to Campanario. 
 The king has sent me a beautiful ring. The allies have 
 taken the south of Sebastopol. 
 
181 
 
 LESSON CLXXXL 
 
 ENGLISH PRESENT = PORTUGUESE FUTURE, AND 
 VICE-VERSA. 
 
 La o espero. 
 
 Sam, mas logo volta. 
 
 Se eufor algiim dia a R6ma. 
 
 Quando vier, dfga-lhe. 
 
 Se me nao der mais, etc. 
 
 Nao dcho.* 
 
 I shall ivait for you there. 
 He's out, but will return soon. 
 If I go some day to Rome. 
 When he comes, tell him. 
 If you do not give me more. 
 I cannot find. 
 
 Havemos de ca tornar quando elle representdr. Eu. 
 Ih'o trarei a primeira vez que ca vier. Se podernios ser 
 uteis, ncauios as ordeus de V. M. Tira a vida a dois fi- 
 lhos meus, se eu o nao trouxer outra vez. Levem-me de 
 dlhos tapados aonde quizer&m. Nao dcho* as toalhas. 
 Yim para ver se aclio a chave. Eilippe esta vivo e sao, e 
 volta qualquer dia. Esta gente nao descdnga em quanto 
 nao subverter tudo. Lucte em quanto tiver for9as. Em 
 quanto respirdr nao existo senao para ti. Se nao tornar a 
 ver-te, este annel e para te lembrares de mim. 
 
 He will he hack immediately. The messenger will 
 soon return. I shall wait for the boy there. My master 
 will soon return. Know that they will not rest till they 
 humble us all. If I return some day to Paris, I shall see 
 the Emperor. If the man does not give me more, I will 
 not sell him the horse. When Mario sings, I shall go 
 again. The first time I come, I shall bring my guitar. I 
 cannot find* the plate. He has come to see if he can find 
 the keys. That boy will never rest till he has ruined his 
 health. While I hreathe, I shall never love another. 
 
 potential 
 
 The Portuguese present indicative is often equal to a present 
 tial : " nao dcho^ I cannot find. 
 
182 
 
 LESSON CLXXXIL 
 
 ENGLISH PRESENT PARTICIPLE = PORTTTGTTESE RELATIVE 
 AND INDICATIVE. 
 
 A voz de quern cldma. 
 
 Yendo um memno chordndo. 
 
 Acudir a quern chdma. 
 
 No anno que vem. 
 
 Como o pulso de um que treme. 
 
 Tanta gente que ahf vem ! 
 
 The voice of one crying. 
 
 Seeing a child crying* 
 
 To answer one calling. 
 
 In the coming year. 
 
 Like the pulse of one trembling. 
 
 Such a number coming here ! 
 
 Ouvia uma v6z que Ike dizia. Eis lima voz dos ceos, 
 que dizia. De repente acordou-me do lethargo lima voz 
 que hradou: " Foi aqui." Ella acalenta os meninos que 
 chorao. A eloqueneia e o talento que doinina pela pa- 
 lavra as vontades dos outros. Para o anno que vem es- 
 tarei em E-oma. Ouco alguem que pede soccorro. Eu vi 
 lima crean9a que cJwrdva pela inai. Meu pai ouviu la- 
 droes que forgavao a porta. Yia-se de terra lima inao que 
 agitdva um len90 branco. Ouvimos os passaros que doce- 
 mente cantdvdo no jar dim. 
 
 "We saw a hand leaving a white handkerchief. I 
 heard the voice of a young child citing. I think I shall 
 spend a few days next month at St. Anna. It was the 
 voice of one crying in the wilderness. I shall be in Lon- 
 don the greater part of next year. I hear the cries of 
 some one ashing assistance. "We hear the lions roaring 
 in the forests. I have not time to answer every one call- 
 ing on me. As I lay awake in my bed last night, I heard 
 some thieves forcing the window of my room. I saw a 
 poor child crying for its lost mother. Did you see the 
 crowd of people coming here ? In the coming winter. 
 
 Sometimes the participle is used. 
 
183 
 
 LESSON CLXXXIIL 
 
 POETUGFESE REFLECTIVE = ENGLISH PASSIVES AND 
 NEUTERS. 
 
 O senhor engana-se. 
 Canfirma-se a noticia. 
 Divide-se a casa em quartos. 
 lUles se tornao religidsos. 
 TJsao-se estas palavras. 
 Phendmenos que se tern obser- 
 vddo. 
 
 You are mistaken. 
 The news is confirmed. 
 The hou3e is divided into rooms. 
 They become religious. 
 The words are used. 
 Phenomena which have been, ob- 
 served. 
 
 Aquelles dois se despedlrao um do outro. Isto chd 
 ma-se trigo. Sentiu-se um grande ruido. Diz-se. Pdd- 
 ver-se hqje o museu ? Vd-se embora ! Deve indagdr-se 
 o estado das estradas. Todas as noticias que se poderem 
 colligir. As medidas de que sefaz liso n'este districto. 
 Para que este servico se possa fazer. A imitacao do que 
 se pratica nos paizes mais cultos. N'esta ilha somente se 
 fabrica louca de barro. No dia 10 do corrente se perde* 
 rao dois navios mercantes. A verdade e perigosa de 
 dizer-se, e desagradavel de ouvir-se. 
 
 These expressions are not used. You are mistaken, 
 Ma'am. The intelligence is not confirmed. The kingdom 
 is divided into six provinces. The conversation became 
 general. This is called barley. It is said that the king 
 is dead. Can the church he seen to day ? Yesterday, ten 
 ships of war were lost. It is dangerous to speak truth ; 
 disagreeable to hear it. The dear friends said good-bye. 
 This town is called rather handsome. In the dreadful 
 storm of 26th October, 1859, the Eoyal Charter and 
 many other ships were lost. 
 
184, 
 
 LESSON CLXXXIV. 
 
 ENGLISH INDICATIVE^ POBTTTGTJESE INFINITIVE. 
 
 Sinto nao poder. 
 Espero ve-lo. 
 Va ver quern e. 
 Smto deixd-lo. 
 Espero torndr a vS-lo. 
 Lisonjeio-me de merecer. 
 
 I am sorry that 1 cannot. 
 
 I hope I shall see you. 
 
 Go and see who it is. 
 
 I regret I must go. 
 
 I hope I shall see you again. 
 
 I natter myself I shall merit. 
 
 Estao no quarto as nossas malas ? Sim, senhores, la 
 as mandei por. Espero ve-lo em breve restabelecido. 
 Va abrir a porta. Temia nao ter o gosto de ver a V. S. 
 Quer o senhor ficdr para jantar comigo ? Sinto niiiito 
 nao poder aproveitar-me mais tempo de sua companhia. 
 Pretende nao ter sido enganado. Dizem ser no senhor 10 
 de uma Deusa tao cruel, que nao consente que ninguem 
 ahi aporte. Sentindo muito nao ter podido ir a casa do 
 senhor. Sinto causdr-Vae esta private Estimo muito 
 ser o drgao dos sentimentos da Academia. 
 
 I thank you sincerely for your attentioD. I am sorry 
 that I am obliged to tell you. I hope I shall see you 
 again to-morrow. Go and see who is at the door. Go 
 and open the front gate. I am sorry I cannot avail my- 
 self of your polite invitation. I regret I was not able to 
 go to your house yesterday. I am glad that I am the 
 organ of the opinion of the Camara. I hope that I shall 
 find my brother in perfect health. It seems to me that 
 the time has arrived. I am sorry I must leave the Society 
 of my friends. He pretends he has not been cheated. He 
 is sorry to cause the gentleman all this trouble. 
 
185 
 
 LESSON CLXXXV. 
 
 ENGLISH TNELNTTIVE PASSIVE = POTU GUESE INFINITIVE 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Ella se faz amdr. 
 
 E de desejdr. 
 
 Deixou-se apmihdr. 
 
 O mesmo se pode dizer de. 
 
 Como era de esperdr. 
 
 Eu as maudarei concertdr. 
 
 She makes herself beloved. 
 It is to be hoped for. 
 He let himself be cauglvt. 
 The same may be said of, 
 As was to be expected* 
 I'll get tiiem mended. 
 
 V. S. nimca se deixa -yer. Estas pennas nao prestao 
 para nada ; mande-as apardr. Nao sei se o mesmo se 
 podera dizer da sua intelligencia. Quizera mandar con- 
 certdr umas rendas, e faze-las depois lavdr. E preciso 
 da-lo a comjpor. Ali estao os marmores de Paros, que 
 os condes d'Arundel fizerao transportdr da Grrecia. De 
 maneira que pdde dividir-se em tres partes. A rainha 
 Christina fez assassindr Monaldeschi. Eazem-me doer. 
 Eazia-se temer dos Mouros. JE de ever que eile nao fosse 
 alheio. Isso nao deve admirdr. 
 
 He makes him self fear ed. I'll send them to be mended. 
 It cannot be denied. Truth is sometimes dangerous to 
 tell, and disagreeable to hear. This cannot be translated 
 into Latin. It is to be hoped that the Russians will 
 evacuate the north fort. The poor horse allowed himself 
 to be caught. I think the same may be said of many 
 men. As was to be expected, the first man was shot. He 
 will send the boots to be mended. Mrs. E. never 
 allows herself to be seen. Send these pens to be mended. 
 So that the whole kingdom can be divided into four parts. 
 He was incapable of deceiving, or allowing himself to 
 be deceived. 
 
186 
 LESSON CLXXXVI. 
 
 AM GOING TO = VOU, ESTOTJ PARA- 
 
 Vou despedrr-me de V. S. 
 
 Estou para ir a sua casa. 
 
 la a dizer. 
 
 Vao plantar. 
 
 Estou a ponto de me ir embdra. 
 
 O leitor vdi vendo. 
 
 I am going to take leave. 
 I am going to your house, 
 I teas going to say. 
 They are going to plant. 
 I am about to go away. 
 The reader is witnessing. 
 
 V6u-\h.e mandar um bocado de gallinha. Vou deitar 
 liito. Tolosa estdva a ponto de render-se, quando o du- 
 que appareceu a soccorre-la. Vou tocar para saber se 
 o almoco esta prompto. Vdi V. S. ver as luminarias ? 
 Estou para concluir um negocio mui importante. amor 
 fraterno estivera a ponto de dar a victoria a commise- 
 ra9ao. la para retirar-me, quando o monge me disse. 
 N'essa occasiao estdva elle a partir para S. Claudio. 
 Eu estou a dizer cousas que, etc. Estou para sair. 
 rapazinlio estd para morrer. Vou tomar um banho. 
 
 They are going into mourning. She was going to call 
 for help. I am, going to take leave of you, as the steamer 
 starts to-day at four o'clock. I shall ring to know if dinner 
 is ready. I was going to say that I could not pay the 
 money, when he offered me his purse. I am going to 
 plant sugar-canes in these fields. I am going to send 
 you a slice of this cold beef. The fort was on the point 
 of surrendering, when the Count appeared with 1000 
 men. The ship was about to sail for Teneriffe. I beg to 
 say, in reply to your letter of 21st ult. I shall put on 
 my boots. 
 
187 
 
 LESSON CLXXXVIL 
 
 AM TO, HAYE TO = DEYO, TENHO QUE (or) DE. 
 
 I am to dine with him. 
 We are to leave to-morrow. 
 You were to dine. 
 I was to have dined. 
 He has much to do. 
 I have to go. 
 
 Devo jantar com elle. 
 Temos de partir amanha. 
 Y. S. devia jantar. 
 £u devia ter jantado. 
 Tern nuiito que fazer. 
 Tenho que ir-me. 
 
 Nos devemos acompanha-los. O emir regulou os tri- 
 biitos que os vencidos devido pagar. Com o pretexto de 
 ter de occupar-se de graves negdcios. casamento devia 
 ser no come9o do inverno. Pequena cidade, onde devia 
 estdr a 6 de j unho, dia de feira. Tenho que pedir-lhe um 
 favor. Tenho muito que fazer. Elle tern cartas que es- 
 crever. Tenho que ir a miiitas partes. Tenho hora dada 
 para tratar de negocios. Nada tern que receidr d'isso. 
 Teve de ceder aos desejos dos ambicidsos. Elles guiarao- 
 me para o aposento, onde devia passar a noite. 
 
 He is to dine with the Duke of Palmella to-morrow, 
 I must set out on Thursday for Paris. You were to 
 breakfast with me ; why did you not come ? I was to 
 have dined* with the Count on "Wednesday, but I was too 
 ill to go. I have to ash a special favour. He has really 
 a great deal to do. I have two words to say to you. The 
 general settled the tributes, which the conquered tribes 
 were to pay. I have an appointment. Under the pretext 
 of having to occupy himself in matters of importance. 
 The funeral was to take place at three o'clock. 
 
 * This, though common, is not correct English. Such phrases 
 as "I was to have gone," " I intended to have stayed," should be," I 
 was to go" " I intended to stay." 
 
188 
 LESSON CLXXXVIII. 
 
 IDIOMATIC FORMS WITH "ESTOU. 
 
 r " 
 
 JEstou a estudar. 
 JEstd a cliover. 
 JEstou a partir. 
 Estou estudando. 
 JEstd acabando-se. 
 JEstou a ser julgado. 
 
 I am at study. 
 
 It is raining. 
 
 I am about to start. 
 
 I am studying. 
 
 He is digging. 
 
 I am to be judged. 
 
 Eu estdva a escrever quando elle partiu. JEstou a 
 trabalhar. JEstou a sudr em bica. JEstou a partir para 
 Portugal. JEstd jantdndo. Elle estd a estudar Direito 
 em Coimbra. Eu* a dizer-lhe isto, e o horaem a dormir ! 
 Eu estdva a rir, elle a cliordr. Eu estive a dizer missa, e 
 elles a oitvi-la,. Meu irmao estdva a desenhdr, e miuba 
 irrna a tocdr, quando pegou o fogo em casa. Elle estdva 
 Undo quando eu o encontrei. O Senhor P. estd a 
 mower e o filbo a brincdr. Estou aguarddndo o que 
 elle respondera. 
 
 Sbe was reading when he entered the room. He is 
 studying medicine in the University of Edinburgh. My 
 friend is about to start for Lisbon in the Galgo. I icas 
 running for the doctor, when I met my father. The poor 
 old monk tvas dying. Why am I talking to you about 
 things superior to your understanding ? Your brother 
 was playing the machete, when the house fell. It is rain- 
 ing in the mountains, though the sun is shining in town. 
 Your uncle is icorhing in the palace of the Count. I was 
 teaching the boys, when the earthquake took place. I am 
 perspiring very much. 
 
 * An elliptical phrase. 
 
189 
 LESSON" CLXXXIX. 
 
 IR WITH PRESENT PA11TICIPLE.* 
 
 Vdi-se chegdndo o inverno. 
 O tempo vdi limpdndo. 
 Vdi-se fazendo velho. 
 Vdi perdendo a belleza. 
 Vdi-se concluindo. 
 Em* amanhecSndo. 
 
 Winter 
 
 It clears up. 
 
 He is groiving old. 
 
 She is losing her beauty. 
 
 He is digging. 
 
 When day dawns. 
 
 Vdi-se approximdndo a vindima. Vdi-se fazendo tarde. 
 As n&vens vao-se separdndo. O tempo vdi estdndo mais 
 ameno. Durou a guerra dez annos, e ao passo que ia 
 durdndo e crescendo a guerra, se ia juntamente com os 
 annos diminuindo a causa d'ella. Como visse que se 
 vinlia chegdndo o dia da sua morte. Mentor ia seguindo 
 a Telemaco. Vdi-se chegdndo a colheita. Vdi perdendo 
 o medo. Eu os leio, mas vou sempre dizendo que nao. 
 O doente vdi-se concluindo. Isto vdi sendo dia. Deve 
 ser um prazer regio ir Undo aquella deliciosa satyra. 
 
 Winter is drawing near. In order to be able to live. 
 That sad emigration is depopulating this beautiful island. 
 Returning to what I was saying to you. The leaves of 
 the trees are falling. The months are rolling on. The 
 sick man is hastening to his end. The soldiers were fol- 
 lowing the enemy. Winter is coming, and the days will 
 soon be short. The rain has ceased, and the weather is 
 clearing up. When dag dawns, I shall setoff for Lisbon. 
 The weather is becoming milder, and the fields are getting 
 clothed with verdure. That young lady is losing her 
 beauty. The harvest is approaching rapidly. 
 
 * The participle with " em" prefixed is equal to a future in- 
 dicative. 
 
190 
 
 LESSON CXC. 
 
 CAN = POSSO, SEI ; COULD = PODIA, PODEBIA, SOTJEE. 
 
 Pode faze-lo, se gdsta. 
 Se Y. M. poder vir. 
 Sei ler e escrever. 
 D'onde se podia ver. 
 Perguntar se sabia ler. 
 Como se nao podessem haver 
 hdmens. 
 
 He can do it, if lie likes. 
 If you can come. 
 I can read and write. 
 Whence could be seen. 
 To ask if he could read. 
 As if there could not be men. 
 
 Diga-me em que lhe posso servir. V. S. pode fazer-me 
 urn grande servico. E/emediar-nos-hemos coino podermos. 
 Pode ver-se hqje o museu ? Nao posso ficar. E a 
 melhor cousa que pode fazer. P6de-me mandar isto ? 
 Que posso offerecer a V. S. ? Y. S. poderia fazer-me um 
 favor. Teremos peixe ? Nao pude achar. Todos^ os 
 sitios d'onde se podia ver o desembarque do chefe. Elle 
 soube reprimir os abusos. Poderia alguem espera-lo ? 
 Nao posso mais. Nao o posso sourer. Evito-o quanto 
 posso. mais depressa qaepode'r. 
 
 Can you send it for me to the Torrinha Eoad ? If I 
 can render you any service, I will do it with pleasure. 
 He could not be a minute without his friend. The best 
 advice that can be given. He found him the most patient 
 listener that garrulity could demand. Do you know 
 what can be done ? He said that you alone could give 
 exact intelligence. He could see and hear all, perfectly. 
 You can go home, if you like. I cannot remain to-night. 
 I began to ask, if he could read. Could any hope to see 
 the boy again ? I avoid the youth as much as I can. 
 As fast as you can. You can do me a favour. 
 
191 
 
 LESSON CXCI. 
 
 CAN HATE, COULD HATE = PODE TEE, PODEEIA TEE, 
 
 Elle nao pode ter feito isto. 
 13 impossivel que elle 
 
 ohrddo assim. 
 Nao pode ser que elle teriha 
 
 morto o hdmem ? 
 Bu poderia ter acabddo a obra, 
 
 Elle nao tinha podido descobrir. 
 
 He can not have done it. 
 He can not have done so. 
 
 He can not have killed the man ! 
 
 I could have finished the work. 
 
 He could not have found out. 
 
 £lle poderia ter seguido o officio de seu pai. Yerdades 
 que a sua razao nao tinha podido descobrir. £llle poderia 
 ter gdnho na especulaclo, se pensasse melhdr. Eu po- 
 deria ter feito isto, se tivesse tido tempo bastante. O 
 secretario poderia ter escripto este officio, se quizesse 
 trabalhar mais. Os hdmens poderido ter sido mais^fe- 
 lizes, se de ha mais tempo se tivessem conbecido. Elle 
 inflammou-se a ponto que poderia ter feito asneira. OjSe- 
 nhor E. tinha podido fazer isto, se lb'o pedissem. Elle 
 apresentou mais dinheiro do que tinha podido ganhar. 
 
 They beard truths, which tbe most cultivated reason 
 could not have discovered. Tbey can not have finished 
 that immense work in three montbs. You might have 
 built tbat bouse in a year. He could have done the work 
 very easily in three weeks, if they had allowed him. 
 Tbe book is better printed than I could have supposed. 
 Tbe secretary could have finished all these letters, if 
 he had not gone to the ball. It is quite impossible 
 tbat he can have acted so. The officer might have gained 
 100 dollars, if he had been attentive. I could have 
 saved tbe boy, if I bad bad a rope. 
 
192 
 
 LESSON CXCII. 
 
 MAT, MIGHT = POSSO, PODEEIA, PODESSE. 
 
 Posso pedir-llie lima graca ? 
 
 Posso enganar-me. 
 
 Qualquer que seja. 
 
 M.uitos poderiao ser felizes, se — 
 
 tJma questao que poderia ser 
 
 curidsa. 
 Seja feita a vonta.de cle Deus ! 
 
 May I ask a favour of you ? 
 I may be mistaken. 
 Whoever lie may be. 
 Many might be happy, if — 
 A question, which might 
 
 curious. 
 May God's will be done! 
 
 he 
 
 Isto pode ser. Quando o rapaz vier, poderd Y. M. ir. 
 Elles poderao magoar-se. Seja o que elle quizer, eu 
 estirno sua probidade. Pode ser assirn. Pode acon- 
 tecer. Qualquer pode fazer o que nao for contrario as 
 leis. JS r do nos e Ucito violar a lei. Ser-me-hd permittido 
 ofterecer-lhe. Pode ser que elle venha. Oxala que seja 
 feliz ! Oxala que volte cede. Pode-se retirar. Creio que 
 nos podemos levantiir. Eu podia fazer isso se quizesse. 
 Eu tinha podido faze-lo, mas, etc. Elle poderia ir, se 
 quizesse. Ser-lhe-7^« licito ir, se podesse. 
 
 He may do what he pleases. May I be allowed to 
 send you a whig ? May be, she will come to-morrow. 
 May he soon revisit his native land ! Such a thing may 
 happen. You may go, as you have finished the work. 
 These may do what is not contrary to law. You may 
 come as soon as you please. You may be sure that 
 you will find me at home. The boy might do it, if he 
 liked. The child miglit read, if he would. He might go 
 to Demerara, if he could get money to pay his passage. 
 He might write the letter, if he pleased. He might sing- 
 it he would. 
 
193 
 
 LESSON CXCIII. 
 
 SHALL,* SHOULD. 
 
 Terei a honra ? 
 Quer que elle venha ? 
 Serei aflbgado. 
 Iria, se tivesse cavallo. 
 Deve obedecer. 
 Se elle fizesse fsso. 
 
 Shall I have the honour ? 
 
 Will he come ? shall he come ? 
 
 I shall be drowned. 
 
 I should go, if I had a horse. 
 
 He should obey. 
 
 If he should do that. 
 
 Nao irei a, Lisboa amanha. A menina diz que nao 
 quer ir, mas hdde ir. Nao, nao hddefazer tal. Dir -Die- 
 Mi o que penso ? Se V. S. nao quer ir, w*$ so. Jrei por 
 elle ? Eu voltarei se poder. Ficarei, se me for licito. 
 Do que lhe ^eirfe eu offerecer ? QweV g'we eu o sm?« de 
 legumes ? Diga-me que edificios havemos de ver. Se 
 elle viesse, comeria com-ndsco. Se eu tivesse cavallo, 
 iria. Se tivesse noticias d'elles, dar-lh'as-Mz. Se cho- 
 vesse, Y. S. nao devia ir. Se eu tivesse poder, as cousas 
 haviao de ir d'outro mddo. 
 
 If he should do that, I would punish him. I shall 
 not go to Camacha on Monday. Shall I help you to a 
 little roast-beef? How much should I give him per day ? 
 I shall want you to-morrow at 6 o'clock. Shall you 
 have time to come with me ? Shall we go on Monday ? 
 I should like to have a catalogue. I shall be much obliged 
 to you. I should like a glass of beer. Shall I light the 
 fire ? We shall not be ready in time. It shall be done. 
 If we were perfect, we should be saints. Shall I have 
 the honour of calling on you to-morrow? If I had a 
 good pony, I should go. He shall have it next week. 
 
 * Implied in the form of the Portuguese verb, e. g., I shall go, 
 irei ; I should go, iria. 
 
194 
 
 LESSON CXCIY. 
 
 "WILL, "WOULD. QUEBO, YOU, QUIZ. 
 
 Quer V. S. faze-lo, ou nao? 
 
 Nao, eu nao quero. 
 
 Vou-Yhe mostrdr os quartos. 
 
 Nao o quiz fazer. 
 
 Isto e o que en f aria. 
 
 Se ella lh'o pedisse, dar-lh'o-7n« ? 
 
 Will you do it, or not ? 
 
 No, I will not. 
 
 I tvill shoto you the rooms. 
 
 He would not do it. 
 
 This is what Td do. 
 
 If she asked, would you give it ? 
 
 QmcV almocar com-nosco ? Quer cha ? Elle nao 
 quer trabalhar. Teria de pedir-lhe lima cousa. Quer 
 fazer-me um obsequio ? Vou ver. Creio que Y. S. gos- 
 tard oVeste. Elle Jiacle ca estar quarta-feira. Fa-lo-Jiei 
 com gosto. Farei por V. S. o que nao J- aria por ninguem. 
 Espero que nao seja nada. JSTao Tidde dizer que nao. 
 Quer tomar um cdpo de neve ? Quer Y. S. que eu va 
 hqje ? Choverd, mas nao hade trovejdr. JNos nao lhe 
 pagaremos. Segundo se quer. Deixe-me passar, eu Mide 
 ir. Eu quero que Y.M. f&qa. isto. 
 
 Will you go or not ? I m>z7Z tell him to come. Let 
 me pass. I will see my child. The man says he will 
 send the money to-morrow. He was very lazy, and would 
 not write the letter. The doctor says it will be nothing. 
 Til go and see who is at the door. What would you. 
 have us do ? If I were in your place, this is what I 
 would do. Would you go, if he invited you? In the 
 evening, he would relate to us his numerous adventures. 
 Sometimes he would go at 10 o'clock. No, I will not. 
 At night, the old man would read tc us. I told him all, 
 vet he would not believe me. 
 
195 
 
 LESSON CXCY. 
 
 WILL HATE, WOULD HAVE — TEREI, TERIA, QUERIED. 
 
 Teria escripto. 
 Iria,* teria ido. 
 Eu quero que elle obedeca. 
 Elle teria querido casar-se. 
 Nao ganhava.f 
 
 Eu nao quizera que V. S. escre- 
 vesse. 
 
 He will have written. 
 I would have gone. 
 I ivill have him obey. 
 He would have married. 
 I would not have gained 
 I would not have you write. 
 
 Eii teria jantddo com Y. S., porem a cMva nao me 
 deixdu. Pelusio, d'onde havia fazer-se o nosso embarque, 
 se Sesdstris nao acabara. Se tivesse pedido D. Beatriz 
 a vdsso pai, elle lh'a Tiouvera dado por mulher. Ella teria 
 morrfdo, se nao fosse, etc. N'lima regata de vapores o 
 nosso barco nao ganliava\ de certo o premio. Bern dese- 
 jdvaf eu ser o portaddr, mas negdcios domesticos me em- 
 bara^ao. Se nao estivesse impedido com molestia, iria 
 pessoalmente a casa de Y. S. A nao ser Y. S., estdva 
 perdido. 
 
 I would have paid him with pleasure, but he would 
 not take the money. Be that as it may, I will have my 
 child obey me. He would have liked to have married, 
 but, unfortunately, he had not the means. I would not 
 have you write to him any more, for he will not reply. 
 Without doubt, he would have died, if it had not been for 
 the kindness of the old vicar. But for you, he would have 
 been entirely ruined. I should have liked to accompany 
 you to Madeira, but pressing business prevents me. 
 
 * " Iria" would go >, is often used for "teria ido," would have 
 'gone. 
 
 f The imperfect is often used in this sense. 
 
196 
 
 WILL OR 
 
 LESSON CXCVL 
 
 shall" in the sense of 
 "have to be." 
 
 MUST OE 
 
 Se o fizer, pagdr-lhe-ML 
 
 Quanto lhe heide dar ? 
 
 O vinho hade ser barato est© anno. 
 
 que heide comer ? 
 
 Que camfnho heide tomdr ? 
 
 Dar-lhe-hei diias patacas. 
 
 If he does it, I must pay him. 
 What shall I have to give you ? 
 Wine ■will he cheap this year. 
 What shall I eat ? 
 What road must I take ? 
 Til give you two dollars. 
 
 JNfao se sabe em que se hade passar o tempo. Se all 
 lhe poder prestar algum servico, fd-lo-Mi com prazer. 
 Quando tiver sede, o que lieide beber ? JEstimd-lo-hei 
 miiito, Jlcdr-lhe-hei agradecido. Ser-me-hd licito pergun- 
 tar-lhe ? Apedr-nos-hemos aqui ? Sim, Senhores, Tidode 
 ter bons quartos e boas camas. V. S. hade achdr os pre- 
 90s mui razoaveis. Hade almogdr com-nosco. Que lhe 
 heide dizer da gente ? Para que hade matar-se ? A co- 
 lheita hade ser boa. Os vinhos haode ser muito bons este 
 anno. Aonde havemos de parar para jantar ? 
 
 If he finishes the printing in three weeks, I shall pay 
 hwi more. How much shall I have to give the man ? 
 Milho ivill be much cheaper next year. What will the 
 man drink ? "Which of these two roads shall I take ? I 
 shall do it with much pleasure. May I be permitted to 
 inquire if you have had good news from the duke ? You 
 will find the prices at the hotels very reasonable, but the 
 rooms are not clean. Where shall we stop to breakfast ? 
 When I am hungry, what am I to eat ? My friend, you 
 will breakfast with me this morning. I will give you ten 
 dollars, nothing more. 
 
197 
 LESSON CXCVIL 
 
 I HATE JT7ST — ACABO* DE. 
 
 Acabdva de vir, quando. 
 Acdbo de o fazer. 
 Chego agora mesmo. 
 Acabddo de publicar-se. 
 Acabdvao de conclufr. 
 Acabdva Y. S. de sair. 
 
 He had just come, when. 
 I have just done it. 
 I am just arrived. 
 Just published. 
 They had just finished. 
 You were just gone out. 
 
 Acdbo de tomdr lima chicara de cafe. Tome a vir 
 coser, quando acabar* de brincar. Acabao de entrar. 
 Nao fdco mdis que chegdr da Crimea. Os Musulraanos 
 acabdvao de conquistdr aquella parte da Africa. O novo 
 emir acabou de avassalldr o resto da Peninsula. Que 
 horas sao ? Acabao de dar nove. Os Judeus acabdvao de 
 receber a lei. O peixe acdba de chegdr. Este catalogo 
 acdba de ser publicado bqje mesmo. Acabdvamos de com- 
 prar a casa quando lhe pegou o fogo. Acabcmdo de dizer 
 isto. 
 
 The mail has just arrived. I have just told you. 
 Just published, a History of Portugal, by A. Herculano. 
 They had just finished a beautiful drawing of the fortress, 
 when a shot was fired. I am sorry I cannot dine with 
 you, as I have just finished lunch. In reply to your kind 
 letter, just received. The books, to which I refer, have 
 just been published by Silva. The allies have just suc- 
 ceeded in forcing the Russians to evacuate part of Sebas- 
 topol. We had/ws^ bought the house, when it took fire. 
 The lady had just gone out, when I called. Saving just 
 said these words, he expired. 
 
 * This idiom literally means, " I finish of doing ; " and resembles 
 the French, " Je viens de faire." 
 
198 
 
 LESSON CXCVIII. 
 
 OUGHT I>EYO, DEYIA. 
 
 Devo fazer o meu thema. 
 Elle deve estar aqui. 
 O vercle deve ir-lhe berii. 
 Nao devo duvidar. 
 O que devia dizer. 
 
 I ought to do nvy theme. 
 He ought to be here. 
 Green ought to suit you well. 
 I ought not to doubt. 
 What I ought to say. 
 
 Devemos trabalhar e nao brincar. V. M. deve pensar 
 antes de fallar. Aquelle que nao quer trabalhar nao deve 
 comer. Nao se deve deixar para amanha aquillo que se 
 pdde fazer hoje. A que horas deverei estar prornpto ? 
 Eu nao duvido, nem devo duvidar. Na guerra o rei deve 
 ser o defensor dos povos. E certo que se fosse verda- 
 deiro, devia ser adoptado. nome do Sr. E. deve ser- 
 nos tao caro, como se fosse o de um compatriota ndsso. 
 Este catalogo que deve considerar-se como um supple- 
 ment. 
 
 These boys ought to work, and not to play. Every 
 one ought to think before speakiug. He who will not 
 work, ought not to eat. This book ought to be considered 
 as an answer. If my plan is good, it ought to be adopted. 
 The interests of these children ought not to be sacrificed. 
 Such people ought not to be admitted into good society. 
 He neither doubts, nor ought to doubt. At what hour 
 ought the boat to be ready ? The king ought always to 
 be the defender of his country. That ought never to be 
 left for to-morrow, which can be done to-day. Tou ought 
 to go to Madeira in time. 
 
199 
 
 LESSON CXCDL 
 
 MUST — DETO, SEE PEECISO, E MISTBE, ETC. 
 
 Devo comef. 
 
 E preciso que elle seja doudo. 
 E mister separar-nos. 
 Preciso levantar-me. 
 Preciso que me faca, etc. 
 
 I must eat. 
 
 He must be mad. 
 
 We must part. 
 
 I must rise. 
 
 You must make me, etc. 
 
 Agora deve tomar uma cMcara de cafe. Preciso lavar 
 as maos. Preciso ir-me embora. E preciso irmos vesti- 
 das em corpo. Devo tomar a direita ou a esquerda ? 
 Devo fazer aquillo ? Calcarei as botas. porque deve fazer 
 lama. Sera mister que me faca outro par. Sera preciso 
 que eu leve a comida amanba ? Elles devem ter vindo 
 mui mo^os para a Inglaterra. Devemos morrer todos. 
 E mister que leve este rol. Preciso que isso esteja prompto 
 para quinta-feira. A que boras deverei estar prompto ? 
 Deve ser um prazer regio. 
 
 I must write. You must cut my hair. They must 
 learn. He must have been a handsome man. If you do 
 not wish to lose the friendship of your uncle, you ought 
 to act otherwise. He must be a tool, when he acts in 
 that manner. We must part, for the steamer goes in an 
 hour. You must make me a pair of stout boots. Now, 
 you must take a glass of wine and water. I must wash 
 my hands. We must go in full dress. Must I take the 
 right hand or the left ? At this price they must be very 
 good. What must be given to the coachman ? 
 
200 
 
 LESSON CC. 
 
 THERE IS, HERE IS— HA, TEM, ElS-AQTJI. 
 
 Ha ran hdmem. 
 
 Havia um soldado. 
 
 Nao ha perigo. 
 
 Nao tern pressa. 
 
 Ha seis mezes que estou aqui. 
 
 Nao ha quern o veja. 
 
 There is a man. 
 
 There tvas a soldier. 
 
 There is no danger. 
 
 There is no hurry. 
 
 I have been here six months. 
 
 You are quite a stranger. 
 
 Ha dois annos que o nao vejo. Tres dias ha que eu 
 a vi. Ha muito tempo que nao tenho o gosto de ver a 
 V. S. Ha alguma cousa de novo ? ~Naolia tempo a per- 
 der. Ha cartas para mim ? Devo ter lima carta no 
 escaninho. Ms-aqui lindos aventaes de seda. Aqui os 
 tern lindissimos. JEis-aqui o que eu aborreco. Ha alguma 
 esperanca ? JE'zs-me aqui. Nada 7ia tao perigoso como a 
 ma companhia. Eis-aqui um. amigo meu. Sa homens. 
 Que tempo Jia que V. S. esta no Tunchal ? Ha um mez 
 que elle esta doente. 
 
 There will always be poor in the world. If there 
 should be any one — . If there were but two horses. 
 How long have you been in Oporto ? There is nothing 
 so injurious to the invalid as excitement. She has been 
 very ill for two months. Cronstadt is one of the strongest 
 fortresses that exist. There is no hurry. I shall send it 
 to-morrow. Here are some very fine books for sale. Is 
 there anything new in the paper to-day ? Are there any 
 letters for my father ? I have been five years in the 
 island. 
 
201 
 
 LESSON CCI. 
 
 ADVEBBS OE PLACE. 
 
 Onde ? por onde ? aonde ? para 
 
 onde? embdra? 
 Aqui, ahi, d'ahi, all, por aqui. 
 
 Alem, ca, la, acola, arriba. 
 
 Cerca, dentro, fdra, diante, atras. 
 
 Where ? which way ? whither 
 away? 
 
 Here, there, thence, yonder, this 
 way. 
 
 Beyond, here, there, over there, 
 up. 
 
 Round, within, out, before, be- 
 hind. 
 
 Onde e a casa de — ? Yenha ca. Ya-se embdra. Eu 
 aqui estou bem. Venha^or aqm. Ya por ahi. Passe 
 por all. Yenha d'aqui a pouco. Yamos a pe ate Id. Por 
 onde vamos ? JLis-aqui tima linda vista. Ha cinco annos 
 pdra-cd. Nao se mova d'ahi. Pique ahi. Yoltemos 
 par a trdz. Aonde vai o rapaz ? D'aqui a alguns dias. 
 Torne atrdz. D'aqui para ali. Aqui dentro. D'aqui 
 por diante. Dentro em tres dias. Tern saido/bV^. Tenho 
 gente de fdra. Janta fdra. Mandar alguem adidnte. 
 De hoje em diante. Deixar alguem atrdz. Alem d'isso. 
 
 Where is the church ? Let us go on horseback. Sere 
 is a beautiful watch. Where is your master ? Stay here. 
 He goes out. My friend lives there. Which way did he 
 go? From hence forward. He has company. My friend 
 is dining out. Besides this. The church is far from this. 
 Near land. It is near mid-day. The gentleman is not 
 within. Nearly five years ago. I shall return within 
 three weeks. My master dines out to-day, not far from 
 this. Let us go up. He went down. After that, he 
 went away. 
 
202 
 
 LESSON CCIL 
 
 ADYEBBS OF TIME. 
 
 Quando, algumas vezes, desde. 
 Sempre, cedo, tarde, para sempre. 
 Niinca, tantas vezes, nmitas vezes, 
 
 raras vezes, outra vez. 
 Agora, antes, depois, entao. 
 Hqje, hontem, hontempela nianha. 
 
 When, sometimes, since. 
 Always, soon, late, for ever. 
 Never, so often, often, seldom, 
 
 again. 
 Now, before, after, then. 
 To-day, yesterday, yesterday 
 
 morning. 
 
 Qudndo vai o vapor P Apenas tiulia saido, qudndo a 
 casa cam. Hoje em dia. De qudndo em qudndo. Desde 
 entao. Devemos sempre fazer o nosso dever. Miiito cedo. 
 Amar para sempre. Ouvi-o dizer outr'ora. Eu antes 
 quereria nozes. Vai-se fazendo tdrde. Mais do que nunca. 
 Agora quer uma cousa, agora quer outra. Antes morrer 
 que ser traidor. Voltei tres Inezes depois. Hontem foi 
 dia santo em todo o logar. Levante-se^'i. E^a tempo. 
 J a vou. J a sefoi o seu mestre ? Estive la hontem pela 
 manha. Logo you. Logo que receberdes esta, vinde 
 ver-me. 
 
 When does lie return ? He had hardly gone, when he 
 fell. I see him from time to time. Till now. He will 
 rather die, than work. He is sometimes in town in the 
 morning. Always get up early. Since then I have sel- 
 dom seen him here. I shall write to yon to-day, or to- 
 morrow. It is growing late, I must go home. He will 
 give it you now. Yesterday was the first day of the month. 
 He prefers fish. It is time to write that letter. I am 
 coming directly. As soon as he died. Formerly so full 
 of life. 
 
203 
 
 LESSON CCIIL 
 
 ADYERBS OF QUANTITY AND NUMBER. 
 
 Tao quao ; lima vez, diias vezes. 
 Miii, mais, menos, tanto quanto. 
 Assas, apenas, tanto quanto, de- 
 
 masiado, em quanto. 
 Quasi, de nenhum mddo, so. 
 Cerca, as vezes, as mais das vezes. 
 
 So as ; once, twice. 
 
 Much, more, less, as much. as. 
 
 Enough, hardly, so much as, too 
 
 much, while. 
 Almost, not at all, only. 
 About, at times, most frequently. 
 
 JNao va tao depressa. Tao alto e tao branco. Tanto 
 melhor. Tanto peior. Tanto por tanto. Se elle fosse tao 
 prudente quao atrevido. Fiz isso tres vezes. Nem mais 
 nem menos. Quer comer mais? Sao quasi dez horas. 
 Quanto leva pela passagem ? Mui agradavel. Pouco 
 mais on. menos. Nao se acha menos. Adiantar-se-ha 
 quanto poder. Qucmto em mim for. Defendo-o quanto 
 pdsso. JEmquanto a este homem castigo parece-nos 
 demasiddo severo. Mmqudnto durar o miindo. Ha quasi 
 um mez. De mais a mais. Emqudnto ao mais. Com- 
 prido de mais. 
 
 He goes too fast. This man is so tall. If you come 
 with us, so much the better. If she were as good as she 
 is beautiful. He is sixty years, neither more nor less. 
 I found myself minus. How much did you pay for this 
 book ? He will write as much as he can. As to this 
 country, I think it beautiful. While the world lasts, 
 there will be good and bad men. I shall help you as far 
 as in me lies. It is nearly a year. I have not even a 
 dollar. It is almost 4 o'clock. His conduct is not at all 
 agreeable. So much the worse. The cholera raged, so 
 that it threatened to destroy all. 
 
204 
 
 LESSON CCIV. 
 
 ADVERBS OE MANNER AND QUALITY. 
 
 Sim, certamente, na verdade. 
 Nao, amda nao, nada, nada 
 
 menos. 
 Assini, por acaso, assim mesmo. 
 Como, bein, mal, melhdr, peidr. 
 Talvez, pdde ser, porventiira. 
 Devagar, depressa. 
 
 Yes, certainly, indeed- 
 
 No, not yet, nothing, nothing 
 
 less. 
 So, by chance, just so. 
 How, well, ill, better, worse. 
 Perhaps, may be, per chance. 
 Slowly, fast. 
 
 Creio que sim. Digo que nao. Eacamos assim. Elle 
 nao me disse nada. Nao o creio. Ainda nao acabou ? 
 Como diz V. S. ? Nao le bem. V. S. nao anda nada. 
 Como se chama isto ? Elle falla devagdr. Talvez nao 
 seja necessario. Muito hem, estarei prompto. Estimo 
 muito que assim acontecesse. Como assim ? Assim seja. 
 Como quer que seja ? Morrer como militar. Eerido como 
 estava, fallou. Ora hem. Bempouco. Muito hem feito. 
 De mal para peior. Mal disposto. Nao ha nada melhdr. 
 Cdda vez melhdr. Esta peior. Nao pode ser. Yamos 
 
 I say so. I believe not. Let him do so. I cannot go 
 yet. The boy does not write well. Perhaps he will return 
 to-morrow. So be it, I am quite ready. He wishes to 
 die as a soldier. Ill as he was, he wrote a long letter. 
 There is nothing better than pure water. Let us go back 
 quickly. He grows hetter and better. Whatever he the 
 case, I must go to Lisbon. The work is very well done. 
 I am glad that he is so well. Go quickly. I have not 
 seen it yet. Let him do so. The work is very well done. 
 The poor are behaving worse and worse. Charles does not 
 speak well in public. 
 
205 
 LESSON CCV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES USED EOR ADVERBS. 
 
 Sinto infinito. 
 
 Rdro pregava. 
 
 Disse ella bdixo. 
 
 Doce tanges, doce cantas. 
 
 Falla cldro e distincto. 
 Fallava rijo. 
 
 I regret very much. 
 He rarely preached. 
 She said in a low voice. 
 Sweetlythou playest, sweetly sing- 
 
 est. 
 He speaks clearly and distinctly. 
 He was speaking aloud. 
 
 Desprezando ingrdta e descuiddda os mimos com que 
 foi dotada. Queira V.S. aceitar henigno a expressao de 
 meu sincero louvor. TJma tal sociedade e a sentinella 
 que vigia cauteldsa em torno, etc. Tenho a honra de 
 dizer-lhe que me aproveitarei gostoso dos seus offere- 
 cimentos. Sentindo infinito a dor que tao justamente 
 afflige a Y.S. Minha mulher se reconhece agradecida. 
 Eolgo infinito de ter uma occasiao de ser litil a Y.S. 
 Ellas viviao seguras e quietas. Sentiu infinito a morte 
 do seu amigo. Elle falla Idixo. 
 
 Will you kindly accept this trifle ? I rejoice ex- 
 to have it in my power to be of use to you. I 
 shall avail myself with pleasure of your kindness. He 
 watches carefully around. The monk rarely preaches. 
 I grieve very much. Despising ungratefully the offers I 
 made. I feel very much the grief which, etc. He spoke 
 very slowly. I rejoice much to hear of your good for- 
 tune. He lives quietly and securely in a cottage. Will 
 you kindly excuse the trouble I give you ? I shall avail 
 myself gratefully of your kindness. 
 
206 
 
 LESSON CCVI. 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY OF ADVERBS. 
 
 Ca e la, por dra. 
 
 Para ca e para la, sobretuclo. 
 
 Ja la, ja agora, ja entao. 
 
 Ja ha dias, jaja ; jaja. 
 
 Aqui dentro, ate aqui, ate alii. 
 
 Amda nao, algum tanto. 
 
 Hither and thither, at present. 
 Up and down, above all. 
 Done with, now, even then. 
 Some clays ago, quickly ; yes, y 
 Within, to this, to that time. 
 Not yet, rather. 
 
 D'ha cinco annos^ara cd. Desde entao para cd sem- 
 pre cri que, etc. A historia dos tempos que ja la vao. 
 Estas botas sao grandes de mdis. As solas nao sao las- 
 tdnte fortes. -D' aqui a tres mezes. Issojd la vai. Ld 
 se foi tudo. J~d Id vai o tempo. Jdjd me lembro. Isso 
 hontem seria bom,^ agora e superfluo. V a jdjd! Aqui 
 jaz. D'aqut a algiins dias. D'ali a d6is dias. Ao longe 
 pelos campos. jy ahi a pouco pareceu-me ouvir a voz. 
 Ja chora,jd se rijd se enfureee. O Alcantara, sobre o 
 qualja entao havia uma ponte^awco mdis oumenos como 
 a de hoje. 
 
 G-o very quickly. Some days hence. Acw I remem- 
 ber. The higher you go, the colder it gets. This dress 
 is rather short. Three months hence I shall go to 
 England. He promotes directly or indirectly the instruc- 
 tion of the people. Morally and socially speaking. Some 
 days ago, I was walking in the Praca. Yesterday food 
 would have been welcome ; to-day it is useless. Even 
 then there was a bridge and a small house. I cannot go 
 at present. This paper is too large. The soles of my 
 boots are not strong enough. They will go to England 
 within three months. The history of days gone by. 
 
207 
 LESSON CCVIL 
 
 ADVERBIAL PHEASES. 
 
 Apenas, Trial, tanto que. 
 
 Tdnto que elle sepultoti sen pai. 
 
 Yeiu Ter-m eassim que chegou. 
 
 Em chegando a porta. 
 
 As soon as, hardly. 
 
 As soon as he had buried his 
 
 father. 
 He came to see me as soon as he 
 
 arrived 
 As soon as I had arrived. 
 
 Elle correu a mim apenas me avistou. Ella apenas 
 o vira desapparecer no arco, saira detraz do reposteiro, 
 Apenas descavalgou, deu varias ordens. Elle foi roubado 
 pelos Berbereseos, quando apenas contava cinco annos. 
 " Meu criado " gritou Brites apenas me viu, Apenas 
 chegou a Tunis, foi elle comprado por ordem do bei. 
 Mai se pddem ler sem horror. besteiro apenas entrou 
 encaminhou-se para uma diamine. Os recursos do pastor 
 apenas chegavao para sustentar as creancas, 
 
 As soon as he had dined, he went out. They could 
 hardly stand. They hesitated, as soon as they saw me. 
 Hardly had the horse come, when he was bought. No 
 sooner had they left the regiment, than they became the 
 victims of the guerillas. The soldier no sooner entered 
 the room, than he took a seat near the fire. If I do not 
 get up as soon as I awake, I fall asleep again. He had 
 hardly entered the house, when the assassin stabbed him. 
 No sooner had the ship struck, than all order was at an 
 eud. He lost his sight, when he was hardly six years old. 
 He paid the money as soon as he came. 
 
Senao,* menos, so, nao mais do 
 
 que- 
 Ninguem senao meu pai. 
 Mais nada senao- 
 Tiido, menos lima affronta- 
 Nao tenho senao. 
 Nao tern mais do que dizer- 
 Nao ha formdsa sem senao- 
 
 208 
 LESSON CCVIIL 
 
 SEtfA.0, ETC. 
 
 Except, less, only, only- 
 
 No one but my father. 
 Nothing more, except. 
 All but an affront. 
 I have nothing but. 
 You have only to say. 
 No beauty without a but. 
 
 Eu esquecer-me-hia de tudo menos de urn amor puro 
 e ardente. Nao se esta senao ao pe do liime. Elle nao 
 tern outra culpa senao a de ter obedecido a lei do pro- 
 pheta. Ninguem nos ve se^ao Deus. Nao tenho se^ao 
 papel ordinario. Tudo e merecedor de respeito, menos o 
 infeliz que vos falla. Nao achei se^ao homems. Nao 
 espero senao pelas siias ordens. Nao faco outra cousa 
 senao tossir. Nao e senao um aguaceiro. Nao faz senao 
 conversar. Nao quero escrever senao um bilhete. Nao 
 entrei senao para saber como estava Y. S. 
 
 It is nothing hut water. I only eat twice a day. A 
 miserable system is that of those who admit no other 
 light than that of reason. "We have here hut five loaves. 
 It is nothing hut an invention. This excellent man had 
 nothing hut a limited income. The letter contained no- 
 thing hut the usual words. During the whole three days, 
 I did nothing hut write to Laura. He leaves nothing hut 
 ruins. He knows no mother hut me. He has nothing hut 
 an old coat. They have only a very small salary. He 
 had no fault hut laziness. 
 
 * " Se nao " means if not ; as, " Elles mdstrao se nao mutua ami- 
 zade, ao menos nmtuo respeito." 
 
209 
 
 LESSON CCIX. 
 
 THAT DE QTTE.* 
 
 Sem se lembrarem de que.f 
 Este sera o signal de que, etc. 
 Nao sou dfgno de que entres na,etc. 
 Nao ba de que.% 
 Peca que lhe deem de* beber. 
 
 Without remembering that. 
 This shall be the sign that. 
 I am not worthy that you, etc. 
 That is nothing. 
 Call for something* to drink. 
 
 Com a differ enga de que o periodo conta-se por annos. 
 Becordei-me de que ja nem pai nem irma tinha. Elle 
 dava visiveis signaes de que o sen coracao nao estava 
 sereno. Avisa-lo-hei de que deve comparecer. Queixa- 
 vao-se os povos de que o abbade mandava, etc. Yasco 
 tremia de que o segredo fatal lhe escapasse. Todos se 
 queixavao de que os tempos nao erao prosperos. Esta 
 certo de que os lencoes estejao bem seccos ? Sem se 
 lembrarem de que o medico disse hontem a tarde. Sinto 
 muito queixar-me de que o secretario escreveu. Estou 
 perfeitamente seguro de que estou dizendo a verdade. 
 
 He remembered that he had invited the general and 
 two friends to dinner. I am not certain that the sheets 
 are dry. He will convince himself that his faith is weak. 
 Without my remembering that the man had gone. This 
 shall be the sign that I send thee. If I remember what 
 the old man told us. Impressed with the conviction 
 that associations are a powerful element, etc. I am con- 
 vinced that your creditor will not pay the £50. Be sure 
 that the bed is well-aired. I remembered that he had 
 lost his brother at Cawnpore. 
 
 * De, etc. De que often means " something]' as, " De-me de 
 que beber," Give me something to drink. 
 
 f Que is pronounced que when it finishes a sentence, as in Nao 
 ha de que; otherwise it is pronounced que (e mute), as in Nao sou 
 digno de que entres na, etc. 
 
 X Equal to " Pray don't mention it j" or, " It's not worth men- 
 tioning." 
 
210 
 
 LESSON CCX, 
 
 PREPOSITIONS OF EXISTENCE AND STATU, 
 
 Em. 
 
 Sobre, sob, entre. 
 Ante, apds, contra. 
 Com, sem. 
 Dentro de. 
 
 In, on, at, into. 
 
 Upon, under, between, an, at. 
 
 Before, after, against. 
 
 With, without. 
 
 Within. 
 
 No inverno. Em casa. Em guerra. Em methodo 
 breve. Em consciencia. Em ponto. Em Londres. 
 Esta em si. Eicou em terra. Estive em Africa. Vai em 
 biisca d'elle. Em punicao dos seus peccados. Ee um 
 em outro. Em acabando, irei. Nos nossos tempos. Ee 
 riia em riia. Esta sobre a mesa. Sobre longa conside- 
 racao. Toma sobre si a ciilpa. Sob a figura de Mentor, 
 Sob sen amparo. Entre limas arvores. Entre nds fique 
 o segredo. Le a carta entre si. Ea-lo-hei com prazer. 
 Sem ceremonia. Com tantas attencoes. Ante os dlhos. 
 
 At all times. In Paris. In England. From door to 
 door. Straws formed into a flower. In three days. It 
 is in the drawer. In proof of his friendship. Above out 
 strength. The Queen reigns over the people. The war 
 in Asia. He went from one to the other. The book is 
 on the table. Having dined, I shall go out. Your friend 
 is not himself. He will do it with much pleasure. He 
 will pay in advance. The man voted against me. With- 
 out saying a word. Without delay. Without reason. 
 He dines at the inn. He is at home. Amongst friends, 
 I shall be there within an hour. 
 
211 
 
 LESSON CCXI. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS OE ACTION. 
 
 De ; desde ; por. 
 Por. 
 
 A ; ate ; para. 
 Ate esse ponto. 
 Para com. 
 
 Of, from, by, than ; since ; by. 
 Through, by means of. 
 To, at ; till; for; towards. 
 So far. 
 Towards. 
 
 Peco-lhe por favor. Delas stias drdens. Da minha 
 parte. Se eu vier por Coimbra. Veiu de Eranca. Da 
 choupana ao palacio. Em menos de tres annos. Em vasos 
 de metal. Cheio ^'agua. O pobre do bomem. Portas 
 de ouro. E de Lisboa. Edicao para uso do Collegio. 
 Elle sain de casa. Desde entao. Desde as tres boras ate 
 as quatro. De dia. Capdz de ensinar. Viver de peixe. 
 Saltar de alegria. Diante de mim. De madrugada. Elle 
 se aparta do seu dever. De Eunchal a Machico ba tres 
 leguas. A juizo do cirurgiao. Irei a Londres. 
 
 A marble statue.* A writing master. I learned it by 
 beart. One by one. From Madrid to Lisbon. Till that 
 moment. He must go to Santarem. From man to man. 
 The thief of a boy! I shall return through Grermany, in 
 less than four months. Tour friend is from Spain. At 
 3 o'clock. He is of a good family. A wind-mill. They 
 live on fish. In the opinion of the lawyer. Erom Eun- 
 chal to the Mount. He will go to Braganza. I must do 
 my duty towards my pupils. Since then, I have not seen 
 him. The poor woman ! 
 
 * Such forms are translated as if " statue of marble." 
 
212 
 LESSON CCXII. 
 
 USES OF PABA. 
 
 Vai para Franca. 
 
 O amor para com o fflho. 
 
 Trabalho para ganhar. 
 
 Para o dia seguinte. 
 
 Esta, para partir. 
 
 Muito bom para xxm principiante. 
 
 He is going to France. 
 
 TuO\efor the son. 
 
 I work to gain. 
 
 For the following day. 
 
 He is about to start. 
 
 Very goodybr a beginner. 
 
 Vou para Lisboa. Yai para casa d'elle. Esta para 
 chover. Quero os sapatos^anz hqje. Habilidade/>ar« as 
 lettras. Para dentro do mar. TJnia viagem para as Jn- 
 dias. Para confirm acao d'esta verdade. Tenho hora 
 dada para tratar de negdcios. Deus sabe para que. 
 Para a outra vez. Vou tocar para saber^ Agua quente 
 para lavarmos as maos. Para cima. Elle nao presta 
 para nada. Para que Y. S. o saiba. De mim para mim. 
 Ha oito para ndve annos. 61he para mim. Para a 
 outra parte. Yestidos para os hdspedes. 
 
 This bouse is for tbe countess. This pencil is for 
 drawing. He is strong enough to walk. He is not the 
 man for that. A house for the poor. John works for 
 the public good. On the other side. Towards the end 
 of the month. Much advanced for his age. We are just 
 going to start. He is gone ^-stairs. They have gone 
 down. Towards the south. For the future. A child of 
 8 to 10 years. Four or five leagues off. A remedy for 
 all diseases. He went off to France. This book is for a 
 beginner. 
 
!1S 
 
 LESSON CCXIII. 
 
 USES OF POR.* 
 
 Os males causados por Joao. 
 Por toda a Xsia ; por porta. 
 
 Por anno, mez, semana, dfa. 
 Por dez annos, por culpado. 
 Feito por forca, por vergonha. 
 A dbra esta por fazer. 
 
 The evils caused by John. 
 Throughout Asia, through the 
 
 gale. 
 Per annum, month, week, day. 
 Por ten years. As guilty. 
 Done by force, out of shame. 
 The work is not done. 
 
 Por agora. Ir por vinho. Palavra por palavra. 
 Trocar vinho por azeite. Por douto que seja. Por mim, 
 ficarei aqui. Por todo o reino. V. S. nao o tera por 
 menos de dez patacas. Eu passarei por Portugal. A 
 razao de vinte por cento. Deixarao-n'o por morto. Eu 
 tenho-o por meu amigo. Por mar e por terra. Vai pelo 
 medico. Por exemplo^ Por inveja. Por toda a vida. 
 Reputado por sabio. A noite irei ^>or sua casa. Peco-lhe 
 pela nossa amizade. Um vale por muitos. Eu intercedi 
 por Scipiao. A obra fi.cdu. por acabar. Pelas duas horas 
 da tarde. 
 
 For the space of a year. For money. For 160 dollars 
 a year. .5y the force of friendship. i?y this letter. We 
 must go for water. He exchanges wine for bread. As 
 for me, I shall go. I'll not give the book for less than 
 5 dollars. He pays at the rate of 10 per cent. He re- 
 turns to Germany by Erance. I shall call on you about 
 4 this afternoon. We must send for the doctor. How- 
 ever rich he may be. Done by John. £50 per annum. 
 For many ages. For two pounds. Out of spite. He 
 translates verbally. The robbers left him for dead. 
 
 Por'' is a verb; (i por" a preposition. 
 
214 
 
 LESSON CCXIY. 
 
 PKEPOSITIONAL PHEASES WITH " DE.' 
 
 Antes,* diante,* dentro, detraz. 
 Debaixo, em ciina (a cima), alem, 
 
 atraz. 
 Defronte, acerca, ardda, emrdda. 
 Depois, ao reddr, em torno, ao 
 
 longo, abaixo. 
 
 Before, before, within, after. 
 Under, upon, beyond, behind. 
 
 Facing, about, round, around. 
 After, round, in turn, along, 
 below. 
 
 Antes do sen nascimento. Antes de quiuta feira. 
 Didnte de mini. Did?ite do Rei. Dentro do seu paiacio. 
 Dentro do meu coracao. Dentro do anno. Dentro da ci- 
 dade. Detraz da porta. Detraz do paiacio. Alem d'isso. 
 Leia didnte de mini. Debdixo da mesa. Depois de ceia. 
 Depois de tantas promessas. Depois de Cicero. Depois 
 d\4manha. Depois de jantar. Fora da casa. Estar de- 
 fronte de outro. ]N"a roda do anno. Fora da graca. Fora 
 de perigo. Fora de tempo. Acerca do nmro. Acerca 
 d'este negdcio. Ferto do rio. Ferto de tres horas. 
 
 Before the creatiot). Before the house. He stood he- 
 fore the fire. After the flood. BeMnd me. Within the 
 house. Out of the kingdom. Out of town. 0w£ of 
 doors. Beyond measure. BeMnd the house. Tinder the 
 chair. After dinner. After so much work. Near the 
 house. Facing the church. He went round the house. 
 Along the sea-coast. Over his head. Zypo^ the table. 
 From off' the chair. He sat below them. He is out of 
 danger. I told him about this. Near 10 o'clock. Beside 
 me. From beyond the river. Beyond sea. Under the 
 show of friendship. Before breakfast. 
 
 * "Antes" is before as to &e : 
 
 diante^ is before as to pZace or 
 
215 
 
 LESSON CCXV. 
 
 Junto. 
 
 Pegado, na casa pegada. 
 
 Quanto. 
 
 Ate. 
 
 Conforme, segiindo. 
 
 Tocante. 
 
 Close. 
 
 Near, next door. 
 
 As to. 
 
 Till. 
 
 According to, suitable. 
 
 Touching. 
 
 A minha casa estiijzhito a sua. Junto a. cidade. Pe- 
 gado as cousas do miiiido. Pegado aos jardins de Cesar. 
 Quanto a dispiita. Triste ate a morte. Isso agrada ate 
 aos briitos. Ingrato ate ao pai. Desde as dez horas ate 
 as onze. Ate aos olhos. Ate a primeira. Julgou con- 
 forme as leis. Viver conforme aos dictames da razao. 
 JNada sei tocante ao assiimpto. Segundo S. Jeronymo. 
 Na casa pegada a minha. Junto as margens do mar. 
 Esta lista sera junta aos estatiitos. Quanto a esse ponto. 
 Conforme a lista do governador. 
 
 TiZZ the month of June. As to this subject. Accord- 
 ing to your orders. According to the promise he made. 
 He knows absolutely nothing in relation to the subject 
 in question. The governor's palace is near the fortress 
 of St. George. The prince was ungrateful, even to his 
 father. As to the dispute, I think I shall leave it in 
 the hands of the governor. I shall stay at home till 4 
 o'clock. His quinta (villa) is very near the sea-shore. 
 I know nothing relative to the subject of which you speak. 
 We ought to act according to the dictates of reason. 
 You must judge according to the laws. 
 
215 
 LESSON CCXYI. 
 
 PEEPOSITION WITHOUT "a" OE " DE." 
 
 A, ate. 
 
 Com, conforrne, contra. 
 Durante, cle, desde. 
 Entre, em, segiindo, salvo. 
 Para, por, perante, sob. 
 Sobre, traz, sem, tocante. 
 
 At, till. 
 
 With, according to, against. 
 
 During, of, since. 
 
 Between, in, according to, except. 
 
 For, by, before, under. 
 
 Upon, bebind, witbout, about. 
 
 You a Londres. Nao chegarei a tempo. Nao sei 
 inontar a cayallo. D'aqui a tres dias, A seu gosto. Ao 
 principio. Elle foi a casa. Cara a cara. Ate Roma. 
 Ate as orelhas. Com a ajuda ^'um amigo. Com cortezia. 
 Com armas prohibidas. Conforrne o meu parecer. Con- 
 forme o seu merecimento. Eallou contra mim. Contra a 
 sua vontade. Durante o inverno. Yem de Lisboa. 
 Elle foi a pe desde Funchal ate Camaeho. Desde o 
 primeiro ate o ultimo. Conforrne este piano. Desde o 
 herco. Sem dinheiro. Para mim. JEm Paris. Entre 
 nos. Perd n te o juiz. 
 
 I sball return to Spain. The bouse is on tbe right 
 hand. He goes on foot. They travel by night. He lives 
 in London. He speaks with elegance. According to their 
 principles. The day after. According to his custom. 
 I saw him face to face. Dinner is already on the table. 
 During fourteen years. To the east and to the north. 
 Except Arragon and Navarre. JJn der the feet. Accord- 
 ing to this plan. According to the indications. From 
 that period. Erom the beginning to the end. He is at 
 his ease. He lives in the English fashion. A man 
 let ween 20 and 30 years of age. 
 
217 
 
 LESSON CCXVII. 
 
 PREPOSITIONAL IDIOMS. 
 
 Em lhe morrendo o pai. 
 Nao podemos ir de bdtas. 
 Sem irmos vestidos em corpo.* 
 Precisa toma-lo emjejum. 
 Sem apparato nem ostentacao. 
 Pelo que me toca. 
 
 As soon as his father is dead. 
 We can't go in boots. 
 Without going in full dress. 
 It must be taken fasting. 
 Without form or show. 
 As far as I am concerned. 
 
 Precisa ir de sapatos. Em nossa procura. Urn doutor 
 em leis. Tomar de renda. P6r maos violentas em Joao. 
 Bosquejar ao lapis. Yende a peso. Pagavel a vista. 
 G-ente havida por incapaz de enganar. A 60 dias vista. 
 A minha espera. Elles gostao de orar em pe nas Syna- 
 gdgas. Ao alcdnce de toda a gente. Nao ha obra, por 
 grande que seja, que se nao pdssa encurtar. Servir de 
 segundo pai. Em eu Undo boa cama. Sem mostrar vai- 
 dade nem soberba. Caindo em terra. Em acabando, irei. 
 Os homens feitos d imdgem de Deus. Jantar na riia. 
 
 He comes to (em) his assistance. Blindfold. Waiting 
 for us. Above the level of the sea. By good fortune. 
 Prom sea to sea. Tou must take that medicine fasting. 
 Your brother is a doctor of laws. They laid violent hands 
 on the treasures in the palace. Yon cannot go to court 
 in boots. In search of you. To dine in the open air. 
 I gave him a bill at 60 days' sight. This book is pub- 
 lished at a price within reach of everybody. The General 
 ordered the troops to march at night. He leaps/br joy. 
 I am dying of hunger. He is how-legged. As soon as I 
 have done, he may go. 
 
 * Literally, "in body. 
 
218 
 LESSON CCXVIIL 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY — PREPOSITIONS AND NOTTNi 
 
 A pressa, a rios, aos centos. 
 A logares, a condicao de que. 
 A pena de, aos montoes, a parte, 
 
 a propdsito. 
 Ao presente, a tempo, a mhldo, 
 
 ao menos. 
 &.$ a vessas, a final, a bdrdo, a, 
 
 espera. 
 
 Fast, in streams, in hundreds. 
 In places, on condition that. 
 On pain of, in heaps, aside, by 
 
 the by (apropos). 
 At present, in time, often, at 
 
 least. 
 Upside- down, finally, on board, 
 
 in wait, or waitina. 
 
 Afdlta de chiivas. Morto a lanca. Este rio a logares 
 tern 10 bracas de fundo. Elle descobre ao Unge dois 
 homens. Devo tomar a direita ou d esquerda? Fica- 
 me o pe mais d vontdde. Yamos a pe. Vai a rdda do 
 mundo. Ao prdprio. rei estava n'esse tempo nafldr 
 da idade. Com muito prazer. A primeira vista. A tdda 
 a pressa. Ao principio. Ao romper do dia. Rio a bdioco. 
 A propdsito do que V. S. diz. Nao obstante isto, ambos 
 erao, etc. Eu estou na cama, mas o velho esta de cama. 
 Estarnos a espera. Escreve a propdsito. Fdra de pro- 
 pdsito. 
 
 Bound his heart. Little by little he lost all his money. 
 Down the river. Apropos of what he was saying. They 
 arrived in time. They all spoke at once. They went on 
 foot. This river, in places, is very deep. The man is in 
 the prime of life. The boat went down the river. Not- 
 withstanding this, both were in bed. The men were in 
 hundreds. He came on purpose. The fields suffer for 
 want of rain. The ship has gone round the world. At 
 first sight, he fled. At break of day the ship went down 
 the river. 
 
219 
 
 LESSON CCXIX. 
 
 PHRASE0L0OY — PREPOSITIONS, ADJECTIVES, AND NOUNS. 
 
 On purpose, suddenly, from 
 
 time to time. 
 By starts, slowly, by heart> on 
 
 the away. 
 In order, in short, above, at 
 
 home. 
 Quite, without fail, on foot, or 
 
 standing. 
 
 De proposito, — improviso, — 
 
 quando em quando. 
 De salto, ■ — vagar, — cor, — 
 
 caminho. 
 Em drdem, — fim, — cima, — 
 
 casa. 
 De todo, sem falta, em pe. 
 
 Vestido de marinheiro. De piira numanidade me 
 soccorreu. De tres em tres dias. Em cima de nds. As 
 vagas accumulavao-se em serras. Por baixo de capa. 
 JEm lim ella lhe diz. Em quanto impdrta isso ? Anda de 
 galdpe. Esta em pe. Sobre tudo. Antes de tudo. Em 
 desdrdem. Em porcoes. Em rebanhos. Na idade de 
 pouco niais de vinte annos. O frasco virado de boca para 
 baixo. Em primeiro logar. Elle esta em casa. Sem 
 termo. Sem limites. Em lima palavra. De mdugrddo. 
 Nao podemos ir de iotas nem as senhoras de chapeu. 
 muito hem. 
 
 He was dressed as a soldier. From six to eight years. 
 It is raining above the sea. I see the waves in moun- 
 tains. Gro slowly. Send the books to me, without fail, 
 to-morrow. I am in doubt. He is not at home. I stand 
 sentinel. It lies at the bottom. He was in danger of 
 being drowned. The poor fellow is beside himself. 
 What news ? I shall see him on the way. Go in peace. 
 I am in earnest. I know him by sight. He knows me 
 byname. With haste. In place of that word. He went 
 to the ball in boots. They were dressed as sailors. The 
 child went on all fours. 
 
220 
 
 LESSON CCXX. 
 
 PHRASEOLOGY — PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, AND NOTTNS. 
 
 Para cima, — baixo, — diante, 
 
 -tras. 
 Para entao, para outra vez. 
 Para casa, — fora, — dentro. 
 Porventiira, — costume, — cima. 
 Por medo, — amor, — favor, — 
 
 isso. 
 
 Above, below, before, behind. 
 
 By then, next time. 
 Home, out, in. 
 By chance, — custom, above. 
 For fear, — love, by favour, 
 therefore. 
 
 V ou para cima. Vamos para hdixo. Ya mais para 
 diante. Mais para trdz ! Esta para sair para fora. Sem 
 tomar por isso o titulo. O livro esta. Id em cima. Muito 
 perto. Hdntem de tarde. Hontem pela manha. Depois 
 d'ainanha. Antes d'hontem. Ha umito tempo. Por 
 metades. So por este meio. Amanha pela manha. Mais 
 adidnte. Antes mais que menos. Para entao jd teremoa 
 acabado a dbra. Os cabellos atados por trdz. Por 
 essa razao. Yamos para cdsa. Anda para diante. Tenho- 
 o por ignordnte. JSTao o tenho^or doido. Passe por Id. 
 So por so. 
 
 I am going upstairs. They are going down. He is 
 out. They will go out. I went yesterday morning. He 
 will return to-morrow morning. I consider them mad. 
 Go more that ivay. Eurther back. I must go home. At 
 last he went in. The man is very near. For fear. I 
 believe them mad. He considers me ignorant. For the 
 same reason. For want of space. On account of indis- 
 position. The boy is upstairs. Go on. Above the water. 
 By chance, he fell into the water. Let us go upstairs to 
 the library. They consider him rather foolish. 
 
221 
 
 LESSON CCXXI. 
 
 PHBASEOLOQY — COtfJUPTCTIOirS. 
 
 Assim asshn, assim seja, como. 
 Ainda quando, amda agora, de 
 
 mddo que. 
 Nao so, mas tambem. 
 Nao so, mas ate ; nao — senao. 
 Com tanto que. 
 A saber isso ; a ser assim. 
 
 So so ; so be it ; as. 
 
 Even when, but just now, so that. 
 
 Not only, but also. 
 
 Not only, but even ; only. 
 
 So that. 
 
 If I had known it ; that being so. 
 
 na paz como na guerra. Assim elle queira. 
 Com tanto que. JEmqudnto ao que. Borem com tiido 
 isso. Belo contrdrio. Como quer que. Tanto mdis. A 
 nao ser isso, teria sido o seu amigo. Amda agora chegou. 
 fille residiu quasi sempre em Portugal. Eabulas recebidas 
 nao so pelos chronistas, mas ate pe]os historiadores. 
 Entao, muito embora. Assim como tambem declarava. 
 Assim se resolveu. E mais duvidoso ainda. Cabellos 
 espessos, posto que ja grisalhos. Escrevia como fallava. 
 Assim como appareceu. Assim como assim, estou decidido 
 a casar. 
 
 So that he was seldom able to work. It is hut 12 
 o'clock. Why so ? They are not so. His leg is but so 
 so. But for him, I should have lost my life. But yet, 
 Madam. He will find but very few. But even kings must 
 die. May he do so to me, and more also. A courtier 
 and a patron too. If, however, you cannot go. This is 
 still more doubtful. Not only praised by the people, 
 but even honoured by the king. On the contrary, I shall 
 remain at home. As he also promised. I should not go, 
 knowing this. The man wrote as he spoke. Even when 
 I went away, he was not satisfied. 
 
222 
 LESSON CCXXII. 
 
 NOUS'S REQUIRING "de" OR "a."* 
 
 Means, favour, honour, pleasure. 
 
 Meio, favor, honra, gosto, prazer, 
 
 bondade, idea, caso. 
 Esperanca, necessidade, defensao. 
 Consequencia, resolucao, certeza. 
 
 Resistencia, aversao, obedieneia. 
 
 Hope, need, defence. 
 Consequence, resolution, cer- 
 tainty. 
 Resistance, aversion, obedience. 
 
 No meio de lima existencia de continuos combates. 
 O pensamento de fugir. No caso de nao poder dar, etc. 
 As esperdngas de obter. A idea de near senhor. A ne- 
 cessidade de confiar a defensao da patria a este principe. 
 Em consequencia ^' isto. Tenha a bondade de ver. Ella 
 tomou a resolugao de divorciar-se. Com o intento de 
 accommetter Affonso VI. Accessao ao tbrono. A sua 
 volta ao Aragao. Em relagdo ao conde. Cara a cara. 
 Amor a patria. Com relagao a situacao. Tern medo a 
 agua? IJma longa resistencia a fortuna e a actividade 
 do rei. 
 
 I have the honour to be. Have the goodness to pass 
 me the water. I am glad to bave an opportunity of being 
 useful to you. The fear of being taken. Tbe pleasure 
 of seeing you. It is time to go tbere. "Without loss of 
 time. He had means of escaping. The result of this en- 
 terprise. The news of the invasion. A method of doing. 
 On account of illness. Adherence to the principles of jus- 
 tice. In relation to that question. A constant inclination 
 to moderate principles. Homage to the see of Borne. A 
 lesson to the people. The only remedy for tbe evil. 
 
 * The preposition which a word takes after it is called its com,' 
 plement. Many of the complements in Portuguese follow the 
 English idiom. 
 
223 
 
 LESSON CCXXIII. 
 
 NOUNS EEQUIRING " POE " OR " PAEA." 
 
 Prayers, resignation. 
 Enthusiasm, indifference. 
 Predilection, classification. 
 Propensity, motives, instrument. 
 Loyalty, ability, charity. 
 Assistance, walk, liberty. 
 
 Preces, 
 
 Enthusiasmo, indifferenca. 
 Predilec^ao classificacao. 
 Propensao, motivos, rnstrumento. 
 Lealdade, habilidade, caridade. 
 Coadjuvacao, passeio, liberdade. 
 
 Amor pelo filho. Preces por chiiva. TJina predileccao 
 por nossa pafcria. A classificacao dos habitantes por 
 sexos, idades e profissoes. Enthusiasmo pela musica. 
 Amor pelos homens. Indifferenca por tiido. JDesapego 
 pelo mundo. Correio para Inglaterra por navios e pelos 
 paquetes. camliino para ir a cidade. A propensao 
 para a ociosidade. amor para o filho. Lealdade para 
 seus principes. unico meio para os destruir. Liber- 
 ddde para todos. progrdmma para a exposicao. A sua 
 coadjuvagao para este objecto. 
 
 There are reasons for believing. Walks for foot pas- 
 sengers. Better instruments for this. Eull liberty for 
 all those who, etc. An ample theatre for ambition. 
 Various precautions for the defence. An excellent re- 
 medy for toothache. An advantage for a son. Grou/nds 
 for hoping. £ aim for your wounds. A reason for sup- 
 posing me dead. Emigration to Demerara. Prayers for 
 rain. He has a predilection for port-wine. The classifi- 
 cation of the boys by ages. Enthusiasm for the drama. 
 A subscription for the poor sailors. The way to Camacha. 
 Love o/men. 
 
224 
 
 LESSON CCXXIV. 
 
 tfOTJTN'S EEQTJIBI^G " EM " OR " ENTEE. 1 
 
 Desdrdem, prazer, influencia. 
 Entrada, promocao, confianca. 
 Perigo, mudanca, culpa. 
 Desintelligencia, differenca, d 
 
 tinccao. 
 Allianca, vontade, emulacao. 
 
 Disorder, pleasure, influence. 
 Entrance, promotion, confidence. 
 Danger, change, fault. 
 Misunderstanding, difference, dis- 
 tinction. 
 Alliance, will, emulation. 
 
 A influencia no ammo do rei. TJma desordem no 
 estado. A entrada no poder do conde Derby. ^Elle foi 
 moderado em epochas em que houve perigo em o ser. A 
 promocao em honras e em lucros. A sua confianca em 
 Deus. TJma mudanca na constitui9ao. Como se tivesse 
 culpa em executar as ordens do rei. Um tratado entre 
 os reis. A paz entre os dois inimigos. As negocia9oes 
 entre os gabinetes de Londres e Paris. TJma allianca 
 entre os estados. Um combafe entre a guar da e os pai- 
 sanos. A luta entre a humanidade e a justi9a. 
 
 The influence of this belief on the mind of the queen. 
 There is danger in being a minister of state. His^ro- 
 motion in honour was very rapid. A change in the go- 
 vernment of Spain. The communication between Lisbon 
 and Santarem. The peace between the two nations was 
 broken. Harmony between these two souls. The space 
 between the armies. Connivance between the thieves and 
 the officers. A struggle between the king and the par- 
 liament. A bad feeling between the sisters. A treaty 
 between the kings. 
 
225 
 
 LESSON CCXXV. 
 
 NOUNS REQUIRING (1) "COM, 11 (2) " CONTRA.' 
 
 (l)Pacto, reconcilia9ao, intimidade. 
 Allian9a, contacto, harmonia. 
 Combate, guerra. 
 (2) Conspira9ao, suspeita. 
 Tentativa, violencia, barreira. 
 Querxa, reac9ao, abrigo. 
 
 Compact, reconciliation, intimacy . 
 Alliance, contact, harmony. 
 Combat, war. 
 Conspiracy, suspicion. 
 Attempt, violence, barrier. 
 Complaint, reaction, shelter. 
 
 O resentimento contra o marido. TJma empreza con- 
 tra os rebeldes. Lhe ficou dentro da alma o espinho da 
 ma vontdde contra o seu successor. TJma conspiracao 
 contra o imperador. Suspeitas odidsas contra a sua vi- 
 ctima. Urn abrigo contra os revezes da fortuna. pacto 
 do principe com o conde. Pela sua allidnga com os chris- 
 taos. De accordo com elle. TJma lucta com o rei. Desejo 
 ter conhecimento com elle. Guerras com os inimigos do. 
 rei. S. Petersburgo estara em contacto com o Mar-Negro. 
 As opinioes dos seiis amigos estavao & accordo com as siias. 
 
 The reconciliation with the emperor. An alliance 
 with the E-omans. His intimacy with my brother. In 
 immediate contact with the king. The complaints against 
 him. They had committed violence against the people. 
 They raised barriers against the torrent. The reaction 
 of the Visigoths against the Arabs. A good shelter 
 against the reverses of fortune. In harmony with the 
 ideas. Prom the conversation of the king with the pil- 
 grim. In that terrible combat with the Russians. This 
 little house is a shelter against the reverses of fortune. 
 I must raise a barrier against the invasion of the enemy. 
 
226 
 LESSON CCXXVI. 
 
 NOUNS KEQUIKING " SOBRE" (ON, OYER). 
 
 Discussao, reflexoes, proposta. I Discussion, reflections, proposal. 
 Correspondencia, juizo, observa- Correspondence, judgment, obser- 
 
 cao. vation. 
 
 Influencia, estiidos, supremacia. ' Influence, studies, supremacy. 
 Accao, conqufsta, ponte, yigilan- j Action, conquest, bridge, vigi- 
 
 cia. lance. 
 
 Tratado, artigo, prestador, noti- j Treaty, article, lender, news. 
 
 cia. 
 
 Na discussao sobre o acto. Toda a correspondencia 
 solve qualquer objecto. nosso juizo sobre tao impor- 
 tante discussao. Algumas reflexoes sobre este assumpto. 
 Propostas a camara sobre finaucas. A acgao sobre as for- 
 cas productivas da terra. TJm tratado sobre os lhnites 
 das fronteiras. A promessa de sdque sobre o Porto. As 
 nossas observacoes sobre a questao. JEstudos sobre o 
 Christianisino. Dois artigos sobre as moedas Portuguezas. 
 Elle tinha auctoriddde superior sobre a Peninsula. Supre- 
 macia sobre a Peninsula. Supremacia sobre os outros. 
 L m prestador sobre penhor. 
 
 The conquests over the Spaniards. Information on all 
 necessary points. Watchfulness over this business. Our 
 correspondence on this subject. A few reflections on his 
 conduct. A powerful influence on the public mind. The 
 action of the water on the stone. A lender of money on 
 pledges. He has entire supremacy over the minds of his 
 followers. Two articles on the Eastern question. The 
 general had no authority over his officers. The action of 
 the water on tlie walls of the city. My opinion on this 
 subject. 
 
227 
 LESSON CCXXVII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH li DE." 
 
 Aeompanhado, occupado, dis- 
 
 tante. 
 Bordado, matizado, tirado. 
 Capaz, digno, rfco, dependente. 
 Indigena, facil, privado, cego. 
 Prdprio, sedento, inconsolavel. 
 
 Accompanied, busy, distant. 
 
 Bordered, decked, drawn. 
 Capable, worthy, rich, dependent. 
 Native, easy, deprived, blind. 
 Proper, thirsting, inconsolable. 
 
 Acompanhdda de seu augusto esposo. A palrneira e 
 indigena ^'estas ilhas. Plantas aromaticas prdprias dos 
 climas da zona torrida. Uma roupa borddda de ouro. 
 Capdz de dirigir. Banido ^'esta camara. As noticias 
 sao destituidas <^'interesse. Urn trbncopartido da arvore. 
 Uma idea tirdda dos livros Bomanos. E digno de notar-se. 
 Sedento de vinganca. Rico de despojos. Dependente da 
 coroa. O prelado suspenso do officio pastoral. Brivddo 
 de ornato. Esta planta e propria da Ilha da Madeira, 
 Aquelle distincto senhor e digno de ndssa admiracao. 
 
 Accompanied by models. 'Extracted from the best 
 writers. Occupied with graver studies. Deprived of 'your 
 estimable society. These letters are more easy to write. 
 The imagination occupied with the principal object. In- 
 consolable for the absence of Ulysses. A league distant 
 from the sea. Cares inseparable from the throne. The 
 shepherdesses crowned ivith laurel. Covered with con- 
 fusion. He showed himself indifferent to these successes. 
 Territories covered with woods. Deprived of sight, Blind 
 with anger. JPeopled with Jews. 
 
228 
 LESSON CCXXVIIL 
 
 ADJECTIYES WITH "PARA? 
 
 Bom, efficaz, proveitoso. 
 Preparado, destinado, cdmmodo. 
 Essencial, util, importante. 
 Necessario, obrigatdrio, precise 
 Prdprio, conveniente, achado. 
 Satisfactdrio, sufficiente. 
 
 Good, effectual, profitable. 
 Prepared, destined, fit. 
 Essential, useful, important. 
 Necessary, binding, needful. 
 Proper, convenient, found. 
 Satisfactory, sufficient. 
 
 Preparado para estas eventualidades. Noticias uteis 
 para calculos e especulacoes. E miiito horn para a saude. 
 Obrigatorio para as duas partes. Esta obra era destindda 
 para a instruccao do Diique. Locaes proprios para ellas. 
 Sera satisfactdrio para mim participar. Essencial para 
 a dignidade do governo. Auctoridade sufficiente para se 
 declarar superior. Tempo sufficiente para reflectir. As 
 qualidades precisas para a paz. Urn dos meios mais 
 efficdzes para consolidar. Este livrinho e destinado para 
 o uso dos meninos Portugueses e Inglezes. 
 
 Advantageous conditions for the inhabitants. Good 
 for him. Prepared for those who had to fight. "Wood 
 good for building. Site suitable for a factory. An event 
 whose consequences were immense for the progress of 
 civilization. Destined for the habitation. Not less im- 
 portant for the interest. Our verse is sweet enough to 
 give all the effects. I must he prepared for these occasions. 
 This climate is very good for people with chest-disease. 
 It is satisfactory for me to say, that I am pleased. The 
 most effectual means of saving him. 
 
229 
 LESSON CCXXIX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES AtfD PARTICIPLES WITH " POR 
 
 Conhecido, distmcto, celebre. 
 Povoado, habitado, illustre. 
 Cercado, banhado, responsavel. 
 Disperso, perseguido. 
 Regido, conquistado, escolhido. 
 Singular, notavel, famoso. 
 
 Known, distinguished, famed. 
 Peopled, inhabited, famous. 
 Surrounded, bathed, responsible 
 Scattered, persecuted. 
 G-overned, conquered, chosen. 
 Singular, notable, famous. 
 
 Conhecida pela excellencia dos seus dleos. A Hespa- 
 nlia foi povodda por diias niigracoes. O territorio cer- 
 cado pelo occea.no. __ Troia foi tomdda pelos Gregos. Dis- 
 persos pelo paiz. Essa provincia era regida por umle- 
 gado. Umsitiomuitoyre^e^^^o^eZosliabitantes. Todos 
 distinctos pelo merito pessoal. Os paizes banhddos pelo 
 mar. Celebre pelo importante cargo que, etc. JRoubddo 
 pelos piratas. Favorecido por esta eircunstancia. Urn 
 povo singular por opinioes religidsas. Coimbra, famosa 
 por sua universidade. Epsom, notavel por- suas aguas. 
 
 Sheffield, celebrated for its cutlery. Brighton, known 
 for its sea-baths. This region was inhabited by many 
 barbarous nations. The country was at last conquered 
 by Charles the Great. He was chosen successor to the 
 crown. He escaped, followed by Grarcia. A stranger, 
 but illustrious by blood. I am responsible for these 
 things. This cause aided by many others. The state 
 surrounded by the sea. Sebastopol was taken by the 
 allies. Waterloo was famous for its battle. England 
 was peopled by various races. Caldas, noted for its warm 
 baths. 
 
230 
 
 LESSON CCXXX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH "EM. 
 
 Envolto, posto, convertido, la- 
 
 vado. 
 Dividido, interessado, attento. 
 Iuexoravel, sepultado, sito. 
 Util, fiel, destro, usado, felfz. 
 Fundado, talhado, disfarcado. 
 Transformado, trocado, submer- 
 
 gido. 
 
 Involred, placed, converted, 
 
 bathed. 
 Divided, interested, attentive. 
 Inexorable, buried, situated. 
 Useful, faithful, clever, used. 
 Founded, cut out, disguised. 
 Transformed, changed, submer- 
 
 Envolto em obsciira noite. Dividido em diias partes. 
 Os habitadores diversos em racas, em costumes, em lin- 
 guas. Os prisioneiros forao postos em liberdade. Urn 
 pacote embrulbado em papei pardo. Inexoravel em me 
 condemnor. Mais util na pratica. Eundado na impossi- 
 bilidade. Minerva transforniada em Mentor. Submer- 
 gido nets profundezas do mar. Absorto eon urn. profundo 
 silencio. Talhado na rdcha viva. Juno disfarcada em 
 velha. Alguns convertidos em pdrcos. Yulcano lavado 
 em suor. Interessado em o enganar. Sepultado nas 
 ruinas. 
 
 The Egyptians divided into bands. Eaithful in keeping 
 a secret. So attentive in listening to all. Men dexterous 
 in the construction of ships. A king skilled in war. 
 Eaithful in his alliances. Rivalry converted into pro- 
 found hate. Involved in thick darkness. These men 
 divided in two parties. The soldier was set at liberty. 
 The poor workman was bathed in sweat. The soldiers 
 were buried in the ruins of the fortress. The boy was 
 interested in finishing the work. Useful in labours. 
 Gaul was divided into three provinces. 
 
Coberto,* cego, contente, satis 
 
 feito. 
 
 Compativel, tratavel, parallelo. 
 Associado, identificado, mistu 
 
 rado. 
 Parecido, commensuravel. 
 Casado, inquieto, humilde. 
 Curvado, armado, conhecido. 
 
 231 
 LESSON CCXXXI. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH " COM." 
 
 Covered, blind, content, satisfied. 
 
 Compatible, tractable, parallel. 
 Associated, identified, mixed. 
 
 Like, commensurate. 
 Married, restless, humble. 
 Bent, armed, know. 
 
 Similhante estado nao e compativel com o progresso. 
 A Lusitania antiga acha-se associdda com Portugal. Um 
 filho tao parecido com seu pai. Menelau era casado com 
 Helena. Curvado com o peso dos friictos. Pygnialiao 
 cego com a paixao que tinha por ella; Contente com poder 
 salvar a vida. Tratdvel com os seus visinhos. Inquieto 
 com os progressos dos christaos. Os habitantes identifi- 
 cddos com os E-omanos. Os indigenas misturddos com as 
 outras racas. Armado* com armas prohibidas. Furioso 
 com a resposta. 
 
 Not contented with making himself feared. The 
 streets parallel with the rivers. The sun covered with 
 clouds. Content with the wages. Charity is not com- 
 patible with hatred. Punishment commensurate with 
 crime. Grood and humble with all. Vineyards mixed 
 with orchards. The height known now by the name of 
 Bairro-alto. Meets laden with spoils. Madeira favoured 
 with the best climate in the world. He was associated 
 with the count in that undertaking. They were in time 
 mixed with the invaders. The street was parallel ivith 
 the river. 
 
 * Takes also de ; "coberto de trapos." 
 
232 
 LESSON CCXXXII. 
 
 TEEBS EEQUIEIKQ- "DE," OF. 
 
 Dispor, deixar, gostar, provar, 
 
 morrer. 
 Lembrar-se, esquecer-se, ausen- 
 
 tar-se. 
 Precisar, aproveitar-se, depender. 
 Desesperar, cessar, sair, vir, pri- 
 
 var-se. 
 
 Dispose, leave, like, taste, try, 
 
 die. 
 Remember, forget, absent one's 
 
 self. 
 Want, avail one's self, depend. 
 Despair, cease, go out, deprive, 
 
 come. 
 
 Disponha do seu criado. Deixemo-nos de comprhnen- 
 tos. Nao gosto de tantas ceremonias. Ilorro de sede. 
 Lembra-se d'isso ? Gosta de queijo ? Esqueci-me do 
 seu nome. Bnderico se apossou da coroa. JPreciso das 
 minhas botas. Aproveitdr-me-\\e\ do seu offerecimento. 
 Elle e applaudido de to da a gente. Nao se me da d'isso. 
 Elle ause?ita-se da minlia casa. Ella apeia-se do cavallo. 
 Isto ndsce da sua negligencia. Accdrdo d'uvi sonho. 
 Ella cdra de vergonha. Estou encantddo ^'isto. Isto nao 
 depende de mim. Sustenta-se de trigo. Elle fdge do 
 perigo. 
 
 I remember this. He has forgotten the name. He 
 does not like such forms. We like beef. I want a room. 
 I shall avail myself of jour offer. He wept for joy. He 
 fled for fear. I come from Lisbon. Overcome by pain. 
 They absented themselves from the house. I jumped off 
 the horse. What do you like to drink at dinner ? This 
 filled him with indignation. Forgetful of the obligations 
 contracted by the promise made to Alphonso. Try them 
 both. He enjoys good health. I am persuaded of the 
 contrary. Using the power. It is composed often. 
 
233 
 
 LESSON CCXXXIII. 
 
 VERBS EEQUIRLN G" SOB RE," UPON ; "ENTRE," BETWEEN. 
 
 P6r, recair, lanear, arrojar. Put, fall, throw, hurl. 
 
 Conversar, tomar, disputar, de- Converse, take, dispute, delibe- 
 
 Hberar. . rate. 
 
 Apertar, vigiar, discordar, cha- Tighten, watch, disagree, call. 
 
 mar. 
 
 Distinguir, metter, luctar, dividir. Distinguish, put, struggle, divide. 
 
 Conversou sobre differentes materias. !Elle delibera 
 sobre isto. Pondo sobre o liombro a cruz vermelha. 
 Esta accusa9ao pesa sobre sl memoria de Henrique. Lan- 
 9ar lima censiira severa sobre as leis. Discordamos sobre 
 os meios. Arrojei-me sobre eile. As suspeitas tinhao 
 recaido sobre o homem. TJma monarcliia repartida entre 
 os tres filhos. A cidade fechada entre a bahia e o oceano. 
 Apertado entre cabecos ingremes. Ha pouca differenca 
 entre est as palavras. Chamdr a attencao publica sobre 
 este acto. Nao podendo tomir sobre si. 
 
 Struggling between remorse and love. They came to 
 consult him on almost all subjects. Reflecting on this. 
 The invisible world exercises an immense influence over 
 us. I am not able to take wpon myself the expense. 
 The sword raised above the head. Dividing amongst 
 themselves the provinces of the Roman empire. He 
 threw himself on the foe. Suspicions have fallen upon 
 him, as the murderer of the count. He took the blame 
 upon himself. Putting the poor old man on his shoulder, 
 he left the city. There is much diiference between the 
 languages of Spain and Portugal. 
 
234 
 
 LESSON CCXXXIV. 
 
 YEEBS BEQITIEISTG "ATE," TO; " CO NTRA," AGAINST. 
 
 Chegar, ir, pelejar, levar. j Keacli, go, war, carry. 
 
 Alcancar. j Attain. 
 
 Marchar, votar, defender. j March, vote, defend. 
 
 Murmurar, peccar, protestar. [ Murmur, sin, protest. 
 Declamar, defender. Declaim, defend. 
 
 A devastate* chegou ate os districtos da Idanha. 
 You ate Coimbra. Alexandre foi ate a India. E neces- 
 sario pelejar ate veneer. Levava ate mil sol dados. Mar- 
 chou contra o rei. Elles votarao contra o projecto. As 
 folhas francezas alcancao ate 2 de Marco. 'Ellepartiu 
 para o Oriente. Nao tern razao para murmurar contra o 
 amo. bosque chega ate o mar. A Providencia alcanca 
 ate as avezinhas. Pecca contra Deus. Elle defende a 
 causa da liberdade contra os tyrannos. O orador de- 
 clainou contra a guerra. 
 
 The English papers come down to the 16th of May. 
 The general set off for North America. The pupil had 
 no reason to murmur against the teacher. "We must 
 fight till we win. Julius Caesar went as far as the river 
 Thames. The rebels marched against the emperor. The 
 president declaimed against the terms of the peace. 
 Hofer defended the cause of liberty against the tyrant. 
 The sad destruction reached to the very gates of the city. 
 He sins against Grod in telling lies. He set out for Bala- 
 clava in the steamer. He must vote against the measure. 
 The rebels marched against the queen. 
 
235 
 
 LESSON CCXXXY. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING "POR," TOR, BY. 
 
 Esperar, designar, trabalhar. 
 Pagar, dar, agradecer, trocar. 
 Pedrr, perguntar, levar. 
 Ir, haver, addptar, tomar. 
 Arriscar, tomar, pugnar, passar. 
 Vigiar, acudir, substituir. 
 
 Hope, designate, work. 
 Pay, give, tbank, change. 
 Beg, ask or inquire, carry. 
 Gro, hold, adopt, take. 
 Pisk, take, fight, pass. 
 Watch, help, substitute. 
 
 Espere por inim. Quanto devo pagar por isso ? 
 Quanto pede por semana ? A noite irei por sua casa. Es- 
 pera elle pela resposta ? JEstou por isso. Fdgo por isso. 
 Perguntei pela saiide de V. S. Comega por queimar isto. 
 Y. S. passou pela minha casa ? Deite-se por terra. A 
 Gralliza era regida por diversos condes. Tendo por fron- 
 teira. Arriscdndo a vida pela monarcliia. !0ila vigidva 
 pela seguranca da casa. Ir pelo mar. Quanto leva pela 
 passagem ? _Dar-lhe-hei tres patacas por estes. Eico- 
 lhe agradecido por esta visita. 
 
 He waits for us. How much have we to pay for the 
 horses ? How much does he ash a month ? To-morrow 
 I shall call at jour house. He helps me. To substitute 
 one expression/or another. He must wait for an answer. 
 He called at his house. Give him a dollar for the dog. 
 He risked his life for the country. He will throw him- 
 self on the ground. You must watch for the safety of 
 the ship. To fight for the laws. "We may begin by ex- 
 amining this question. Praising him for the resolution. 
 He designated him by this title. The love he felt for 
 Egilona. He passes for a good man. 
 
236 
 
 LESSON CCXXXVI. 
 
 VERBS REQUIRING- "EM" IN, INTO, ON. 
 
 Entrar, admittrr, converter. 
 Empenhar-se, situar, influir. 
 Deitar, dividir, residir, converter, 
 
 achar. 
 Gl-anhar, introduzir, envolver. 
 Escrever, viver, folgar, encontrar. 
 
 Enter, admit to, convert into. 
 Engage in, situate, influence. 
 Throw in, on ; divide, reside, 
 
 find. 
 Gain, introduce, involve. 
 Write, live, rejoice, meet. 
 
 Entremos rfesta mata. Veja no seu reldgio. Perco 
 nHsso. Deite o cha nas chicaras. Granho n'isso um dia. 
 Esta em casa. Consinto n'tsso. JNao posso dormir em 
 terra. Tradiiza isto em Inglez. Deu com-sigo no chao. 
 Dei no pensarnento do auctor. Isto ha de dar-lhe na 
 cabeca. Anda em corpo. Esta em pe. Estou em duvida. 
 Nao esta em perigo. O velho esta na cama v Portugal 
 abiinda em vinhos. Convenho na proposta. Elle se des- 
 faz em lagrimas. Pegou ffl'um pau. Ealhou na empreza. 
 Cain no chao. Estamos no campo. 
 
 He entered the town. He beat John in the race. He 
 writes in good language. They enter into disputes. He 
 had been introduced into the court. Involved in the 
 struggle with Henry. The man seized a stick. He en- 
 gaged in an enterprise. He throws wood on the fire. He 
 writes with his own hand in the sand. Admitted to the 
 court of the king. His actions lie buried in profouud 
 darkness. A monastery situated in Burgundy. A monk 
 influenced the affairs. To live in peace. He resided in 
 Portugal. The merchant rejoices in traffic. I shall be 
 at home. It consists in forming a new kingdom. 
 
237 
 LESSON CCXXXVIL 
 
 VEEBS BEQUIBING "Af 9 TO, AT. 
 
 Forbid, belong, give, refer, send. 
 
 Prohibir, pertencer, dar, referfr, 
 
 mandar. 
 Desagradar, custar, bater, valer. 
 Conceder, entregar, apear-se, 
 
 levar. 
 Yoltar, ir, dirigir-se, unir-se. 
 
 Displease, cost, knock, to value. 
 Concede, deliver, alight, carry. 
 
 Gro, return, address, unite. 
 
 Principia-se a segar os trigos. Perguntemos ao co 
 cheiro. Conduza o senhor ao seu quarto. Chegado ao 
 logar. A ser assim. Estou as ordens de V. S. Elle 
 aspira a fama. navio se dirige ao porto. A lenha se 
 rediiz a cinzas. Elle cede aos sens rogos. Opponho-me 
 a isso. Elle falta a sua palavra. Elle se entrega ao pra- 
 zer. Indo por sitio a Santarem. Igual scrte cdube a 
 Lisboa. A infanta foi entregue a E-aymundo. Prohi- 
 bindo essas viagens aos Hispanhoes. Yoltando a Mau- 
 ritania. Esta pertence a viiiva do conde. 
 
 This displeases the old prince. These triumphs cost 
 the Saracens rivers of blood. He dresses in the English 
 mode. I go to Lisbon. He applies to study. He laid 
 siege to Santarem. When do you set sail ? Take this to 
 the gentleman. I want to go to the opera. Take me to 
 the bridge. They knock at the door. Can you send it 
 for me to No. 10 ? He withdraws his shoulders from the 
 wheel. Exposed to the sun. A people given to fishing. 
 In order to resist misfortunes. Carried to the last point. 
 Deliver this letter to the gentleman. 
 
238 
 LESSON CCXXXVIII. 
 
 TEEBS KEQUIBING "COM" WITH. 
 
 Honrar, estar^ fallar, vestir. Honour, be, speak, dress. 
 
 Morrer, tremer, alegrar-se. Die, tremble, to rejoice. 
 
 Contrastar, congracar, concordat*. Contrast, ingratiate, agree. 
 
 Ter, calcular, cumprir, coinpeth\ Have, calculate on, discharge, 
 
 compete. 
 
 Tratar, casar, alliar-se, ligar. Treat, marry, ally, bind. 
 
 Confundir, occupar, acabar. i Confound, busy, have done. 
 
 H6nre-me com as siias or dens. Estou com muita 
 fome. Com quern falla Y. S.? Morro com calma. Tre- 
 mendo com frio. Este painel contrasta com a abundancia. 
 Irei ter com V. S. a boca da noite. Querernos fazer com 
 elle contas. Elle esta com capote. Cumprirei com o pro- 
 mettido. Esta com defhixo. Elle trata-me com rigor. 
 Nao posso competir com elle. Disputei com elle acerca 
 d'isso. Elle ameacou-o com sua viuganca. JNao cumpre 
 com o seu dever. Atindu com o caminho. Occupado 
 com guerras. Sua filha casara com Moiiiz. 
 
 He will honour them with his commands. He is very 
 hungry. With whom will you speak ? The boy is trem- 
 bling with cold. Can I speak with the lady ? Let us 
 have done with this. He will fulfil his promise. The 
 king threatens her with his vengeance. The soldier dis- 
 charges his duty. His aunt is married to Mr. P. I am 
 glad of it. They disputed with the king. She has caught 
 cold. My teacher treats me with kindness. I agree 
 with him in this. Marrying Alice. He calculated on 
 war, I am dying with heat. 
 
239 
 
 LESSON CCXXXIX. 
 
 VEEES EEQTjIEING ^PARA" FOE, TO, T0WAE33S, 
 IN OEEEE TO. 
 
 Ir, voltar, partfr, vir. 
 
 Bitscar, faltar. 
 
 Olhar, estar, servir. 
 
 Deitar, tender, deixar, reservar. 
 
 Armar, prestar, tirar. 
 
 Avancar, contribuir. 
 
 To go to, return, set out, come. 
 
 Search, fail. 
 
 Look, be, serve. 
 
 Throw, tend, leave, reserve. 
 
 Prepare, be good, draw. 
 
 Advance, contribute. 
 
 Olhe para mini, Deitemos os dlhos pdra estes cam- 
 pos. Voltemos para casa. Vou pam a escola. A que 
 horas parte o vapdr para L6ndres ? JEntre para a lancha. 
 O quarto delta para a rua. Xsto nao presta para nada. 
 Eu emigrei de Portugal para Inglaterra. Os chefes ti- 
 nhao avancado para Castella. Armado para a conquista. 
 Os reis buscavao-n'o para juiz das suas contendas. Vim 
 para te ver. Estd para o nascente. Estou para partir. 
 Vai para meia noite. Eu tirarei para mini. So fait 6 u 
 um Stentdr para tornar a scena completaT 
 
 Look this way. Look ye ? He cast his eyes on these 
 fields. He returned home. The boy is going to school. 
 At what o'clock does the coach go to Lisbon ? He came 
 to see him. I am about to write. Bodies tend to the 
 centre. "Will you stay/br dinner? We shall leave for 
 another opportunity. I have written to England. We 
 reserve for the conclusion of this article. It contributes 
 to the discovery of truth. He came to see you. The 
 window of my room looks on the street. The clock is 
 good for nothing. I am about to set off. When does 
 the French steamer start for Teneriffe ? 
 
240 
 LESSON CCXL. 
 
 VEEBS INCLUDING PBEPOSITIONS.* 
 
 Almocar, jantar, cear. 
 
 Vestir, calcar. 
 
 Fallar, agradecer. 
 
 Subir. 
 
 Mergulkar. 
 
 Aproveitar, ajustar, roubar. 
 
 Breakfast on, dine on, sup on. 
 
 Put on, put on (boots). 
 
 Speak of, thank for, avail of. 
 
 Go up. 
 
 Dive for. 
 
 Profit by, agree for, rob for. 
 
 Falldmos artes, poesia, politica. Vestirei a minha 
 casaca nova. Quer calgdr sapatos ? Eu^esfo'este habito 
 para isso. velho franciscano s^&zW os degraus do altar. 
 JFallou-se litteratura. O que quer V. S. almogdr I Niinca 
 calgou esporas. Elles cdlgao-lhe muito bem. Quer almo- 
 gdr ovos ? J&ujantarei vitella amanha. Elle ceou peixe. 
 Hei de vestir as minhas calcas novas. meu amigofdlla- 
 me politica ? O homeni mergulha perolas. Aproveitei 
 essa occasiao para — . Muito agradego a sua bondade. 
 Ajustdndo a passagem em quatro mil reis por cada 
 pessoa. 
 
 These men are fishing for pearls. I shall breakfast 
 on beef and bread. He will put on his new coat. I bar- 
 gamed for the passage at four shillings each person. 
 They spoke of art, poetry, and history. They never put 
 on spurs. The old sailor dined on ducks and green peas. 
 I shall avail myself of this opportunity. The marquis 
 went up the steps of the throne. I thank you for your 
 politeness. You must put on the stout boots. We 
 shall dine on roast beef to-day. The boys were diving 
 for pearls in the Red Sea. 
 
 * Tbese verbs govern the noun without an intervening preposi- 
 tion : " almogdr dvos," to breakfast on eggs. 
 
241 
 
 LESSON CCXLI. 
 
 INTEBJECTIONS. 
 
 Q.uieto ! caluda ! 
 
 Ah! apage! safa! 
 
 Ora bem ! ora esta ! dra essa ! 
 
 Ai de vds ! 
 
 Pois bem ! poi3 nao ! bem ! 
 
 Oraveja! asn&ira! vaibonito! 
 
 Softly! hush! 
 
 Ah! away! off! 
 
 Very well! good! capital! 
 
 Woe to you! 
 
 Well ! of course ! well ! 
 
 Only see ! nonsense ! very fine 
 
 Oh desgracado de mim ! De joelhos I Ai de nos ! 
 Oh! es tu, meu pobre Claudio? Ah! senhor, acudi-me ! 
 Pois nao! " Hum !" exclamou Er. Joao, daudo aos hom- 
 bros. Que tal! mas veja. Ora, grdgas a Deus, foi-se ! 
 Deus me perdoe! Se morreu, paciencia! Louvado seja 
 Deus! Famoso! Tom a sentido! Deus o permitta ! Mis- 
 ericordia! Valna-me Deus ! Optimo! ObrigadXssimo! 
 Toda a santissima noite ! Justo ! Deus nos acuda ! Mas, 
 avie-se! Asneira! Almas bentas, valei-me ! Nada de 
 gracas ! Justamente ! Ah, muito bem ! Que admi» 
 racao ! 
 
 I never closed an eye, the whole Messed night! Blessed 
 Spirits, save me ! Bless me ! what's the matter ? God 
 bless me ! Beally ! Lord preserve us ! Lord help me ! 
 Of course ! Exactly so ! Very good ! Capital ! That's 
 a good one ! Oh, the rogue ! Come on ! Come along ! 
 JN"o doubt ! Take care ! Certainly. It is a pity ! Help ! 
 help! By no means! "Why not? "We are lost! God's 
 will be done ! Certainly not ! Thank God ! Eamous ! 
 It can't be helped ! Undoubtedly ! Well then, speak 
 out! 0, yes, sir. Off! Out! Go away! 
 

APPENDIX, 
 
 OUTLINES OF PORTUGUESE GRAMMAR 
 WORD-BUILDING. 
 
 HINTS ON "WORD-FORMATION. 
 
 A few weeks' careful study of the following rules, the 
 result of a long] comparison, will enable the learner to 
 acquire a stock of several thousand terms, chiefly literary 
 and scientific, but many in every-day use. 
 
 I. Portuguese is one of the many dialects descending 
 from Latin, a sister of the Spanish, but no more a cor- 
 ruption of it than Italian is. "With the Latin stock a 
 few Greek, Celtic, and Gothic words have been preserved. 
 Arabic terms were introduced in the middle ages, and 
 recent times have contributed largely from French, 
 English, and other languages. Still, the mass of Por- 
 tuguese is Latin, and our first hints are therefore ad- 
 dressed to the Latin scholar. The changes by which 
 Latin becomes Portuguese are chiefly the following : — 
 1. Suppression of cases, using prepositions . instead of 
 inflections. 2. Frequent suppression of the passive, 
 simplification of conjugation, and use of auxiliaries. 
 
 3. Use of the Latin ablative as a Portuguese nominative. 
 
 4. Suppression of neuter gender. 5. Slight changes in 
 
244 
 
 terminations. 6. Contractions, transpositions, and suppres- 
 sions in roots. 7. Alteration in the quantity of syllables. 
 
 (1.) Many words are the same as in Latin. Those in 
 a : acacia, barba, barca, canna, casa, cera, dea, ecloga, 
 fama, gemma, bora, idea, juvenca, lingua, meta, nota, 
 orbita, palma, quadra, serra, terra, iiva, vacca, zona. In 
 or : amor, cantor, delator, exterior, intercessor, professor, 
 etc. In I: sol, sal, consul, mel, fel. In x: appendix, 
 index, calls. Altar, echo, chaos, lexicon, etc. 
 
 (2.) Many retain the Greek and Latin prefixes un- 
 altered : «pathia, aversao, adherir, «wputar, ampliiiheatro, 
 analyse, rmfepassar, rmf/poda, apostata, fr/color, cataracta, 
 circumferencia, ccwjunecao, co^radistinccao, cfepositar, 
 didmetro, distrahir, dilacerav. educacao, exchisao, epi- 
 theto, extrajudicial, 7?y^e;-critico, Jii/pocrita, «;ifringir, in- 
 /ercepto, introdiMzir, onetd^hora, o&edecer, ^ermittir, post- 
 hiimo,^rematuro,^/'ohibir, rescrever, retrocesso, sz^jugar, 
 subtetfugio, sujoerfiwo, syno&o, transformer, ultramariiio. 
 Some of these are modified (as in Latin and English) to 
 suit the following letter, e. g., ad becomes ac in cccumu- 
 lar ; con varies into co, col, cog, etc. ; in changes into ig, 
 il, im, etc. ; and so of oo, sua, and syn. Des, as a Portu- 
 guese prefix, is equal to dis in English: desarmar, disarm.; 
 or un: cfesataear, untie. In sometimes becomes em or en : 
 inter, entre. Ex becomes es. 
 
 (3.) Many words modify the Latin root by prefixing 
 a letter — abarbar, eseorpiao, esphera, estatua. 
 
 By inserting — farina, farinha; vino, vinlw; speculum, 
 espellw. 
 
 By rejecting — sanctus, sdnto; melius, meio; aer, ar; 
 c7zarta, carta; tales, tdes; canes, cdes; camisia, cainisa. 
 
 BY CHANGING 
 
 an intoou — «wrum, ouro; aua\ire, ouvir; awtumnus, outono 
 
 b „ v — &ebere,dever; habere, haver; arbore, drvore 
 
 c „ g — laco, J ago ; lacrima, lagrima ; secret o, segredo 
 
 c „ i — nocte, noite; lecto, leito; secta, seita 
 
 c „ u — doctor, doutor ; doctrina, doutrina 
 
 C „ qu — calens, quente ; crepare, qiiebrdr 
 
 c „ z — dicere, dizer ; facere,fazer 
 
 d „ j — Yideo, vejo ; desiefero, desejo 
 
 d ,, t — co^urnix, codorniz 
 
245 
 
 BY CHANGING 
 
 e into h — linea, linha ; castanea, castdnha 
 
 e „ i — esca, isca ; sentio, sinto ; equalis, igudl 
 
 f „ v — prq/ectus, proveito 
 
 fl ,, cli— ^amma, chdmma 
 
 g „ j — anyelus, dnjo ; sponyia, esponja; gemi,joelho 
 
 hy „ j — hi/SLcmthus, Jacinto 
 
 i ,, a — cam'stra, candstra 
 
 i „ e — spissus, espesso ; capital, cabeddl ; luve, neve 
 
 is „ io — navw, navio 
 
 j „ i — mayor, maidr ; pe/or, peior 
 
 1 „ li — cZamare, cTiamdr ; cZave, chdve 
 
 1 „ r — bZandus, ordndo ; ob/igatio, obrigacdo 
 
 li „ i — moZmo, moiiiho 
 
 li „ Hi — fi.lio,filJio ; muliev, mulhe'r ; ioli^folka 
 
 n „ i — are^a, areia ; ave^a, aveia ; catena, cadeia 
 
 p „ b — ca£>ra, cabra ; aperire, abrir ; q^eriare, obrdr 
 
 pi „ cb — ^Zumbo, cliumbo ; plws'm, chuva ; pleno, cheio 
 
 q „ g — a^ua, dgua ; e^ua, egua ; sequi, seguir 
 
 t „ c — malitfia, malicia; mentfio, mencao 
 
 t „ d — materia, madeira ; vita, vida ; lafro, ladrdo 
 
 u „ o — wnda, onda ; triinco, trdnco ; stopa, estopa 
 
 s „ z — cru#, cruz ; lu#, luz ; ^&x,paz; fziux,f6z, etc. 
 
 By altering the termination : — 
 
 anis „ ao — canis, cao ; ^anis,pao 
 
 anus \ ~ ( manus, mao ; sanus, sdo ; \anus, vdo ; 
 
 anum) a0 ( ip&ganus, pagao ; granum, grdo 
 
 ana ,, a. — \ana, la; cana, ca 
 
 onus,, om — "bonus, bom ; tomes, torn; sonus, som 
 
 nm „ o — ferrum, ferro ; tem^\um,templo ; solum, solo 
 
 us „ o — anuws, anno ; Yentus, vento ; mundzw, mundo 
 
 By cutting o^tbe termination, as emblems, emblem :- 
 
 siiiSj am — causal^, causal ; singulars, singular. 
 
 His — fva,gilis,frdgil; babiZis, hdbil ; utiZw, util. 
 n — carme?i, carme; nomew, nome. 
 re — mare, mar ; amare, amar. 
 udus — crudus, cru ; nucfoj, nu. 
 x — caLr, cal. 
 
246 
 
 (4.) Many Portuguese nouns and adjectives are 
 Latin ablatives — anno, baculo, calarno, discipulo, edicto, 
 foco, gremio, habito, idolo, juramento, labio, medico, 
 negocio, odio, panno, quarto, refdgio, sacco, typo, urso, 
 vento, zelo : from 1st and 2nd decl. Similarly from the 
 3rd— ave, carne, dente, ente, fonte, gente, herde, igno- 
 rante, labe, marmore, nave, drbe, ponte, quadriipede, sorte, 
 valle. Those of the 4th change the abl. u into o — cornu, 
 corno ; arco, porto, etc. In the 5th — acie, carie, effigie, 
 serie, and superficie are the only illustrations. The ex- 
 ceptions are — ablatives in ane, ano, and one becomes ao y 
 cane, cao ; gvdno, grao ; opinion, opiniao ; ono is om, as 
 bono, bom; ine, ion, as fine, Jim ; ine, em, as homine, 
 liomem. Others modify the root, e. g., regno, reino ; 
 luna, liia; coelo, ceo; dolente, doente ; pede, pe' ; rete, 
 rede ; lege, lei ; rege, rei ; libro, livro. 
 
 (5.) Many words have undergone such changes that it is 
 sometimes difficult to recognize the original Latin — anima, 
 alma; auricula, orelha ; audire, ouvir ; bracchium, brdco ; 
 capilli, cabello ; caseus, qiieijo ; denarius, dinlieiro ; ec- 
 clesia, igreja ; facere, fazer ; genu, joelho ; lac, leite ; 
 magister, mestre ; nepos, neto ; oculus, ollw ; puteus, 
 pogo ; questus, qiieixa ; regula, regra ; sinus, se'io ; tur- 
 bidus, turvo ; umbra, sombra; vesica, bexiga. 
 
 (6.) Many Latin words become Portuguese by modi- 
 fying the affix : — 
 
 ans into ante — am ans, nmante ; tolerant e 
 antia „ ancia — to\emntia y tolerancia ; vigilancia 
 are „ ar — amare, amdr 
 
 arius „ ario — advers^nws, adversario 
 ator „ ador— senator, senador ; orador, pescador 
 bilis „ vel — dbm&bilis, amdvel 
 ens „ ent — ip&tens, patente ; regente, decente 
 entia „ encia — scientia, sciencia ; benevolencia 
 ere „ er — capers, caber ; saber 
 
 icus „ ico — paciftaw, pacijico 
 io „ ao — successio, successao ; opiniao, religiao 
 
 itas „ idade — ciVAitas, civiliddde 
 itas „ idez — rigiditas, rigidez 
 tio „ cao — nsitio, nagao ; devocao 
 urn „ o — templww, templo ; beneficio, feno 
 
 us „ o — activi^, activo ; adverso, barbaro, calvo 
 
247 
 
 II. — The following observations will prove useful to 
 ihe English scholar : — 
 
 (1.) Many words are exactly the same in "both lan- 
 guages, such as end in a, e, al, el, il, ul, ar, or, on, ude, 
 idea, diploma, base', cone, animal, signal, cruel, civil, 
 consul, singular, successor, lexicon, longitude, etc. ; the 
 pronunciation alone marks the difference. 
 
 (2.) Many become Portuguese by adding a letter, 
 often a, e, or o — artist, artiste; part, parte; moment, 
 momento ; or by assuming a syllable, such as ar, er, 
 ir — abandon, abandonoV; vend, vender; applaud, ap- 
 plaud^*. 
 
 (3.) Many words in Portuguese, as in other lan- 
 guages, consist of prefix, root, and affix, the second 
 modified by the first and third. The effect of a prefix is 
 seen in conformir, oeformar, mformar, Cransformar, re- 
 former ; and of affixes in observer, observacfo, observao'or, 
 ohservagao, obserYancia, obserYatorio, observance. The 
 following digest must be carefully studied : — 
 
 ]S T OUNS OF 
 
 doing end in ao, ida : exclusao, sahida 
 
 doer end in ador, or, eiro, ante, ico, ista : porta^or, feitor, 
 
 cocheiro, negociante, medico, dentista 
 done (state) end in ancia, mento : abaixawenfo, tolerdncia 
 place end in ario, orio, ouro, ada, eto, ica : semindrio, 
 
 escriptorio, levaoa, lazarezto, botica 
 condition end in ez, lira, dade, eza, ela, or : mu&ez, gor&ura, 
 
 yerddde, belleza, cliente7a 
 instrument end in eiro, eira, oura, ador, a : pimenteiro, 
 
 cafeteira, tesoura, iurador, harpa 
 place for things end in al, ol, ar, ia, el, aculo : Puncho7, 
 
 pombaZ, paio7, pomar, livrarza, grane7, receptacnZo 
 manner, creed, end in ismo : gallicismo, caikolicismo, egoismo 
 quantity, number, end in ame, utne, ada, agem, alha: 
 
 enxdme, legume, mmdda, folh.dgem, metrdlha 
 trees, plants, end in eira, eiro, oro : palmeiVa, ipmheiro, 
 
 sycamoro 
 science and art end in a, ia, ia, ica, ura : algebra, astrono- 
 
 mia, historia, musica, architectwra 
 augmentation end in ao, az, asco, acho, ona : dinheirao, 
 
 villanaz, pennacno, sabichona 
 
248 
 
 NOUNS OF 
 
 diminution end in mho, ella, ete, ito, ilha, etc. : rapaz/w&o, 
 
 -pagella, bilhefe, pahVo, baetWia 
 office, dignity, end in ado, ia : consulage*, con&ddo, baronza 
 made of end in aca : palbrt'f « , b&gdca 
 strokes end in ada : pancacfo, ipalmdda, chicotaJtf 
 feminine end in a, ora, oa, eira, essa, eza, ina, etc. : tia, 
 
 senhora, pavo«, lavade/m, condess#, duqueza, menma 
 dweller in, native,lend. in ano, ez, ol, eo : Eoina?io, Erance2, 
 
 Hespanho'Z, Ilheo 
 contempt end in ao, chao, ota, zarrao: ratao, sabic^ao, 
 
 jandta, komenzarrao 
 
 TABLE OF COEEESPOKDIXO TEEMIJSTATIOJSTS. 
 
 English 
 
 
 Portuguese. 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 able 
 
 
 al 
 
 able 
 
 
 avel 
 
 ability 
 
 
 abilidade 
 
 aceous 
 
 
 aceo 
 
 
 1 
 
 acio \ 
 
 ace 
 
 ace > 
 
 
 asso ) 
 
 acle 
 
 
 acnlo 
 
 act 
 
 
 acto 
 
 acy 
 
 { 
 
 acia ) 
 asia j 
 
 ad 
 
 
 ada 
 
 ade 
 
 
 ada 
 
 age 
 
 
 agem 
 
 age 
 
 
 agio 
 
 aign 
 
 
 anha 
 
 ain 
 
 
 ao 
 
 ain 
 
 
 anha 
 
 ain 
 
 
 anho 
 
 al 
 
 
 al 
 
 al 
 
 
 o 
 
 Examples. 
 
 idea, panorama, magnesia, aurora 
 vegetable, vegetal 
 
 curable, curavel ; favoravel, toleravel 
 probability, probabilidade; habilidade 
 herbaceous, herbaceo 
 
 palace, palacio; prefacio; pace, passo ; 
 grace, graca, raca 
 
 obstacle, obstaculo ; oraculo, pinaculo 
 fact, facto; acto, contacto, contracto 
 primacy, primacia ; contumacia, fal- 
 
 lacia, apostasia 
 salad, salada ; nomada, monada 
 grenade, grenada ; cruzada, arcada 
 image, imagem ; passagem, vantagem 
 suffrage, suffragio 
 campaign, campanha ; champanha 
 captain, capitao ; montao, grao 
 mountain, niontanha 
 gain, ganho 
 
 filial, social, metal, mineral, original 
 eternal, eterno ; miiito, individuo 
 
249 
 
 ality 
 
 an 
 
 an 
 
 an 
 
 ance 
 
 ance 
 
 ane 
 
 ant (adj.) 
 
 ant (n.) 
 
 ant 
 
 ant (adj.) 
 
 ar 
 
 ard 
 
 are 
 
 asm 
 
 ate (v.) 
 ate (adj.) 
 ate (n.) 
 silent e 
 „ e (n.) 
 » e (v.) 
 » e (v.) 
 » e (v.) 
 „ e (n.) 
 bility 
 We 
 
 ble (n.) 
 He (adj.) 
 ble (adj.) 
 
 idade 
 
 ano 
 
 ao 
 
 o 
 
 ancia 
 
 anca 
 
 ano 
 
 ante 
 
 ente 
 
 o 
 
 ante 
 
 ar 
 
 arda 
 
 ado 
 
 arar 
 
 asmo 
 
 asma 
 
 ar 
 
 ato, ado 
 
 ado 
 
 ( arda ) 
 
 ( ado ) 
 
 arar 
 
 ( asmo \ 
 
 \ asma j 
 
 c 
 c 
 c 
 
 ce 
 
 ch 
 cious 
 
 er 
 ir 
 
 ar 
 
 o 
 
 bilidade 
 
 vel 
 
 bula 
 
 bre 
 
 bil 
 
 ca (no.) 
 
 co (adj.) 
 
 co (no.) 
 
 cio, cia, 
 
 9a 
 cha 
 z 
 
 !cio, cia, ") 
 9a ) 
 
 cula,go,| 
 
 cnlo 
 
 ct 
 
 cle 
 cto 
 
 t 
 
 nationality, nacion alidade 
 human, humano ; Romano, pelicano 
 organ, orgao ; pagao, sacristao 
 European, Europeo ; Indio, plebeo 
 abundance, abundancia ; fragrancia 
 finance, financa ; danca, balan9a 
 profane, profano ; mundano, urbano 
 abundant, abundante ; importante 
 assistant, assistente ; defendente 
 servant, servo 
 
 militant, militante ; emigrante 
 solar, regular, altar, titular 
 
 drunkard, bebado 
 
 compare, comparar ; preparar 
 
 enthusiasm, enthusiasmo ; pleonasmo 
 
 animate, animar ; perpetuar, fabricar 
 ornate, ornato ; immediato, privado 
 consulate, consulado ; pontificado 
 conclave, phrase, cone, catastrophe 
 dame, dama ; fama, danca, lan9a, fata 
 absolve, absolver ; dissolver, revolver 
 assume, assumir ; dividir, resumir 
 vote, votar ; consolar, admirar 
 fume, fumo ; conciso, concreto, modo 
 visibility, visibilidade ; risibilidade 
 admirable, admiravel; visivel, terrivel 
 fable, fabula 
 noble, nobre 
 ignoble, igndbil 
 
 music, miisica ; arithmetica, ldgica 
 optic, optico ; lunatico, erratico 
 critic, critico ; arco, po^mico 
 preface, prefacio ; commercio, silen- 
 
 cio, essencia, far9a, for9a 
 epoch, epocha ; monarcha, patriarcha 
 loquacious, loquaz ; tenaz, feroz 
 particle, particula ; artigo, especta- 
 
 culo 
 conflict, conflicto ; distincto, objecto 
 
250 
 
 d 
 
 
 do 
 
 dom 
 
 
 ado 
 
 ect 
 
 
 eito 
 
 ect 
 
 
 ecto 
 
 ected 
 
 5 
 
 ecto ^ 
 igido j 
 
 ection 
 ector 
 
 
 eicao 
 eitor 
 
 ed (from") 
 ar) ) 
 
 ed(rroin") 
 er&ir)j 
 
 ado 
 
 ido 
 
 eer 
 
 { 
 
 eiro 
 heiro 
 
 ee 
 
 
 ado 
 
 ee 
 
 
 ia 
 
 el 
 
 
 elo 
 
 el 
 ent 
 
 
 il, el 
 
 ente 
 
 ent 
 
 
 ento 
 
 er 
 
 
 eiro 
 
 er 
 
 
 or, ador 
 
 er 
 
 
 o ? e 
 
 er y 
 
 
 
 esce 
 
 
 escer 
 
 ess 
 
 
 iz 
 
 ess 
 
 
 essa 
 
 ess 
 
 
 eza 
 
 ess 
 
 
 eira 
 
 ess 
 
 
 esso 
 
 et 
 
 
 eta 
 
 eur 
 
 
 eza 
 
 fy . 
 
 
 near 
 
 ge 
 
 
 J a 
 
 ge 
 hood 
 
 
 gio 
 er 
 
 ia 
 
 
 OS 
 
 ian 
 
 
 o 
 
 ic 
 
 
 030 
 
 ice 
 
 
 icio 
 
 ice 
 
 
 ico 
 
 liquid, liquido ; rnethodo, placido 
 dukedom, ducado ; earldom, contado 
 perfect, perfeito ; effeito, respeito 
 object, objecto ; projecto, aspect o 
 erected, erecto ; corrected, corrigido ; 
 
 renectido 
 perfection, perfeicao ; imperfei^o 
 elector, eleitor ; reitor 
 adapted, adaptado ; venerado, re- 
 
 putado, suffocado, separado 
 converted, convertido ; concedido, 
 
 dividido 
 engineer, engenheiro ; carabineiro r 
 
 mosqueteiro, mulateiro 
 refugee, refugiado 
 guarantee, guarantia 
 camel, camelo 
 
 funnel, funil; barril, coronel 
 agent, agente ; inconveniente 
 convent, convento; armamento 
 banker, banqueiro ; lanceiro 
 reformer, reformador 
 astronomer, astronomo ; litliograplio 
 artillery, artilbaria 
 effervesce, effervescer 
 actress, actriz ; empress, imperatriz 
 countess, condessa 
 baroness, baroneza; duqueza,princeza 
 heiress, herdeira 
 
 process, processo; excesso, successo 
 poet, poeta ; lanceta 
 grandeur, grandeza 
 purifj, purificar ; qualificar, edificar 
 forge, forja; arrange, arranjar; loja 
 college, collegio ; refugio, privilegio 
 widowhood, viuvez 
 effluvia, effluvios 
 theologian, theologo 
 majestic, magestoso 
 sacrifice, sacrificio ; edificio, officio 
 service, servico 
 
ice 
 
 icia, 19a 
 
 ice 
 
 icho 
 
 ice 
 
 eza 
 
 ics 
 
 ica 
 
 ier 
 
 eiro 
 
 iet 
 
 ieto 
 
 igm 
 
 igar 
 
 ile 
 
 il 
 
 iliate- \ 
 
 ilhar 
 iliar 
 
 ime 
 
 imo 
 
 in 
 
 em 
 
 ine 
 
 nho 
 
 ine 
 
 nlia 
 
 ine 
 
 in a 
 
 ine 
 
 ino 
 
 ing. 
 
 ando 
 
 ing 
 
 endo 
 
 ing. 
 
 indo 
 
 *®g 
 
 ante 
 
 ing 
 
 ente 
 
 ion 
 
 10 
 
 ion 
 
 iao 
 
 ion 
 
 nhao 
 
 ion 
 
 ao 
 
 ious- 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 e 
 
 isc 
 
 isco 
 
 isli 
 
 ir 
 
 ish (adj.) ez 
 
 ish (dim. 
 
 ) inho, ac 
 
 ism 
 
 ismo 
 
 ist 
 
 ista 
 
 ist 
 
 ICO 
 
 it 
 
 lto 
 
 it 
 
 ite 
 
 it© 
 
 ita 
 
 ite 
 
 itio 
 
 ite 
 
 ito 
 
 ited 
 
 ido 
 
 ity 
 
 idade 
 
 251 
 
 police, policia : noticia, malicia 
 
 caprice, capricho 
 
 avarice, avareza 
 
 statics, statica ; mathematica 
 
 cashier, caxeiro ; financeiro, f usileiro 
 
 quiet, quieto 
 
 fatigue, fatigar 
 
 puerile, pueril ; fertil, imbecil, ddcil 
 I humiliate, humilhar ; conciliate, con- 
 ) ciliar 
 
 maritime, maritimo 
 
 margin, margem ; origem, virgem 
 
 marine, marinho 
 
 line, linha 
 
 mine, mina ; disciplina, machina 
 
 divine, divino ; libertino, feminino 
 
 dancing, d: ncando ; formando 
 
 reading, lendo ; concedendo 
 
 persuading, persuadindo ; dividindo 
 
 during, durante 
 
 dominion, dominio 
 religion, religiao ; opiniao, centuriao 
 pavilion, pavilhao 
 vision, visao ; divisao, explosao 
 perfidious, perfido 
 ellipsis, ellipse ; these 
 disc, disco, obelisco 
 abolish, abolir ; brandir, finir, polir 
 English, Inglez ; Irish, Irlandez 
 lo whitish, branquinho 
 
 paganism, paganismo ; baptismo 
 
 dentist, dentista ; economista, purista 
 
 botanist, botanico 
 
 decrepit, decrepito ; habito 
 
 limit, limite 
 
 levite, levita; hypocrita 
 
 site, sitio 
 
 definite, definito ; erudito, exquisito 
 
 united, unido 
 
 brevity, brevidade ; santidade 
 
252 
 
 ity 
 
 ez 
 
 solidity, solidez ; fluidez, rapidez 
 
 ity 
 
 eza 
 
 nobility, nobreza 
 
 ive 
 
 ivo 
 
 positive, positivo ; fugitivo, motivo 
 
 ize 
 
 izar 
 
 •baptize, baptizar ; immortalizar 
 
 k 
 
 co & que 
 
 frank, franco ; banco ; tank, tanque 
 
 kin 
 
 inho 
 
 lambkin, cordeirinho 
 
 le 
 
 lo 
 
 ample, amplo ; templo, exemplo 
 
 le 
 
 lilo 
 
 title, titulo ; discipulo 
 
 let 
 
 inho 
 
 rivulet, rebeirinho 
 
 liant 
 
 hante 
 
 brilliant, brilhante 
 
 ling 
 
 inho 
 
 gosling, gansinho 
 
 lock 
 
 inho 
 
 hillock, onteirinho 
 
 ly (adv.) 
 
 mente 
 
 finally, finalmente ; totalmente 
 
 m 
 
 ma 
 
 system, systema; sympt6ma,emblema 
 drama 
 
 me 
 
 mo 
 
 supreme, supremo ; extremo 
 
 nm 
 
 mna 
 
 column, columna 
 
 nee 
 
 ncia 
 
 ignorance, ignorancia ; distancia 
 
 nee 
 
 nca 
 
 vigilanca, differen9a 
 
 ne 
 
 ona 
 
 vigilance, zone, zona 
 
 ness 
 
 ura 
 
 fineness, finura ; altura, frescura 
 
 ness 
 
 eza 
 
 firmness, firmeza ; franqueza 
 
 nt 
 
 nta, nte 
 
 aiFront, affronta ; font, fonte 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 canto, embargo 
 
 on 
 
 ao 
 
 prison, prisao ; dragao, galleao 
 
 on 
 
 ao 
 
 sermon, sermao ; salmao, prisao 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 terror, horror, tremor, inventor 
 
 or 
 
 ario 
 
 proprietor, proprietario 
 
 or 
 
 
 
 error, erro 
 
 ose 
 
 or 
 
 impose, impor ; compor, suppor 
 
 ose 
 
 oso 
 
 verbose, verboso 
 
 ose 
 
 osa 
 
 prose, prdsa 
 
 ot 
 
 ota, ota 
 
 patriot, patridta ; pilot, piloto 
 
 OU3 
 
 
 
 various, vario ; contiguo, adventicio 
 
 OUS 
 
 oso 
 
 generous, generoso ; glorioso 
 
 ph 
 
 pho 
 
 paragraph, paragrapho 
 
 ply 
 
 plicar 
 
 multiply, multiplicar 
 
 que 
 
 CO 
 
 burlesque, burlesco ; pittoresco 
 
 re 
 
 ro, er 
 
 centre, centro ; sepulchro, desastre 
 
 rious 
 
 re 
 
 illustrious, illiistre 
 
 rn 
 
 rno 
 
 modern, moderno ; interno 
 
253 
 
 rfc 
 
 He 
 
 se 
 
 so 
 
 ship 
 ship 
 
 ade 
 ia 
 
 some 
 
 6so 
 
 sque 
 t 
 
 SCO 
 
 to 
 
 te 
 
 to 
 
 te 
 
 ta 
 
 ter 
 
 tro 
 
 tion 
 
 tie 
 
 tie 
 
 cao 
 
 tolo, tola 
 tello 
 
 tor 
 
 dor 
 
 ture 
 
 duro 
 
 ty 
 
 dao 
 
 ube 
 
 ubo 
 
 uce 
 
 uzir 
 
 ucb (v.) 
 
 ir 
 
 net (a.) 
 ude 
 
 licta, ucto 
 ude 
 
 ude (v.) 
 
 uir 
 
 ude 
 
 ao 
 
 ul 
 
 ul 
 
 ulse 
 
 ulso 
 
 ult (v.) 
 
 ultar 
 
 um 
 
 o 
 
 ure 
 
 ura 
 
 urn \ 
 
 lirno ") 
 urna ) 
 
 us 
 
 o 
 
 X 
 
 xo 
 
 X 
 
 xto 
 
 V 
 
 Ta 
 
 7 
 
 ia 
 
 J 
 
 io 
 
 J 
 
 ea 
 
 J 
 
 o 
 
 fort, forte 
 
 use, uso ; abiiso, abstruso, vaso, verso 
 
 friendship, amizade 
 
 lordship, senhoria ; capitania, legacia 
 
 toilsome, laborioso ; trabalhoso 
 
 picturesque, picturesco ; burlesco 
 
 alphabet, alphabeto; distincto, quieto 
 
 remote, remoto ; voto, absoliito 
 
 note, nota 
 
 barometer, barometro ; thermometro 
 
 nation, na9ao ; ra9ao, propor9ao 
 
 apostle, apostolo ; epistle, epistola 
 
 castle, castello 
 
 orator, orador ; cultivador, regulador 
 
 mature, madiiro 
 
 laxity, laxidao 
 
 cube, ciibo 
 
 conduce, conduzir ; deduzir, induzir 
 
 instruct, instruir 
 
 conduct, conducta, pro duct o 
 
 latitude, longitude, plenitude 
 
 conclude, concluir 
 
 gratitude, gratidao ; solidao 
 
 consul 
 
 impulse, impulso 
 
 consult, consultar 
 
 asylum, asylo ; delirio 
 
 manufacture, manufactura ; fractura 
 
 turn, turno 
 
 apparatus, apparato ; genio 
 complex, complexo ; sexo 
 context, contexto ; pretexto, texto 
 academy, academia ; economia, espia 
 family, familia ; memoria, historia 
 adversary, adversario ; observatories 
 assembly, assemblea 
 destiny, destino 
 
254 
 
 ABSTKACT OP PEECEDING- TABLE, 
 
 Applicable to "Words in English, and Portuguese having 
 the same Greek or Latin root : — 
 
 1. "Words in a, al, ar, or, ude, are the same in both 
 languages, with few exceptions. 
 
 2. Words in ant, ent, add e. 
 
 3. "Words in act, an, ect, ess, ic, id, il, ism, x, and xto, 
 add o — fact, facto. 
 
 4. "Words in on, ion, tion, sion, change these into ao, 
 iao, and cao — prisao, religiao. 
 
 5. Words in cy, dy, ly, my, gy, ry, sy, change y into 
 ia, ncy into ncia, and ice into icia. 
 
 6. Words in ce, ge, ary, ery, ory, change e and sy into 
 io — palace, palacio. 
 
 7. Words in ane, ate, be, ete, ite, ote, ute, ene, ine, 
 ive, ire, se, etc., change e into o — humane, huinano. 
 
 8. Words in ch (hard), c, ist, ot, add a — monarch, 
 monarcha. 
 
 9. Words in ity change ity into idade — city, cidade. 
 10. Words in ade, ics, change the last letter into a. 
 31. Words in ous take oso ; in eous, eo ; cious, z. 
 
 12. Words in us and urn, change these into o. 
 
 13. Words in ate (verbs), change ate into ar ; inginto 
 ando, endo, indo ; ed into ado, ido ; tor into dor. 
 
 ADJECTIVES 
 
 Are sometimes roots, or primitive words, as diiro, caro, 
 cavo; but more frequently derivatives, with the following 
 affixes: — 
 
 ADJECTIVES MEANING 
 
 acting : ante, ente ; fvlmindnte, -potente 
 j)ower to act : ivo, az ; active-, tendz 
 acted on : ado, ido ; vasgacfo, vestido 
 able to he: avel, ivel, uvel, atil, ico; amdvel, y'iswsI, soluvel, 
 -povtdtil, levad/po 
 
255 
 
 ADJECTIVES MEANING 
 
 belonging to: ano, ar, ario, ez, ico, il, ino ; paisa^o, polar, 
 
 alimentary, portugueiz 
 full of: ento, oso, lirno, 6z, ez ; lamacewfo, ranioso, tacit- 
 
 ^m0, atro'z, cortex 
 made of: eo ; SLureo, ferreo 
 having much of: tido ; BarbwJo, lanudo 
 tearing, causing: fero, fico ; frondi/ero, paciyfoo 
 Semy : ante, ente, ido ; constante, decente, humido 
 apt to he, going to: biindo; furihundo, morihundo 
 like, tending to: ado, idulo ; achumbddo, advents, 
 
 acidulo 
 diminutive, fond of : inho, ino, zinho ; bomtinho 
 
 Adjectives in o become feminine by changing o into a: 
 activo, active. Adverbs are formed by adding mente to 
 the feminine of adjectives, e.g., SLctiv&inente. Diminutives 
 by putting "inho" ino, or zinho, instead of o: homtinho, 
 pequenmo, grandezinho. These diminutives have often 
 the force of "ish" in English, as largw7*, blackM; hut far 
 more frequently are expressive of endearment, like "petit," 
 in French ; e.g., bonitinho means ''pretty little dear," and 
 rarely pretty^. 
 
 YEEBS 
 
 Are primitive, as por ; and compound, or derivative, as 
 im^ov. Their terminations are of course significative, of 
 which the following are specimens : — 
 do, act, he : ar, er, ir, or ; apromptir, receber, impeil/r, 
 
 suppor 
 grow, hecome : ecer ; envelhecer, esclarecer, anoitecer, em- 
 
 branquecer 
 do often, or habitually: ejar ; gotejdr, apedre/ar, cvayejar, 
 
 trovejdr, Tp&dejdr 
 act as, make like: ear; pastor ear, pedantear, pavonear-se 
 imitate, mimic : ezar ; a£remcezdr, aportugue^ar 
 make he : izar, isar, itar ; fertil^ar, humamsar, f&cilitdr 
 act in a small way : iscar, icar, igar ; chxxviscdr, bebemVa'r, 
 
 choiomig dr 
 
256 
 
 OUTLINES OP GPAMMAB. 
 
 I. The Article is thus declined : — 
 
 The sing. on. o f. &plur.on. os f. as 
 of the do da aos das, comp. of de, of 
 
 to the ao a dos as, „ a, to 
 
 in the no na nos nas, „ em, in 
 
 by the pelo pela pelo pelas, „ por, by 
 
 A or an is um, uma ; of a, de um, de uma ; to a, a vm, 
 a uma, etc. 
 
 Examples. — sol, terra, a do mar, da barba, no ar, na 
 agua, a hora, pela lingua, na orbita, da terra, pelo pro- 
 fessor, os navios, as horas, aos cantores, dos navios, as 
 ideas, pelos professores, nos navios, pelas barbas. Um 
 professor, uma palma, de um consul, a uin pastor, de uma 
 vacca, a lima dea, a casa do governador, a influencia da 
 lingua. 
 
 II. The NouiS" hasno inflection for case ; the objective 
 or accusative is preceded by the particle " a" when there 
 is danger of ambiguity : as, " Joao ama a Pedro," " Lobo 
 nao mata a lobo." 
 
 JSumber. — The folloAving are the rules for the forma- 
 tion of the plural : — 
 
 Pule 1. A noun ending in a vowel takes s: filha, fil- 
 has ; vento, ventos ; gru, grus. 
 
 Pule 2. A noun ending in a consonant (except / and 
 on) takes es : senhor, senhores ; colher, colheres ; inglez, 
 inglezes ; cor, cores ; paiz, paizes. 
 
 Pule 3. A noun ending in I drops it before taking es: 
 animal, ammdes ; lencol, lenco^s ; azul, azues. JEl and il 
 become eis : papeZ, pape7s ; aocil, docm\ " iZ," when 
 accented, becomes is : fusil, fusz's. Consul, cal, mal, and 
 pensil follow Pule 1 : consules, cales, males, pensiies. 
 
 Pule 4. A noun ending in on changes m into ns : 
 homem, homers ; bom, bons ; fiin, fins ; algum, algu^s ; 
 aturn, atu7is. 
 
 Pule 5. Nouns in ao form the plural in three ways : — 
 (1) By adding s; (2) by changing ao into aes ; (3) by 
 changing do into oes. No rule is so safe as lists — 1. Ac 
 
257 
 
 maos, pagaos, oregaos, drfaos, drgaos, sdlaos, temporaos, 
 vaos, zangaos. 2. Allemaes, caes, capellaes, capitaes, Cata- 
 lans, charlataes, deaes, ermitaes, escrivaes, guardiaes, 
 massapaes, paes, sacristaes, tabelliaes. 3. Accoes, con- 
 fissoes, coracoes, and fully 1000 more, being all the femi- 
 nine nouns in do, cdo, and tdo, except mao and hengdo. 
 Aldeao, anao, and villao take aos or oes ; also, soldao and 
 volcao, oes, or aes. The first and second lists are com- 
 plete ; all other nouns in do come under the third. 
 
 Some have no plural, Lisooa ; some no singular, can- 
 gdlhas, anjinhos (when meaning a double thumb-screw) ; 
 some are the same in both numbers, pires, cdes, ourwes, 
 etc. 
 
 II. G-endee. — The Portuguese language has two gen- 
 ders, masculine and feminine. The grand general rule is, 
 all nouns ending in o are masculine ; all in a, feminine. 
 Some special rules follow : — 
 
 Rule 1. Nouns in e, i, o, and u are masculine : caffe, 
 pe, lacre, leite, sangue, livro, alcali, peru, and many 
 others. 
 
 Exceptions. Chemine, se, fe, face, alface, sede, parede, 
 vide, tarde, longitude, etc. ; fonte, fronte, ponte, arte, 
 parte, sdrte, fdme, carne, noite, febre, tdsse, classe, chave, 
 neve, sege, nao, avo, enxd, md, tribu, and a few others of 
 no moment. 
 
 Rule 2. Nouns in I, m, n, r, and z are masculine: saZ, 
 hornet, pesar, lapis, nariz. 
 
 Exceptions. Cal, rnivem, drdem, and those in gem, as 
 imagem ; mulher, colher, cor, cor; dor, flor ; paz, raiz, fdz, 
 ndz, vdz, cruz, Mz, and all in dez, e.g., timidez, etc. 
 
 Mule 3. Nouns in a, do, ei, ade, ede, and ude are femi- 
 nine : as rainha, opiniao, lei, amizade, sede, virtu de. 
 
 Exceptions. Dia ; names of professions in ista, den- 
 tista ; Greek nouns in a, diadema ; words in a, cha, alvara ; 
 but pa is feminine. 
 
 III. The Adjective forms its plural as the Noun 
 does, and its feminine thus : — 
 
258 
 
 o becomes a : douto, dout« ; novo, ndv# 
 
 ao , , a : v«0, \a ; sac, sa 
 
 ez, 61, or, u, and um, add a : inglez, ingleza ; hespanhdk, 
 
 protectors, mia, uma 
 oso becomes osa : generoso, generosa 
 e, 1, r, and z (except or, ol, and ez) do not change: breve, 
 
 finaZ, visiveZ, faeiZ, tenaz, cortez 
 
 The Comparative and Superlative are formed by pre- 
 fixing metis and o mais, as alto : metis alto, o mais alto. 
 
 Exceptions. Bom,melhor,6ptimo; mao,peior,pessimo; 
 grande, maior, maximo ; pequeno, menor, minimo. Some 
 take the following : — Issimo, as antigo, Biitiqmssimo ; 
 nobre, TiobHissimo ; fiel, n&elissimo. Xllimo, as facil, 
 f&cillimo; humilde, humillimo. JErrimo, as agro, acerrimo; 
 pobre, pauperrmo, and -pobrissimo. 
 
 The following are irregular : — Bom, boa ; mao, ma. 
 Commum is now invariable. 
 
 Examples of Nouns and Adjectives. As opinioes dos 
 capitaes. Os coracoes dos animaes. As maos dos guar- 
 diaes. As cruizes dos Christaos. As margens dos ribei- 
 rinhos. O gatinho do pastorinho. Panno Hespanhdl. 
 Uma fragata Americana. Os generaes Russos. Yinho 
 branco. Um cavallo Arabe. Uma febre agiida. As boas 
 maneiras dos officiaes superiores. Came crua. Um mao 
 jantar. Doutrina sa. Ares saos. Homens ainaveis. 
 Senhoras Allemas. Grandissima actividade. Mais nota- 
 vel. A maior affabilidade. A melhor vida. O mendr 
 tempo. 
 
 The Numerals are — Cardinals: nm, dois, tres, quatro, 
 cinco, seis, sete, oito, nove, dez, onze, doze, treze, quatorze, 
 quinze, dezaseis, dezasete, dezoito, dezanove, vinte, vinte- 
 um, trinta, quarenta, cincoenta, sessenta, settenta, oitenta, 
 noventa, cem, duzentos, trezentos, quatro centos, qui- 
 nhentos, etc., mil, dois mil. Ordinals: primeiro, segiindo, 
 terceiro, quarto, quinto, sexto, septimo, oitavo, nono, de- 
 cimo, undecimo, duodecimo, decimo-tercio, etc., vigesiroo, 
 vigesimo-primeiro, trigesimo, quadragesimo, etc., cente- 
 simo, millesimo. 
 
259 
 
 IV. The Pko^otjns have the following forms : — 
 1. The Personal Pronouns are — 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. m. 
 
 3./. 
 
 eu, nds 
 
 tu, yds 
 
 elle, elles 
 
 ella, ellas 
 
 de, a, para mim, nds 
 
 ti, vds 
 
 elle, elles 
 
 ella, ellas, si 
 
 (ace. form) me, nos* 
 
 te, vos* 
 
 0, OS 
 
 a, as, se 
 
 The first line contains the nominative forms : I, we, 
 etc. The second, the forms used after prepositions, as a, 
 de, por, para, com, etc., contraction taking place only in 
 delle, delles ; della, dellas ; and comigo, com-nosco, for 
 com mim, com nos. The third represents the forms 
 equivalent to accusatives or objectives, governed by active 
 verbs. "It is I" is " sou eu ;" " it is he," " e elle ;" " it 
 is said," " diz-seT " Se," used with a reflective verb, is 
 equal to one, toe, they, people ; like "on" in French, as 
 " come-se" "one eats;" "bebe-se bom vinho aqui" "they 
 drink good wine here." 
 
 2. Conjunctive pronouns are joined to verbs : o, him ; 
 a, her ; os, them (m.); as, them (/!); se, himself, herself, 
 themselves ; Ihe, to him or her ; Ihes, to them. These 
 frequently combine with the Personal Pronouns,- thus — 
 m'o, or mo, it to me; as "De-wo," " Give it to me, :> 
 referring to a masculine object ; ^e-ma, if feminine; 
 Je-mos, if masculine plural ; <^e-mas, if feminine plural. 
 The table exhibits the possible combinations : — 
 
 It(m.)to me, mo thee, to him, her, Vho us, nolo you, volo self, selo 
 It(y.)to „ ma „ ta „ „ lha „ viola „ vola ,, sela 
 Them \ 
 (m.) to J 
 Them -> 
 (/.) to I 
 
 Examples. Diga-me. Eu o digo. Elle ama. Paga- 
 me. De-lhe o livro. De-lho. De-lhe a penna. De-lJia. 
 De-lhe os livros. De-llios. De-lhe as pennas. De-lhas. 
 Sem mim, della, de ti, dellas, para elle ; encha-o ; de-me 
 um eopo, peca-ZAe uma vela, metta-o no sacco, mande-os 
 cedo. Elle den-mo. Ella deu-lhos. A si. 
 
 me, mo 
 
 „ ma 
 
 thee, to 
 „ ta 
 
 „ mos 
 
 „ tos 
 
 „ mas 
 
 „ tas 
 
 him, her, Iho 
 „ „ lha 
 
 ,, „ llios 
 
 „ nolas 
 
 nolas 
 
 volos 
 volas 
 
 „ selos 
 
 * Nds and vds, in the nominative and after prepositions, always 
 have the accent, and are pronounced as if ndss, vdss ; but in the ac- 
 cusative as if nooz or nuz, vooz or viiz. 
 
260 
 
 Pronouns are further modified in combining with 
 verbs ; e.g., instead of " amar 0," to love him, it becomes 
 "ama-fo," or "amal-0," or "ama^o;" and so of the 
 others — amal-«, amal-os, ami-las. Again, amamos-0 be- 
 comes amamo-Zo. Also, for euphony 0, a, os, and as 
 take n after third plural of the verb — adomo-o becomes 
 adordo-^o. 
 
 3. The JPossessives are — 
 
 Meu 
 
 mmha 
 
 meus 
 
 minhas 
 
 my 
 
 Teu 
 
 tua 
 
 teus 
 
 tiias 
 
 thy 
 
 Seu 
 
 sua 
 
 seus 
 
 siias 
 
 his, her, its, their, your 
 
 Ndsso 
 
 ndssa 
 
 ndssos 
 
 ndssas 
 
 our 
 
 Ydsso 
 
 vdssa 
 
 vdssos 
 
 vdssas 
 
 your 
 
 The possessive often requires an article : meu livro, 
 my book ; a minha casa, my house ; but the article is not 
 used before persons: meu pai, meu irmao, vdssa senhoria, 
 etc. 
 
 4. The Demonstratives — 
 
 Este esta estes estas (isto) this, these 
 
 Esse essa esses essas (isso) that, those 
 
 Aquelle aquella aquellea aquellas (aquillo) that, those (yonder) 
 
 JEste is exactly "this;" esse is "that" near; aquelle is 
 "that" yonder. They combine with outro, forming esf- 
 outro, this other ; esfoutros, these others ; ess'outro, 
 aquell'outro. Isto is "this" used alone, like "ceci;" isto 
 is "that;' like "cela." 
 
 Mesmo mesma mesmos mesmas self, same, very one 
 
 O a os as that, those 
 
 Mesmo is used thus : j@u mesmo, I myself; elles mes- 
 mos, they themselves. Also, mesmo homem, the same 
 man ; ao mesmo tempo, at the same time. " O," as a de- 
 monstrative, is used thus : que, he who; also, de, that 
 of. All these combine with de, as desle, desta, destes, 
 destas, disto ; desse, daquelle ; do mesmo, da mesma, dos 
 mesmos, das mesmas ; do, da, etc., with em, as neste, nesta, 
 nestes, nestas, nisto ; nesse, naquelle, naquillo, no mesmo, 
 no, na, etc. 
 
261 
 
 Examples, ^ste livro, esta mesa, estes livros, estas 
 mesas; deste cavallo, desta questao, destes homens, destas 
 mulheres ; a este rapaz, a esta rapariga, a estes rapazes, 
 a estas raparigas ; neste quarto, nesta cama, nestes quar- 
 tos, nestas camas ; aquelle livro, aquella casa, aquelles 
 livros, aquellas casas ; daquelle criado, daquella eriada, 
 daquelles criados, daquellas criadas ; aquelle homem, 
 aquella mulher, aquelles homens, aquellas mulheres ; 
 naquelle navio, naquella caina, etc. No mesmo dia, isso 
 mesmo, pela mesma razao, ella mesma ; o mimero dos 
 que — , dois remos, o do temor, e o da esperanca, os do 
 ndsso dia. (1 Cor. xv. 39). 
 
 5. The Relatives are — 
 
 Que (invariable), who, which, that, whom 
 
 O que, a que, os que, as que, what, which ; he, she, or those who 
 
 Ciijo, ciija, etijos, cujas, whose 
 
 Quern (invariable), whoever ; he or she who ; what 
 
 O qual, a qual, os quaes, as quaes, who, which ; the which 
 
 " Que " is used with both genders, both numbers, with 
 verbs, and prepositions : " o que " is equal to that, wliich, 
 or what, in the phrase what he says is true. It is declined 
 like o, a, do que, da que, etc. " Cujo " (de quem) takes 
 the preposition but no article, de cujo cavallo — not do. 
 " Quem " has the force of who in the phrase " who steals 
 my purse," or the Latin "sunt qui;" it takes preposi- 
 tions. " qual " is used instead of que to prevent 
 ambiguity, as lequel is in French ; it is declined with the 
 article, and takes the prepositions : do qual, da qual, dos 
 quaes, das quaes ; no qual, pelo qual, etc. 
 
 Examples. O professor que falla, a eriada que canta, 
 os pensamentos que sao vaos, estas palavras que digo. 
 O relogio que tenho. A filha que elle ama. O homem 
 que vejo. A casa em que ; as circunstancias em que \ a 
 penna com que, o negocio de que ; o homem esta certo 
 do que diz. Nos dizemos o que sabemos. que tern a 
 esposa e o esposo. Nao sei o que e. O homen de cujo 
 livro, etc. A mulher de cujo relogio. ^ O rapaz de cujas 
 maos, a rainha de cujos cavallos. Da a quem te pede. 
 
262 
 
 Como quern tinha autoridade. Quern nelle ere nao e con- 
 demnado. Somos quern soinos. De quem teni a honra 
 de ser. Deos a quem havia crido, Nao sabia quem elle 
 era. (See also John vii. 25.) Diante de Deos, a quem 
 havia crido, o qual da vida aos mortos ; sua graca, a qual 
 elle derramou ; os filhos entre os quaes vivemos ; pelas 
 quaes cousas ; pelo Evangelho do qual eu fiii feito 
 ministro. (Col. ii. 3. ; Eph. iii. 12. ; iv. 16.; Philem. 12. ; 
 2 Cor. xi. 29. ; Eom. ix. 20.) 
 
 6. The Interrogatives are — 
 
 Que? (invariable), what? 
 
 Quem ? (invariable), who ? whom ? 
 
 Ciijo, cuja, ciijos, cujas ? whose? (de quem? is more usual) 
 
 Qual, quaes ? which? (i.e., which of two or more) 
 
 Examples. Que livros tern elle ? Que boas novas ha ? 
 Com que autoridade ? Que rua e esta ? Que diremos ? 
 Que diz a Escritura ? Que distancia ? Que horas sao ? 
 Que quer ? A que fim ? Quem e ? Quem me livrara ? 
 Quem nos separara ? Quem sabe ? De quem e isto ? 
 Com quem fallou ? De quem e esta imagem ? De quem 
 e elle filho ? Quaes sao as riias ? Qual pois o ama mais ? 
 Qual e mais facil ? Qual e o caminho ? Qual e o pre90 
 disto ? A qual dos sete ? Qual delles ? Qual dos 
 dois? 
 
 7. The Indefinites are — 
 
 Alguem (ind,), somebody, any one ; muito, much, many ; pouco, 
 
 little, few ; tal, qual. 
 Algtim, some, any ; nenhiim, no, none ; quanto, how great, what j 
 
 tudo (ind.) 
 Ambos, both; ninguem (ind.), nobody j qualquer, any, whatever ; 
 
 tan to, so great, so much, so many. 
 Cada (ind.), each (not every) ; outrem (ind.), others ; quemquer 
 
 (ind.), whatever ; uns, lirnas, some. 
 Certo, a certain ; outro, another, other ; so, alone. 
 Fulano, such-a-one; os mais, the rest; todo, all (pi.), every. 
 
 Examples. Conheee Y. S. alguem ? Tern alguma 
 queixa contra algum ? alguns de vossos poetas algumas 
 pessoas, ambos gritarao, cada homem, cada casa, cada um, 
 
263 
 
 disse-me certa pessoa, fulano diz, muito vinho, muita 
 prudencia, nrnitos hdmens, miiitas filhas, nenhiim homen, 
 nenhtima casa, nenhiim de sens amigos, ninguem la esta, 
 sem outrem em casa, outro dia, nao ha outro meio, os 
 Hiais fugirao, pouco tempo, pouca agua, poucos, poucas 
 pessoas, quanto tempo, com quanta dor ! quantos traba 
 lhos ! quantas noites ! qualquer hdmein sabe isso, quaes 
 quer que sejao 6s perigos, elle so, ella so, a so excepcao, 
 todo {all) o anno, toda a noite, todos os dias (every), 
 todas as noites, tal pai, tal filho, taes e taes cousas, tal e 
 qual, alguns dos quaes, elle e tal qual Y. S. o tern co- 
 nhecido, tiido ia bem, tanto dinheiro, vinte e tantos, um ao 
 outro, uns aos outros, uns e outros, uns doze homens, 
 umas meias, um e outro. 
 
 Y. Yeebs. — The Portuguese Yerb is regular in its 
 structure, and presents few difficulties to the Latin 
 scholar. Yerbs are chiefly derived from nouns — dlho, 
 olhar, ar, arejar — the root being modified by prefixes 
 and affixes. The peculiarities are — 
 
 1. An inflected or personal infinitive, amar eu, amares 
 tu, amar elle, am&rmos ncs, amarcfes yds, amarem elles = 
 my loving, thy loving, his loving, etc. 
 
 2. The use of four auxiliaries — ter, haver, ser, and 
 estdr — and the remarkable distinction between ser, re- 
 presenting a permanent, essential quality, and estdr, a tem- 
 porary state or circumstance. 
 
 3. Richness in compound tenses and idiomatic forms; 
 and singular combinations with pronouns, expressing deli- 
 cate shades of meaning : e. g., tenho or Aei amado, tinha or 
 havia amado, tive or houve amado, etc.; anddndo vendo, 
 hei de amar, ter sido amado, tenho de ir, acdbo de ouvir, 
 estd para pedir, o cair da folha. Tenho que escrever, 
 Jiavemos de nos divertir, estou a temer, escrever-lhe-hei, te- 
 lo-ha Y. S. apprendido. Deve-se-abrir as janellas, batei, 
 e abrir-se-vos-ha. Perdodr-se-lhe-ha. Fa-lo-hei. 
 
 4. The gerund* (present participle active) combines 
 with estdr to form progressive tenses in ndo like the 
 English ing : e. g., estou amdndo, I am loving. It is 
 
 * Constancio's nomenclature. 
 
264 
 
 joined to nouns (without undergoing inflection) ; e. g., a 
 cabega naddndo em sdngue. It is used absolutely, evitdndo 
 expressoes bdixas. Often conveys a. future contingent idea : 
 havendo logdr, irei: if I have time, I shall go. 
 
 5. The supine* (past participle) in ado or %do (for 
 irregulars, see p. 147), combines with ter and haver to 
 form the compound tenses of the active, and with ser 
 and estdr, those of the passive ; in the first, invari- 
 able ; in the second, inflected like an adjective. Elle 
 e amado, ella e amad«, elles sao amados, ellas sao 
 amad«5. It does not follow the Erench construction 
 (as it once did) in such phrases as, " le livre que j'ai 
 ecrit ;" ie la lettre que j'ai ecrite ;" but remains invari- 
 able. It is often used like an ablative absolute (inflected) : 
 chegddo o tempo, the time being come ; consultddos os 
 capitdes. Employed actively, as well as passively, as an 
 adjective: " cangddo" is tiring and "tired;" " esquecido" 
 " forgetful," and forgotten" It is elliptically used with- 
 out the verb to be ; e. g., " suspeito de infecto," for " sus- 
 peito de ser infecto," suspected of being infected. 
 
 6. Reflective, reciprocal, impersonal verbs and re- 
 flectives as impersonals, are in constant use, the whole 
 
 tendency of the language being to employ the third per- 
 son, like "on" in Erench. They are, of course, connected 
 with the appropriate pronouns, me, te, se, etc., except in 
 the few cases where tne impersonal is pure : abstenho- 
 me de beber, nao me esquecerei. Often equivalent to 
 the passive, sdbe-se, it is known, divide-se a easa. Reci- 
 procals are Englished by " each other :" muito se querem 
 os dois amigos. Impersonals are reflective, as, vdi-se (one 
 goes), chega-se,faz-se ; or pure, as vale, chove, convem. 
 
 7. The Moods are nearly the same as in other lan- 
 guages. No optative form, the defect being supplied by 
 oxald, oxald que eu tivesse, etc. The subjunctive is used — 
 (1.) When contingency is in the second or subordinate 
 clause: quero que elle fdga isto. (2.) As & polite im- 
 perative : diga-lhe. (3.) Instead of the English infinitive ; 
 diga-lhe que suba, tell him to come up. (4.) After words 
 of need, duty, possibility, etc. : e preciso que eu vd. 
 
 * Constancy's nomenclature. 
 
265 
 
 (5.) Often after verbs of doubt, fear, or emotion ; espero 
 desejo, estimo, receio, quero, aconselho, rogo, peco, creio 
 temor, etc. Espero que V. 8. esteja melhdr ; receio que 
 tenhdmos um verao quente ; duvido que assim seja. (6.) 
 After words and phrases indicating purpose, paraque, 
 afim que : or concession, aindaque, posto que ; condition, 
 se, no caso que, comtanto que, etc. ; para que tome este 
 logar ; afim que elle tenlia bons exemplos. (7.) In 
 prayers, wishes, hlessings, etc. : a graga seja com todos, 
 paz seja aos irmaos. 
 
 {Note. — The Portuguese subjunctive is not always 
 used to express purpose, as it is in Latin after " ut ;" para 
 with the infinitive is generally used like "pour" in 
 French, or in old English "for to," as para fazer isto. 
 The great distinction between the infinitive and subjunc- 
 tive in the subordinate clause is, that the infinitive is to be 
 used in Portuguese when the verbs in both clauses refer 
 to the same person. " Quero fazer Isto" I wish to do that: 
 the subjunctive in Portuguese, when the verbs refer to 
 different persons : " Quero que elle fdga isto," I wish him to 
 do that, though translated by the infinitive in English.) 
 
 The conditional (potential or suppositive) affirms, de- 
 pending on a previous doubt, whereas the subjunctive 
 doubts, depending on a previous affirmation : eu sahiria, 
 se o tempo estivesse bom, I should go out, if the weather 
 were good ; quero que elle fdga. The infinitive is often 
 used as a noun : o cahir da folha, the fall of the leaf ; 
 o unico ser humano, the only human being. 
 
 8. The Tenses require attention. The present in Por- 
 tuguese is used as in English, but also often stands for a 
 future, vou ja, I shall go directly. JNao dou tanto, I 
 shall not give so much. The imperfect is not a past 
 definite (as given in most Portuguese grammars for Eng- 
 lishmen), hut a, progressive tense, aseu Zmquando elle entrou 
 — not I read, or did read, but I was reading when he came 
 in. The preterite definite or perfect tense shows the de- 
 finite a,ct,fallei, I spoke ; but it also represents the Eng- 
 lish compound of the present when the act is definite, 
 thus, jantei, I have dined ; o vapor chegou, the steamer 
 has arrived ; ja lhe disse, I have already told you. {Note 
 this carefully.'] The preterite indefinite much as in Eng- 
 
266 
 
 lish, tenho escripto tres on quatro cartas sem effeito, 
 and so of the others. The future indicative as in Eng- 
 lish ; but the future subjunctive in ar, er=to the English 
 present (when used as a future), se vier, if he comes : se o 
 vapor chegdr, if the steamer arrives. The Portuguese 
 tense in cisse, esse, use, generally called imperfect sub- 
 junctive, is hypothetical; sometimes past (after a past), 
 elles nao derao provas que tivessem, etc., they did not give 
 proof that they had (as if it were " could have''''), e como 
 estivessem olhando para o ceo (Acts i. 10) ; sometimes 
 future, SQpodesse ser, if it could be ; se eu desse, if I were 
 to give. The compound forms follow the same usages, 
 dira tudo o -que tiver ouvido, he will say all he has heard, 
 i. e., that he may or shall, have heard ; se elle me tivesse 
 fallado, if he had spoken, i.e., if he could have spoken. 
 The pluperfect in ra, amara. 
 
 9. The persons are the same as in other languages, 
 but the usage is different. Where the English use the 
 second person plural "you" in speaking to all, the 
 Portuguese always use the third person in speaking to 
 superiors and equals, and often in addressing inferiors ; 
 e.g., " Como esta hoje ?" is, literally, " How does (he) to- 
 day ?" Hence, to prevent ambiguity, the frequent neces- 
 sity of putting Y. E., Y. S., or V. M. before the verb — 
 the first for Vossa JExcellencia, when speaking to persons 
 of rank, or ladies ; the second, Vossa SenJwria for gentry 
 and the middle-classes ; the third Vossa Merce (pro- 
 nounced Vosmece) to work-people and upper servants ; 
 and Vosse amongst intimate friends and to the lowest 
 classes. The pronouns — personal, possessive, etc. — 
 must, of course, all be in the third person : " Como esta 
 seu irmao ?" How is your brother ? Hence " a sua casa" 
 would mean " your house," a casa delle, his house. " Tu" 
 is used in prayer; amongst friends, in families, to 
 servants, and the poor. Vds is employed in elevated 
 style; in sermons, lectures, addresses; "Yos, Senhor," 
 to the king; when used for "tu," the verb is plural, 
 the adjective singular : vos, minha filha, estais louc#." 
 In Portuguese novels, professing to represent people 
 speaking as in real life, all the dialogues are in 
 " vos," instead of being in the third person singular ! 
 
267 
 
 The third person plural is spelled with em or eein, 
 ao or am. 
 
 10. Formation of Tenses. The student will master the 
 verbs with ease, if he carefully notices the formation of 
 the tenses from the infinitive, (1.) In the first person, 
 the personal infinitive and the future subjunctive are the 
 same as the present infinitive, but are inflected, e.g., am-ar 
 am-ar, am-ar. (2.) Present participle formed thus : am-ar, 
 am-dndo ; past participle, am-ar, am-ddo. (3.) Future, 
 amar, amar-e^; conditional, am-ar, amsLY-m. (4.) Plu- 
 perfect amar, amar-$. (5.) Imperfect subjunctive, am-ar, 
 a.m-dsse. (6.) Present indicative, am-ar, am-o, and pre- 
 sent subjunctive, am-ar, ame. (6.) Imperfect indicative, 
 am-ar, &m.-dva, and perfect indicative, am-ar, am-ei. 
 
 The correspondence of the tenses is extremely impor- 
 tant. In the indicative — 1. The present and future may 
 be followed by any tense. 2. All the tenses may be fol- 
 lowed by the present, in affirmations. 3. The perfect 
 and imperfect are followed by the imperfect when the 
 action is not complete, by the perfect when it is. In the 
 subjunctive, the tense is determined by the tense of the 
 indicative verb that precedes — (1.) The present indicative 
 is followed by the present subjunctive, when the second 
 action is future ; by the perfect subjunctive, when the 
 action is complete; by the hypothetical form in sse, when 
 the act is incomplete. (2.) The perfect indicative and 
 conditional are followed by the form in sse, when the act 
 is future ; by the perfect subjunctive, when it is past. 
 (3.) The future indicative takes the present subjunctive 
 and future subjunctive when the act is future ; the future 
 perfect subjunctive when the act is to have been done. In 
 the imperative, the governing or leading verb takes the 
 infinitive, or present subjunctive with que. 
 
 In the conditional — 1. The form in ria takes after it 
 the form in sse. 2. The form in dra, in the first clause 
 requires the same form in the second. 3. The compound 
 eu o " teria avisado," in the first clause, requires " se elle 
 ma tivesse pedido " in the second. 
 
268 
 
 AUXILIAEY VERBS. 
 
 LSTDICATIYE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 eu hei, I liave tenho, I have 
 
 tu has, thou hast tens, etc. 
 elle ha, he has tern 
 ndshavemos,we tenios 
 
 have 
 vds haveis, you tendes 
 
 have 
 elles hao, they tern, or teem 
 
 have 
 
 sou, I am 
 
 (always) 
 es 
 e 
 
 somos 
 
 sois 
 
 estou, I am 
 
 (sometimes) 
 estas 
 esta 
 estamos 
 
 estais 
 
 estao 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 havia, had, was tmha, had, was 
 
 having 
 
 having 
 
 havias 
 
 tmhas 
 
 havia 
 
 tinha 
 
 haviamos 
 
 tinhamos 
 
 havieis 
 
 tfnheis 
 
 haviao 
 
 tmhao 
 
 houve, had 
 
 tive, had 
 
 houveste 
 
 tiveste 
 
 houve 
 
 teve 
 
 houvemos 
 
 tivemos 
 
 houveste3 
 
 tivestes 
 
 houverao 
 
 tiverao 
 
 era, was (always) estava, was (then 
 
 or there) 
 
 eras estavas 
 
 era estava 
 
 eramos estavamos 
 
 ereis estaveis 
 
 erao estavao 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 fiii, was (always) estive, was (then) 
 
 foste estiveste 
 
 foi esteve 
 
 fomos estivemos 
 
 fostes estivestes 
 
 forao estiverao 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 houvera,had had 
 
 tivera, had had 
 
 fora, had been 
 
 estivera, had been 
 
 
 
 (always) 
 
 (then) 
 
 houveras 
 
 tiveras 
 
 foras 
 
 estiveras 
 
 houvera 
 
 tivera 
 
 fora 
 
 estivera 
 
 houveramos 
 
 tiveramos 
 
 foramos 
 
 estiveramos 
 
 houvereis 
 
 tivereis 
 
 foreis 
 
 estivereis 
 
 houverao 
 
 tiverao 
 
 forao 
 
 estiverao 
 
269 
 
 Future. 
 
 haverei, shall 
 
 terei, shall have 
 
 serei, shall be 
 
 estarei, shall be 
 
 have 
 
 
 
 (always) 
 
 (then) 
 
 haveras 
 
 teras 
 
 
 seras 
 
 estaras 
 
 havera 
 
 tera 
 
 
 sera 
 
 estara 
 
 haverenios 
 
 teremos 
 
 
 serenios 
 
 estareraos 
 
 havereis 
 
 tereis 
 
 
 sereis 
 
 estareis 
 
 haverao 
 
 terao 
 
 
 serao 
 
 e3tarao 
 
 
 Future Conditional. 
 
 
 haveria 
 
 teria 
 
 
 seria 
 
 estaria 
 
 haverias 
 
 terias 
 
 
 serias 
 
 estarias 
 
 haverfa 
 
 teria 
 
 
 seria 
 
 estaria 
 
 haveriamos 
 
 teriamos 
 
 
 seriamos 
 
 estariarnos 
 
 haverieis 
 
 terieis 
 
 
 serieis 
 
 estarieis 
 
 haveriao 
 
 teriao 
 
 
 seriao 
 
 estariao 
 
 
 
 Impebative. 
 
 
 ha (tu) 
 
 tern 
 
 
 se 
 
 esta 
 
 havei (vos) 
 
 tende 
 
 
 sede 
 
 estai 
 
 SlJBJUNCTIYE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 haja, have 
 
 tenha, have 
 
 seja, be, may be 
 
 esteja, be, may be 
 
 hajas 
 
 tenhas 
 
 
 sejas 
 
 estejas 
 
 haja 
 
 tenha 
 
 
 seja 
 
 esteja 
 
 hajamos 
 
 tenhamos 
 
 
 sejamos 
 
 estejamos 
 
 hajais 
 
 tenhais 
 
 
 sejais 
 
 estejais 
 
 hajao 
 
 tenhao 
 
 
 se]ao 
 
 estejao 
 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 houvesse, should tivesse, should 
 
 fosse, might be, 
 
 estivesse, might 
 
 have, or had 
 
 have, or 
 
 had 
 
 were 
 
 be, were 
 
 houvesses 
 
 tivesses 
 
 
 fosses 
 
 estivesses 
 
 houvesse 
 
 tivesse 
 
 
 fosse 
 
 estivesse 
 
 houvessemos 
 
 tivessemo; 
 
 
 fossemos 
 
 estivessemos 
 
 houvesseis 
 
 tivesseis 
 
 
 fosseis 
 
 estivesseis 
 
 houvessem 
 
 tivessem 
 
 
 fossem 
 
 estivessem 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 houver, shall 
 
 tiver, shall have 
 
 for, shall be, were estiver, shall be, 
 
 have 
 
 
 
 
 were 
 
 houveres 
 
 tiveres 
 
 
 fores 
 
 estiveres 
 
 houver 
 houvermos 
 houverdes 
 houverem 
 
 tiver 
 tivermos 
 tiverdes 
 tiverem 
 
 for 
 
 formos 
 f6rdes 
 forem 
 
 estiver 
 estivermos 
 estiverdes 
 estiverem 
 
270 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Impersonal. 
 
 haver, to have 
 
 
 
 ser, to be (always) 
 
 ter, to have 
 
 
 estar, tobe (some time or place) 
 
 
 
 Personal. 
 
 
 haver eu, or houver, ray having ser, 
 
 my being 
 
 haveres tu, 
 
 
 thy „ seres, 
 
 
 haver elle, 
 
 
 his „ ser, 
 
 
 havermos nos, 
 
 
 our „ sermos, 
 
 »' r> 
 
 haverdes vos, 
 
 
 your „ serdes, 
 
 5i JJ 
 
 haverem illes, 
 
 
 their ,, serem, 
 
 3> 5> 
 
 t&r, 
 
 
 my „ estar, 
 
 J5 59 
 
 teres, 
 
 
 „ ,, estares, 
 
 55 55 
 
 ter, 
 
 
 „ ,, estar, 
 
 55 55 
 
 termos, 
 
 
 „ ,, estarmos, 
 
 55 SJ 
 
 terdes, 
 
 
 „ „ estardes, 
 
 55 55 
 
 terem, 
 
 
 „ „ estarem, 
 
 Paeticiples. 
 Present. 
 
 55 55 
 
 havendo 
 
 
 tendo sendo 
 Past. 
 
 estando 
 
 havido 
 
 
 tido sido 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 estado 
 
 tenho havido 
 
 I have had 
 
 tenho tido 
 
 I have had 
 
 tinha „ 
 
 
 I had „ 
 
 tmha „ 
 
 I had „ 
 
 terei „ 
 
 I s 
 
 hall have „ 
 
 terei „ 
 
 I shall have „ 
 
 tenlia „ 
 
 I] 
 
 may have ,, 
 
 tenha „ 
 
 I may have „ 
 
 (se) tiver „ 
 
 
 if I have „ 
 
 tiver „ 
 
 if I have „ 
 
 (se) tivesse „ 
 
 
 if I had „ 
 
 tivesse „ 
 
 if I had „ 
 
 ter „ 
 
 
 to have „ 
 
 ter „ 
 
 to have „ 
 
 tendo „ 
 
 
 having „ 
 
 tendo „ 
 
 having „ 
 
 tenho sido 
 
 
 I have been 
 
 tenho estado 
 
 I have been 
 
 tinha „ 
 
 
 I had „ 
 
 tinha „ 
 
 I had „ 
 
 terei „ 
 
 I shall have „ 
 
 terei ,, 
 
 I shall have „ 
 
 tenha „ 
 
 I may have „ 
 
 tenha „ 
 
 may have „ 
 
 tiver ,, 
 
 
 if I had „ 
 
 tiver „ 
 
 if I have ,, 
 
 tivesse „ 
 
 
 if I had „ 
 
 tivesse „ 
 
 if I had „ 
 
 ter „ 
 
 
 to have „ 
 
 ter „ 
 
 to have „ 
 
 tendo „ 
 
 
 having „ 
 
 tendo „ 
 
 having „ 
 
 Observations 
 
 (1.) Hei, havia, etc., may be used for 
 
 tenho, tinha, 
 
 etc 
 
 ., throughout. (2.) Saver 
 
 de and Ter de, 
 
 followed by the infinitive, foi 
 
 -m a complete 
 
 series of com- 
 
271 
 
 pound tenses ; e. g., Hei de ser, I have to be, or shall be ; 
 Havia de ser, I had to be ; Haverei de ser, I shall have to 
 be, etc. (3.) PJstdr similarly combines with the present 
 participle Ustou sendo, I am being ; JEstdva sendo, and so 
 on. (4.) The compound form, ter sido, unites with the 
 participle of the verb, to compose the passive voice: Tenho 
 sido amaio, ella tern sido amida, nos temos sido amados, 
 ellas tern sido amidas, and so on, the sido invariable. 
 
 The Three Regular Conjugations, in ar, er, and ir ; 
 the Verb Por. 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 fallo, I speak 
 
 como, I eat 
 
 abro, I open 
 
 pdnho, I put 
 
 fallas, thou 
 
 comes 
 
 
 abres 
 
 poes 
 
 speakest 
 
 
 
 
 
 falla, lie speaks 
 
 come 
 
 
 abre 
 
 poe 
 
 fallamos, we 
 
 comemos 
 
 
 abrimos 
 
 pomos 
 
 speak 
 
 
 
 
 
 fallais, you speak comeis 
 
 
 abris 
 
 pondes 
 
 fallao, they speak comem 
 
 
 abrem 
 
 poem 
 
 
 
 Imp 
 
 erfect. 
 
 
 fallava, I was 
 
 comia, was eat- 
 
 abria,was open- 
 
 punha, was put 
 
 speaking 
 
 ing 
 
 
 ing 
 
 ting 
 
 fallavas 
 
 comias 
 
 
 abrfas 
 
 piinhas 
 
 fallava 
 
 comia 
 
 
 abria 
 
 piinlia 
 
 fallavamos 
 
 comiamos 
 
 
 abriamos 
 
 punhamos 
 
 fallaveis 
 
 comieis 
 
 
 abrfeis 
 
 punheis 
 
 fallavao 
 
 comiao 
 
 
 abriao 
 
 punhao 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 fallei, spoke 
 
 comi, eat, 
 
 ate 
 
 abri, opened 
 
 piiz, put 
 
 fallaste 
 
 comeste 
 
 
 abriste 
 
 poseste 
 
 fallou 
 
 comeo 
 
 
 abrio 
 
 poz 
 
 fallamos 
 
 comemos 
 
 
 abrimos 
 
 posemos 
 
 fallastes 
 
 comestes 
 
 
 abristes 
 
 posestes 
 
 fallarao 
 
 comerao 
 
 
 abrirao 
 
 poserao 
 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 fallara, had 
 
 comera, had 
 
 abrira, had 
 
 posera, had put 
 
 spoken 
 
 eaten 
 
 
 opened 
 
 
 fallaras 
 
 comeras 
 
 
 abriras 
 
 poseras 
 
 fallara 
 
 comera 
 
 
 abrira 
 
 posera 
 
 fallaramos 
 
 comeramos 
 
 abriramos 
 
 poseramos 
 
 fallareis 
 
 comereis 
 
 
 abrireis 
 
 posereis 
 
 fallarao 
 
 comerao 
 
 
 abrirao 
 
 poserao 
 
272 
 
 fallarei, shall 
 
 m 
 
 commerei, shall 
 
 mere. 
 abrirei, shall 
 
 porei, shall put 
 
 speak 
 
 eat 
 
 open 
 
 
 fallaras 
 
 comeras 
 
 ahriras 
 
 poras 
 
 fallara 
 
 comera 
 
 abrira 
 
 pora 
 
 fallarernos 
 
 comeremos 
 
 abriremos 
 
 poremos 
 
 fallareis 
 
 comereis 
 
 abrireis 
 
 poreis 
 
 fallarao 
 
 comerao 
 
 abruao 
 
 porao 
 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 
 fallaria, should 
 
 comeria, should 
 
 abriria, should 
 
 poria, should put 
 
 speak 
 
 eat 
 
 open 
 
 
 fallarfas 
 
 conierias 
 
 abririas 
 
 porias 
 
 fallaria 
 
 comeria 
 
 abriria 
 
 poria 
 
 fallariamos 
 
 comeriamos 
 
 abririamos 
 
 poriamos 
 
 fallarieis 
 
 comerieis 
 
 abririeis 
 
 porieis 
 
 fallariao 
 
 comeriao 
 
 abririao 
 
 poriao 
 
 
 Impekatiye. 
 
 
 s. falla, speak 
 
 come, eat 
 
 abre, open 
 
 poe, put 
 
 p. fallai, speak 
 
 comei, eat 
 
 abri, open 
 
 ponde, put 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTITE. 
 
 
 
 J? resent* 
 
 
 falle, speak 
 
 coma, eat 
 
 abra, open 
 
 ponha, put 
 
 falles 
 
 comas 
 
 abras 
 
 ponhas 
 
 falle 
 
 coma 
 
 abra 
 
 ponlia 
 
 fallemos 
 
 comamos 
 
 abramos 
 
 ponhamos 
 
 falleis 
 
 comais 
 
 abrais 
 
 ponhais 
 
 fallem 
 
 comao 
 
 abrao 
 
 ponhao 
 
 
 Imperfect.^ 
 
 
 fallasse, spoke, 
 
 comesse, eat, 
 
 abrisse, opened 
 
 posesse, put 
 
 should speak 
 
 should eat 
 
 should open 
 
 
 fallasses 
 
 com esses 
 
 abrisses 
 
 posesses 
 
 fallasse 
 
 comesse 
 
 abrisse 
 
 posesse 
 
 fallasseinos 
 
 comessemos 
 
 abrissemos 
 
 posessemos 
 
 fallasseis 
 
 commesseis 
 
 abrisseis 
 
 posesseis 
 
 fallassein 
 
 comessem 
 
 abrissem 
 
 posessem 
 
 * It is incorrect to translate the subjunctive present by " may." 
 Its force can only be understood in a sentence : Diga-lhe que falle, 
 tell him to speak. Nao coma, don't eat. Abra a porta, open the 
 door. 
 
 t Better called hypothetical, for it is so used ; e. g., Elle iria, se 
 eu fallasse, he would go, if I spolce ; seria melhor, se comesse, he 
 would be better if he ate, or would eat. 
 
273 
 
 (se) fallar, if I 
 
 fallares 
 
 fallar 
 
 fallarmos 
 
 fallardes 
 
 fallarem 
 
 fallar 
 
 fallar eu 
 fallares hi 
 fallar elle 
 fallarmos nds 
 fallares vds 
 allarem elles 
 
 comer en 
 eomeres tu 
 comer elle 
 comermos nds 
 comerdes vds 
 comerem elles 
 
 Future, 
 
 (se) comer, if I (se) abrir, if I 
 
 eat open 
 
 eomeres abrires 
 
 comer abrir 
 
 comermos abrirmo3 
 
 comerdes abrirdes 
 
 comerem abrirem 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 comer abrir 
 
 Personal. 
 
 (se) puzeYj^I put 
 
 puzeres 
 
 puzer 
 
 puzermos 
 
 pnzerdes 
 
 puzerem 
 
 por 
 
 my 
 thy 
 his 
 
 your 
 their 
 
 my eating 
 thy „ 
 his „ 
 our „ 
 your „ 
 their ,, 
 
 abrir eu 
 abrires tu 
 abrir elle 
 abrirmos nds 
 abrirdes vos 
 abrirem elles 
 
 por eu 
 pores tu 
 por elle 
 pdrmos nds 
 pordes vos 
 porem elles 
 
 my opening 
 thy „ 
 his 
 
 your „ 
 
 their „ 
 
 my putting 
 
 thy „ 
 
 his „ 
 
 our „ 
 
 your „ 
 
 their „ 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. 
 fallando, speaking comendo, eating, abrindo, opening, pondo, putting 
 
 Perfect. 
 fallado, spoken comido, eaten abrido, or aberto, posto, put 
 
 opened 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 (1.) Tenho fallddo, I have spoken ; tinha fallddo, I 
 ,iad spoken ; terei fallddo, I shall have spoken ; tenha 
 ■fallddo, I may have spoken ; se eu tiver fallddo, if I have 
 spoken ; se eu tiv esse fallddo, if I had spoken ; ter fallddo, 
 to have spoken ; tendo fallddo, having spoken ; and simi- 
 larly of the other conjugations. (2.) Forms with haver ; 
 Hei de fallar, I have to speak, i.e., I shall speak ; havia 
 de fallar, I had to speak, and so on. (3.) Forms with 
 ter : e.g., tenho que escrever, I have to write ; and so on 
 
 T 
 
274 
 
 throughout the verb. (4.) Forms with estar: estou 
 falldndo, I am speaking ; estou parapedir, I am about to 
 speak ; estou a comer, I am eating. (5.) Passive form : 
 Sou amddo, somos ainados, etc. ; estou encantado ; and so 
 on throughout. 
 
 IEEEGULAK VERBS OF THE EIEST 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. "Verbs in car change c into qu before e : Rear, 
 iique, locdr, toquei. 
 
 2. Verbs in gar insert u between g and e : entregar, 
 entregue, chegar, cheguei. 
 
 3. The irregular participles, in verbs of the first con- 
 jugation are, chiefly, aceito for aceitado, entregue for en- 
 tregado, enxuto for enxugado, gdsto for gastado, morto for 
 inatado, pdgo for pagado. 
 
 4. The irregular verbs are estdr and dar, the former 
 already given. The latter is regular in ddva, dar Si, daria, 
 ddndo, dado, and all compound tenses. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 ddu das da damos dais dao give 
 
 Perfect Indicative. 
 dei deste deo demos destes derao gave 
 
 Pluperfect Indicative. 
 dera deras dera deramos dereis derao had given 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 de des de demos deis dera gi^e 3 m ^y give 
 
 Imperfect Subjunctive. 
 desse desses desse dessemos desseis dessem might give 
 
 Puture Subjunctive. 
 der deres der dermos derdes derem if, — give 
 
 Idiomatic Pheases. 
 
 Bar audiencia, cor, espaco, gloria, lei, lugar, 6rdens,etc. , 
 as in English ; dar beneficio, privilegio, meios, confer 
 benefits, etc.; dar fratos, uva, produce, yield. Dar 
 
275 
 
 combines with nouns thus : dar saltos, to leap ; — gritos, to 
 cry ; — salva, to salute. Dar de comer, de beber, de vestir, 
 to give food, drink, clothing; dar a entender, give to 
 understand; dar em, strike; — sobre, attack; — para, 
 face. Deo-se por medico, gave out that he was a doctor ; 
 dou-me bem aqui, I am well here ; dou-me bem com elle, 
 I am good friends with him ; demos que assim seja, admit 
 it to be so. Quern me dera ! How I desire ! Nao te de 
 cuidado, never mind. 
 
 IBREGTTLAB, VEEBS OF THE SECOND 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 1 . Verbs in ger, change g into j in the present indi- 
 cative, and subjunctive : abranger, abranjo, abranja. 
 
 2. Yerbs in cer change c into c before o and a : descer, 
 desco, desca. 
 
 3. Verbs in oer change o into 6 before o and a : moer, 
 moo, moa. 
 
 4. Perder changes d into c in the first person singu- 
 lar, present indicative, and subjunctive: perder, perco, 
 perca. 
 
 5. The irregular participles are chiefly absolute, ab- 
 sorto,acceso, contento, contradito, convicto, corrupto,defeso, 
 descripto, despeito, dico, eleito, escripto, feito, incurso, 
 interrupto, mantendo,morto, preso, quisto,resoluto, retendo, 
 revisto, roto, visto, volto. (Those in italics have also re- 
 gular forms, usage determining the application, as in 
 English, absolved, absolute ; hung, hanged ; worked collar, 
 and yet, wrought iron.) 
 
 Present. 
 
 creio, believe leio, read sei, know vejo, see 
 
 cres les sabes ves 
 
 ere le sabe ve 
 
 digo, say posso, can trago, being 
 
 dizes pddes trazes 
 
 diz pode traz 
 
 faco, do quero,* want valho, avail 
 
 fazes queres vales 
 
 faz qner vale 
 
 * Eequerer makes xequeiro Yequeira. 
 
276 
 
 The other persons regular : emas, eis, era, or eem. 
 Imperfect (was, ing; used to, would), 
 cria, was believ- fazia queria v#lia 
 
 ing 
 
 dizia 
 
 lia 
 pocKa 
 
 trazia 
 sabia 
 
 
 via 
 
 
 
 Eegular 
 
 throughout 
 
 : ia, ias, ia, iamos, 
 
 ieis, 
 
 iao. 
 
 
 
 Perfect (d, did). 
 
 
 
 
 
 ere, believed 
 
 creste 
 
 creo 
 
 cremos 
 
 crestes 
 
 crerao 
 
 If 
 
 leste 
 
 leo 
 
 lemos 
 
 lestes 
 
 lerao 
 
 trouxe 
 
 trouzeste 
 
 trouxe 
 
 trouxemos 
 
 trouxestes 
 
 trouxerao 
 
 vi 
 viste 
 
 V1U 
 
 vimos 
 vistes 
 virao 
 
 
 disse 
 
 disseste 
 
 disse 
 
 dissemos 
 
 dissestes 
 
 disserao 
 
 piide 
 
 piideste 
 
 pode 
 
 podemos 
 
 pudestes 
 
 puderao 
 
 soube 
 
 soubeste 
 
 soube 
 
 soubemos 
 
 soubestes 
 
 souberao 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 fiz 
 
 fizeste 
 
 fiz^ 
 
 fizemos 
 
 fizestes 
 
 fizerao 
 
 quiz 
 
 quizeste 
 
 quiz 
 
 quizemos 
 
 quizestes 
 
 quizerao 
 
 vali 
 
 valeste 
 
 valeo 
 
 valemos 
 
 valestes 
 
 valerao 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pluperfect (had, would have). 
 
 
 
 crera 
 quizera 
 
 dissera 
 trazera 
 
 fizera 
 soubera 
 
 lera 
 valera 
 
 
 podera 
 vira 
 
 (E.) 
 
 
 Future (shall, will). 
 
 
 
 
 crerei 
 quererei 
 
 direi 
 trarei 
 
 farei 
 saberei 
 
 lerei 
 valerei 
 
 poderei 
 verei (R.) 
 
 Conditional (mi 
 creria diria 
 quereria traria 
 
 ght, could, would, should) . 
 faria leria poderia 
 saberia Valeria vena (E.) 
 
 creia 
 crede 
 
 diz 
 
 dizei 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 faz 
 fazei 
 
 le 
 lede 
 
 
 pdde 
 podei 
 
 
 quer 
 querei 
 
 traz 
 trazei 
 
 sabe 
 sabei 
 
 vale 
 valei 
 
 
 ve 
 vede 
 
 
277 
 
 ere 
 
 cresse 
 quizesse 
 
 crer 
 quizer 
 
 crendo 
 crido 
 
 diga 
 saiba 
 
 SUBJUNCTIYE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 faca 
 
 traga 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 soubesse 
 
 disser 
 souber 
 
 dizendo 
 dito 
 
 sabendo 
 sabido 
 
 querendo 
 querido 
 
 Caber (suit, jit into) 
 caiba, coubesse, couber, 
 
 trouxesse 
 
 Future. 
 
 fizer 
 
 trouxer 
 
 Participles. 
 
 fazendo 
 
 feito 
 
 trazendo 
 trazido 
 
 leia 
 valha 
 
 lesse 
 
 valesse 
 
 ler 
 
 valer 
 
 lendo 
 lido 
 
 valendo 
 valido 
 
 possa 
 veja 
 
 (E.) 
 
 (R.) 
 
 poder 
 vir 
 
 podendo 
 podfdo 
 
 vendo 
 visto 
 
 makes caibo, cabfa, coube, coubera, caberia, 
 cabendo, cabido. 
 
 Idiomatic Pheases. 
 
 1. Crer: — de leve, easily ; — de boa mente, readily ; 
 — a olhos fechados, blindly. En lho creo ! I believe you ! 
 Motivo para — , reason to — . Nao creia isto, don't 
 believe that ; — em, a, — in. 
 
 2. Dizer : — que sim, to say yes, assent ; — que nao, 
 to say no, refuse ; — mal de, to speak evil of ; — bem 
 de, to speak well of. Que quer dizer isto ? "What does 
 this mean ? Quer dizer, that is to say. Diz, it is said. 
 
 3. Fazer: — vir, rir, make come, laugh, etc. ; — gastos, 
 spend. "With de fazer de bobo, play the fool ; — papel 
 de, play the part of ; por chegar, try to arrive. Elle se 
 
 faz surdo, he pretends. Faz lua, it is moonlight. 
 
 4. Ler : Nao sei ler, he cannot read. Pdde ter de 
 cadeira, he could lecture, he knows it well. Ler a cartilha 
 a, to tell one his faults. Leia devagar, read slowly. Leu 
 a cartel, he read the challenge. 
 
 5. Poder : Pode ser, may be, perhaps. Nao pdsso 
 mais, I can do no more. Sinto nao poder, I am sorry I 
 cannot. Ate nao poder mais, till no more could be done. 
 Nao posso com isto, I can't lift it. Fode-se fazer, it may 
 be done. 
 
278 
 
 6. Querer: — bem a, wish well to ; — mal a, wish harm 
 to; — antes, prefer ; como quizer, as you please. Quanto 
 quer, what do you ask ? Quer queira, quer nao queira, 
 whether you will or no. 
 
 7. Saber : — de cor, know by heart ; sem eu o — , 
 without my knowledge. Ninguein, que eu sdiba, no one 
 that I know of. Nao sdbe mentir, he cannot lie. Sdbe- 
 se, it is known. Vir a saber-se, become known. 
 
 8. Trazer : por forca, bring by force ; ■ — a memoria, 
 bring to mind ; — na memoria, carry in the mind. Vento 
 trdz chiiva, wind brings rain ; - — guerra, wage war ; 
 — origem, descend ; ■ — - vontade, wish. 
 
 9. Valer mais, to be worth more. Nao vale a pena, 
 it is not worth while. Nao vale nada, it is good for 
 nothing. Mais val, it is better to. Vol tanto, it is worth 
 so much. Valer-se de, avail one's self of. 
 
 10. Ver mundo, see the world ; — vir, see what will 
 come of it ; ate mais — , good-bye ; fazer — , show. Esta 
 por — , it remains to be seen ; a meu ver, in my opinion ; 
 faz que nao ve, he pretends not to see. 
 
 11. Caber has no exact English equivalent ; it means 
 to be contained in, to be held : e , g., O vinho nao cdbe na 
 garrafa, literally, the wine is not contained in the bottle ; 
 or, in English, the bottle will not hold the wine. Nao 
 me cdbe, it does not suit me. Nao cdbe erro, no room 
 for error. — com elle, to suit, please him. 
 
 IKBEGULAE, VERBS OF THE THIRD 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. Yerbs in gir change g into j before o and a : 
 fdgir, fujo ; tingir, tinjo. 
 
 2. Verbs in guir lose the u before o and a : seguir, 
 sigo ; distinguir, distingo. 
 
 3. Yerbs in entir and ertir, erir, edir, estir, change e 
 into i : sentir, sinto ; vestir, visto ; repetir, repito. 
 
 4. Yerbs in udlr, ulir, etc., change u into o in second 
 and third person singular, and third person plural, pre- 
 sent indicative, and in imperative : acudir, acodes ; acode, 
 
279 
 
 acodem, acode tu. So all verbs in ir, with u before d, g, 
 1, m, p, q, s, and ss. 
 
 5. Dormir makes durrno ; pedir, pego ; ouvir, ougo ;. 
 medir, wiego. 
 
 6. The irregular participles are : aherto, ahstrdcto, of- 
 flicto, assumpto, avmdo, coherto, compulso, concluso, con- 
 tracto, desavindo, descoherto, digesto, directo, diviso, enco- 
 berto, erecto, excluso, exhdusto^ exempto, expulso, expresso, 
 extincto,frito, impresso, incluso, infuso, instructo, oppresso, 
 repulso, represso, suhmerso, sdrto, tinto, vindo. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 YOU, gO 
 
 sirvo, serve peco, ask 
 
 rio, laugh 
 
 vais 
 
 serves 
 
 pedes 
 
 ris 
 
 va 
 
 serve 
 
 pede 
 
 ri 
 
 vamos 
 
 servimos 
 
 pedrnios 
 
 rim os 
 
 ides (obs.) 
 
 servis 
 
 pedis 
 
 rides 
 
 vao 
 
 servem 
 
 pedem 
 
 riem 
 
 saio, go out 
 
 subo, go up venho, come 
 
 
 sais, saes 
 
 sdbes 
 
 vens 
 
 
 sai, sae 
 
 sobe 
 
 vem 
 
 
 saimos 
 
 subimos 
 
 vimos 
 
 
 sais 
 
 subis 
 
 vmdes 
 
 
 saem 
 
 sdbem 
 
 vem 
 
 
 Imperfect (was - 
 
 — ing, was to — , 
 
 would — ) 
 
 ia 
 
 seryia 
 
 pedia 
 
 ria 
 
 saia 
 
 subia 
 
 vinha 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 fiii 
 
 servf 
 
 pedi 
 
 ri 
 
 foste 
 
 serviste 
 
 pediste 
 
 riste 
 
 foi 
 
 servio 
 
 pedio 
 
 no 
 
 fomos 
 
 servimos 
 
 pedimos 
 
 rimos 
 
 fostes 
 
 servistes 
 
 pedistes 
 
 ristes 
 
 forao 
 
 servirao 
 
 pedirao 
 
 rirao 
 
 sahi 
 
 subi 
 
 vim 
 
 
 sahiste 
 
 subiste 
 
 vieste 
 
 
 sahfo 
 
 subio 
 
 veio 
 
 
 sahmios 
 
 subimos 
 
 viemos 
 
 
 sahistes 
 
 subister 
 
 viestes 
 
 
 sahirao 
 
 subirao 
 
 vierao 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 fora 
 
 servira 
 
 pedira^ 
 
 rira 
 
 sabira 
 
 subira 
 
 viera 
 
 
280 
 
 Future and Conditional. 
 
 ir-ei, — 
 sahir-ei, 
 
 1a 
 
 ia 
 
 servir-ei 
 subir- ei. 
 
 , — ia pedir-ei, — ia 
 — fa vir-ei, — ia 
 
 rir-e 
 
 vai 
 ide 
 
 
 
 serve 
 servi 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 pede 
 pedi 
 
 ri 
 ride 
 
 sai 
 sahf 
 
 
 
 sobe 
 sobf 
 
 vem 
 vinde 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 Present. 
 va sirva peca ria 
 
 saia suba venha 
 
 vas, etc., all regular (except vos vades), — as, — a, — amos, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 fosse 
 
 sahisse 
 
 subisse 
 servisse 
 
 pedisse 
 viesse 
 
 Future. 
 
 (se) for (if) 
 sahir 
 
 servir 
 subir 
 
 pedir 
 vier 
 
 
 Infinitive and Part 
 
 ir 
 
 mdo 
 ido 
 
 servir 
 
 servmdo 
 
 servido 
 
 pedir 
 
 pediudo 
 
 pedido 
 
 sahir 
 
 sahindo 
 
 sahido 
 
 subir 
 
 subindo 
 
 subido 
 
 vir 
 
 vmdo 
 vindo 
 
 nr 
 
 rindo 
 
 rido 
 
 Idiomatic Phrases. 
 Ir adiante, to go forward ; — atraz delle, heMnd him ; 
 — por pao, etc., for bread, etc. ; — contra, — against ; 
 
 — com a torrente, — with the stream. Vou buscar, I am 
 going to fetch. 
 
 Ia dizer, I ivas going to say. Vd ver, go and see. 
 Fa-se embora, go away. 
 
 SaMr a publico, to be made known. Sdi a seu pae, he 
 is like his father. SaMrd caro, it will cost yon dear ; 
 
 — fora, to go ont (of the house). Ao sahir do sol, at 
 sunrise. Sdia o que sair, come what may. 
 
 Servir o estado, — the state ; — um amigo, a friend ; 
 
 — a merce, return the kindness ; — de, act as. Nao serve 
 
281 
 
 de nada, is of no use. Sirva se de mim, make use of me ; 
 para que serve — , what's the use of. 
 
 Subir ao pulpito, mount the pulpit ; — uma arvore, 
 climb a tree. Sobe o f'umo, the smoke ascends ; os anjos 
 subindo, the angels ascending. Suba, come up. Eaca 
 favor de subir, come up, please. 
 
 JPedir justica, ash justice ; — perdao, pardon ; — pao, 
 ash for bread ; o negocio pede cautela, the business re- 
 quires caution. JPedi-lhe por favor, I ashed him as a 
 favour. 
 
 Bir as gargalhadas, laugh heartily, horselaugh ; — ate 
 nao mais, — his fill ; por-se a — , burst out laughing. 
 Hir-se muito alto, laugh out ; — de, laugh at ; — com sigo 
 mesmo, have a quiet laugh. 
 
 Vir as maos, come to blows ; — ao pensamento, — into 
 mind, occur to ; — a prova, — to the proof; — a saber se 
 — to be known. Vierao cartas, letters have come. Vira 
 tempo em que, the time will come when. Vindo a noite, 
 night being come ; logo que vier, as soon as he comes; 
 em vindo aprimavera, spring coming, or when spring 
 comes. Grosto que viesse {literally, I like he should 
 come), I should like him to come. 
 
 REFLECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 These are conjugated throughout with the reflective 
 pronoun: — 
 
 acho-me, I find myself atrevo-me, I venture 
 
 achas-te, thou findest thyself atreves-te., thou ventured 
 
 acha-se, he finds himself atreve-se, he ventures 
 
 achamo*-nos, we find ourselves atrevemo*-nos, we venture 
 
 achais-vos, you find yourselves atreveis-vos, you venture 
 
 achao-se 3 they find themselves atrevem-se, they venture 
 
 Reflective Verbs as Passives and Neuters. 
 
 The passive voice in Portuguese is much more fre- 
 quently represented by the annexed forms than by the 
 compound £orms with ser and estdr : e.g., " achdo-se 
 rosas," is, literally, "roses find themselves," but it 
 
 * s omitted for euphony. 
 
282 
 
 means "roses are found;" confirma-se a noticia, the 
 news is confirmed ; fdlla-se, it is said; conta-se, it is 
 related; nutre-se a alma, the soul is nourished; torna-se, 
 it grows. 
 
 IMPERSONAL, OE UNIPEESOKAL VEEBS. 
 
 These are chiefly the following : —Acabou-se, it is 
 done ; bdsta, it is enough ; consta, it is stated; chove, it 
 rains ; convent, it suits ; cumpre, it is fitting ; nao fax 
 conta, it does not pay ; gela, it freezes ; ha, there is ; 
 importa, it matters ; neva, it snows ; parece, it seems ; 
 relamjpeja, it lightens ; rest a, it remains ; succede, it hap- 
 pens ; troveja, it thunders ; vale, it is worth. These have 
 the usual tenses : e. g., chove, it rains ; cliovia, it was 
 raining ; se chover, if it rains ; and so on. The verb 
 " haver" is the chief unipersonal verb, and uses the third 
 person singular throughout for both singulars and plurals. 
 Ha leite, there is milk ; ha ovos, there are eggs. Its parti- 
 ciple does not vary : e. g., Se tivessem havido flores, 
 teria havido fructos, if there had been flowers, there 
 would have been fruits. 
 
 Combined Eoems. 
 
 1. With pronouns. — Diga-Z7ze, tell him ; diga-lhes, tell 
 them. Comprei-o para d&r-lho, I bought it to give it to 
 him. A penna e boa, elle wCa dara. Elle assentou se-lhe 
 ao lado. Comeca a turvar se-me a, cabeca. 
 
 2. "With pronouns and auxiliaries : — Dar-me has 
 prazer, you will give me pleasure. Cortar -Ihe-hemos uma 
 talhada. Ser-?ne-hia impossivel. ~Fic&v-lhe-hei muito 
 obrigado. Continuar-se-A«. Escrever-ZAe-Aei amanha. 
 
 CONTEACTED EoEMS. 
 
 1. The infinitive loses r in combining with the 
 pronoun; amar o, becomes ama-lo, amal-o, or amallo; 
 ve-lo, for ver-o; cre-lo for crer-o; abracd-los. Naohpode 
 negd-\o. Te-lo-ha. 
 
 2. Some infinitives are further contracted : Fazer be- 
 comes faze, far, and fa; e. g.,/ar-me-hia o favor ;/a-le-hei 
 
283 
 
 com prazer ; ipensalo e faze-lo sao cousas differentes ; nao 
 e preciso dize-lo, dir-lhe hei. 
 
 3. Quer is sometimes quel, as quel as justas, do you 
 like them a close fit ; hemos and hia, hiamos, in com- 
 pounds are contractions for havemos, havia, haviamos. 
 
 4. In reflective verbs the first person plural loses s 
 before nos, as achdmo-nos, for achdmos-nos. 
 
 5. The third person plural makes the governed pro- 
 noun take n, for euphony ; adorao-^o, for adorao-o ; elles 
 matarao-wo, or iCo. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 Adverbs of quality are chiefly derived from adjectives, 
 by adding u mente'" (equal to the English "Zy") to the ad- 
 jective; cy.,habil, habilmente; prudente, prudentemente. 
 If the adjective has a feminine form, the affix "mente" is 
 appended: justo, just«, justamente. Example. — Bom 
 makes boamente,but prefers hem; mao takes mal, etc. Ad- 
 verbs are thus compared : cedo, mais cedo, o mais cedo, 
 soon, sooner, soonest ; menos justamente, less justly. 
 "When two adverbs in "mente" concur, the first "mente" 
 is suppressed, as "franca e lealmente fallando." 
 
 1. Or Place. 
 
 acola o homem esta acold, the man is over there, 
 
 yonder 
 ahi ahi esta, there he is ; ahi mesmo, just there; 
 
 d'ahi a alguns dias, some days hence 
 alem diem d'isso, besides that ; alem daque, besides ; 
 
 alem das suas forcas, beyond his strength 
 all, alii mora ali, he lives there, yonder ; por ali, that 
 
 way ; em d'alli, thence ; para alii, thither 
 aquem. aquem do rio, this side of the river ; muito aquem 
 
 de, much below ; within, beneath, less than 
 arriba dito arriba, said above ; — de dez, above ten ; rio 
 
 — , up stream; de baixo — ,from head to foot 
 atraz como disse — , as I said above ; fica — , he falls 
 
 behind : deixar — , to leave behind 
 
284 
 
 ca venha cd, come here ; de cd, give here ; ca e la, here 
 
 and there ; chegue-se para cd, come nearer 
 cerca meio dia on a — , noon or about it ; a — de mil, 
 
 «£ow£ 1000 ; morto on dcerca, dead or almost 
 dahi — por diante, thence, from that place (more 
 
 nsed as adverb of time) 
 debaixo — da mesa, under the table 
 dentro — de casa, within doors ; ir para — , go in ; — da 
 
 cidade, in the city; por — , inside 
 diante va — , go on ; para — , on, forwards ; ir por — , 
 
 continue ; andar — , precede, anticipate 
 fora — out, not at home ; jantar — , dine out ; esta 
 
 — , he's out ; gente de — , company ; — de si, 
 
 out of his senses 
 
 la 
 
 longe 
 onde 
 perto 
 traz, tras 
 aqui # 
 
 agora 
 
 ainda 
 antes 
 avante 
 cedo 
 
 * Aqui, 
 alii, where 
 
 there, in that place ; para — , thither ; de — , 
 thence ; — em cima, up there ; — baixo, 
 down there 
 
 miiito — , very far ; ao — ,far off; — da cidade, 
 far from town ; tao — , come as far as 
 
 — queira, where you please ; de — , whence ; 
 para — , whither ; por ■ — , how 
 
 mora aqui — , he lives near here ; mais — ,nearer ; 
 
 — de o fazer, near doing it ; de — , nigh 
 para — , back, backwards ; ir a — de, to pursue ; 
 
 andar para — , turn back, relapse 
 esta aqui, he is here ; aqui dentro, in here ; ftaqid, 
 
 hence; ate aqui, thus far 
 
 2. Or Time. 
 
 now: ate — ,tillnoiv, ainda — , just now; desde — , 
 henceforth ; , now now ; — mesmo, in- 
 stantly 
 
 yet, still: elle — nao veio, he is not come yet; — 
 mais tempo, still more time; — nao, not yet 
 
 — de jantar, before dinner ; — do dia, before 
 the day ; — de pagar, before paying 
 
 passar — , pass on ; ir — , go on ; a obra vai — , 
 
 the work goes on 
 venha — , come soon ; miiito — , very early ; de- 
 
 where the speaker is ; 
 neither is. 
 
 where the one spoken to is : 
 
285 
 
 man ha — , early in the morning , tao — , so 
 
 early 
 depois — de jantar, after dinner ; o dia — , the day 
 
 after ; — disso, afterwards ; logo — , imme- 
 diately 
 entao then, at that time : ate — , till then ; desde — =, 
 
 since then ; pois — , well then, in this case 
 hoje to-day : — em dia, this day ; — faz nm anno, 
 
 a year to-day ; de — em diante, from to-day 
 
 onwards 
 ja — paguei, I have paid already ; vou — , I am 
 
 going directly ; , quickly ; — se ve, it's 
 
 quite clear 
 logo — vou, I am going presently ; oy and oy ; — que 
 
 receber, as soon as you receive ; ate — , good- 
 
 oye : 
 
 minca never : — mais, never more ; — jamais, never 
 
 more ; para — mais, for ever 
 quando ivhen : ate — , till when ; — mais at most ; — 
 
 menos, at least ; desde — , since when 
 hontem yesterday: antehontem, the day before yesterday 
 sempre always, ever : para — , for ever ; para todo — , 
 
 without end ; — que penso, every time I 
 
 think 
 
 3. Quantity. 
 
 acerca — de quinhentos soldados, ahout 500 soldiers 
 apenas — tive tempo de, I hardly had time to — ; — 
 
 chegou foi elle vendido, he had scarcely come 
 
 when he was sold* 
 assaz fico — contente, I am sufficiently satisfied 
 demais estas botas sao grandes — , these boots are too 
 
 large 
 mais — \dnho que cerveja, more wine than beer ; 
 
 pouco — ou menos, thereabouts 
 menos — frio, less cold ; ao — , at least ; nem mais 
 
 nem — , neither more nor less 
 mui — agradavel, very pleasant 
 
 muito — bom, very good ; nao — , not much ; quando — , 
 
 at most ; — apertado, too tight 
 
 * Arenas is equal to Tiardhj^ when. 
 
286 
 
 quao 
 quanto 
 quasi 
 sequer 
 
 tao 
 tanto 
 
 assim 
 
 bem 
 
 coino 
 nada 
 nao 
 sim 
 
 talvez 
 mal 
 
 porque 
 ora 
 
 — bello ! how beautiful ; tao formosa — boa, as 
 fair as she is good 
 
 — em mini for, as much as in me lies ; — posso, 
 as much as I can ; em — , while 
 
 — duas horas, almost two o'clock ; o — morto, 
 nearly dead 
 
 nem — , not even ; nem — um so, not even one ; 
 
 nem — teve tempo de, he has not even had 
 
 time 
 vai — de pressa, he goes so fast ; — rico como, 
 
 so rich as ; — bom ! so good ! 
 
 — melhor, so much the better ; — monta, it 
 
 amounts to so much 
 
 algum — , a little 
 
 Quality. 
 
 -, let us do so ; — seja, so be it ; 
 tanto — , 
 
 como, as soon as 
 
 -, he sings 
 -, all right ; 
 
 4. 
 
 so : facamos — 
 
 , so so 
 
 so that 
 icell : miiito — , very icell ; canta 
 
 well ; — cheio, very full ; esta - 
 
 — pouco, very little 
 how : assim — , as, like, just as ; — assim ! how 
 
 so ! — se, as if ; doente — • esta, ill as he is 
 elle nao me disse — , he said nothing to me ; — 
 
 menos, nothing less ; nao e — , it's nothing ! 
 no : — o creio, I do not believe it ; — le bem, 
 
 he does not read well ; digo que — , I say no 
 yes : creio que — , I believe so ; mas — , but 
 
 rather ; dar o — , consent ; agora — , now 
 
 indeed 
 
 — nao seja assim, perhaps it is not so ; — que 
 nao, perhaps not 
 
 estou — , I am ill ; — feito, ill-made ; de — para 
 peior, from bad to worse ; — o vio, hardly 
 had he seen him 
 
 — nao va ? why don't you go ? — nao quero, 
 because I won't ; sem — , without cause 
 
 — um — outro, now one, now the other ; — vai ! 
 now go ! — segue-se, now it follows 
 
287 
 
 PBEPOSITIONS. 
 
 1. Some prepositions govern words directly : e. g., 
 para mini, for me ; por mar, by sea ; para ver, in order 
 to see. 
 
 2. Some prepositions require a, de, etc. : tocante ao 
 assnmpto, touching the subject ; diante de mim, before 
 me. 
 
 3. The prepositions a, ate, com, contra, de, em, para, 
 etc., por, sobre, form complements to nouns, adjectives, 
 and verbs. 
 
 Nouns. — Amor a allianca com, o intento de, con- 
 fianca em, subscripcao para, preces por, tratada entre, 
 conspiracao contra, reflexoes sobre. 
 
 Adjectives. — Exposto a, contente com, digno de, fiel 
 em, proprio para, famoso por, inserto sobre, conspirado 
 contra, castello campeando sobre o terreno, ingrato para 
 com elle. 
 
 Verbs. — Chegar ate, pertencer a, gostar de, pensar 
 em, peccar contra, contrastar com, distinguir entre, olhar 
 para, esperar por, conversar sobre. 
 
 4. The same verb has different complements: e.g., 
 dar a, give to ; dar com, meet with ; dar em, strike ; dar 
 para, face, front; dar sobre, rush on; dar atrdz, run 
 after. 
 
 5. Prepositions intervene between the governing and 
 governed verb, when the verb expresses a definite act : 
 acdbo de escrever, continuo a ler ; but not when indefinite : 
 devo dizer Jt /apo saber, etc. 
 
 6. The preposition is often in the verb, as jantdr 
 peixe, to dine on fish ; almogdr dvos, breakfast on eggs ; 
 calcdr botas, put on boots ; vestir roupa, put on linen ; 
 agradecer lhe o livro, thank him for the book. 
 
 7. The safest rule is, at first, to follow the literal 
 translation of the English prepositions, to, a; of,de; 
 with, com ; for, para ; for, by, por. The dictionary and 
 practice will meet such cases as think of, pensar em ; em 
 extremo, extremely. 
 
 8. Prepositions before infinitives, in Portuguese, are 
 ofter rendered by prepositions and participles in English : 
 
288 
 
 longe de querer, far from wishing ; em visitdr os orphaos, 
 in visiting the orphans ; comecou por queimdr o livro, he 
 began by burning the book ; niotivo pdrajicdr, reason for 
 remaining ; depois de eu ler a carta, after my reading the 
 letter ; sem conhecer, ivithout knoiving ; e depois de o 
 terem examinado, and after their having examined it. 
 
 9. Prepositions before infinitives are sometimes equal 
 to a finite verb : e preciso pelejar ate veneer, we must fight 
 till we conquer. 
 
 10. Em governs the present participle, and is equal to 
 when, or as soon as: em morrendo-lhe seu pai, when his 
 father dies ; em sendo 2 horas, when it is two o'clock ; 
 em eu tendo boa cama. Em acabando, irei. 
 
 1. Simple Pkepositions. 
 
 a vou a Lisboa, I go to Lisbon ; — tempo, in 
 
 time ; — sua vontade, at one's ease ; — pe, 
 on foot ; — ingleza, in the English style ; 
 — des vintens,tf£l(W.; — razao de,at the rate 
 of ; — vela, under sail ; ■ — proposito, by the 
 by ; — forca de, by dint of; — falsa fe, with 
 treachery ; a x a = a 
 
 ate — o natal, till Christmas; — amanha, till to- 
 
 morrow; — os mais vis, even the vilest ; — 
 Londres, as far as London ; — agora, till 
 now ; — entao, till then 
 
 com cortar — uma faca, cut with a knife ; esta — 
 
 medo, he is afraid ; — veneer, in conquer- 
 ing 
 
 confdrme trajar — a estacao, dress according to the 
 season ; — o uso, according to custom 
 
 contra — against me ; — o parecer do medico, against 
 the doctor's opinion; — a noite, towards 
 night 
 
 de vem — Franca, he comes/romPrance; — ponte- 
 
 pedra, stone-bridge ; — boa raca, of good 
 family ; amado — mim, loved by me ; — dia 
 by day ; — porta em porta, from door to 
 door ; viver — peixe, live on fish ; menos — , 
 — less than; e — crer, it is to be believed; 
 e — , belongs to ; pobre — mim ? poor me ; 
 
289 
 
 o bom do luonge, the poor monk ; — cor, by 
 heart ; forms many phrases, de vagar, de 
 pressa, de graca, de veras, etc. 
 
 desde — Pariz ate Londres, from Paris to London ; 
 — as tres horas ate as quarto, from three 
 to four o'clock ; entao, since then 
 
 durante — a guerra, during the war ; — todos os dias 
 da sua vida, during all the days of his life 
 
 apds — isso, after that ; correr apoz elle, run after 
 
 him ; busque paz, e va apos della 
 
 em vinho — garrafa, wine in bottle ; — casa, at 
 
 home ; — guerra, in war ; de riia — riia, from 
 street to street; dormir — terra, sleep on the 
 ground ; nao esta — si, he's not in his senses. 
 Before a present participle equal to as soon as: 
 em chegando na cidade, as soon as he arrived 
 in the city ; no dia, in the day ; na hora, in 
 the hour ; nos quartos, in the rooms ; nas 
 camas, in the beds ; — nossa prociira, in 
 search of us; — jejuni, fasting. 
 
 entre — nos, between ourselves ; — as 10 e 11 horas, 
 
 between 10 and 11 o'clock ; — dia, during 
 the day ; — maos, in hand ; — tanto, mean- 
 while ; um costume — os francezes, a custom 
 amongst the Prench ; — o povo, amongst the 
 people 
 
 para 1. Person ft? ovfor: carta — Joao, letter for 
 
 John ; isto e — mim, this is for me ; — 
 elle,j^or him 
 *2. Before infinitive, in order to : trabalho — 
 ganhar, I work to gain ; estudo — chegar a 
 ser sabio 
 
 place : vou — India, I am 
 — o ar, upwards; — o sul, to 
 
 3. Motion to a 
 going to India 
 the south 
 
 4. Time, period 
 
 o dia seguiiitej/br next day ; 
 — hoje, for to-day ; — o fim da semana, 
 towards the end of the week. 
 
 * Est6u para pagar a conta, I am just going to pay the account ; 
 a conta estajpor pagar, the account is to be paid, or, is not yet paid, 
 or w»paid. 
 
 V 
 
290 
 
 5. Por (purpose) : nao presta — nada, good 
 for nothing ; bom — , good for ; feito — , 
 
 made /or 
 
 6. About to : esta — partir, lie is about to 
 start ; — chover, going to rain 
 
 por 1. Done by : causado — elle, caused by him ; 
 
 tornado pelos gregos, baken by the Greeks. 
 
 2. Object: — amor de min, for my sake; 
 faco — isso, I work for that ; trabalha — 
 dinheiro 
 
 3. Place : pelas riias, in the streets ; — toda 
 a Asia, throughout Asia ; passarei — Beira, 
 I shall go through Beira 
 
 4. Means : ganhei o — empenho, I got it by 
 interest ; — esta carta vera, you will see by this 
 
 5. Manner : feito — forca, done by force ; — 
 cujas chagas, by whose wounds 
 
 6. Time : — anno, per annum ; — mez, by the 
 month 
 
 7. Value : — menos de 4, for less than 4 ; 20 
 — cento, 20 per cent; — quanto,for how much 
 
 8. Exchange : troca vinho — pao, he barters 
 wine for bread; tanto — cabe9a, so much a 
 head 
 
 9. Favour : intercedi — Joao, I pleaded for 
 John ; estou — isso, I am for that ; estao — 
 ella, they are for her 
 
 10. In lieu of: padeceu — nos, suffered for us 
 
 11. Equality : um vale — nruitos, one goes for 
 many ; olho — olho, e dente — dente 
 
 12. As, for : ir — consul, go as consul ; — 
 men amigo, as my friend; — morto, for 
 dead ; tomar — 
 
 13. Before infinitive, to be : a dbra esta — 
 fazer, the work is to be done 
 
 14. Fetching : foi — vinho, he has gone for 
 wine ; va pelo medico, go for the doctor ; 
 ir — lenha, go for wood 
 
 15. As for : — mim, fico aqui, as for me, I stay 
 here ; com as maos por lavar, with unwashed 
 hands 
 
291 
 
 16. However : por douto que seja, however 
 learned he may be ; — muito rico que seja, 
 — bem que eu faca 
 
 17. Though : por ser pobre, though poor 
 
 18. Reason /br; famoso — , famous for; — 
 vergonha, for shame ; — inveja, through envy 
 
 segundo — a came, according to the flesh 
 sem 1. — amigos, without friends ; — vida, without 
 
 life ; — ceremonia 
 
 2. (Before infinitive), — qiierer, without wish- 
 ing ; — irmos, withoat our going 
 
 3. (Present subjunctive) — que tudo esteja 
 prompto, without all being ready ; — que o 
 chamem 
 
 4. (Imperfect subjunctive) , todos forao mdrtos, 
 sem que um so escapdsse, without one escaping 
 
 sob — a figiira de Mentor, under the form : — cor 
 
 de, under colour of ; — pena de ; — Poncio 
 Pilatos 
 
 sobre — a mesa, on the table ; — ndssas forcas, 
 
 beyond our strength ; estar — , be above ; — 
 longa consideracao, after ; reinar — , reign 
 over ; tomar — si, take on himself 
 
 2. Compound Prepositional Phrases. 
 
 a a cerca c?esta materia, about this matter ; a cirna 
 
 ^elle, above him ; ao pe de\\&, near her ; a 
 forca de bra^os, by force of arms ; a nianeira 
 de, like ; a pezar de mim, in spite of me ; a 
 tempo, in time ; a parte, aside ; a pressa, in 
 haste ; a rios, in streams ; ao longe, at a dis- 
 tance ; a sua vontade, at his ease ; a pe 5 on 
 foot ; a espera Jelle, waiting for him ; ares- 
 peito disto, as to this ; ao longo da riia, along 
 the street ; atrdz da casa, behind the house ; 
 afdlta de,for want of 
 
 de de bdixo da condicao, under the condition ; de- 
 
 balde, in vain ; de brucos, prostrate ; de cor, 
 by heart ; de proposito, on purpose ; de im- 
 proviso, suddenly ; de vagar, slowly ; de 
 pressa, quickly ; de caminho, on the road ; 
 
292 
 
 de joelhos, on one's knees ; de botas, in boots; 
 de luto, in mourning ; de marinheiro, as a 
 sailor ; de boca para baixo, mouth down- 
 wards ; de gatinhas, on all fours ; de repente, 
 suddenly ; estou de cima e elle debaixo, I 
 am above, and be below ; de cima para baixo, 
 over and over 
 
 em esta em baixo, be is below ; em casa, at borne ; 
 
 em cima da cama, on tbe bed ; em cima, 
 besides ; em diivida, in doubt ; em fim, in 
 fine ; em pe, on foot, up ; em breve, shortly ; 
 em summa, in short ; em vivos, ivliile living ; 
 em primeiro logar, in the first place ; em- 
 frente do pregador, before tbe preacher ; em- 
 torno do templo, round the church; em logdr, 
 delle, in his stead 
 
 para para com os pobres, toivards the poor ; para 
 
 comigo, toioards me ; de mim para mim, as to 
 me ; para baixo, dowmvards ; — cima, up- 
 ivards ; — diante, forwards ; — traz, back- 
 ivards ; para la, that way ; para ca, this way 
 
 por por amor de, for love of ; atado por traz, tied 
 
 behind ; por isso, therefore ; por cima da 
 cabeca, above the head ; por baixo delle, 
 beneath him ; por tiirno, in turn ; por modo 
 de dizer, so to speak ; por mar e por terra, 
 by sea and land ; um por um, one by one ; 
 10 por todos, ten in all ; por isso, therefore ; 
 por isso mesmo, for that very reason ; por 
 causa de, on account of, by reason of ; por 
 baixo, underneath; — cima, above; — diante, 
 before ; — detraz, behind ; — dentro, within ; 
 — fora, without 
 And many others, all more or less adverbial. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Some simply connect words, as conjunctives, condi- 
 tional, causal, etc. ; some require the indicative, some 
 the subjunctive ; some the infinitive, some participles. 
 
293 
 
 mas 
 
 nem 
 
 ou 
 
 ora 
 
 pois 
 
 porem 
 
 que 
 
 quer 
 
 tambem 
 
 todavia 
 senao 
 
 2. 
 
 a proporcao 
 
 1. Puke Conjunctions. 
 
 Joao e eu, John and I ; branco e preto, 
 
 white and black ; e que tenho eu com 
 
 isso, and wh&t, etc. 
 but : — ainda, but still ! — antes, but 
 
 on the contrary ; — com tiido, hut for 
 
 all that 
 
 — um — outro, neither; — mais — 
 menos, neither more nor less ; — ■ eu 
 tao pouco, nor I 
 
 elle — eu, he or I ; — rico o pobre, 
 whether rich or poor ; — leia 6u 
 escreva, whether you read or write 
 
 — digo eu, still I say, etc. ; — ■ veja, just 
 havia homem, now there was a 
 
 see; — 
 man 
 - va, go 
 
 then; — entao? what then? 
 bem, be it so ; — sim, oh, of course 
 (ironical) ; — nao, most certainly 
 
 — Mentor que temia, etc., however, etc. ; 
 e certo, — que, it is certain, however, 
 that — 
 
 diz — quer, he says that he wants, etc. ; 
 diga-lhe — venha, tell him to 
 come ; tenho — ir me, I must go ; 
 jantemos, — 6 tarde, let us dine, /or it 
 is late ; menos — , less than 
 
 — publico — particular, whether public 
 or private ; se — , at least, at any rate ; 
 — sim — nao, all one, quite the same 
 
 eu — sou Erancez, I too am a French- 
 man ; nao somente, mas — , not only, 
 but also 
 
 — nao podia pagar o dinheiro, neverthe- 
 less he could not pay the money 
 
 nao tenho — ouro, I have nothing hut 
 gold ; nao so — , not only, hut also ; 
 nao faz — , does nothing hut 
 
 Conjunctions with Indicative. 
 
 que — estiida, apren de, as he studies, he learns 
 
294 
 
 ainda que — alguns dizem though some say 
 
 como — era de esperar, as was to be expected ; 
 
 rico — elle e, rich as he is ; falla — 
 quern sabe, as one who 
 de maneira que — ambos estavao inquietos, so that both 
 
 were uneasy 
 de pois que — isso aconteceo, after that happened 
 
 de sorte que — nao posso ler, so that I can't read ; — 
 pareciao amigos, so that they seemed 
 friends 
 durante — eu retardava, ivhile I was delaying 
 
 em quanto que — eu faco, while I am doing 
 logo que — chega, digo me, as soon as he comes, 
 
 tell me 
 por que — nao sabia, because he did not know 
 
 se bem que — nao faco, though I do not make 
 
 segiindo — y ejo, as far as I see ; — dizem, as 
 
 they say ; — o que esta escripto, ac- 
 cording to what, etc. 
 se bast a me, — ainda vive, enough if he 
 
 still lives ; — o vizir vai, if the Y. goes 
 se nao ■ — posso pagar, ifl cannot pay, etc. ; se 
 
 ainda o nao leu, if you have not read it 
 visto que — os sao inferidres, since these are in- 
 
 ferior. 
 
 3. Co^jttnctions with Subjunctive. 
 
 ainda que — elle me reprehenda, though he chides 
 
 me 
 ainda quando — assim fosse, even if it were so 
 antes que — venha, before he comes ; — aconte- 
 
 cessem, before they happened ; — elles 
 
 chegassem 
 ate que — me pdgue, till he pays me ; — - eu viva, 
 
 as long as I live 
 a menos que — elles me nao convidem, unless they 
 
 invite me ; — que elle estiide, unless 
 
 he studies 
 bem que — estivesse escripto la, though it was 
 
 written there 
 comtanto que — o facao, provided that they do it ; — 
 
295 
 
 me nao faca mal, so that he does not 
 hurt me 
 caso que — eu nao pdssa pagar, in case I can't 
 
 como seja — for, be that as it may ; — quer que 
 
 seja, however that may be ; — elle nao 
 
 la esteja, if 
 para que — se acabe, that it be finished ; — viva- 
 
 mos, that we may live 
 posto que — venha, nao irei, though he should 
 
 come, I won't go 
 primeiro que — isso aconteca, sooner than that should 
 
 happen 
 como se — eu fosse crianca, as if I were a child ; 
 
 fallou — tivesse perdido o juizo, he 
 
 spoke as if 
 embora — censiirem os criticos, what though the 
 
 critics censure 
 logo que — Y. S., receber esta carta, as soon as you 
 
 get this letter 
 no casa que — V. S., seja enganado, in case you may 
 
 be wrong 
 por bom que — eu podesse, even if I could 
 pode ser que — parta hoje, he perhaps goes to-day 
 se — elle pagar, ^he pays ; — quizer, if you 
 
 like ; — me der, if you give me ; — 
 
 eu estivesse 
 sem que — demos, without our giving ; fossem 
 
 ouvidos, without their being heard 
 A fim que — eu seja rico, that I may be rich; — 
 
 vos nao ouca, that I may not hear you 
 que diga-lhe — me traga, tell him to bring 
 
 me ; nao faltao pessoas — se appli- 
 
 quem, etc. 
 
 4. Conjunctions with Infinitive. 
 
 a* — ser assim, if it is so ; — saber isso, if 
 
 this were known; — nao ser isso, 
 hut for this 
 
 * A is strictly a preposition, but has here a conjunctive force. 
 
296 
 
 alem de — apanhar o fructo, curtou a arvore, 
 
 besides plucking the fruit, etc. 
 antes de — morrer, before dying 
 
 ate — nao poder mais, till he could do no 
 
 more 
 em vez de — o ajudar, instead of helping him ; — 
 
 de fugir, instead of running away 
 como sei — fazer, I know what to do 
 
 confdrme — eu achar a terra, as I find the 
 
 country 
 depois de — ler o Hvro, after reading the book 
 
 em logar de — escrever a carta, instead of writing the 
 
 letter 
 em quanto — durar o miindo, while the world lasts 
 
 quer-quer — choVa — faca bom tempo, whether it 
 
 rains, or is fine 
 longe de — ser, far from being 
 
 no caso de — V. S. vir, in case of your coming 
 
 sem — ser religioso, without being religious 
 
 visfco — ser tao tarde, seeing it so late 
 
 ai 
 
 arra ! 
 ah! 
 
 apre ! 
 
 cia! 
 fora ! 
 old! 
 
 ta! 
 ora 
 
 INTEEJECTIONS. 
 
 — meu filho, ah, my son ! — que prazer ! oh, 
 what joy ! ■ — que desgraca ! what a pity ! 
 
 oh ! ah ! you rogue ! 
 
 — irmao ! oh my brother ! — meu nobre 
 aino ! ah, my noble master ! 
 
 (marks aversion) get away ! off ! the deuce ! 
 
 hang it ! 
 come on ! look sharp ! quick ! 
 
 — cao ! get out, dog ! out ! out ! 
 
 (calling) holla ! hoy ! 
 
 — fora d'aqui ! be off ! out of this ! 
 
 — ! — ! hush ! hush ! 
 
 — sus ! on ! on ! 
 
 " Uhm, rosnou o clerigo," "hum, muttered the priest." 
 
 Inteejectional "Woeds aitd Pheases. 
 affasta — te, get out of the way ! be off ! 
 
ai de mim ! 
 animo ! 
 aqui d'elrei! 
 
 avante ! 
 asneira ! 
 basta ! 
 
 caluda ! 
 com affeito ! 
 coitado ! 
 cuidado ! 
 
 coisas ! 
 
 de veras 
 deus 
 
 deus 
 
 por, etc. 
 que duvida ! 
 misericordia 
 
 que — ! 
 oxala 
 
 olha! 
 
 optimo ! 
 paciencia ! 
 psio ! 
 
 qual! 
 por forca 
 silencio ! 
 
 297 
 
 woe is me ! oh, dear me ! 
 cheer up ! 
 
 — gritou o homem ! help ! murder ! cried 
 the man ! 
 
 upa ! firm ! — ! — ! 
 nonsense ! 
 
 estou contente ! enough ! enough ! I 
 
 am satisfi ed ! 
 hush ! silence ! 
 really ! 
 
 — do povo ! poor people ! 
 take care ! 
 
 filha, tu dizes coisas ! child, don't talk 
 
 nonsense ! 
 indeed ! 
 
 — nos acuda ! God help us ! — o permitta ! 
 God grant it ! — to pague ! may God 
 reward you ! 
 
 gracas a — ! thank God ! — me salve ! God 
 help me ! — me perdoe ! God forgive me ! 
 exactly ! just so ! that's it ! 
 
 — piedade ! for mercy's sake ! 
 why not ! no doubt ! of course ! 
 
 — ! bradou o mdnge! "mercy!" cried the 
 monk 
 
 — gente ! what people ! 
 
 — que seja feliz ! may you be happy ! — 
 que venha, oh if he would come ! 
 
 — faca isto ! see, do this ! — Yenha ca ! I 
 say, come here ! 
 
 capital ! very good ! 
 
 no help for it ! make the best of it ! 
 
 o Manuel — psio ! chega a falla ! Manuel, 
 
 hist, 
 what ! 
 of course ! 
 silence ! 
 
 * The Portuguese always prefix o in ealling any one: "Psio" 
 and " olha" are commonly used to attract attention, like " Heh," I 
 say, in English. 
 
298 
 
 truz ! truz ! truz ! truz ! a porta ; rap, rap, rap, 
 
 at the door 
 sentido ! take care ! look out ! 
 
 filha da minha alma ! isso agora ! calle 
 
 a bocca ! pobre da inae ! 
 valha-me — deus, Grod help me ! 
 viva ! long live, etc., — ; good morning ! how do 
 
 you do ? 
 seja, etc. — pela saude de V. S., G-od bless you ! deus 
 
 queira que — , God grant it may he so ! 
 vamos come along ! go on ! 
 
 THE END. 
 
 Thomas Harrild, Printer, Salisbury Square, Fleet Street, Loudon. 
 
4:, 
 

 
 & 
 
 4** 
 
 ■ 1 
 
 ■ 
 1.' 
 
 i 
 
 * 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 t* 
 
 3. f